Contents

Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Operating Manual PDF

1 of 559
1 of 559

Summary of Content for Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Operating Manual PDF

MELDAS is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective company.

Introduction

This manual is referred to when using the MELDAS 60/60S Series. This manual explains how to operate, run and set up this NC unit. Read this manual thoroughly before using the NC unit. To safely use this NC unit, thoroughly study the "Precautions for Safety" on the next page before use. * The "MELDAS60 Series" includes the M64A, M64, M65, M66 and M65V. * The "MELDAS60S Series" includes the M64AS, M64S, M65S and M66S. Details described in this manual

CAUTION

For items described as "Restrictions" or "Usable State" in this manual, the instruction manual issued by the machine maker takes precedence over this manual.

Items not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not possible".

This manual is written on the assumption that all option functions are added. Confirm with the specifications issued by the machine maker before starting use.

Refer to the Instruction Manual issued by each machine maker for details on each machine tool.

Some screens and functions may differ depending on the NC system (or its version), and some functions may not be possible. Please confirm the specifications before use.

Refer to the following documents.

MELDAS 60/60S Series Alarm / Parameter Manual ............................................... BNP-B2201 MELDAS 60/60S Series MELDASMAGIC64 Programming Manual (M TYPE)...... BNP-B2182 MELDAS 60/60S Series MELDASMAGIC64 Programming Manual (L TYPE)....... BNP-B2181

In this NC unit, the machining programs, parameters and tool compensation data are saved in the memory (memory elements). This NC unit's memory is backed up by lithium batteries, and under normal conditions will last 6 years from the date of manufacture. However, data contents could be lost under the conditions described below. To prevent data loss, output important programs, parameters, etc., to a serial input/output device and save them. Refer to Section "III-8 Maintenance Functions" in this manual for information on how to do this. Data in the memory can be lost under these kinds of conditions.

(1) Incorrect operation

Data can be lost if the operator inadvertently changes data while editing a program or setting parameters. (This is not really a data loss, but it is a loss from the standpoint that the original data is gone.)

Data can be lost if the operator inadvertently deletes data or initializes NC unit.

(2) Battery life expires

When the battery life expires and there is not enough voltage to store the data in the memory, data can be lost by turning the power OFF.

(3) Faults

Data can be lost when faults occur and the control unit must be replaced.

< Important Usage Notes >

Precautions for Safety

Always read the specifications issued by the machine maker, this manual, related manuals and attached documents before installation, operation, programming, maintenance or inspection to ensure correct use. Understand this numerical controller, safety items and cautions before using the unit. This manual ranks the safety precautions into "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

DANGER

When the user may be subject to imminent fatalities or major injuries if handling is mistaken.

WARNING

When the user may be subject to fatalities or major injuries if handling is mistaken.

CAUTION

When the user may be subject to bodily injury or when physical damage may occur if handling is mistaken.

Note that even items ranked as "

CAUTION", may lead to major results depending on the situation. In any case, important information that must always be observed is described.

DANGER

Not applicable in this manual.

WARNING

1. Items related to operation If the operation start position is set in a block which is in the middle of the program and the program is started, the program before the set block is not executed. Please confirm that G and F modal and coordinate values are appropriate. If there are coordinate system shift commands or M, S, T and B commands before the block set as the start position, carry out the required commands using the MDI, etc. If the program is run from the set block without carrying out these operations, there is a danger of interference with the machine or of machine operation at an unexpected speed, which may result in breakage of tools or machine tool or may cause damage to the operators. Under the constant surface speed control (during G96 modal), if the axis targeted for the constant surface speed control moves toward the spindle center, the spindle rotation speed will increase and may exceed the allowable speed of the workpiece or chuck, etc. In this case, the workpiece, etc. may jump out during machining, which may result in breakage of tools or machine tool or may cause damage to the operators.

CAUTION

1. Items related to product and manual

For items described as "Restrictions" or "Usable State" in this manual, the instruction manual issued by the machine maker takes precedence over this manual.

Items not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not possible".

This manual is written on the assumption that all option functions are added. Confirm with the specifications issued by the machine maker before starting use.

Refer to the Instruction Manual issued by each machine maker for details on each machine tool.

Some screens and functions may differ depending on the NC system (or its version), and some functions may not be possible. Please confirm the specifications before use.

2. Items related to installation and assembly

Ground the signal cables to ensure stable system operation. Also ground the NC unit main frame, power distribution panel and machine to one point, so they all have the same potential.

If the control unit's rotary switch is set to "7", all data in the NC will be erased and the system will not start up.

3. Items related to preparation before use

Always set the stored stroke limit. Failure to set this could result in collision with the machine end.

Always turn the power OFF before connecting/disconnecting the I/O device cable. Failure to do so could damage the I/O device and NC unit.

4. Items related to screen operation

If the tool offset and workpiece coordinate system offset are changed during automatic operation (including during single block stop), they are validated from the command of the next block or blocks onwards.

When forcibly setting (forcibly outputting) data on the I/F diagnosis screen during machine operation, pay careful attention to the sequence operation.

All of the various data in the NC memory is erased when formatting. Be sure to use the transfer function to transfer all necessary data to another storage device before formatting.

Even if the tool compensation amount write command, parameter write command or variable data write command is executed with graphic check, the data will be actually written in, and the original data will be overwritten.

To prevent influence from data omission and data transformation in the communication circuit, always verify the data after inputting and outputting machining programs.

Do not change setup parameters without prior approval from the machine maker.

5. Items related to programming

Because of key chattering, etc., during editing, "NO NOS. FOLLOWING G" commands become a "G00" operation during running.

" ; " "EOB" and " % " "EOR" are explanatory notations. The actual codes are "Line feed" and "%" for ISO, and "End of Block" and "End of Record" for EIA.

Do not change the fixed cycle program without prior approval from the machine maker. (Continued on next page)

CAUTION

6. Items related to operation

Stay out of the moveable range of the machine during automatic operation. During rotation, keep hands, feet and face away from the spindle.

Carry out dry operation before actually machining, and confirm the machining program, tool offset and workpiece coordinate system offset.

If the operation start position is set from a block in the program and the program is started, the program before the set block is not executed. If there are coordinate system shift commands or M, S, T, and B commands before the block set as the starting position, carry out the required commands using the MDI, etc. There is a danger of interference with the machine if the operation is started from the set starting position block without carrying out these operations.

Program so the mirror image function is turned ON/OFF at the mirror image center. The mirror image center will deviate if the function is turned ON/OFF at a position other than the mirror image center.

7. Items related to faults and abnormalities

If a BATTERY FAULT alarm is issued, save the machining program, tool data and parameters before replacing the battery.

If the axis overruns or emits an abnormal noise, immediately press the emergency stop button and stop the axis movement.

8. Items related to maintenance

Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector. Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.

Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.

Do not connect or disconnect the PCBs while the power is ON.

Do not connect the cable by pulling on the cable wire.

Do not short circuit, charge, overheat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.

Dispose the spent battery according to local laws.

Do not replace the control unit while the power is ON.

Do not replace the base I/O unit while the power is ON.

Do not replace the control section power supply PCB while the power is ON.

Do not replace the expansion PCB while the power is ON.

Do not replace the memory cassette while the power is ON.

Be careful that metal cutting chips, etc., do not come into contact with the connector contacts of the memory cassette.

Do not replace the high-speed program server unit while the power is ON.

Disposal

(Note) This symbol mark is for EU countries only. This symbol mark is according to the directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end- users and Annex II.

Your MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product is designed and manufactured with high quality materials and components which can be recycled and/or reused. This symbol means that batteries and accumulators, at their end-of-life, should be disposed of separately from your household waste. If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, this chemical symbol means that the battery or accumulator contains a heavy metal at a certain concentration. This will be indicated as follows: Hg: mercury (0,0005%), Cd: cadmium (0,002%), Pb: lead (0,004%) In the European Union there are separate collection systems for used batteries and accumulators. Please, dispose of batteries and accumulators correctly at your local community waste collection/ recycling centre.

Please, help us to conserve the environment we live in!

- i -

Contents I. OPERATION SECTION 1. Setting and Display Unit Operation.........................................................................................1

1.1 Appearance of Setting and Display Unit ...........................................................................1 1.2 Functions of Display Areas ...............................................................................................2 1.3 Screen Transition Diagram ...............................................................................................4

1.3.1 Screen Transition when Power Is Turned ON .........................................................4 1.3.2 Screen Transition Diagram (Lathe system) .............................................................5 1.3.3 Screen Transition Diagram (Machining center system) ...........................................7

1.4 Screen Selection Procedure .............................................................................................9 1.5 Data Setting Method .......................................................................................................13 1.6 Screen Saver/ Backlight OFF .........................................................................................17

2. Monitor..................................................................................................................................19 2.1 POSITION.......................................................................................................................20

2.1.1 Total Clear of Screen .............................................................................................23 2.1.2 Position Display Counter Zero and Origin Zero .....................................................23 2.1.3 Manual Numeric Command (S, T, M) ....................................................................24 2.1.4 Displaying Automatic Operation Program..............................................................27

2.2 COORDINATE................................................................................................................28 2.2.1 Correcting the Buffer..............................................................................................32

2.3 COMMAND.....................................................................................................................44 2.3.1 Execution Program Monitor ...................................................................................44 2.3.2 Execution Modal Monitor .......................................................................................45 2.3.3 Total Integrating Time Display ...............................................................................47

2.4 PROGRAM SEARCH .....................................................................................................48 2.4.1 Memory Search......................................................................................................49 2.4.2 Tape Search ..........................................................................................................51 2.4.3 Compare Stop........................................................................................................53

2.5 Resuming the Program...................................................................................................55 2.5.1 Operation Sequences for Program Restart............................................................58 2.5.2 Restart Search Operations ....................................................................................61 2.5.3 Restart Position Return System.............................................................................67 2.5.4 Manual Numeric Commands with Program Restart...............................................68 2.5.5 Checkpoints for Program Restart...........................................................................69

2.6 PLC SWITCH..................................................................................................................70 2.6.1 PLC Switch ON and OFF Operation ......................................................................70

2.7 COMMON VARIABLE.....................................................................................................71 2.7.1 Common Variable Display .....................................................................................72 2.7.2 Common Variable Setting ......................................................................................73 2.7.3 Common Variable Data Deleting ...........................................................................73

2.8 LOCAL VARIABLE..........................................................................................................74 2.8.1 Local Variable Data Display...................................................................................75

3 (I). Tool Offset (L system) ......................................................................................................77 3.1 Wear Data.......................................................................................................................78

3.1.1 Setting Tool Offset Data.........................................................................................79 3.1.2 Erasing the Tool Offset Data..................................................................................79 3.1.3 Tool Wear and Tool Length Data Setting Mode (incremental/absolute) ................80

3.2 Tool Length Data ............................................................................................................82 3.2.1 Manual Tool Length Measurement I ......................................................................83

- ii -

3.2.2 Manual Numeric Command Operation on the TOOL DATA Screen (M, T) ...........89 3.2.3 Manual Tool Length Measurement II .....................................................................90

3.3 Tool Nose Data...............................................................................................................97 3.4 Tool Life Management I (#1096 T_L type is 1) ...............................................................98

3.4.1 Tool Life Management Method ..............................................................................99 3.4.2 Conditions for Counting (incrementing) .................................................................99 3.4.3 Setting Tool Life Management Data ....................................................................100 3.4.4 Erasing Tool Life Management Data in Display Screen Units .............................100 3.4.5 Precautions ..........................................................................................................100

3.5 Tool Life Management II (#1096 T_Ltype is 2) .............................................................101 3.5.1 Group Registration...............................................................................................101 3.5.2 Tool Life Incrementation Methods........................................................................104 3.5.3 Parameters ..........................................................................................................106

3.6 Tool Registration...........................................................................................................107 3.6.1 Outline of Functions .............................................................................................107 3.6.2 Tool Registration in the Magazine Pot .................................................................107 3.6.3 Tool Registration in the Spindle, Standby and Indexing Areas............................108 3.6.4 Deleting Tool Registration Data ...........................................................................109 3.6.5 Manual Numeric Command Operation (M, T) on the TOOL

REGISTRATION Screen......................................................................................109 3 (II). Tool Offset (M system) ..................................................................................................111

3.1 Tool Offset ....................................................................................................................112 3.1.1 Tool Offset Data Setting.......................................................................................113 3.1.2 Tool Offset Data Clear .........................................................................................113 3.1.3 Tool Offset Data Setting Modes (Absolute and Incremental)...............................113 3.1.4 Manual Tool Length Measurement ......................................................................116 3.1.5 Manual Numeric Command Operation on the TOOL OFFSET Screen (M, T).....119

3.2 Tool Registration...........................................................................................................120 3.2.1 Function Outline...................................................................................................120 3.2.2 Tool Registration in Magazine Pot .......................................................................121 3.2.3 Tool Registration in HEAD, NEXT, and INDEX ...................................................122 3.2.4 Tool Registration Data Clear................................................................................122 3.2.5 Manual numeric Command Operation on the TOOL REGISTRATION

Screen (M, T).......................................................................................................123 3.3 Tool Life ........................................................................................................................124

3.3.1 Function Outline...................................................................................................124 3.3.2 TOOL LIFE Screen Data Display.........................................................................125 3.3.3 TOOL LIFE Data Display and Setting (TOOL LIFE Data Screen Page 2) ...........129 3.3.4 Clear of All TOOL LIFE Data (HEAD, NEXT, GROUP LIST Screen Page 1) ......130

4. Parameters (User) ..............................................................................................................131 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate ..................................................................................................132

4.1.1 Setting Workpiece Coordinate System Offset Data .............................................134 4.1.2 Setting External Workpiece Coordinate System Offset Data...............................134 4.1.3 Displaying Machine Position Data .......................................................................134 4.1.4 Workpiece Coordinate Offset Measurement Function (L System).......................135 4.1.5 Workpiece Coordinate Offset Measurement Function (M System)......................139 4.1.6 Workpiece position Measurement Function (M System) .....................................140

4.2 Machining Parameters..................................................................................................146 4.2.1 PROCESS PARAMERTER..................................................................................146 4.2.2 Control Parameters..............................................................................................153 4.2.3 Axis Parameters...................................................................................................155 4.2.4 Barrier Data..........................................................................................................157 4.2.5 Tool Measurement Parameter .............................................................................159

- iii -

4.3 I/O Parameters .............................................................................................................160 4.3.1 I/O BASE PARAM................................................................................................160 4.3.2 I/O DEVICE PARAM ............................................................................................162 4.3.3 COMPUTER LINK PARAMETER ........................................................................165

4.4 Setup Parameters.........................................................................................................168 4.5 BACKUP Screen...........................................................................................................169

4.5.1 Backup Operations ..............................................................................................170 4.5.2 Restoration Operations ........................................................................................171

5. Program..............................................................................................................................172 5.1 Function Outline............................................................................................................173 5.2 Menu Function ..............................................................................................................174

5.2.1 MDI Screen Menu Function .................................................................................174 5.2.2 EDIT Screen Menu Function................................................................................178

5.3 Program Edit Operation ................................................................................................180 5.3.1 Data Display Update (One Screen Scroll) ...........................................................180 5.3.2 Data Display Update (One Line Scroll) ................................................................181 5.3.3 Data Change........................................................................................................182 5.3.4 Data Insertion (

SHIFT

DELETE INS ) .....................................................................................183

5.3.5 Deletion of One Character (

DELETE INS )..........................................................................184

5.3.6 Deletion of One Block (

C.B CAN ) .................................................................................185

5.3.7 Deletion of Data on One Screen ..........................................................................186 5.4 MDI Screen Extension Operation .................................................................................187

5.4.1 MDI Data Registration in Memory (

MDI-ENT ) ...........................................................187 5.5 Edit Screen Extension Operation..................................................................................188

5.5.1 Edit Data Call (

SEARCH ) ..........................................................................................188 5.5.2 New Program Registration and Preparation ........................................................193

5.6 PLAYBACK...................................................................................................................195 5.6.1 Playback Operation..............................................................................................196 5.6.2 Edit Operation ......................................................................................................201 5.6.3 Limitations............................................................................................................202

5.7 Word Editing .................................................................................................................203 5.7.1 Handling of the Various Keys During Word Editing .............................................206 5.7.2 Searching Word Units ..........................................................................................207 5.7.3 Word Search ........................................................................................................208 5.7.4 Character String Search ......................................................................................209 5.7.5 Deleting Words ....................................................................................................210 5.7.6 Deleting Lines ......................................................................................................211 5.7.7 Replacing Words..................................................................................................212 5.7.8 Inserting Words....................................................................................................213 5.7.9 Copying Words ....................................................................................................215 5.7.10 Program .............................................................................................................216 5.7.11 Deleting Programs .............................................................................................217 5.7.12 Newly Creating Programs ..................................................................................218 5.7.13 Operation Search...............................................................................................219 5.7.14 B. G Search .......................................................................................................220 5.7.15 B. G Quit ............................................................................................................221 5.7.16 Comments..........................................................................................................221 5.7.17 Setting the Program Operation Start Position....................................................222

6. Data In/Out .........................................................................................................................223 6.1 DATA INPUT ................................................................................................................224

6.1.1 Change of Input and Comparison ........................................................................225 6.1.2 Machining Program Input.....................................................................................226

- iv -

6.1.3 Inputting Tool Offset Data ....................................................................................229 6.1.4 Inputting Parameter Data.....................................................................................230 6.1.5 Inputting Common Variables................................................................................231 6.1.6 Inputting History Data ..........................................................................................232 6.1.7 Inputting Waveform Data .....................................................................................233 6.1.8 Inputting Auxiliary Axis Parameter Data ..............................................................234

6.2 DATA OUTPUT.............................................................................................................235 6.2.1 Machining Program Output ..................................................................................237 6.2.2 Outputting Tool Offset Data .................................................................................241 6.2.3 Outputting Parameter Data ..................................................................................242 6.2.4 Outputting Common Variable Data ......................................................................245 6.2.5 Outputting History Data........................................................................................246 6.2.6 Outputting Waveform Data ..................................................................................247 6.2.7 Outputting Auxiliary Axis Parameter Data............................................................248

6.3 PROGRAM ERASE ......................................................................................................251 6.4 PROGRAM COPY ........................................................................................................256

6.4.1 Machining Program Copy ....................................................................................257 6.4.2 Machining Program Condense ............................................................................259 6.4.3 Machining Program Merge...................................................................................260 6.4.4 Changing the Machining Program Number..........................................................262

6.5 PROGRAM FILE...........................................................................................................263 6.6 RS-232C I/O Device Connection ..................................................................................265

6.6.1 Connection of Tape Reader, Tape Puncher, Printer, FLD...................................265 6.7 Data Protection .............................................................................................................266

6.7.1 Data Protection Key .............................................................................................266 6.7.2 Edit Lock B, C ......................................................................................................268

7. Diagnosis ............................................................................................................................270 7.1 ALARM MESSAGE.......................................................................................................271

7.1.1 Tracing of Alarm and Stop Codes........................................................................271 7.2 SERVO MONITOR .......................................................................................................273

7.2.1 Servo Monitor.......................................................................................................273 7.2.2 Servo Monitor (2) .................................................................................................274 7.2.3 Servo Diagnosis...................................................................................................275 7.2.4 Servo Diagnosis (2) .............................................................................................276 7.2.5 PW Diagnosis ......................................................................................................277 7.2.6 Display Items for the Synchronous Error .............................................................278

7.3 SPINDLE MONITOR.....................................................................................................280 7.4 PLC Interface Diagnosis ...............................................................................................284

7.4.1 PLC-I/F Setting and Display.................................................................................284 7.4.2 PLC Device Data Display.....................................................................................286 7.4.3 PLC Interface Signal Forcible Definition (Single-shot Type)................................287 7.4.4 PLC Interface Signal Forcible Definition (Modal Type) ........................................288 7.4.5 Diagnosis Executed When an Emergency Stop Status Occurs...........................289

7.5 Absolute Position Monitor .............................................................................................290 7.5.1 ABS SERVO MONITOR ......................................................................................290 7.5.2 Absolute Position Initialization .............................................................................291

7.6 Adjustment....................................................................................................................293 7.6.1 Adjustment Preparation .......................................................................................293 7.6.2 Automatic Analog Output Adjustment ..................................................................293 7.6.3 Adjustment Procedure .........................................................................................294 7.6.4 Parameter Input/Output .......................................................................................295

7.7 OPERATION HISTORY................................................................................................296

- v -

7.8 Configuration ................................................................................................................297 7.8.1 S/W MODULE TREE ...........................................................................................297 7.8.2 H/W MONITOR ....................................................................................................297 7.8.3 Option ..................................................................................................................298

7.9 Auxiliary Axis Parameter...............................................................................................299 7.9.1 Auxiliary Axis Parameter Screen .........................................................................299 7.9.2 Backup.................................................................................................................300

7.10 Auxiliary Axis Monitor .................................................................................................304 7.10.1 Alarm History Display.........................................................................................305 7.10.2 Auxiliary Axis Adjustment Function....................................................................305 7.10.3 Operation Method for the Auxiliary Axis Adjustment Function...........................308

7.11 MELDASNET Support Parameters.............................................................................311 7.12 NC Data Sampling ......................................................................................................314 7.13 Anshin-net...................................................................................................................315 7.14 MTB net ......................................................................................................................316

8. High-speed Program Server ...............................................................................................317 8.1 Host Setting ..................................................................................................................318

8.1.1 Setting the User Name.........................................................................................319 8.1.2 Setting the Password ...........................................................................................319 8.1.3 Designating the Directory.....................................................................................320 8.1.4 Setting the Host Address .....................................................................................320 8.1.5 Inputting a comment ............................................................................................321

8.2 Host (Compatible with M60 Series) ..............................................................................322 8.2.1 Displaying the File List .........................................................................................323 8.2.2 Downloading (IC to host) .....................................................................................324 8.2.3 Uploading (Host to IC) .........................................................................................325

8.3 Host (Compatible with M60S Series) ............................................................................326 8.3.1 Host Communication Screen ...............................................................................326 8.3.2 File Selection Screen...........................................................................................329 8.3.3 NC Data File Name..............................................................................................331 8.3.4 Using the Host Communication Screen ...............................................................332 8.3.5 Using the File Selection Screen...........................................................................337

8.4 IC Card .........................................................................................................................340 8.4.1 Inputting a Machining Program from the IC Card (IC to NC) ...............................341 8.4.2 Outputting a Machining Program to the IC Card (NC to IC).................................342 8.4.3 Erasing a Machining Program in the IC Card ......................................................343 8.4.4 Formatting the IC Card ........................................................................................344 8.4.5 Searching for a Machining Program in the IC Card .............................................345 8.4.6 Listing the Machining Programs in the IC Card ...................................................346

9. Graphics .............................................................................................................................347 9.1 Outline of Functions......................................................................................................347 9.2 Menu Function ..............................................................................................................348 9.3 Use of the Trace Mode (

TRACE ).....................................................................................350 9.4 Use of the Check Modes ..............................................................................................351 9.5 GRF MODE (

GRF MODE ) ......................................................................................................359

9.6 SCALE (

SCALE ) .............................................................................................................361 9.6.1 Changing the Scale..............................................................................................361 9.6.2 Changing the Display Position .............................................................................362

9.7 STANDARD (

STANDARD ) .....................................................................................................366 9.8 ROTATION (

ROTATION ) (M system)....................................................................................367 9.9 ERASE (

ERASE ) .............................................................................................................368 9.10 PROGRAM (

PROGRAM ).....................................................................................................369

- vi -

10. Ladder Circuit Monitor [for PLC built-in specification only] ...............................................370 10.1 Parameter Setting.......................................................................................................370

11. Visual Analyzer (Waveform display) .................................................................................371 11.1 Menu Function ............................................................................................................373 11.2 Synchronous Tap Error Display..................................................................................374

II. MACHINE OPERATION MANUAL 1. Operation State .........................................................................................................................2

1.1 Operation State Transition Diagram .................................................................................2 1.2 Power OFF .......................................................................................................................2 1.3 Run Not Ready .................................................................................................................3 1.4 Ready ...............................................................................................................................3

1.4.1 Reset........................................................................................................................3 1.4.2 Automatic Operation Start........................................................................................3 1.4.3 Automatic Operation Pause .....................................................................................4 1.4.4 Automatic Operation Stop........................................................................................4

2. Indicator Lamps.........................................................................................................................4 2.1 Control Unit Ready ...........................................................................................................4 2.2 Automatic Operation Busy ................................................................................................4 2.3 Automatic Operation Start Busy .......................................................................................4 2.4 Automatic Operation Pause Busy.....................................................................................4 2.5 Return to Reference Position............................................................................................5 2.6 Alarm ................................................................................................................................5 2.7 M00...................................................................................................................................5 2.8 M02/M30...........................................................................................................................5

3. Reset Switch and Emergency Stop Button ...............................................................................6 3.1 Reset Switch.....................................................................................................................6 3.2 Emergency Stop Button....................................................................................................6

4. Operation Mode.........................................................................................................................7 4.1 Mode Selection Switch .....................................................................................................7 4.2 Jog Feed Mode.................................................................................................................7 4.3 Rapid Traverse Feed Mode ..............................................................................................8 4.4 Return to Reference Position Mode..................................................................................9 4.5 Incremental Feed Mode..................................................................................................11 4.6 Handle Feed Mode .........................................................................................................12 4.7 Memory Mode.................................................................................................................13 4.8 MDI Operation Mode ......................................................................................................14

5. Operation Panel Switches in Operation Mode ........................................................................15 5.1 Rapid Traverse Override ................................................................................................15 5.2 Cutting Feed Override ....................................................................................................15 5.3 Manual Feedrate.............................................................................................................15 5.4 Handle/Incremental Feed Magnification Factor ..............................................................16 5.5 Handle Feed Axis Selection............................................................................................16 5.6 Manual Pulse Generator.................................................................................................16 5.7 Cycle Start and Feed Hold..............................................................................................17 5.8 Feed Axis Selection ........................................................................................................17

6. Operation Panel Switch Functions ..........................................................................................18 6.1 Chamfering .....................................................................................................................18 6.2 Miscellaneous Function Lock..........................................................................................18 6.3 Single Block ....................................................................................................................18

- vii -

6.4 Dry Run...........................................................................................................................18 6.5 Manual Override .............................................................................................................18 6.6 Override Cancel ..............................................................................................................19 6.7 Optional Stop ..................................................................................................................19 6.8 Optional Block Skip.........................................................................................................19 6.9 Manual Absolute .............................................................................................................20 6.10 Error Detect ..................................................................................................................21 6.11 Follow-up Function .......................................................................................................21 6.12 Axis Removal ................................................................................................................21 6.13 Manual/Automatic Synchronous Feed..........................................................................21 6.14 Handle Interruption .......................................................................................................22

6.14.1 Outline..................................................................................................................22 6.14.2 Interruptible Conditions ........................................................................................22 6.14.3 Interruption Effective Axis ....................................................................................22 6.14.4 Axis Movement Speed Resulting from Interruption..............................................23 6.14.5 Path Resulting after Handle Interruption..............................................................24 6.14.6 Handle Interruption in Tool Radius Compensation ..............................................26 6.14.7 Interrupt Amount Reset........................................................................................28 6.14.8 Operation Sequence ............................................................................................28

6.15 Machine Lock................................................................................................................29 6.16 Deceleration Check ......................................................................................................30

6.16.1 Functions .............................................................................................................30 6.16.2 Deceleration Check Method.................................................................................30 6.16.3 Deceleration Check when Opposite Direction Movement is Reversed................33 6.16.4 Parameters ..........................................................................................................34 6.16.5 Precautions ..........................................................................................................35

III. SETUP 1. Switches ....................................................................................................................................1

1.1 Layout Diagram of the Control Unit Rotary Switch ...........................................................1 2. Start up and Adjustment Procedure ..........................................................................................5

2.1 Confirmation of Connections ............................................................................................5 2.2 Setting of Various Switches ..............................................................................................5 2.3 Turning Power ON, Memory Initialization and Parameter Settings...................................7

3. Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Point Return ......................................................................8 3.1 Outline ..............................................................................................................................8 3.2 Dog-type Reference Point Return.....................................................................................8 3.3 Reference Point Return Parameters...............................................................................10 3.4 Dog-type Reference Point Return Adjustment Procedures ............................................15

4. Absolute Position Detection System .......................................................................................16 4.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................16 4.2 Coordinate System of Absolute Position System............................................................16 4.3 Starting up Absolute Position Detection System ............................................................17

5. Stored Stroke Limit..................................................................................................................28 5.1 Stored stroke limit I .........................................................................................................30 5.2 Stored stroke limit II ........................................................................................................31 5.3 Stored stroke limit IB.......................................................................................................33 5.4 Stored stroke limit IC ......................................................................................................33 5.5 Movable Range during Inclined Axis Control ..................................................................34 5.6 Stored Stroke Limit for Rotation Axis ..............................................................................35 5.7 Precautions.....................................................................................................................36

- viii -

6. Daily Maintenance and Periodic Inspection and Maintenance................................................37 6.1 Maintenance Tools .........................................................................................................37 6.2 Maintenance Items .........................................................................................................37

6.2.1 Escutcheon ............................................................................................................38 6.2.2 LCD Panel..............................................................................................................38 6.2.3 ATA Memory Card .................................................................................................39

6.3 Replacement Methods....................................................................................................40 6.3.1 Cable......................................................................................................................40 6.3.2 Durable Parts .........................................................................................................42 6.3.3 Unit.........................................................................................................................45 6.3.4 Control PCB...........................................................................................................47 6.3.5 Memory Cassette...................................................................................................49 6.3.6 High-speed Program Server ..................................................................................51

7. Troubleshooting.......................................................................................................................52 7.1 Confirmation of Trouble State.........................................................................................52 7.2 When in Trouble .............................................................................................................53

8. Maintenance Functions ...........................................................................................................57 8.1 Data Input/Output Function.............................................................................................57

8.1.1 Data Format ...........................................................................................................58 8.1.2 Data Output............................................................................................................61 8.1.3 Data Input and Compare........................................................................................65 8.1.4 Parameter Backup .................................................................................................70

8.2 Data Sampling ................................................................................................................71 8.2.1 Specifications.........................................................................................................71 8.2.2 Operation Procedures............................................................................................72 8.2.3 Setting and Display Items ......................................................................................73 8.2.4 Data Output Procedures ........................................................................................79

IV. APPENDIXES Appendix 1 List of Function Codes .............................................................................................1 Appendix 2 Table of Command Value Ranges...........................................................................2 Appendix 3 Circular Cutting Radius Error...................................................................................3 Appendix 4 Registering/Editing the Fixed Cycle Program ..........................................................4

4.1 Fixed Cycle Operation Parameters...................................................................................4 4.2 Inputting the Fixed Cycle Program ...................................................................................4 4.3 Outputting the Fixed Cycle Program.................................................................................4 4.4 Erasing the Fixed Cycle Program .....................................................................................4 4.5 Standard Fixed Cycle Subprogram (For L system)...........................................................5 4.6 Standard Fixed Cycle Subprogram (For M system)........................................................15

Appendix 5 RS-232C I/O Device Parameter Setting Examples and Cable Connection...........20 Appendix 6 Data Input/Output Data List ...................................................................................21 Appendix 7 Operation Messages on Setting and Display Unit .................................................23

I. OPERATION SECTION

1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.1 Appearance of Setting and Display Unit

I-1

1. Setting and Display Unit Operation

1.1 Appearance of Setting and Display Unit The setting and display unit consists of a display unit (9-inch umber color), keys, and menu keys, as illustrated below:

(1) Appearance of the CT100 Setting and Display Unit ... Example of key layout for machining center system

(Separate types FCUA-CR10+KB10 and FCUA-EL10+KB10 are similar.)

MITSUBISHI READY

MONI- TOR

TOOL PARAM

EDIT MDI

DIAGN IN/OUT

SFG F0

O A

N B

G C

X U

Y V

Z W

F E

D L

H I

P \

Q J

R K

M (

S )

T [

?

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

0 S P

DELETE INS

CB CA N

SHIFT

INPUT CALC

RESET

- +

. ,

EOB ]

= #

/ *

READY LED Alphabetic character, numerical character, and symbol keys Setting keys Function selection keys

CRT/EL display

Page keys

Menu keys Reset key Cursor keys Data correction keys

Input key (calculation) Shift key

(2) Appearance of the CT120 Setting and Display Unit ... Example of key layout for lathe system

MITSUBISHI READY

MONI- TOR

TOOL PARAM

EDIT MDI

DIAGN IN/OUT

SFG F0

O A

N B

G C

X U

Y V

Z W

F E

D L

H I

P \

Q J

R K

M (

S )

T [

?

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

0 S P

DELETE INS

CB CA N

SHIFT

INPUT CALC

RESET

- +

. ,

EOB ]

= #

/ *

(Note 1) To enter the letter or symbol on the lower right of an alphabetic or symbol key, press the

corresponding key while holding down the

SHIFT key.

(Example) Pressing the

O A while holding down the

SHIFT key types letter "A".

1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.2 Functions of Display Areas

I-2

1.2 Functions of Display Areas Screen display is divided into the following four areas: (1) Data display area (2) Operation status mode and alarm message area (3) Menu display area (4) Setting area and key operation message area

.......Function....... name

Data display area

Key operation message area..........

...Setting area........................................................................................................

...Operation status mode/alarm display area.........................................................

...Menu display area..............................................................................................

1. MONITOR 3. 1/4

System name display When using the 2-system, the system name will be displayed here for screens that can be set and displayed per system. The name set in parameter "#1169 system name" will display. The systems can be switched over by pressing

$ .

Maximum number of pages

Page number

Menu number

Function name

Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 MENU ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 ST5 ST6 ST7 ST8 Operation mode

Operation status mode display and menu display (during normal operation)

Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Alarm 1 (19 characters)

Alarm message display (during alarm occurrence) Alarm 2 (19 characters)

This is displayed when 6 or more menus exist.

The selected menu is reverse- displayed.

Alarm is highlighted and message (warning) is normally displayed.

1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.2 Functions of Display Areas

I-3

Explanation of operation status display

Position Display symbol Explanation ST1 EMG During emergency stop RST During reset LSK When paper tape reader is in label skip state HLD During feed hold stop STP During single block stop Normal operation state other than the above ST2 mm Metric command in. Inch command ST3 ABS Absolute command mode G90 INC Incremental command mode G91 ST4 This indicates that subprogram is not executed.

SB1 SB4

Machining program execution is controlled according to subprogram data. Each value of 1 to 4 indicates the subprogram depth.

ST5 G54 G59

Selection of the workpiece coordinate system is indicated.

ST6 G40 Tool radius compensation cancel state G41 During tool R compensation (left) G42 During tool R compensation (right) ST7 fix Fixed cycle is being executed. PR State in which power must be rebooted to validate set parameter. State other than the above. ST8

(Note 1) denotes blank display.

1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.3 Screen Transition Diagram

I-4

1.3 Screen Transition Diagram 1.3.1 Screen Transition when Power Is Turned ON

MONI- TOR etc.

Power ON

O1234 N12345 X -12000.000 M3 Y -3400.000 S100 Z -560.000 T12 N1 N2

MONITOR 1

Blank screen

Title screen

SHIFT

C.B CAN

Display screen

(1) When the power is turned ON, the "Title" screen is displayed. To select a display screen on the "Title"

screen, press the corresponding "function selection" key. (2) To select a blank screen on a display screen, select the "MONITOR 1" screen and press

SHIFT key, then

C.B CAN key.

To select a display screen on the "blank screen", press the corresponding "function selection" key.

1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.3 Screen Transition Diagram

I-5

1.3.2 Screen Transition Diagram (Lathe system) Screens with a

$ mark will change between systems if the

$ key is pressed when using the 2-system.

$

$

MDI

$

$

MONI- TOR

POSITION COORDINATE

COMMAND MODAL

INFORM. TIME

RESERCH

PLC

SWITCH

COMMON VARIABLE

LOCAL

VARIABLE

PROGRAM SEARCH

$

$

$

TOOL PARAM

NOSE-R

TOOL LIFE

DATA

$

TOOL TIP OFFSET

TOOL DATA

I/O BASE PARAM

SETUP PARAM

BACKUP

SERVO PARAM

SPINDLE PARAM

BASE SPEC. PARAM

AXIS

SPEC. PARAM

$

MACRO

FILE

PSW

$

MC-ERR.

CMP.

PLC

TIMER

#1000

#9000

#2000 #2200 #3000

#4000,#5000 #6000 #7000 #7000

The setting can be displayed when SETUP PARAM is selected.

EDIT MDI

MDI

EDIT

MDI-ENT

PROGRAM

SMALL LARGE

FILE

SEARCH

DIAGN IN/OUT

SPINDLE MONITOR

PLC-I/F

ALARM

MESSAGE

SERVO MONITOR

SERVO DIAGNOSIS

ABS SERVO MONITOR

ABS. POSITION SET

SUPPORT

AUX-PRM

AUX-MON

ERASE

FILE

INPUT

OUTPUT

COPY

IC CARD

HOST SET

HOST

ADJUST

S-ANALOG

OPERATION

HISTORY

CONFIG

[MENU 1] [MENU 2] [MENU 3] [MENU 4] [MENU 5] [MENU 6] [MENU 7] [MENU 8]

#8000

EDIT

$ $

$

$

WORK

PROCESS CONTROL

AXIS BARRIER

1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.3 Screen Transition Diagram

I-6

SFG

MACRO

CONTROL

PROGRAM

ERASE

TRACE

STEP

OPERATION

SEARCH

ERASE

CHECK

MAC-PAR

LIST

STANDARD

GRF

MODE

ROTATION

SCALE

OFF

ON

PARAMETER #1217/0

F0

VISUAL

ANALYZER

LADDER

MONITOR

APLC

ON

OFF

PARAMETER #1222/2

ON

OFF

PARAMETER #6451/0

1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.3 Screen Transition Diagram

I-7

1.3.3 Screen Transition Diagram (Machining center system) Screens with a

$ mark will change between systems if the

$ key is pressed when using the 2-system.

$

$

$

MONI- TOR POSITION COORDINATE

COMMAND MODAL

INFORM. TIME

RESERCH

PLC

SWITCH

COMMON VARIABLE

LOCAL

VARIABLE

PROGRAM SEARCH

$

$

$

$

TOOL PARAM

TOOL LIFE

DATA

TOOL

OFFSET

T-

REGIST- RATION

I/O BASE PARAM

SETUP PARAM

BACKUP

WORK

PROCESS CONTROL

AXIS BARRIER

BASE SPEC. PARAM

AXIS

SPEC. PARAM

$

MACRO

FILE

PSW

$

MC-ERR.

CMP.

PLC

TIMER

#1000

#9000

#2000 #2200 #3000

#4000,#5000 #6000 #7000 #7000

EDIT MDI

MDI

EDIT

MDI-ENT

PROGRAM

SMALL LARGE

FILE

SEARCH

DIAGN IN/OUT

SPINDLE MONITOR

PLC-I/F

ALARM

MESSAGE

SERVO MONITOR

SERVO DIAGNOSIS

ABS SERVO MONITOR

ABS. POSITION SET

SUPPORT

AUX-PRM

AUX-MON

ERASE

FILE

INPUT

OUTPUT

COPY

IC CARD

HOST SET

HOST

ADJUST

S-ANALOG

OPERATION

HISTORY

CONFIG

[MENU 1] [MENU 2] [MENU 3] [MENU 4] [MENU 5] [MENU 6]

#8000

SPINDLE PARAM

SERVO PARAM

MDI

EDIT

[MENU 7] [MENU 8]

$ $

$

The setting can be displayed when SETUP PARAM is selected.

1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.3 Screen Transition Diagram

I-8

SFG

MACRO

CONROL

PROGRAM

ERASE

TRACE

STEP

OPERATION

SEARCH

ERASE

CHECK

MAC-PAR

LIST

STANDARD

RANGE

GRF

MODE

ROTATION

SCALE

OFF

ON

PARAMETER #1217/0

F0

VISUAL

ANALYZER

LADDER

MONITOR

APLC

ON

OFF

PARAMETER #1222/2

ON

OFF

PARAMETER #6451/0

1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.4 Screen Selection Procedure

I-9

1.4 Screen Selection Procedure The following operation methods are based on using the exclusive setting and display unit.

Select a screen according to the following procedure: (1) Select a function screen by using the appropriate function key. (2) Select a menu screen in the function by using the appropriate menu key. (3) Select a page in the menu screen by using the page key.

FUNCTION

MENU

Page

First page

Page Page

Menu 1

Menu 2

Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6

Menu 7

Menu 8

1.1 screen

2.1 screen

3.1 screen

4.1 screen

5.1 screen

6.1 screen

7.1 screen

8.1 screen

5.2 screen

6.2 screen

1.3 screen

6.3 screen

6.4 screen

4.2 screen

1.2 screen

2.2 screen

8.2 screen

Second page

Third page

Fourth page

(1) Select a function screen.

MONI- TOR

TOOL

PARAM

EDIT MDI

DIAGN IN/OUT

SFG

F0

Press the function selection key corresponding to the function screen to be displayed. (Example) Press the

MONI- TOR key.

1) The previously displayed menu screen is

displayed in the data display area. 2) The first display screen after power is turned

ON is the screen on the first menu.

If the same function selection key is again pressed, a return is made to the first page screen of the first menu. (Example) Again press the

MONI- TOR key.

POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU

[PROGRAM SEARCH] MONITOR 4.1/4 O12345678 N12345-12 O 1000 N 200-30 [PROGRAM FILE] 100 1500 50000 1234567 200 2000 70000 2000000 300 3000 123456 3000000 400 7000 200000 4000000 1234 10000 300000 5000000 [COL.BLOCK]

O N - N20 G91 G28X0 Y0 Z0; O( )N( )-( ) TAPE( )

[POSITION] 12/14 13:27 MONITOR 1 O12345678 N12345-12 O 1000 N 200-30 S 12345 ( 2000) #1 T 1234 M 12 #1 Fc 12000.00

G00 X-345.67 Y345.67; T1234; N100 S5000 M3; N200 G00 Z-100;

X -12345.678

Y 12345.678

Z 0.000

C 0.000

POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU

1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.4 Screen Selection Procedure

I-10

(2) Select a menu screen in the function. Up to five menus are displayed at a time. When a menu key below the menu display is pressed, the

menu screen corresponding to the menu key is displayed.

Press the menu key corresponding to the menu display.

Menu display

Menu key

POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU

1) The selected menu screen is displayed in the data display area.

2) The selected menu is highlighted in the menu display area.

POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU

[PROGRAM SEARCH] MONITOR 4.1/4 O12345678 N12345-12 O 1000 N 200-30 [PROGRAM FILE] 100 1500 50000 1234567 200 2000 70000 2000000 300 3000 123456 3000000 400 7000 200000 4000000 500 10000 300000 5000000 [COL.BLOCK]

O N - N20 G91 G28X0 Y0 Z0; O( )N( )-( ) TAPE( )

When the rightmost menu in the menu display area is "MENU", it indicates that other menus than the

displayed menus exist. Make menu change by pressing the menu key below "MENU", then select the menu screen to be displayed.

Press the

MENU key.

POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU

(1)

1) Only the menu display area is changed and the remaining menu group is displayed.

RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU

[PROGRAM SEARCH] MONITOR 4.1/4 O12345678 N12345-12 O 1000 N 200-30 [PROGRAM FILE] 100 1500 50000 1234567 200 2000 70000 2000000 300 3000 123456 3000000 400 7000 200000 4000000 500 10000 300000 5000000 [COL. BLOCK]

O N - N20 G91 G28X0 Y0 Z0; O( )N( )-( ) TAPE( )

Press the menu key corresponding to the

menu display. RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU

(2)

RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU

[COMMON VARIABLE] MONITOR 7.1/11 # 110 100 -123456.7890 111 101 12.3456 112 102 113 103 114 104 115 105 116 106 117 107 118 108 119 109

#( )DATA( )NAME( )

1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.4 Screen Selection Procedure

I-11

When the screen selection menu is selected, the screen that mark is displayed after the menu means that the operation menu exists.

Press the menu key corresponding to the menu display.

T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU

(1)

1) The selected menu screen is displayed in the data display area.

2) The selected menu is highlighted and mark is displayed after the menu.

T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE NENU

[NOSE-R] TOOL 3.1/4 #1 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 0 2 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 0 3 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 0 : : : : : :

#( ) R( ) r( ) P( )

Press the menu key again.

(2)

T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU

1) The operation menu is displayed in the menu display area.

+INPUT =INPUT RETURN

[NOSE-R] TOOL 3.1/4 #1 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 0 2 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 0 3 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 0 : : : : : :

#( ) R( ) r( ) P( )

1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.4 Screen Selection Procedure

I-12

(3) Select a page in the menu screen. When the menu screen contains a number of pages, feed pages by using the page key, the rightmost

page key (

NEXT ) is the "next page" screen selection key. The leftmost page key (

BACK ) is the "previous page" screen selection key.

Using the rightmost key

NEXT , feed page.

Using the leftmost key

BACK , feed page.

# 1 #1

#10 #20

#21 #31

#30 #40

#41 #51

#50 #60

First page Second page Third page Fourth page Fifth page

#81 #91

#90 #100

#61 #71

#70 #80

to to to to to to to to to to

1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.5 Data Setting Method

I-13

1.5 Data Setting Method

(1) Outline of data setting The data setting method consists

mainly of the following steps: (1) Enter the data number. (2) Move the cursor. (3) Press data keys. (4) Press the INPUT key.

When a screen is selected, the cursor is displayed in the right end within the first parentheses in the setting area.

RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU

[COMMON VARIABLE] MONITOR 7.1/11 # 110 100 -123456.7890 111 101 12.3456 112 102 113 103 114 104 115 105 116 106 117 107 118 108 119 109 #( )DATA( )NAME( ) Data setting

area

Cursor

(1) Enter the data number.

Enter the number of the data to be set by using the numeric keys. (Example) To set data in #104, press

1

0

4 .

RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU

#( 104 )DATA( )NAME( )

(2) Move the cursor.

To move the cursor to the next parentheses, press the

key.

RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU

#( 104 )DATA( )NAME( )

(3) Press data keys.

Seeing the data display area contents, enter new data by using the keys. (Example) To change to 12.345, press

1

2

3

4

5 .

RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU

#( 104 )DATA( 12.345 )NAME( )

(4) Press the INPUT key.

Check the setup contents displayed in the setting area and set the data in memory by pressing the

INPUT key.

1) Data setting processing is performed according to the setting area contents, and the result is displayed in the data display area.

2) The data number in the setting area is incremented by one, and the cursor is displayed in the right end within the second parentheses.

After the last data number is input, it is not displayed. At this time, the cursor is displayed in the right end of the first parentheses.

RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU

[COMMON VARIABLE] MONITOR 7.1/11 # 110 100 -123456.7890 111 101 12.3456 112 102 113 103 114 104 115 105 116 106 117 107 118 108 119 109 #( 105)DATA( )NAME( )

1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.5 Data Setting Method

I-14

3) To consecutively set data, repeat (3) and (4). 4) To change the data number, press the

INPUT key. The number is incremented by one. When the

key is pressed, the number is incremented by one. When the

key is pressed, the number is decremented by one. The data number can also be directly changed by moving the cursor to the data number setting area.

(Note 1) Data in the setting area is only displayed on the screen and is not set in memory until the

INPUT key is pressed. If the screen is changed before the

INPUT key is pressed, the data in the setting area becomes invalid.

(2) Cursor control and operation examples 1) Data write into the display screen (by keying) is made at the position indicated by the cursor. When

the cursor is not displayed, keying is not effective. Data ( )

Cursor This position enables keying.

2) When any key is pressed, already displayed data is moved one column to the left and the data corresponding to the key pressed at the cursor position is displayed.

DATA ( 12) When

3 is pressed, DATA ( 123)

3) If a number of parentheses exist in the data setting area, pressing the

key when the cursor is in the right end within a parenthesis causes the cursor to move to the right end within the next pair.

When the

key is pressed, the cursor is moved to the right end within the next parentheses.

# ( ) DATA ( )

When the

SHIFT

key are pressed, the cursor is moved to the preceding parentheses.

# ( ) DATA ( )

4) When the

DELETE INS key is pressed, the data at the cursor position is deleted. To cancel one character

entered by using any data key, etc., use the

DELETE INS key.

If you press

3 ,

3 by mistake, # ( 12) DATA ( 1233)

If you once press the

DELETE INS key, # ( 12) DATA ( 123)

If you again press the

DELETE INS key, # ( 12) DATA ( 12)

Each time the

DELETE INS key is pressed, one character of data at the cursor position is deleted and the

data to the left of the deleted character is moved one column to the right.

1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.5 Data Setting Method

I-15

5) Data in parentheses where the cursor exists is erased by pressing the

C.B CAN key.

Display is made in the setting area as shown in the right. # ( 10) DATA ( 12.345)

If you press the

C.B CAN key, # ( 10) DATA ( )

6) Data in all parentheses in the setting area is erased by pressing

SHIFT

C.B CAN .

Display is made in the setting area as shown in the right.

If you press

SHIFT

C.B CAN ,

# ( 10) DATA ( 12.345)

# ( ) DATA ( )

7) The cursor in parentheses is moved one column to the left or right by pressing the

or

key desired character of data entered by using the data keys can be corrected.

Display is made in the setting area as shown in the right.

If you make successive four strokes of the

key,

If you press

3 ,

# ( 10) DATA ( 12.345)

# ( 10) DATA ( 12.345)

# ( 10) DATA ( 13.345)

2 is corrected to 3 and the cursor is moved one column to the right.

If you press the

key, # ( 10) DATA ( 13.345)

The cursor is only moved one column to the right.

If you press

0 SP

0 SP

0 SP , # ( 10) DATA ( 13.000)

The character at the cursor position is rewritten and the cursor is also moved one column to the right.

Data is corrected in sequence. (Note 1) If

is pressed when the cursor exists in the right end within one parenthesis, the cursor is moved to the right end within the following parenthesis part; if

is pressed when the cursor exists in the left end within one parenthesis, the cursor is moved to the right end within the preceding parentheses.

1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.5 Data Setting Method

I-16

8) When the

SHIFT

keys are pressed, the cursor is moved to the right end within the following parentheses.

# ( 123) DATA ( 234) If you press the

SHIFT

key, the cursor is moved to the right end within the preceding parentheses.

# ( 123) DATA ( 234) If you press the

SHIFT

key, the cursor is moved to the right end within the following parentheses.

(3) Miscellaneous information 1) Data can also be set by other special methods. See the appropriate items. (For example, manual

numeric command setting is performed by the reverse display setting method.) 2) If an invalid key is pressed when data is set within parentheses, a "setting error" will occur at input

time and the data will not be accepted. Again set correct data from the beginning.

1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.6 Screen Saver / Backlight OFF

I-17

1.6 Screen Saver / Backlight OFF

The screen saver function protects the display unit by turning OFF the screen after the time set in the parameters has elapsed. The screen can also be turned OFF with key operations on the POSITION screen. The backlight OFF function turns OFF the backlight in order to extend the life of the LCD screens backlight. The screen can be turned ON by pressing any of the keys on the key operation panel.

(1) Turning the screen OFF

(a) Screen Saver

If there is no key operation or a screen display request signal input from the machine within the time set in the parameter (#8078 Screen Saver Time), the screen will be turned OFF. If the parameter is set to 0, the screen will not be turned OFF.

The screen can turn OFF by pressing the

SHIFT and

C.B CAN keys on the POSITION screen. Even if the

parameter is set to 0, the screen can be turned OFF by pressing the

SHIFT and

C.B CAN keys.

(Note) The screen will not be turned OFF even if the

SHIFT and

C.B CAN keys are pressed on a screen

other than the POSITION screen.

(b) Backlight OFF

When the Screen Sever function works, the backlight turns OFF.

(2) Turning the screen ON

If a key is pressed or the screen display request signal is input while the screen is OFF, the screen will turn ON. (If an LCD is used, the backlight will also turn ON.) When a function select key is pressed, the screen will turn ON (the backlight will also turn ON for an LCD), and each key function will be executed. When alphanumeric or symbol key is pressed:

1 Only screen is turned ON

Z Only screen is turned ON * The following keys are also included. (

INPUT /

/

C.B CAN /

DELETE INS )

When a function select key is pressed:

MONI- TOR Screen turns ON and screen shifts

(Note) If a key is pressed or the screen display request signal is input while the screen is ON,

counting of the time to turn the screen OFF will restart.

1. Setting and Display Unit Operation 1.6 Screen Saver / Backlight OFF

I-18

(3) Setting the parameters

# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8078 Screen Saver Set the time to turn the screen OFF.

The screen saver will not turn ON if 0 is set. 0 to 60 (min) 0: Do not turn screen

OFF. (4) Target display units

This screen saver function is valid with the following display units. (a) 9-type CRT/9.5-type EL (b) 7.2-type/10.4-type monochrome LCD (c) 10.4-type color LCD (Note1) The display unit in (a) is valid only when the screen is turned OFF by the

SHIFT and

C.B CAN keys on

the POSITION screen. (Note2) The display units in (b) and (c) have a backlight which is turned ON/OFF.

(5) Precautions (a) If the screen is turned OFF while keys can be operated on the EDIT screen, etc., and an

alphanumeric, symbol or INPUT key is pressed, the first key will be handled as that for turning the screen ON. The key will not be input.

(b) If the function key, menu key, page key or system changeover key is pressed while the screen is OFF, the screen corresponding to the pressed key will turn ON.

(c) The screen will not turn ON even if the reset key is pressed. However, if the screen display request signal is input when the reset key is pressed, the screen will turn ON. Refer to the instruction manual issued by each machine maker for details. Note that whether the screen will turn ON when any of the machine operation board keys (other than the NC operation board keys) is pressed will differ according to the machine specifications. Refer to the instruction manual issued by each machine maker for details.

(d) Correspondence of

SHIFT key. The screen will not turn ON when just the

SHIFT key is pressed.

2. Monitor

I-19

2. Monitor When the function selection key

MONI- TOR is pressed, the following menu appears:

POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU

MONITOR menu display (No.5 to 8) (No.1 to 4)

Menu selection keysPrevious page key Next page key

RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU

PROGRAM FILE

SEARCH

PROGRAM FILE

SEARCH

TIME

COM-VAR

MODAL

INFORM.

MONITOR menu display No.1 to 4

POSITION X M Y S Z T

PREVIOUS PAGE

NEXT PAGE

MENU

PLC-SW

COM-VAR

COORDI

POSITION, DIS TO GO, WORK,

MACHINE

COMMAND

PROGRAM DISPLAY

SEARCH

PROGERAM FILE

SEARCH

MONITOR menu display No.5 to 8

PREVIOUS PAGE

NEXT PAGE

LOC-VAR

LOC-VAR

......

......

RESERCH

2. Monitor 2.1 POSITION

I-20

2.1 POSITION When the menu key

POSI is pressed, the POSITION screen is displayed.

POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU

[POSITION] 12/14 13:27 MONITOR 1 O12345678 N12345-12 O 1000 N 200-30 S 12345 ( 2000) #1 T 1234 M 12 #1 Fc 12000.00

G00 X-345.67 Y345.67; T1234; N100 S5000M3; N200 G00Z-100.;

X -12345.678

Y 12345.678

Z 0.000

C 0.000

(4-axis pecifications)

The following can be performed on the POSITION screen: (1) Full screen erase (2) Origin set. The current value (POSITION) data of each axis can be set to 0. (3) Manual numeric command. Miscellaneous function output of M, S, T, etc., can be set through the

screen.

2. Monitor 2.1 POSITION

I-21

Display item Explanation 12/14 13:27 The date and the time are displayed. O12345678 N12345-12 The currently executing program number, sequence number, and

block number are displayed. O 1000 N 200-30 When a subprogram is being executed, the program number,

sequence number, and block number of the subprogram are displayed.

[POSITION] X-12345.678 Y 12345.678 Z 0.000 #1 C 0.000 #1

The relative value is coordinate position using referenced to the machine zero point. The current position during execution and its abbreviation (if the position is specific or is placed in specific state) are displayed. #1~#4 (first to fourth reference point positions), ] [ (servo off state), > < (axis removed state) MR (mirror image) are displayed. Whether the tool reference position (figure below (a)) or the current position of the tool nose position (figure below (b)) that considers offset, such as tool length offset amount or tool diameter compensation amount, in the tool reference position is applied to the display of the relative value can be selected with the parameter.

Workpiece offset Machine zero point

Workpiece zero point

Relative value (a) (Machine position) Displayed by tool reference position

Workpiece coordinate

Current value B

Tool reference position Tool nose position

Relative value (b) Displayed by tool nose position

Tool

(Continued on next page)

2. Monitor 2.1 POSITION

I-22

Display item Explanation

The relative of the relation value counter display contents and the parameters is as shown below.

#1287 ext23 /bit3

#1221 aux 05/bit7

0 1

0

Relative value (figure below (a))

Relative value (figure below (b)) The compensation amount is considered according to #1287 ext23/bit4,5 contents.

1

Relative value (figure below (a))

The current value B is displayed in M60S series. In the M60A/64 lathe system, not only the counter of the POSITION screen but also the relative value of the COORDINATE screen changes to the current value B. The relative value (figure below (b)) is displayed in the M64A/64(Machining system) /65/66.

0 Relative value The compensation amount is considered according to #1287 ext23/bit4,5 contents. #1221 aux

05/bit7 1

Current value B The counter of the POSITION screen changes to the current value B.

S 12345 (2000) T 1234 M 12 Fc 12000.00

The spindle rotation speed command value is displayed. The actual spindle rotation speed is shown in ( ). The tool command value is displayed. The last four digits of the miscellaneous function command value are displayed. During interpolation feed, the speed in the current vector direction in moving is displayed. During independent axis feed, the speed of the axis with the highest speed is displayed.

G00 X-345.67 Y345.67; T1234; N100 S5000M3; N200 G00Z-100.;

Four blocks of the current program being executed are displayed. The top block is an already executed block. The subsequent three lines are the subsequent block program.

2. Monitor 2.1 POSITION

I-23

2.1.1 Total Clear of Screen If you do not use the unit for extended periods, clear the entire screen to prevent deterioration of the display

unit by the following procedures. (1) Select 1st menu

POSI on the MONITOR screen and press the

SHIFT and

C.B CAN keys to clear total

screen. (2) If you want to display screen after clearing of total screen, press a function select key such as

MONI- TOR to

display the screen you desire. 2.1.2 Position Display Counter Zero and Origin Zero Counter Zero The POSITION display only is set to zero and the absolute value data remains unchanged. Origin Zero This sets both POSITION display and absolute value data to zero. It is equivalent to G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ;. (Note1) Origin zero is valid only when #1123 origin is set to 0. (Note2) Counter zero and origin zero are disabled in the current value B.

In the following operations, the

INPUT key has the counter zero function and the

C.B CAN key

has the origin zero (set zero) function.

Press the address key X .

1) The address indication corresponding to the key is highlighted.

Press the

INPUT key (counter zero) or

C.B CAN key (origin zero).

1) The axis position data is set to zero and

the next axis name is highlighted. 2) By repeatedly pressing the

INPUT key or

C.B CAN key, the position data of other axes

can be cleared to zero. 3) Upon completion of zero clear of final

axis, the display is no longer reversed. 4) If you press an axis address key

midway, the address of specified axis is highlighted.

5) When you press a key other than axis address key, the display is no longer reversed.

X -12345.678 Y 1.234 Z 12.345 C 123.456

X -12345.678 Y 1.234 Z 12.345 C 123.456

X 0.000 Y 1.234 Z 12.345 C 123.456

X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 12.345 C 123.456

2. Monitor 2.1 POSITION

I-24

2.1.3 Manual Numeric Command (S, T, M) You can easily execute spindle function S, tool function T and miscellaneous function M by operation on the

screen. Namely, you can key in S, T and M commands as if they were commanded by a program. (1) Conditions that allow manual numeric command M, S or T command sequence is not under way. Even during automatic start or pause, for example, the

manual numeric command is available if above conditions are met. (2) Operating procedures of manual numeric commands 1) Select the position display

POSI menu screen. 2) Press the address key corresponding to the command. This causes the corresponding commanded

value display section to be highlighted and makes the system ready for input of manual numeric command. The spindle function key is

S , tool function key is

T and miscellaneous function key is

M . 3) Key-in the numerical value to be input. 4) Press the

INPUT key.

(Example) The procedures to execute S1200 by manual numeric command are given below. First select POSITION display on MONITOR screen.

On screen, last executed command value is displayed.

Press the address key

S .

1) The address corresponding to the pressed key and numerical value setting range are highlighted.

S 500

S

Set the numerical value by number keys.

1

2

0

0

1) The set numbers are displayed successively as highlighted.

S 1200

Press the

INPUT key.

1) The S command is executed. 2) The reversed display on screen

returns to normal.

S 1200

2. Monitor 2.1 POSITION

I-25

(3) Action to be taken when an erroneous numeric is set and the correct one is desired to be set There are two methods: Method (1) While pressing the

DELETE INS key, delete the set digits one by one. Then, retry to enter the

correct digits. Method (2) Retry the entry, beginning with pressing the address key corresponding to the

command.

Press

DELETE INS

DELETE INS

DELETE INS to delete the

erroneously set numeric.

(Example) In this condition, the numeric is

desired to be replaced by S1500.

S 1200

Method (1)

S 1

Enter

5

0

0 . S 1500

Press address key

S to return to the initial status.

Method (2)

S

Enter

1

5

0

0 . S 1500

(4) Setting/output range of manual numeric command The setting and output range for the manual numeric command are indicated.

BCD Signed binary M 0~9999 S 99999 T 0~9999

2. Monitor 2.1 POSITION

I-26

(Note 1) If the type is BCD output and a negative number is set, the positive value converted from it will be output.

(Example) Manual numeric command

Output

M -100 M 100 (Note 2) If the number of digits specified in the command exceeds the setting range, the most significant

digit will be lost. (Example)

M 1234

5 M 2345

Most significant digit is lost. 1

(5) Other notes on operation (1) When a minus command is set: Before setting the numeric, press the

key.

(Example) If S-150 is specified: Press address key

S . Then, press key

1

5

0 in order.

Press the

INPUT key.

S-150

S 150

1) A minus value will be output, but a positive value will display.

(2) When manual numeric command operation stops halfway: If the operation is desired to be stopped before input after pressing the address key, press any

non-numeric key. If a manual numeric command address-key such as M, S, T is pressed, the previous operation

will stop. In this case, the next manual numeric command sequentially begins. If an axis address key (X, Y, or Z, etc.) is pressed, the manual numeric command will stop. In this

case, the origin zero or counter zero mode is then entered. If the

SHIFT

C.B CAN keys are pressed, the manual numeric command will stop. In this case, the

POSITION screen is blanked. If one of the following keys is pressed, the operation will not stop: 1) Position display function key

MONI- TOR

2)

key pressed before a numeric is set (will be processed as a minus command.) 3)

DELETE INS key when a numeric has been set (The set data will be deleted.)

(3) The macro interruption codes (M96, M97) and subprogram call codes (M98, M99) will not be processed even if these codes are issued.

(4) No surface speed command is available. In the constant surface speed mode, no command is processed, if specified.

2. Monitor 2.1 POSITION

I-27

(5) The set data will be canceled if screen change is executed during manual numeric command operation.

(6) If operations in which manual numeric commands are carried out (M, S, T keys) are attempted when the manual numeric command protect function is valid, the error message "E05 NOT ACCEPTABLE" will occur.

2.1.4 Displaying Automatic Operation Program (1) Displaying the operation program during automatic operation

During memory, tape, or MDI operation, up to four blocks of the specified program are displayed. The block being executed or the completed block will display at the top line.

(2) Displaying the operation program after SEARCH The head block of the operation searched program is displayed at the line of the next command.

(3) Displaying the operation program at branch to or at return from subprogram When a branch command (M98) block is executed, the subprogram is immediately displayed. When a

return command (M99) block is executed, the main program is immediately displayed.

(4) Difference between one block of work program and one execution block

1) A block containing only EOB or only a comment statement is not interpreted as one execution block. Instead it is processed as one block together with the next block.

2) A block that does not contain a movement command or MST command, such as a variable command, is not interpreted as one execution block. Instead, the program up to the block containing a movement command or MST command is handled in the same manner as one block.

(Note) When a parameter "MACRO SINGLE" is ON, a variable command block is regarded as an execution block.

2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE

I-28

2.2 COORDINATE When the menu key

COORDI is pressed, the COORDINATE screen is displayed.

POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU

[COORDINATE] O12345678 N12345-12 MONITOR2 2.1/2 O 1000 N 200-30 Fc 0.00 WORK COUNT 1300/ 30000

N1 G00 X-345.678; [POSITION] [WORK (G54)] [MACHINE] N2 T1234; X1 100.000 X1 100.000 X1 100.000 N3 S5000 M3; Y1 200.000 Y1 200.000 Y1 200.000 N4 G00 Z-100; Z1 300.000 Z1 300.000 Z1 300.000 N5 G01 X100. F500; A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 N6 Y100.; B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 N7 G02 X200. R200.; C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 [DIS TO GO] [NEXT] 0 50 100 X1 100.000 X1 100.000 S1 5000 110% Y1 200.000 Y1 200.000 ( 2000) Z1 300.000 Z1 300.000 S2 0 0 50 100 A 0.000 A 0.000 ( 0) 80% B 0.000 B 0.000 T 1234

STP mm ABS G40 G54 MEMORY C 0.000 C 0.000 M 12

Multiple axis display screen

This screen is displayed on second page of the COORDINATE screen for 4-Spindle specification or more or 7-Servo axis specification or more.

POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU

[COORDINATE] O 120 N 0- 0 MONITOR2 2.2/2 O N - Fc 0.00 WORK COUNT 0/ 0 [POSITION] [WORK (G54)] [MACHINE] [DIS TO GO] [POSITION B] [MANUAL IT] X1 0.000#1 X1 0.000 X1 0.000 X1 0.000 X1 0.000 X1 0.000 Y1 0.000#1 Y1 0.000 Y1 0.000 Y1 0.000 Y1 0.000 Y1 0.000 Z1 0.000#1 Z1 0.000 Z1 0.000 Z1 0.000 Z1 0.000 Z1 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 U1 0.000 U1 0.000 U1 0.000 U1 0.000 U1 0.000 U1 0.000 V1 0.000 V1 0.000 V1 0.000 V1 0.000 V1 0.000 V1 0.000 N01 G28XYZ ; N02 G91 G41 D1 G17 ; N03 G00 X500. ; N04 G00 Y500. ; STP mm ABS G40 G54 MEMORY

Display item Explanation O12345678 N12345-12 The currently executing program number, sequence number, and

block number are displayed. O 1000 N 200-30 When a subprogram is being executed, the program number,

sequence number, and block number of the subprogram are displayed.

2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE

I-29

Display item Explanation

[POSITION] X -345.678 Y 345.678 Z 0.000#1 C 0.000

The current position during execution and the status abbreviation of the axis are displayed. The status symbol is the same as the display on the POSITION screen. (Note) When using the M64A/M64 lathe system, the relative value display can be changed to the current value B (value that does not include tool length offset amount, tool diameter compensation amount, workpiece coordinate offset amount) by setting parameter "#1221 aux05/bit7" and "#1287 ext23/bit3".

Workpiece offset Machine zero point

Workpiece zero point

Relative value (a) (Machine position) Displayed by tool reference position

Workpiece coordinate

Current value B

Tool reference position Tool nose position

Relative value (b) Displayed by tool nose position

Tool

2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE

I-30

Display item Explanation

[WORK (G54)] X -345.678 Y 345.678 Z 0.000 C 0.000

G54~G59, P1~P48 workpiece coordinate system modal numbers and the workpiece coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system are displayed. (Note) P1 to P48 are options.

[MACHINE] X -345.678 Y 345.678 Z 0.000 C 0.000

The coordinate of each axis in the basic machine coordinate system in which the unique position determined depending on the machine is used as the zero point are displayed.

[DIS TO GO] X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000

The remaining distance of the move command being executed (incremental distance from the current position to the end point of the block) is displayed during automatic operation start busy or pause busy.

[NEXT] X1 0.000 S1 5000 Y1 0.000 ( 2000) Z1 0.000 S2 0 A 0.000 ( 0) B 0.000 T 1234 C 0.000 M 12 (Note) On the multi-axis display screen, this display item corresponds to the area in which [POSITION B] and [MANUAL IT] are displayed.

This displays the command contents of the block executed after the block currently in execution during automatic operation. The following display items can be selected according to setting the parameters. (Note1) [MST] The spindle rotation speed command value is displayed. The actual spindle rotation speed is shown in ( ). The tool command value is displayed. The last four digits of the miscellaneous function command value are displayed. [POSITION B] Tool nose position coordinate that is considered tool length offset and tool diameter compensation can be displayed in workpiece coordinate. Tool length offset and tool diameter compensation amount that are considered depend on tool (T) designation or the currently selected tool No. that is input from the external source. [MANUAL IT] The amount moved with the manual mode while the manual absolute switch was OFF is displayed. The manual interrupt amount can be selected for the counter value displayed on the coordinate value screen using parameter.

2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE

I-31

(Note1) The type of position counter to display can be selected with the base specification parameter (#1137 Cntsel).

Counter Parameter #1137 Cntsel Left Right

00 or 10 MST 01 or 11 Next command 02 or 12 Current value B 03 or 13

Next command

Manual interrupt amount 20 MST 21 Next command 22 Current value B 23

Current value B

Manual interrupt amount 30 MST 31 Next command 32 Current value B 33

Manual interrupt amount

Manual interrupt amount

Display item Explanation N1 G00 X-345.678 Y345.678; N2 T1234; N3 S5000 M3; N4 G00 Z-100; N5 G01 X100.F500; N6 Y100.; N7 G02 X200.R200.;

The current work program being executed is displayed. This is the same as the POSITION screen display.

SPINDLE

Z-AX

The spindle load and Z axis load can be displayed as a bar graph, using the user PLC.

WORK COUNT: / Workpiece count Max. workpiece count

Workpiece count : Indicates count data of the number of workpieces.

Workpiece count Max. value :

The max. workpiece value set in #8003 WRK LIMIT value is displayed.

Display range: 0~999999

2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE

I-32

2.2.1 Correcting the Buffer

(1) Outline During automatic operation (memory or tape operation) or MDI operation, a block stop can be applied, and the next command can be corrected or changed. When a program error occurs, the block in which the error occurred can be corrected without resetting the NC, and operation can be continued. (Note) When running a machining program from the external memory, even if the buffer is

corrected, the revisions are not reflected on the original program.

Tape or IC card

Memory

MDI

Preread block

Execution block NC operation

Machine control

Buffer correction

(2) Details (a) The next command can be corrected in the following two cases.

When single block stop is applied, and there is a machining program containing a next command to be corrected.

During automatic operation, there is an error (program error) in the next command's machining program, and the program is stopped.

(b) During memory or MDI operation, not only the displayed buffer data but also the memory and

MDI contents are corrected with the buffer corrections. (c) If an error occurs in the preread block, the block in which the error occurred can be corrected.

(Note) The buffers on the second and third pages of the COORDINATE screen cannot be corrected.

2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE

I-33

(3) Operation method During a single block stop or when a program error stop occurs, the buffer can be corrected with the following operations, and operation can be continued.

(a)

(b)

* Buffer correction area (39 characters 6 lines)

The normally executed program appears in this area. (Up to six lines will be displayed.)

Commands before previous command Previous command Command in execution Next command and subsequent commands

: : N122 T1212; N123 S1230 M3; N124 G00 X68. Y201.; N125 G01 X80. Y195. F50; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; : :

[Buffer correction area in normal state]

Display area

When correcting the buffer, the display changes so that the next command is displayed at the head of the area, and the entire buffer correction area is highlighted. The cursor will initially flicker at the head of the next command. The cursor can be moved freely within the buffer correction area using the cursor keys. (6 lines)

N123 S1230 M3; N124 G00 X68. Y201.; N125 G01 X80. Y195. F50; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.;

Next command and subsequent commands [Buffer correction area during buffer correction]

Select the first page of the COORDINATE screen.

Press the one of the cursor keys (

,

,

,

) or tab keys (

,

).

The buffer correction mode will be entered, and the buffer correction area will be highlighted.

2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE

I-34

(c)

(d) The buffer correction mode ends, and the corrected data is written into to program. If a program error has occurred, the error display disappears.

(e)

The program execution resumes from the currently stopped position.

(Example) An example of creating and executing the following program is given below. If a program error (P62) occurs in the N125 block, the cause of the error is removed by correcting the buffer.

N121 G28 X0 Y0; N122 T1212; N123 S1230 M3; N124 G00 X68. Y201.; N125 G01 X80. Y195.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 X120.; N130 G01 X130.;

(a)

Start automatic operation. 1) A program error (P62) will occur

after N124 is executed.

N124 G00 X68. Y201.; N125 G01 X80. Y195.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 X120.; P62 F-CMD. NOTHING

Correct the program with the same method as editing a normal program.

Press the

INPUT key.

Confirm that the corrected data is correct, and then restart.

2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE

I-35

(b)

Press the

key.

1) The head area of the program being executed will change to the buffer correction area when the cursor key is pressed. (The buffer correction mode will be entered.)

2) The message "BUFFER EDIT" will appear.

N125 G01 X80. Y195.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 X120.; N130 G01 X130.;

BUFFER EDIT P62 F-CMD. NOTHING

(c) Insert "F50" at the end of the N125 line.

BUFFER EDIT P62 F-CMD. NOTHING

N125 G01 X80. Y195. F50.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 X120.; N130 G01 X130.;

(d)

Press the

INPUT key.

1) The buffer correction will end when the INPUT key is pressed, and the program being executed will display. (The buffer correction mode will be canceled.)

2) The message "BUFFER EDIT" will disappear.

3) The program error (P62) will disappear.

N124 G00 X68. Y201.; N125 G01 X80. Y195. F50.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 X120.;

(e) Start automatic operation.

Execution will resume from the N125 block.

2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE

I-36

(4) Supplement (a) If there is no data for the next command during automatic operation start or automatic operation

with tape, etc., the buffer correction mode will not be entered even if the cursor key is pressed. % is always inserted at the end of the memory or the next command data will not be lost.

Buffer correction possible Buffer correction not possible (memory operation) (tape operation)

N128 G01 X110.;

N128 G01 X110.; %

(b) The key operations for making corrections during the buffer correction mode are the same as the operations for editing the program. However, blocks other than those displayed in the buffer correction area cannot be displayed and operated by feeding the page with the

NEXT PAGE or

PREVIOUS PAGE

keys or by scrolling with the cursor keys. The page feed and scrolling operations will be ignored.

Operation Buffer correction Program correction Scroll Not possible Possible Page feed/return Not possible Possible Cursor movement Possible Possible Character replacement Possible Possible Character insertion Possible Possible Character deletion Possible Possible Block deletion Possible Possible

2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE

I-37

(c) Even if the buffer is corrected, if the

INPUT key has not been pressed, the corrections can be returned to the original next command by pressing the

NEXT PAGE or

PREVIOUS PAGE key. The mode will

remain the buffer correction mode.

N124 G00 X68. Y201.; N125 G01 X80. Y195.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 X120.; P62 F-CMD. NOTHING

Press the

key.

N125 G01 X80. Y195.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 X120.; N130 G01 X130.;

BUFFER EDIT

Insert F50. at the end of the N125 line.

N125 G01 X80. Y195.F50.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 X120.; N130 G01 X130.;

BUFFER EDIT

Press the

NEXT PAGE or

PREVIOUS PAGE key.

1) Return to the state when buffer correction is started.

N125 G01 X80. Y195.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 X120.; N130 G01 X130.;

BUFFER EDIT

(Note) The

NEXT PAGE and

PREVIOUS PAGE keys function to cancel the edited details during buffer correction, so

the page cannot be switched to the COORDINATE screen page 2 and following. Quit buffer correction to change the page.

2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE

I-38

(d) Buffer correction will be canceled if another screen is opened or reset is executed during the correction. The corrected details will not be reflected.

(e) Operation cannot be started during buffer correction. The "M01 Operation alarm 0013" will

occur. (f) If there is no ; (EOB) in the last block edited when

INPUT is pressed, it will be added automatically.

N125 G01 X80. Y195.F50.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 X120.; N130 G01 X130.

BUFFER EDIT

Press the

INPUT key.

1) ";" is added to the end of the N130 block.

N124 G00 X68. Y201.; N125 G01 X80. Y195. F50.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 X120.; N130 G01 X130.;

2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE

I-39

(g) When the buffer correction mode is entered, there may be cases when the program up to ; (EOB) does not fit in and only part of the program is displayed because the last block displayed in the buffer correction area is long.

N124 G00 X68. Y201.; N125 G01 X80. Y195.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 Y200.; N130 G74 X120.0 Y100.0 Z-20.0 R-10.0 P2.,R0;

Press the

key.

1) "P2.,R0" of N130 is not displayed.

N125 G01 X80. Y195. F50.; N126 Y150.; N127 G02 X100. Y185. R20.; N128 G01 X110.; N129 G01 Y200.; N130 G74 X120.0 Y100.0 Z-20.0 R-10.0

BUFFER EDIT

(Note) Handling when entire block is not displayed The results will differ according to the state when

INPUT key was pressed.

State Results ; (EOB) is not added to the end of displayed data.

The section (P2.,R0;) not displayed will be the continuing part of the displayed section.

; (EOB) is added to the end of the displayed data.

The section (P2.,R0;) not displayed will become separate block.

The N130 block is deleted with the

C.B CAN key.

During memory/MDI operation: The section (P2.,R0;) not displayed will also be deleted.

During tape operation: Only the displayed section will be deleted, and the section not displayed will be kept as a separate block.

2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE

I-40

(h) The number of characters that can be input at once will be the total of the number of characters added (or deleted) with buffer correction and the number of characters in the other blocks displayed in the correction area. The maximum number will be 234 characters (39 characters 6 lines). When adding data, characters exceeding the correction area's margin cannot be added.

In this case, press the

INPUT key and quit the buffer correction once. Then, correct the buffer again. When buffer correction is started, a line return is added for each block and a space is added for each word, so there will be more space for adding characters.

(Example) Add "N175 G74 Z10.0 R5.0 P2.0 ;" after N170.

N120 G02 X150.0 Y100.0 I25.0 J0.0; N130 G02 X150.0 Y150.0 I0.0 J25.0; N140 G02 X200.0 Y150.0 I25.0 J0.0; N150 G02 X200.0 Y200.0 I0.0 J25.0; N160 G02 X250.0 Y200.0 I25.0 J0.0; N170 G02 X250.0 Y250.0 I0.0 J25.0; N180 G02 X300.0 Y250.0 I25.0 J0.0;

Press the

key.

N130 G02 X150.0 Y150.0 I0.0 J25.0; N140 G02 X200.0 Y150.0 I25.0 J0.0; N150 G02 X200.0 Y200.0 I0.0 J25.0; N160 G02 X250.0 Y200.0 I25.0 J0.0; N170 G02 X250.0 Y250.0 I0.0 J25.0; N180 G02 X300.0 Y250.0 I25.0 J0.0;

BUFFER EDIT

Insert "N175G74Z10.0R;".

N130 G02 X150.0 Y150.0 I0.0 J25.0; N140 G02 X200.0 Y150.0 I25.0 J0.0; N150 G02 X200.0 Y200.0 I0.0 J25.0; N160 G02 X250.0 Y200.0 I25.0 J0.0; N170 G02 X250.0 Y250.0 I0.0 J25.0;N175G 74Z-10.0R;N180G02X300.0Y250.0I25.0J0.0;

BUFFER EDIT

Press the

INPUT key.

N120 G02 X150.0 Y100.0 I25.0 J0.0; N130 G02 X150.0 Y150.0 I0.0 J25.0; N140 G02 X200.0 Y150.0 I25.0 J0.0; N150 G02 X200.0 Y200.0 I0.0 J25.0; N160 G02 X250.0 Y200.0 I25.0 J0.0; N170 G02 X250.0 Y250.0 I0.0 J25.0; N175 G74 Z-10.0 R; N180 G02 X300.0 Y250.0 I25.0 J0.0;

2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE

I-41

Press the

key.

N130 G02 X150.0 Y150.0 I0.0 J25.0; N140 G02 X200.0 Y150.0 I25.0 J0.0; N150 G02 X200.0 Y200.0 I0.0 J25.0; N160 G02 X250.0 Y200.0 I25.0 J0.0; N170 G02 X250.0 Y250.0 I0.0 J25.0; N175 G74 Z-10.0 R;

BUFFER EDIT

Insert "5.0P2.0" at the end of the N175 line.

N130 G02 X150.0 Y150.0 I0.0 J25.0; N140 G02 X200.0 Y150.0 I25.0 J0.0; N150 G02 X200.0 Y200.0 I0.0 J25.0; N160 G02 X250.0 Y200.0 I25.0 J0.0; N170 G02 X250.0 Y250.0 I0.0 J25.0; N175 G74 Z-10.0 R-5.0 P2.0;

BUFFER EDIT

Press the

INPUT key.

N120 G02 X150.0 Y100.0 I25.0 J0.0; N130 G02 X150.0 Y150.0 I0.0 J25.0; N140 G02 X200.0 Y150.0 I25.0 J0.0; N150 G02 X200.0 Y200.0 I0.0 J25.0; N160 G02 X250.0 Y200.0 I25.0 J0.0; N170 G02 X250.0 Y250.0 I0.0 J25.0; N175 G74 Z-10.0 R-5.0 P2.0; N180 G02 X300.0 Y250.0 I25.0 J0.0;

(i) If an error occurs in the preread block and the buffer correction mode is entered, the block in

which the error occurred will appear at the head of the area. (j) The error cannot be canceled for a fixed cycle or compound fixed cycle that cannot be displayed. Programs that cannot be displayed include: Fixed cycles Compound fixed cycles Machine maker macros (when base specification parameter #1166 fixpro=0)

When running program No. 9000 to 9999 while the program display lock is valid (base specification parameter #1122 pglk_c=1).

(k) When the program area selection (base specification parameter #1050 MemPrg) is set to 0

[program system same control specifications] and programs with the same numbers are run for the two systems, the buffer cannot be corrected. The message "CAN'T BUF. EDIT" will appear.

2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE

I-42

(l) The buffer cannot be corrected during IC card operation with M198. The message "CAN'T BUF. EDIT" will appear.

(m) Cases in which buffer cannot be corrected The subprogram call command (M98) and return command (M99) will execute the next block to

be executed (subprogram head and return designation) with one automatic start. Thus, the buffer for the subprogram's head and return destination blocks cannot be corrected.

(Example 1)

O10 G28 XYZ : N10 G0 X50.; M98 P100; N11 G0 X100.; N12 G0 X150.; M02; %

O100 N100 G01 Y10. F5000.; N110 G01 Z10.; M99; %

If automatic start is executed when the block is stopped with N10, the N100 block will be executed and will stop with N110. Thus, the buffer for N100 cannot be corrected. If automatic start is executed when the block is stopped with N110, the N11 block will be executed and will stop with N12. Thus, the buffer for N11 cannot be corrected. (Note that if the buffer is corrected when the block is stopped before N10, then N11 can be corrected.)

Normal buffer correction of the subprogram's head is not possible, as shown in the above example. Note that if there is a G0/G1 command in the M98 block, the block will stop at that block. (Example: G0M98P100;) If a block containing only the sequence No. is created at the head of the subprogram, the program will stop at that block, so buffer correction of the following blocks is possible. (Example 2)

O100 N1; Stops here G01Y10.F5000; M99; %

2. Monitor 2.2 COORDINATE

I-43

(6) Precautions (a) When an error occurs during continuous operation, if the program processes the variables, etc.,

in one step, the display will start not from the error block but instead from the head of the variables in which there was a preread error block. Six lines of the program will be displayed.

Example) X100.;

When the buffer correction mode is entered, these six lines will be displayed.

X-10000000; Example when this block has a program error (P35). If the macro block has seven or more lines, the block in which the program error occurred will

not be displayed. (b) Edit lock C When edit lock C is valid (base specification parameter #1121 edlk_c=1), buffer correction of

program numbers 9000 to 9999 is not possible. The "E16 EDIT LOCK C" error will occur. When the base specification parameter #1122 pglk_c=1/2, buffer correction of program

numbers 9000 to 9999 is not possible. The "E16 EDIT LOCK C" error will occur.

(Note) When either base specification parameter #1121 edlk_c or #1122 pglk_c is set, the power must be rebooted.

(c) Data protection key Buffer correction is possible when data protection key 1 (*KEY1: Y238) is ON. Buffer correction is possible when data protection key 2 (*KEY2: Y239) is ON. Buffer correction is not possible when data protection key 3 (*KEY3: Y23A) is ON. The message

"DATA PROTECT" will appear. (d) Edit lock B When edit lock B is valid (control parameter #8105 EDIT LOCK B = 1), buffer correction of

program numbers 8000 to 9999 is not possible. The "E15 EDIT LOCK B" error will occur.

#100=0; #101=1; #102=2; #103=3; #104=4; #105=5;

2. Monitor 2.3 COMMAND

I-44

2.3 COMMAND When the menu key

COMMAND is pressed, the COMMAND screen is displayed. This screen consists of three pages. It displays the execution program monitor, execution modal monitor,

and cumulative time data. Page switching is by pressing the

NEXT PAGE key or

PREVIOUS PAGE key.

2.3.1 Execution Program Monitor This screen displays the active machining

program's execution blocks for monitoring.

POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU

[COMMAND] MONITOR 3.1/3 O12345678 N12345-12 [WORK] O 1000 N 200-30 X 100.000 Y 200.000 Z 300.000 C 0.000 N10 ......... ; N20 ............ ; N30 ; N40 ; N50 ; N60 ; N70 ; N80 ; N90 ; N100 ;

Display item Explanation O12345678 N12345-12 The currently executing program number, sequence number, and

block number are displayed. O1000 N200-30

When a subprogram is being executed, the program number, sequence number, and block number of the subprogram are displayed.

N10 ......... ; N20 ............ ; N30 ;

N90 ; N100 ;

The current program being executed is displayed. The cursor is moved to the top of the current block being executed. When program execution reaches N90, the cursor is also moved to the top of N90. When the N100 block is executed, the N100 block is displayed starting at the top of the screen and the cursor is also moved to the top. The read data is displayed also during tape running in the above way.

[WORK] X 100.000 Y 200.000 Z 300.000 C 0.000

The workpiece coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system being currently executed are displayed.

2. Monitor 2.3 COMMAND

I-45

2.3.2 Execution Modal Monitor By switching the screen from the execution program's monitor screen (in the previous section) by using the

NEXT PAGE key, the execution modal's monitor screen is displayed. This screen mainly displays the modal

values of the active machining program for monitoring. [M system] [L system]

POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU

[MODAL INFORM.] MONITOR 3. 2/3 O12345678 N 12345-12 [WORK] O 1000 N 200-30 X1 100.000 G00 G18 G90 G94 Y1 200.000 G21 G80 G98 G15 G64 Z1 300.000 G67 G40.1 G97 G50.1 G43.1 A1 0.000 G68 :R= B1 0.000 G51 :P= G54 : C1 0.000 G40: D = G49: H = G05 : H = :P10000 FA 24000.00 S 12345 M 123454678 FM 1200.00 10 FS 0.0000 T 1234 35 B 1234 40 G28X0Y0Z0; LSK mm ABS G40 G54

POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU

[MODAL INFORM.] MONITOR 3. 2/3 O12345678 N 12345-12 [WORK] O 1000 N 200-30 X1 100.000 G00 G18 G G23 G98 Z1 200.000 G21 G40 G80 G C1 300.000 G64 G67 G69 U1 0.000 G97 G14 G13.1 G43.1 V1 0.000 W1 0.000 G54 : Tx: -12.345 Tg: 12 Tw:12 Tz: 12.345 V 0 Tc: 10.000 FA 24000.00 S 12345 M 123454678 FM 1200.00 10 FS 0.0000 T 1234 35 FE 0.0000 B 1234 40 G28X0Z0C0; LSK mm ABS G40 G54

Display item Explanation O12345678 N12345-12 The currently executing program number, sequence number, and

block number are displayed. O1000 N200-30

When a subprogram is being executed, the program number, sequence number, and block number of the subprogram are displayed.

[WORK] X1 100.000 Y1 200.000 Z1 300.000 :

The workpiece coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system being currently executed are displayed. Same as the POSITION screen.

[MODAL INFORM.] G00..........G94

G67.......G43.1

The modal state of the current G command being executed is displayed. (Note) Fixed cycle operation: When a fixed cycle command is executed, the G command in the fixed cycle control subprogram does not reflect the G modal of the calling program.

G40:D G49:H

The tool radius compensation modal and offset number and wear amount are displayed. The tool length offset modal and offset number and wear amount are displayed.

2. Monitor 2.3 COMMAND

I-46

Display item Explanation

The rotation angle for the program coordinate rotation command is displayed. The scaling magnification is displayed.

G68: R= (M system) G51: P= (M system) G05: P10000 (M system)

The high-speed machining mode and high-speed high-accuracy mode are displayed.

High-speed machining mode 3 (G05 : P3) High-speed high-accuracy control II (G05 : P10000) SSS control valid (G05 : P10000S) High-speed high-accuracy control I (G05.1 : Q1) Spline interpolation (G05.1 : Q2) Mode OFF (G05 : P0)

Tx: 12.345 (L system) Tz: 12.345 (L system) Tc: 10.000 (L system)

The total of the X axis, Z axis and additional axis' tool length and wear compensation amounts for the tool being used is displayed.

Tg: 12 (L system) Tw: 12 (L system)

The tool length offset No. is displayed. The wear compensation No. is displayed.

v (L system) FA 24000.00 FM 1200.00 FS 0.0000 FE 0.0000 (L system) S 12345 T 1234 M 12345678 10 35 40 B 1234

The constant surface speed spindle rotation speed is displayed. The program command asynchronous feedrate modal value currently being executed is displayed. (mm/min) The manual feedrate is displayed. (mm/min) The program command synchronous feedrate modal value currently being executed is displayed. (mm/rev) The thread lead command synchronous feedrate modal value currently being executed is displayed. (mm/rev) The modal value of the current program command S being executed is displayed. The modal value of the current program command T being executed is displayed. A maximum of four modal values of the current program command M being executed are displayed. The second miscellaneous function modal value of the current program command being executed is displayed.

N300 G1X-100.234~ The current program block being executed is displayed.

2. Monitor 2.3 COMMAND

I-47

2.3.3 Total Integrating Time Display By switching the screen from the execution program's monitor screen by using the

NEXT PAGE key, the TIME

screen is displayed.

POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU

[TIME] MONITOR 3.3/3 O12345678 N12345-12 O 1000 N 200-30 # 1 DATE 99/12/14 2 TIME 13:27:59 3 POWER 9999:59:59 4 AUTO OP 0: 0: 0 5 AUTO STL 0: 0: 0 6 EXT TIME1 0: 0: 0 7 EXT TIME2 0: 0: 0 #( ) DATA( ) ( ) ( )

Display item Explanation O12345678 N1234-12 The currently executing program number, sequence number, and

block number are displayed. O1000 N200-30 When a subprogram is being executed, the program number,

sequence number, and block number of the subprogram are displayed.

#1 DATE 99/12/14 2 TIME 13:27:59 3 POWER ON 9999:59:59 4 AUTO OP 0: 0: 0 5 AUTO STL 0: 0: 0 6 EXT TIME 1 0: 0: 0 7 EXT TIME 2 0: 0: 0

The date and time are set and displayed. year/month/day hour : min : sec The total integrating time in each operation state is displayed.

(1) TIME setting Set the number, hour, minute, and second corresponding to the TIME to be set.

Set 3 in # ( ). Set 0 in DATA ( ) ( ) ( )

Press the

INPUT key. #3 POWER ON 0: 0: 0

POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU

# (3) DATA ( 0 ) ( 0 ) ( 0 )

DATE : Set date (set "YEAR" in last 2 digits of Gregorian calendar) TIME : Set time in 24-hour mode. POWER ON : Total integrating time of the time from control unit power ON to OFF. AUTO OP : Total integrating time of the work time from AUTO STL button pressing in the memory

(tape) mode to M02/M30 or reset button pressing. AUTO STL : Total integrating time during automatic starting from AUTO STL button pressing in the

memory (tape) mode or MDI to feed hold stop, block stop, or reset button pressing. EXT TIME 1 : Dependent on PLC sequence. EXT TIME 2 : Dependent on PLC sequence. (Note) Integration time (#3 POWER ON to #7 EXT TIME 2): When display reaches the maximum

value (9999:59:59), integration is stopped and the maximum value remains displayed.

2. Monitor 2.4 PROGRAM SEARCH

I-48

2.4 PROGRAM SEARCH When the menu key

SEARCH is pressed, the PROGRAM SEARCH screen is displayed. The SEARCH screen enables you to call the program number, sequence number, and block number for

automatic operation from the machining programs registered in memory (or on paper type).

POSI COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MENU

[PROGRAM SEARCH] MONITOR 4. 1/4 O 12345678 N 12345-12

O 1000 N 200-30 [PROGRAM FILE]

100 1500 50000 1234567 200 2000 70000 2000000 300 3000 123456 3000000 400 7000 200000 4000000 1234 10000 300000 5000000

[COLLATION BLOCK] O N - O( ) N( )-( ) COL.( ) TAPE(0)

$1

Display item Explanation O12345678 N12345-12 The currently executing program number, sequence number, and

block number are displayed. O 1000 N 200-30

When a subprogram is being executed, the program number, sequence number, and block number of the subprogram are displayed.

[PROGRAM FILE] 100 1500 50000 1234567 200 2000 70000 2000000 300 3000 123456 3000000 400 7000 200000 4000000

1234 10000 300000 5000000

The numbers of the machining programs registered in memory are listed. The numbers ranging from 1 to 99999999 are displayed in the ascending order. If the number of the registered programs exceeds one page of display, PROGRAM FILE is displayed extending across pages.

[COLLATION BLOCK] O N -

The program position for compare stop is displayed.

After MDI operation is executed, programs cannot be searched for unless reset is executed. To restart from the middle of the program, search for the restart block, and then carry out MDI operation to restore the modal state.

(Note 1) When using the 2-part system, the system name of the currently selected system is displayed as

$1 (system 1) and $2 (system 2). This is not displayed when using a 1-part system. (Only L system)

(Note 2) When using the 2-part system, the details displayed in the list of machining program numbers can be switched with the parameters.

#1050 MemPrg Details

0, 2, 4, 6 The numbers of the machining programs registered in the memory common for the systems are listed.

1, 3, 5, 7 The numbers of the machining programs registered in the memory for the selected system are listed.

2. Monitor 2.4 PROGRAM SEARCH

I-49

2.4.1 Memory Search Any work program is called from the machining programs registered in memory before work. Set the program number to be called, the sequence number, and block number. Set the tape search setting

area to 0. The initial state when power is turned ON is memory search.

Press the

INPUT key.

O ( 1234) N ( 20) - ( ) COL. ( ) TAPE(0)

SEARCH EXECUTION

O ( 1234) N ( 20) - ( ) COL. ( ) TAPE(0)

[PROGURAM SEARCH] MONITOR 4. 1/4 O1234 N 20-0 O 0 N 0-0 [PROGRAM FILE] 100 200 300 400 1234 [COLLATION BLOCK] O N - SEARCH COMPLETE O( ) N( )-( ) COL. ( ) TAPE(0)

1) A search is started. 2) When the specified program

number, sequence number, and block number are found, SEARCH COMPLETE message is displayed.

The found numbers are displayed in O and N. Data in the found block is displayed in the work program display area.

Set the program number to be called. Set the sequence number and block number as required. (Example) To call O1234 N20 block, O ( 1 2 3 4 ) N ( 2 0 ) - ( ) COL. ( ) TAPE (0)

(Note 1) If one of the following operations is executed in the EDIT screen after memory search, the system

enters a status in which nothing is being searched. Operation is disabled at this time. In this case, execute the search again.

Deleting the program being searched. Deleting the sequence number for which the search was being executed. Deleting the block corresponding to the block number for which the search was being executed. (Note 2) One block which the control unit executes in one automatic start cycle can be searched in this

case. The block with ; (EOB) or sequence number only is not regarded as a one cycle execution block. Axis movement command or control command such as M, S, or T is contained in it.

2. Monitor 2.4 PROGRAM SEARCH

I-50

(Note 3) When using the 2-part system, the method for calling the program No., sequence No. and block No. for automatic operation can be switched with the parameters.

#1050 MemPrg

#1285 ext21/bit1 Details

0, 2, 4, 6 - Selected system: The machining program registered in the memory common for the systems is called with the designated program No., sequence No. and block No.

System that is not selected: The called machining program is held. 1, 3, 5, 7 OFF Selected system: The machining program registered in the memory for the

selected system is called with the designated program No., sequence No. and block No.

System that is not selected: The called machining program is held. ON Selected system: The machining program registered in the memory for the

selected system is called with the designated program No., sequence No. and block No.

System that is not selected: The machining program registered in the memory for each system is called with the designated program No.

(Note 4) When using the 2-part system and the same number batch search for all system programs is

valid, the presence of machining programs for each system is searched for in the memory in the following manner.

Presence of program System 1 System 2

Operation

Yes Yes Memory search is carried out simultaneously for the System 1 and System 2 machining programs.

Yes No Memory search is carried out for the System 1 machining program, and then an error (E14) occurs.

No Yes Memory search is carried out for the System 2 machining program, and then an error (E14) occurs.

No No An error (E14) occurs.

2. Monitor 2.4 PROGRAM SEARCH

I-51

2.4.2 Tape Search If processing is desired to be executed from a halfway position on paper tape when running the machining

program using paper tape, the tape can be searched for the sequence number and other information. Before using the tape reader, match tape reader setting and control unit input/output parameter setting. Set

the input/output basic parameters and input/output device parameters on the DATA IN/OUT screen. Mount the paper tape on the tape reader. Then, select tape operation mode and execute the following

search: (1) Set the target program number in O ( ). Set the target sequence number in N ( ). Set the target block

number in - ( ). Set "1" in TAPE ( ). (2) Press the

INPUT key.

(Example)

O ( 1 0 ) N ( 1 ) - ( ) COL. ( ) TAPE( 1 )

O ( 10) N ( 1) - ( ) COL. ( ) TAPE( 1)

SEARCH EXECUTION

O ( 10) N ( 1) - ( ) COL. ( ) TAPE( 1)

[PROGURAM SEARCH] MONITOR 4. 1/4 O 10 N 1-0 O 0 N 0-0 [PROGRAM FILE] 100 200 300 400 1234 [COLLATION BLOCK] O N - SEARCH COMPLETE O( ) N( )-( ) COL. ( ) TAPE(1)

1) A search is started. The paper tape reader operates and paper tape is run.

2) During search, the machining program data being read is displayed at the top of the setting area. Message SEARCH EXECUTION is displayed during this period.

3) When the specified program is found, the search completion message is displayed.

The target numbers are displayed at O and N, located at the top of the screen. The data of the target block is displayed in the machining program's display area.

Press the

INPUT key.

(Note 1) If the tape contains a $ mark during tape operation, a program error (P32) will occur at the $ mark.

2. Monitor 2.4 PROGRAM SEARCH

I-52

(Supplements) (1) Search starts in the position set in the tape reader. (In the label skip status, control jumps to the first

EOB.) (2) After the search is completed, the searched block is read and the tape reader stops. (3) If the NC is reset during search, the search stops. If the NC is reset after search is completed, the

unsearched status returns. (4) If the specified block has not been found after the data to the EOR is read, the following message is

displayed: "E03 NB NOT FOUND" If control parameter "% RWD (SEARCH)" is OFF, the tape will stop at the EOR of the program end.

If the parameter is ON, the tape will be rewound to the EOR of the program head and will stop there. (Note) Even if control parameter "% RWD (SEARCH)" is ON, the tape will not be rewound if I/O

DEVICE PARAM "REWIND CODE" has not been set correctly. The rewind code depends on the I/O device used. Refer to the I/O device manual for rewind

code details. (Example) When the tape was searched for N1 from a halfway position, the tape end was reached before N1 was found. (When "% RWD (SEARCH)" is ON)

% ; N1G ; N2 ; N3 ; %

Position after rewind Search start position

Tape rewind

By pressing the

INPUT key after rewind, the tape is searched for N1.

Error "E03 NB NOT FOUND"

(5) If the target program number is not specified, the tape will be searched for only N and B. This does

not relate to the program numbers in the tape. (6) If the

INPUT key is pressed after normal tape search is completed and other information including another NB is set, search will be executed. If a block stop status is entered after search is completed and the automatic running status is entered by pressing the automatic start button once, tape search will not be executed.

(7) After tape search is completed, "1" is retained in the setting field of TAPE ( ). Thus, the value does not need to be set for each tape search. Only when memory search is desired to be executed, set "0" in the setting field of TAPE ( ).

(8) The "LSK" display is cleared when the first EOB is read. It is displayed at reset or EOR read time.

2. Monitor 2.4 PROGRAM SEARCH

I-53

2.4.3 Compare Stop

The single block stop state can be applied at a random block without turning the "SINGLE BLOCK" switch ON. By using compare stop, the shape machined up to the designated block can be easily compared and machining can be resumed. (1) Setting compare stop

O ( 1234) N ( 20) - ( 3 ) COL. ( 1) TAPE( )

Designate the program No., sequence No. and program No., and set 1 in COL. ( ). (Example) To compare stop at 01234N20-3

O ( 1 2 3 4 ) N ( 2 0 ) - ( 3 ) COL. ( 1 ) TAPE ( )

Press the

INPUT key.

The program No. ("MDI" for MDI), sequence No., block No., and the message "COLL. EXEC" will appear at [COLLATION BLOCK]. The setting areas will change to blanks.

To execute compare stop with an MDI program, set 0 (zero) for the program No.

O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) COL. ( ) TAPE ( )

[COLLATION BLOCK] COLL. EXEC

O 1234 N 20 - 3

Press the "CYCLE START" switch.

O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) COL. ( ) TAPE ( )

[COLLATION BLOCK]

O N -

1) Operation will start. 2) When the designated block is

reached, the signal block stop state will be applied after executing that block.

3) When the single block stop mode is established by compare stop, the program number, sequence number and block number appearing in [COLLATE BLOCK] as well as the "COLL. EXEC" message are cleared.

2. Monitor 2.4 PROGRAM SEARCH

I-54

(2) Canceling compare stop

Press the

INPUT key.

The program number, sequence number and block number settings as well as the "COLL. EXEC" message are cleared.

Set 0 in COL. ( ). O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) COL. ( 0 ) TAPE ( )

O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) COL. ( 0) TAPE ( )

[COLLATION BLOCK] COLL. EXEC

O 1234 N 20 - 3

O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) COL. ( 0) TAPE ( )

[COLLATION BLOCK]

O N -

(3) Precautions

1) When there are several identical sequence numbers and block numbers in a program, compare stop results after the first corresponding block in the sequence of execution has been executed.

2) The compare stop setting is canceled in the following cases. When compare stop has been performed When "0" has been set in the "COL. ( )" on the SEARCH screen When the reset mode has been established 3) If only the program number is set, compare stop will take place at the head of the program only

when there is a program number at the first line. 4) When the program and sequence numbers have been set and the block number has not been set,

the block number is considered to be "0". 5) Compare stop cannot be performed for blocks being executed or blocks already read into the

preread buffer. (Compare stop can be set.) 6) Compare stop cannot be canceled if the block in which compare stop is set is being executed or

has already been read into the preread buffer. (Cancellation of compare stop can be set.) 7) Even if a block not included in the execution program is assigned, no check is conducted to verify

whether it exists in the program. 8) Compare stop is not performed in the tapping mode. 9) Compare stop is possible in a subprogram, but is not possible in a machine maker macro program. 10) If compare stop is set for a fixed cycle block, compare stop will be executed after the positioning

block is completed. 11) Compare stop is possible while the program display is locked (compare stop in an address 9000

program). 12) If compare stop is set for M98 program call, compare stop will be executed at the M98 block. 13) When using the 2-part system, the methods for searching the compare stop block can be switched

with the parameters. #1050 MemPrg Details

0, 2, 4, 6 The compare stop block in the machining program registered in the memory common for the systems is searched with the designated program No., sequence No. and block No.

1, 3, 5, 7 The compare stop block in the machining program registered in the memory for the selected system is searched with the designated program No., sequence No. and block No.

2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program

I-55

2.5 Resuming the Program

The PROGRAM RESTART screen will open when the menu key

RESEARCH is pressed.

RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU

[PROGRAM RESTART] MONITOR 5 .1/ 2 O 31000 N 1- 2

O N - [RESTART- (G54)] [RESTART-R] X -130.000 X -130.000 Y -10.000 Y -10.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000

N6 Y-70.; N7 X-20.; M: MODE <0>MEMORY <1>TAPE T: TYPE <0>UNMODLE <1>TYPE 1 <2>TYPE 2

<3>T-TYP

O( ) N( )-( )P( ) T( ) M( )

$1

[PROGRAM RESTART] MONITOR 5 .1/ 2 O 31000 N 1- 2

O N - T-SELECT T 10

S-SPEED S1 3000 2500 2000 S-SPEED S2 2000 3000 3500 2nd AUX B AUX M 6 3 8

9 6

RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU The program restart function is used to resume machining after the machining program has been stopped midway. The program and block to be restarted are searched for, and machining is resumed from that block.

The restart types include type 1, type 2 and type 3 (T command restart).

Restart method Details Restart type 1 After machining is reset due to a tool breakage, etc., machining is restarted

from the designated sequence number and block number. Restart type 2 After machining program is stopped due to a halt and the power is turned

OFF and ON, machining is restarted from the designated sequence number and block number.

Restart type 3 (T command restart)

After the machining program is stopped due to tool breakage, etc., the T command block executed last in the halted program is searched for and machining is restarted from the next block.

(Note) Restart type 3 is valid only with the lathe system.

Restart type 1 and restart type 2 include types A and B.

Restart method Type Details Type A The search is executed only in the machining program number

having the designated sequence number and block number. The machining program number cannot be omitted.

Restart type 1/2

Type B The restart search is executed for the currently searched machining program, so the machining program to be restart searched cannot be input. The designated sequence number and block number are searched from all programs within the currently searched program number. (Sequence number and block number in the subprogram are searched when there are subprograms.)

2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program

I-56

Display item Details

O 31000 N 1- 2 O N -

This displays the restart searched position (program No., sequence No., block No.). If a subprogram is searched, those numbers also display.

[RESTART- (G54)] X -130.000 Y -10.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000

This displays the remaining distance when the restart search is completed.

[RESTART-R] X -130.000 Y -10.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000

This displays the position on the local coordinate system when the restart search is completed.

N6 Y-70.; N7 X-20.;

This displays two blocks of the restart searched program.

O( ) N( ) -( )

1 to 99999999 0 to 99999 0 to 99

These set the program number, sequence number and block number to be searched. For type A, the program No. cannot be omitted. For type B, the program No. cannot be input.

P( )

0 to 9999 This sets the number of times the search block appears. When, for instance, a block in the subprogram is to be searched, the search block will be executed a multiple number of times when that subprogram is called for a similar number of times, and so the number of times the block is to be executed is set here. There is no need to set this when a one-time execution is to be searched or when the search block is to be executed only once. If 0 is set, a one-time execution is searched.

0 This designates an unmodal search. 1 This designates a type 1 restart search. 2 This designates a type 2 restart search.

T( )

3 This designates a type 3 restart search. (This designates T command restart.)

0 This designates memory search. M( ) 1 This designates tape search.

T-SELECT T S-SPEED S1 S-SPEED S2 2nd AUX B AUX M

This displays the tool command value. This displays the 1st spindle rotation speed command value. This displays the 2nd spindle rotation speed command value. This displays the last four digits of the 2nd miscellaneous function command value. This displays the last four digits of the miscellaneous function command.

2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program

I-57

(Note 1) Restart type 3 is valid only with the lathe system. (Note 2) When using the 2-part system, the system name of the currently selected system is displayed as

$1 (system 1) and $2 (system 2). This is not displayed when using a 1-part system. (Only L system)

(Note 3) When using the 2-part system, the methods for searching for the program and block to be restarted can be switched with the parameters.

#1050 MemPrg

#1285 ext21/bit0 Details

0, 2, 4, 6 - The machining program block registered in the memory common for systems is searched.

1, 3, 5, 7 OFF The machining program block registered in the memory for the selected system is searched.

ON The machining program block registered in the memory for the selected system is searched. If the subprogram for the selected system is empty, the corresponding block is searched from the program with the same number saved in the $1 memory. (Only type B)

2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program

I-58

2.5.1 Operation Sequences for Program Restart

There are two restart methods, type 1 and type 2. (1) Restart type 1

When feed hold and resetting due to a broken tool, etc.

Start

Press the feed hold button and retreat to the tool change position by manual means of MDI. Press the reset key and suspend the present processing.

Replace with a new tool.

With tape operation, f ind the start of the tape.

Search the block from which machining is to restart using the type 1 method. (Refer to 2.5.2 Restart Search Operations)

Set the program restart switch (PLC signal) to ON.

Move the axes to the restart return positions. (Refer to 2.5.3 Restart Position Return System) Issue the M, S, T or B manual numerical command. (Refer to 2.5.4 Manual Numerical Commands with Program Restart)

Set the program restart switch to OFF.

Return to the automatic mode.

Press the automatic start button (cycle start button).

End

Machining program Feed hold, resetting

Operation and machining restart on PROGRAM RESTART screen

When the tool offset amount (tool length, cutter) differs, change it on the tool offset screen.

O p e r a t i o n s o n P R O G R A M R E S T A R T s c r e e n

Upon completion of the restart search, the M, S, T or B function, restart distance to go and restart position are displayed.

"RP" is displayed when the axes have finished moving to the restart position and the subsequent axes do not move in either the "+" or "-" direction.

An operation error results even if there is one axis which is not at the restart position for automatic start (cycle start). Note that if program restart automatic return (#1302 AutoRp) is turned ON, the restart position will be returned to in the order designated in the restart position return order (#2082 a_rstax) when the cycle is started. Machining will restart after the axes have returned.

For type A, the program No. cannot be omitted. For type B, the program No. cannot be input.

2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program

I-59

(2) Restart type 2 When a machining program, which differs from the machining program to be restarted, has been operated in the memory or tape mode prior to the restart search of the machining program to be restarted, and when the coordinate systems applying during the previous automatic operation and the systems applying during machining restart are to be changed. The operating sequence for type 2 is the same as that for type 1 although before the restart search all the settings of the coordinate systems must be made before the machining program is operated. The main program to be restarted must be searched for just before executing restart start.

Start

Set by MDI the coordinate systems applying when the restart program is to start.

Move the axes to their program restart posit ions.

With tape operation, find the start of the tape.

Search the block from which machining is to restart using the type 2 method. (Refer to 2.5.2 Restart Search Operations)

Set the program restart switch (PLC signal) ON.

Move the axes to the restart return positions. (Refer to 2.5.3 Restart Position Return System) Issue the M, S, T or B manual numerical command. (Refer to 2.5.4 Manual Numerical Commands with Program Restart)

Set the program restart switch to OFF.

Return to the automatic mode.

Press the cycle start button.

End

Ma c h in i ng program

Machining suspended

Machining restart

It will not be possible to restart machining properly when the axxes are not located at the positions applying to program start in cases where the program head command is an incremental command or a G92 command.

Operations on PROGRAM RESTART screen

Upon completion of the restart search, the M, S, T and B functions, the restart distance to go and the restart positions will be displayed. "RP" is displayed when the axes have finished moving to the restart position and the subsequent axes, do not move in either the "+" or "-" direction.

Operation of dif ferent program

Turn ON the power and return all the axes to their reference points.

Search the head of the program.

For type A, the program No. cannot be omitted. For type B, the program No. cannot be input.

2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program

I-60

(3) Restart type 3 (T command restart) To restart machining after stopping the machining program due to a tool breakage, etc., search for the T command block executed last in the stopped program.

Start

Press the feed hold button and retreat to the tool change position by manual means of MDI. Press the reset key and suspend the present processing.

Replace with a new tool.

With tape operation, f ind the start of the tape.

Search the block from which machining is to restart using the type 3 method. (Refer to 2.5.2 Restart Search Operations)

Set the program restart switch (PLC signal) to ON.

Move the axes to the restart return positions. (Refer to 2.5.3 Restart Position Return System) Issue the M, S, T or B manual numerical command. (Refer to 2.5.4 Manual Numerical Commands with Program Restart)

Set the program restart switch to OFF.

Return to the automatic mode.

Press the automatic start button (cycle start button).

End

Machining program Feed hold, resetting

Operation and machining restart on PROGRAM RESTART screen

When the tool offset amount (tool length, cutter) differs, change it on the tool offset screen.

O p e r a t i o n s o n P R O G R A M R E S T A R T s c r e e n

Upon completion of the restart search, the M, S, T or B function, restart distance to go and restart position are displayed.

"RP" is displayed when the axes have finished moving to the restart position and the subsequent axes do not move in either the "+" or "-" direction.

An operation error results even if there is one axis which is not at the restart position for automatic start (cycle start). Note that if program restart automatic return (#1302 AutoRp) is turned ON, all axes will simultaneously return to the restart position when the cycle is started. Machining will restart after all axes have returned.

(Note) Restart type 3 is valid only with the lathe system.

2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program

I-61

2.5.2 Restart Search Operations

(1) Type 1 restart search

a) Type A (Standard specifications)

Press the

INPUT key.

M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2

<3>T-TYP

O ( 1000) N ( 6) - ( 0) P ( 1) T(1) M(0)

M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2

<3>T-TYP RESEARCH EXECUTION

O ( 1000) N ( 6) - ( 0) P ( 1) T(1) M(0)

[PROGRAM RESTART] MONITOR 5 .1/ 2 O 1000 N 5- 0

O N - [RESTART- (G54)] [RESTART-R] X -130.000 X -150.000 Y -10.000 Y -150.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000

N6 Y-70.; N7 X-20.; M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2

<3>T-TYP RESEARCH COMPLETE

O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) P ( 1) T( ) M( )

The "RESEARCH EXECUTION" message appears during the search and upon its completion the "RESEARCH COMPLETE" message is displayed.

Assign the block at which machining is to restart and proceed with the type 1 search. (Example) To restart from the 01000 N6 block

O ( 1 0 0 0 ) N ( 6 ) - ( 0) P ( 1 ) T ( 1 ) M ( 0 )

2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program

I-62

b) Type B

Press the

INPUT key.

M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2

<3>T-TYP

O ( ) N ( 6) - ( 0) P ( 1) T(1) M(0)

M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2

<3>T-TYP RESEARCH EXECUTION

O ( ) N ( 6) - ( 0) P ( 1) T(1) M(0)

[PROGRAM RESTART] MONITOR 5 .1/ 2 O 1000 N 5- 0

O N - [RESTART- (G54)] [RESTART-R] X -130.000 X -150.000 Y -10.000 Y -150.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000

N6 Y-70.; N7 X-20.; M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2

<3>T-TYP RESEARCH COMPLETE

O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) P ( ) T( ) M( )

The "RESEARCH EXECUTION" message appears during the search and upon its completion the "RESEARCH COMPLETE" message is displayed.

Assign the block at which machining is to restart and proceed with the type 1 search. (Example) To restart from the 01000 N6 block

O ( ) N ( 6 ) - ( 0) P ( 1 ) T ( 1 ) M ( 0 )

2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program

I-63

(2) Type 2 restart search The program and block to be restarted are searched for with type 2.

(Example) To restart from block (a) in the following program.

(Program example) O2000; ........................................................................................ Main program N1 G91 G28 X0 Y0; N2 G90 G54 G00 X0 Y0 M98 P3000; N3 G55 G00 X0 Y0 M98 P3000; ............................................... (a) N4 M02; % O3000; ........................................................................................ Subprogram N1 G42 G01 X-10. Y-10. D05 F1000; N2 X-40.; N3 Y-40.; N4 X-10.; N5 Y-10.; N6 G40 X0 Y0; N7 M99; %

a) Type A (Standard specifications)

Press the

INPUT key.

M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2

<3>T-TYP

O ( 2000) N ( ) - ( ) P ( ) T(0) M(0)

M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2

<3>T-TYP SEARCH EXECUTION

O ( 2000) N ( ) - ( ) P ( ) T(0) M(0)

[PROGRAM RESTART] MONITOR 5 .1/ 2 O 2000 N 0 - 0

O N - [RESTART- (G54)] [RESTART-R] X X Y Y Z Z C C

O2000; N1 G91 G28X0 Y0; M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2

<3>T-TYP SEARCH COMPLETE

O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) P ( ) T( ) M( )

The "SEARCH EXECUTION" message appears during the search and upon its completion the "SEARCH COMPLETE" message is displayed.

Conduct a unmodal search to locate the head of the machining porgram.

O ( 2 0 0 0 ) N ( ) - ( ) P ( ) T ( 0 ) M ( 0 )

2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program

I-64

Press the

INPUT key.

M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2

<3>T-TYP

O ( 3000) N ( 0) - ( 0) P ( 2) T(2) M(0)

M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2

<3>T-TYP RESEARCH EXECUTION

O ( 3000) N ( 0) - ( 0) P ( 2) T(2) M(0)

[PROGRAM RESTART] MONITOR 5 .1/ 2 O 2000 N 0 - 0

O 3000 N 0 - 0 [RESTART- (G54)] [RESTART-R] X -80.000 X -80.000 Y -40.000 Y -40.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000

O3000; N1 G42 G01 X-10. Y-10. D05 F100; M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2

<3>T-TYP RESEARCH COMPLETE

O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) P ( ) T( ) M( )

The "RESEARCH EXECUTION" message appears during the search and upon its completion the "RESEARCH COMPLETE" message is displayed.

Assign the block at which machining is to restart and proceed with the type 2 search.

O ( 3 0 0 0 ) N ( 0 ) - ( 0 ) P ( 2 ) T ( 2 ) M ( 0 )

2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program

I-65

b) Type B The main program to be restarted is searched for.

Press the

INPUT key.

M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2

<3>T-TYP

O ( ) N ( 0) - ( 0) P ( 3) T(2) M(0)

M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2

<3>T-TYP RESEARCH EXECUTION

O ( ) N ( 0) - ( 0) P ( ) T(2) M(0)

[PROGRAM RESTART] MONITOR 5 .1/ 2 O 2000 N 0 - 0

O 3000 N 0 - 0 [RESTART- (G54)] [RESTART-R] X -80.000 X -80.000 Y -40.000 Y -40.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000

O3000; N1 G42 G01 X-10. Y-10. D05 F100; M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2

<3>T-TYP RESEARCH COMPLETE

O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) P ( ) T( ) M( )

The "RESEARCH EXECUTION" message appears during the search and upon its completion the "RESEARCH COMPLETE" message is displayed.

Assign the block at which machining is to restart and proceed with the type 2 search.

O ( ) N ( 0 ) - ( 0 ) P ( 3 ) T ( 2 ) M ( 0 )

2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program

I-66

(3) Type 3 (T command restart) restart search

Press the

INPUT key.

1) The block containing the T command executed last will be searched for.

2) The "RESEARCH EXECUTION" message appears during the search and upon its completion the "RESEARCH COMPLETE" message is displayed.

3) If each axis is at a () position from the value set in the restart limit (#2072 rslimt), the error "E98 CAN'T RESEARCH" will occur. Manually return the axis to a position where the error will not occur, and then search.

Set "3" in TYPE T ( ) in the setting area.

O ( ) N ( ) - ( )

P ( ) T ( 3 ) M ( )

1) The data set in the setting areas other than T ( ) and M ( ) will be ignored.

2) Designate "1" in M ( ) when using the tape mode.

M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2

<3>T-TYP

O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) P ( ) T(3) M(0)

M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2

<3>T-TYP RESEARCH EXECUTION

O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) P ( ) T(3) M(0)

[PROGRAM RESTART] MONITOR 5 .1/ 2 O 1000 N 5 - 0

O N - [RESTART- (G54)] [RESTART-R] X -130.000 X -150.000 Y -10.000 Y -150.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000

N51 Y-70.; N52 X-20.; M: MODE <0> MEMORY <1> TAPE T: TYPE <0> UNMODLE <1> TYPE 1 <2> TYPE 2

<3>T-TYP RESEARCH COMPLETE

O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) P ( ) T( ) M( )

(Note) Restart type 3 is valid only with the lathe system.

2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program

I-67

2.5.3 Restart Position Return System

Selection can be made by parameter setting as to whether the restart position return after the restart search is to be performed either manually or automatically.

(1) Manual restart position return Set the program restart switch to ON and mode the axes manually to the restart position.

[RESTART- (G54)] [RESTART-R] X -130.000 RP X 0.000 Y -10.000 RP Y 0.000 Z 0.000 RP Z 0.000 C 0.000 RP C 0.000

Set the restart switch to ON. Set operation to the manual

(JOG/rapid traverse) mode. Move the axes in the restart return

direction.

Set the restart switch to OFF.

After the axes have finished returning to the restart position, the [RESTART-R] values on the program restart screen are set to zero and "RP" appears by the side of the [RESTART-P] values.

(Note 1) When the restart switch is ON, the axes cannot be moved in the reverse direction to the

restart direction. An operation error (0003) will occur if the axis is moved in the opposite direction. When a tool bumps into the workpiece and must be retracted, set the restart switch to OFF and retract the tool manually.

(Note 2) After returning to the restart position, the axes cannot be moved with the restart switch ON. An operation error (0111) will occur if the axis is moved.

(Note 3) If, during cycle start, there is even one axis which has not returned to the restart position, an operation error (0112) (there is an axis which has not returned to the restart position) will result. However, and operation error will not result with an axis which has been returned to the restart position but which is no longer at that position.

(Note 4) If the restart position return axis is a machine lock axis, an operation error (0126) will occur. Release the machine lock before starting the return to the restart position.

(2) Automatic restart position return

If the program restart automatic return (#1302 AutoRP) is set to 1 and the cycle is started, the axes will return to the restart position with dry run in the order designated with the restart position return order (#2082 a_rstax). Machining will restart after the axes have returned. (Note 1) Proceed with cycle start after the axes have been moved by manual means to positions

where the tools do not make contact with the workpieces. If the axis has been moved with MDI, restart search will be invalidated. (Note 2) Even if the "#1302 AutoRP" is set to 1, the axes can be returned manually to the restart

position by turning the restart switch ON. In this case, move the axes in the order of manual restart position return automatic restart

position return. The restart operation is completed when the automatic restart position return is completed.

Thus, after completing automatic restart position return, if the operation is stopped temporarily and the restart switch is turned ON, an operation error will occur.

(Note 3) When any axis, which has already been returned manually to the restart position, is subsequently moved from the restart position, it will not return to that position even with the automatic restart position return.

(Note 4) The axis for which "#2082 a_rstax" is set to 0 will not return to the restart position. Note that if "#2082 a_rstax" is set to 0 for all axes, all axes will simultaneously return to the restart position. If the axis for which "#2082 a_rstax" is set to 0 has not completed manual restart position return when automatic restart position return is started, the error "T01 CAN'T CYCLE ST 112" (restart position return incomplete) will occur.

2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program

I-68

2.5.4 Manual Numeric Commands with Program Restart

If restart search is completed, the M, S, T and B codes used for machining will appear on the second page of the PROGRAM RESTART screen. The M, S, T and B functions can be set in the time between the completion of the restart search and the resetting or start. The maximum numbers of the codes that can be displayed are 35 for the M functions, 3 for the S functions, 3 for the T functions and 3 for the B functions. If these numbers of codes used for the machining are exceeded, the codes used first are not displayed. The codes that are not displayed cannot be commanded on this screen, and so manual numeric commands are executed on the POSITION screen. The 2nd miscellaneous function code can be changed by setting the parameters. Even if the miscellaneous function M is designated in the same block, these will appear in the commanded order.

Press the

INPUT key.

T-SELECT T 10

S-SPEED S1 3000 S-SPEED S2 2nd AUX B AUX M 6 3 8

9 6

T-SELECT T 10 S-SPEED S1 3000 S-SPEED S2 2nd AUX B AUX M 6 3 8

9 6

1) The command value with the cursor and the command name display now change to a highlighted display.

2) The highlighting remains and the cursor does not appear during the time until the command has been executed.

3) Upon completion of the command execution, the normal display is resumed and the cursor appears at the next command value position.

4) The assigned codes are displayed on the POSITION screen.

Select page 2 of the PROGRAM RESTART screen.

1) The M, S, T and B commands used for machining appear.

2) The cursor blinks at the right end of the data at the top left of the screen.

Using the

keys, move the cursor to the position of the data to be set.

T-SELECT T 10 S-SPEED S1 3000 S-SPEED S2 2nd AUX B AUX M 6 3 8

9 6

2. Monitor 2.5 Resuming the Program

I-69

2.5.5 Checkpoints for Program Restart (1) Set the tool offset amounts and parameters before proceeding with the program restart search. If the

conditions for such are not set beforehand, it will not be possible for the axes to return to the proper machining start position.

(2) Do not conduct automatic operations during program restart. It will not be possible for the axes to return to the proper machining start position if either operation is conducted during program restart. ("During program restart" means the period from the program restart search to the start of the searched program.)

(3) It will not be possible for the axes to return to the proper machining start position if a program using user macro external signal input, machine coordinate readout or external mirror image commands is the object of the restart search.

(4) When an attempt is made to shift the coordinate systems by manual or MDI interrupt while the previous machining program is being executed, it will not be possible for the axes to return to the proper machining start position.

(5) If type 1 is used, there is no need to implement the unmodal search for the head of the program. The operation start block of the previously operated program is stored inside and the type 1 restart search commences the search (modal search) from the previous operation start block and it locates the designated block. Consequently, unmodal searches are invalid even if they are conducted.

(6) When type 2 is used with type A (standard specifications), the message "E80 TOP SEARCH ERR" will appear if an unmodal search is not executed and search is directly attempted with type 2. Conduct the unmodal search first.

(7) If either type 1 or type 2 is used, it is not possible to search blocks with macro statements during the restart search operation. (This will result in the "E13 NB NOT FOUND" error.)

To initiate a restart search for blocks with macro statements, first set the "#2 MACRO SINGLE" control parameter ON and then proceed. However, the tool path may change because of the relationship of the radius compensation, corner rounding/chamfering and geometric read ahead blocks.

(8) When conducting restart with a tape operation, it will not be possible to return to the proper machining start position if operation is started midway through the tape.

(9) WHILE/GOTO statements cannot be used during tape operations. This means that if such statements exist even when restart search is performed by tape, a program error (P29) results.

(10) The program number cannot be omitted when conducting a search with type 1 or 2 for type A (standard specification). If this number setting is omitted, the "E01 SETTING ERROR" message appears and restart search is not executed.

Reset the program number and proceed again with operation. (11) If a type 2 search is executed when using type B, the designated sequence No. and block No. will be

searched for in all programs within the designated program numbers. Note that if the same sequence No. is found in the main program and subprograms, the No. of appearances designation P will be the number of times for the entire program.

(12) Select type A and type B with the setup parameter "#1278 ext14/bit0". 0: Type A 1: Type B (13) When using multiple systems, carry out restart search for each system. (14) If the axis returning to the restart position is a linear type rotary axis, the axis will return to the workpiece

coordinate position. (15) When using type 3 (T command restart), the N number must be issued before the first T command

block in the program to be searched. (16) When using type 3 (T command restart), there must be one or more N number within 100 blocks of the

program. (17) When using type 3 (T command restart), the only T commands that can be searched are the main

program and the subprogram (nesting 1) called from the main program. (18) When using type 3 (T command restart), if the program is edited before restart search and the position

of the T command block executed last differs from the execution, the error "E98 CAN'T RESEARCH" will occur when the search is started.

2. Monitor 2.6 PLC SWITCH

I-70

2.6 PLC SWITCH When the menu key

PLC-SW is pressed, the PLC SWITCH screen is displayed. The control signals for operation are assigned by using user PLC. The PLC-SWITCH screen enables you to

set each control signal to ON or OFF. (A maximum of 32 signals)

This screen is created with the user PLCs, so each screen will differ. Refer to the instruction manual issued by the machine maker.

RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU

[PLC SWITCH] PARAM 6. 1/2 # 1 AUTO RESTART 9 2 BLOCK DELETE 10 AUTO POWER OFF 3 MANUAL ABS 11 4 OPTIONAL STOP 12 5 HANDLE IT 13 6 PROGRAM RESTART 14 7 15 8 16 #( )

2.6.1 PLC Switch ON and OFF Operation Set the number of the switch to be set to ON in # ( ) and press the

INPUT key. The mark of the switch is set to the up position.

In this state, the switch function becomes effective and is controlled.

To set OPTIONAL STOP to ON. Set 4 in # ( ). Press the

INPUT key.

RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU

[PLC SWITCH] PARAM 6. 1/2 # 1 AUTO RESTART 9 2 BLOCK DELETE 10 AUTO POWER OFF 3 MANUAL ABS 11 4 OPTIONAL STOP 12 5 HANDLE IT 13 6 PROGRAM RESTART 14 7 15 8 16 #( )

The switch mark of OPTIONAL STOP is set to the up position, indicating the switch ON state.

To set the up-position switch (ON state) to OFF (down-position switch), set the number of the ON-

state switch in # ( ) and press the

INPUT key. The PLC switch names (message display) and the function to reverse selected message display are

prepared by using user PLC. These vary depending on the machine maker.

2. Monitor 2.7 COMMON VARIABLE

I-71

2.7 COMMON VARIABLE When the menu key

COM-VAR is pressed, the COMMON VARIABLE screen is displayed. The common variable contents are displayed for the variable command in a machining program.

Common variable data can also be set or changed on the COMMON VARIABLE screen. The common variable configuration varies depending on the number of variables defined in the

specifications. For 100 variables, #100~#149 and #500~#549 are assigned (7-page configuration).

RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU

[COMMON VARIABLE] MONITOR 7.1/11 # 100 -123456.7890 110 101 12.3456 111 102 112 103 113 104 114 105 115 106 116 107 117 108 118 109 119 # ( ) DATA ( ) NAME ( )

Display item Explanation # 100 -123456.7890 101 12.3456 102

The variable numbers and contents are displayed. If variable data is "null" (Note), the data display field will be blank. If the number of columns of data is too large (the data contains more than six characters in the integer part or more than four characters in the fraction part), the exponent will be used for display. (Note) In terms of calculation, a "null" setting is handled in the

same manner as "0". However, it is not handled in the same manner as "0" when using the condition expressions EQ and NE.

"*" display: Indicates that this is a common variable common for all systems within a multiple system. (The number of common variables common for all systems is set in #1303 VlcomN and #1304 V0comN.)

" " display: Indicates that this is a common variable independent for the systems in a multiple system.

When there is only one system, " " will display regardless of the parameter (#1303, #1304) setting.

2. Monitor 2.7 COMMON VARIABLE

I-72

2.7.1 Common Variable Display (1) When a common variable command exists, if the block is executed, the execution result is displayed.

# 100 -123456.7890 101 0.0000 102

# 100 -123456.1234 101 12.3456 102

(Example) The following machining program is executed. #101=12.3456

(2) When a command to set variable names for common variables #500~#519 by user macro exists, if the block is executed, the setup variable name is displayed.

Variable name setting and reference commands require the user macro specifications and are limited to 20 common variables #500~#519. The variable name is a string of up to seven alphanumeric characters beginning with an alphabetic character. For common variables #500~#519, the variable numbers, data, and variable names are displayed as shown below:

# 500 -123456.7890 ABCDEFG 501 100.0000 502 999.9000

(Example) The following machining program is executed. SETVN 501 [POINTER, COUNTER];

RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU

[COMMON VARIABLE] MONITOR 7.6/11 # 500 -123456.7890 ABCDEFG 501 100.0000 POINTER 502 999.9000 COUNTER 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 # ( ) DATA ( ) NAME ( )

2. Monitor 2.7 COMMON VARIABLE

I-73

2.7.2 Common Variable Setting (1) Common variable data setting To set common variable data, set the variable number in # ( ) and common variable data in DATA ( ),

then press the

INPUT key. (2) Setting variable names of common variables #500~#519 To set a variable name, set the variable number in # ( ) and the variable name in NAME ( ), then

press the

INPUT key. Only 20 common variables #500~#519 allow variable name setting. The variable name is a string of up to seven alphanumeric characters beginning with an alphabetic character.

If both data and variable names are set for variable numbers (#500~#519), the data and variable name can be set at a time.

(3) If the

INPUT key is pressed after the variable number and data (or variable name) are set, the setup data (or variable name) is displayed at the variable number position. The variable number in the setting area # ( ) is automatically incremented (to the next number) and the contents of DATA ( ) and NAME ( ) disappear.

(4) If a variable number and data (or variable name) not listed on the selected page are set, when the

INPUT key is first pressed, the screen is changed to the page corresponding to the setup variable number. If again the

INPUT key is pressed, the data (or variable name) is set and displayed at the position of the corresponding variable number.

(5) Whenever the

or

key is pressed for the variable number displayed in # ( ), the variable number can be incremented or decremented by one.

2.7.3 Common Variable Data Deleting To delete all data being set as common variables, at a time, press the

SHIFT

C.B CAN keys, then press the

INPUT key. This deletes the data displayed one screen.

In this case, data on the other screens are not deleted. If all data on all screens are desired to be deleted, repeat the above operation for all screens.

When

SHIFT

C.B CAN keys are pressed, only the display is deleted. When the

INPUT key is then pressed, the variable data is deleted. This delete operation causes the common variable data to be "null".

(Note1) If parameter #1128 RstVC1 is ON, the common variable data will be cleared to "null" when the system is reset. If parameter #1129 PwrVC1 is ON, the common variable data will be cleared to "null" when the power is turned ON.

(Note2) If any other key has been pressed before the

INPUT key is pressed, the variable data will not be deleted.

2. Monitor 2.8 LOCAL VARIABLE

I-74

2.8 LOCAL VARIABLE When the menu key

LOC-VAR is pressed, the LOCAL VARIABLE screen is displayed. Local variables #1 to #33 are provided for each user macro subprogram call level. 33-local variable data is

displayed per page and five-page configuration of levels 0 to 4 is used.

RESERCH PLC-SW COM-VAR LOC-VAR MENU

[LOCAL VARIABLE] MONITOR 8. 1/ 5 DISP LV. (0) ACT. LV. (1) A 1 -12345.6789 F 9 Q 17 Y 25 B 2 12.345 10 R 18 Z 26 C 3 H 11 S 19 27 I 4 12 T 20 28 J 5 M 13 U 21 29 K 6 14 V 22 30 D 7 15 W 23 31 E 8 16 X 24 32 33 FEED-HOLD OVERRIDE EXACT SNGL-BLOCK MST-FIN

Display item Explanation A 1 -12345.6789 B 2 12.3450 C 3

The local variable numbers and contents are displayed. The alphabetic character preceding each local variable number is argument code. None of G, L, N, O, and P can be used as arguments and are displayed. 33 local variables (#1 to #33) exist for each user macro subprogram call level of depth. If variable data is "null" (Note), the data display field will be blank. If the number of columns of data is too large (the data contains more than six characters in the integer part or more than four characters in the fraction part), the exponent will be used for display. (Note) In terms of calculation, a "null" setting is handled in the

same manner as "0". However, it is not handled in the same manner as "0" when using the condition expressions EQ and NE.

ACT. LV. (1) This indicates the level of depth during user macro subprogram control execution. (0): User macro is not called. (1): User macro call level 1 (2): User macro call level 2 (3): User macro call level 3 (4): User macro call level 4

2. Monitor 2.8 LOCAL VARIABLE

I-75

Display item Explanation

FEED-HOLD OVERRIDE EXACT SNGL-BLOCK MST-FIN

This indicates the modal state of the operation control status by the #3003, #3004 command. FEED-HOLD : Is displayed when command is programmed with

#3004 bit 0 set to 1, indicating that feed hold is invalid.

OVERRIDE : Is displayed when command is programmed with #3004 bit 1 set to 1, indicating that cutting override is invalid.

EXACT : Is displayed when command is programmed with #3004 bit 2 set to 1, indicating that the G09 (block deceleration check) command is invalid.

SNGL-BLOCK: Is displayed when command is programmed with #3003 bit 0 set to 1, indicating that block stop is invalid.

MST-FIN : Is displayed when command is programmed with #3003 bit 1 set to 1, indicating the state of proceeding to the next block without waiting for the M, S, T command completion signal.

2.8.1 Local Variable Data Display (1) When local variable #1~#33 command exists in user macro or argument specification is made in user

macro subprogram call, if the block is executed, the execution result is displayed.

DISP LV. (1) ACT. LV. (0) A 1 0.0000 B 2 0.0000 C 3 0.0000 I 4

DISP LV. (1) ACT. LV. (1) A 1 1.0000 B 2 2.0000 C 3 3.0000 I 4

(Example) When the following machining program is executed and user macro subprogram is called, data as shown in the right is displayed on the page of local variable display level (1): G65 P1 A1. B2. C3. ;

2. Monitor 2.8 LOCAL VARIABLE

I-76

(2) The relationship between the user macro subprogram call execution and display levels is as shown below:

Display level (0) 1 0.1000 2 0.2000 3 0.3000 16

#1=0.1 #2=0.2 #3=0.3 G65 P1A1. B2. C3. ; M02;

G65P 10A10. B20. C30; M99;

M99;

G65 P1000A1000. B2000 ; M99;

G65 P100A100. B200. ; M99;

Display of level 0

Display of level 1

Display of level 2

Display of level 3

Display of level 4

Display level (0) 17 33

Display level (1) 17 33

Display level (2) 17 33

Display level (3) 17 33

Display level (4) 17 33

Display level (2) 1 10.0000 2 20.0000 3 30.0000 16

Display level (3) 1 100.0000 2 200.0000 3 16

Display level (4) 1 1000.0000 2 2000.0000 3 16

Main (Level 0) 01 (Macro Level 1) 010 (Macro Level 2) 0100 (Macro Level 3) 01000 (Macro Level 4)

Display level (1) 1 1.0000 2 2.0000 3 3.0000 16

(3) A local variable display page is selected by using the page keys

PREVIOUS PAGE ,

NEXT PAGE . Display can be

changed as desired independently of the executing level. (Note) The local variables are not cleared even when power is turned OFF. They are cleared when a

macro is called.

3. Tool Offset (L system)

I-77

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

3 (I). Tool Offset (L system) The following menu will appear when the function key

TOOL PARAM is pressed.

PARAM menu display (No.1 to 4) TOOL menu display (No.1 to 4) T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU

Menu selection keysPrevious page key Next page key

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

PREVIOUS PAGE

NEXT PAGE

TOOL menu (No.1 to 4)

PREVIOUS PAGE

NEXT PAGE

PARAM menu (No.1 to 4)

TOOL TIP

OFFSET #1 to #10

TOOL DATA

#1 to #10

NOSE-R

#1 to #10

TOOL LIFE DATA

#1~#10

: :

# to #

: :

# to #

: :

# to #

: :

# to #

WORK PROCESS I/O BASE PARAM

SETUP PARAMETER

CONTROL

AXIS

BARRIER PARAM

PARAM

PARAM

PARAM

Refer to PARAMETERS.

MENU

CAUTION

If a tool offset or workpiece coordinate system offset is changed during automatic operation (including during single block stop), the new offset is validated from the command of the next block or blocks onwards.

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.1 Wear Data

I-78

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

3.1 Wear Data

The TOOL TIP OFFSET screen will appear when the menu key

T-OFSET is pressed.

T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU

[TOOL TIP OFFSET] TOOL 1.1/4 [POSITION] X 0.000 #I :INC. #A :ABS. Z 0.000 # C 0.000 1 X 0.050 Z 0.020 C 0.100 2 X 0.100 Z 0.050 C 0.010 3 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 4 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 5 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 6 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 7 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 8 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 9 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 10 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 # ( ) X ( ) Z ( ) C ( )

Set the tool nose wear for each tool used. When the tool compensation No. is designated by the tool command (T command), compensation is carried out matching the tool length of the next screen.

X axis offset X axis tool length offset + X axis wear offset Z axis offset Z axis tool length offset + Z axis wear offset C axis offset (additional axis) C axis tool length offset + C axis wear offset Data Function X X axis tool nose wear

compensation Z Z axis tool nose wear

compensation

Tool nose

Z axis tool nose wear compensation amount

X axis tool nose wear compensation amount

Z

X

C Additional axis tool nose wear

compensation

(Note 1) Whether to apply the tool nose wear compensation of the additional axis on the 3rd axis or 4th axis can be selected with the parameter (#1520 Tchg34).

(Note 2) For multiple system Tool data can be provided for each system, or common tool data can be used for the systems. Select with parameter (#1501 MemTol). Parameter #1501 MemTol 0: Tool data for each system 1: Tool data common for all systems When common tool data is used for the systems, the tool data on the System 1 screen and

System 2 screen will have the same values.

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.1 Wear Data

I-79

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

3.1.1 Setting Tool Offset Data

(1) To set the tool offset data, set the offset memory No. in # ( ), and set the offset data in the setting areas corresponding to wear data, tool length data and tool nose data. Then press the

INPUT key. (2) If the

INPUT key is pressed after the offset memory No. and tool offset data are set, the tool offset data set in the corresponding offset memory No. position is displayed. The offset memory No. in # ( ) of the setting area is incremented by 1, and the contents in DATA ( ) disappear. The No. is not incremented when parameter #1124 ofsfix is 1.

(3) If tool offset data and offset memory Nos. other than those in the display are set, the screen changes to the screen corresponding to the set offset memory No. when the

INPUT key is first pressed. The offset memory is displayed when the

INPUT key is pressed again. (4) By pressing the

and

keys, the offset memory No. displayed in # ( ) can be continuously incremented or decremented by one.

(5) Tool offset data setting range

Screen Item Function #1003 iunit Setting range (unit)

B 9999.999 (mm) C 999.9999 (mm) TOOL TIP

OFFSET

X, Z, C Tool wear

D 99.99999 (mm) B 9999.999 (mm) C 999.9999 (mm) TOOL DATA

X, Z, C Tool length offset

D 99.99999 (mm) B 9999.999 (mm) C 999.9999 (mm)

R Tool radius (nose R)

D 99.99999 (mm) B 999.999 (mm) C 99.9999 (mm)

r Tool radius (nose R) wear

D 9.99999 (mm)

NOSE-R

P Tool nose point 0~8

(Note) When parameter #1019 dia (diameter command) is set to 0, set the radius. When it is set to 1, set the diameter.

3.1.2 Erasing the Tool Offset Data

(1) Erasing the display screen units Ten sets of tool offset data units are displayed on one screen. To set all the displayed offset data to 0, press the

SHIFT key, the

C.B CAN key, and finally the

INPUT key.

(Note) If any other key has been pressed before the

INPUT key is pressed, the offset data will not be erased.

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.1 Wear Data

I-80

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

3.1.3 Tool Wear and Tool Length Data Setting Mode (incremental/absolute)

There are two types of selection method in the absolute value setting or incremental value setting for the tool offset data: the mode selection method and the menu selection method. The required method is selected with the parameter #1136 optype.

Absolute setting

(Old) Incremental setting (New)

(Example) Incremental/absolute value setting

Setting Display Incremental value setting # (2) ( - 0.1) #2 X-100.100 Absolute value setting # (2) ( - 100.1) #2 X-100.100

Display #2 X -100.000

(1) Mode selection method (#1136=0) (a) Change over to the incremental value setting mode

Set I in # ( ), then press the

INPUT key. # ( I) X ( ) Z ( )

[TOOL DATA]

#I:INC. #A:ABS.

"#1: INC." is highlighted, and the mode becomes the incremental value setting mode.

(b) Change over to the absolute value setting mode

Set A in # ( ), then press the

INPUT key. # ( A) X ( ) Z ( )

[TOOL DATA]

#I:INC. #A:ABS.

"#A: ABS." is highlighted, and the mode becomes the absolute value setting mode.

(Note) The mode is held even if the screen is changed or the power is turned OFF.

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.1 Wear Data

I-81

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

(2) Menu selection method (#1136=1) (a) Change over to the incremental value setting mode

Set value in #( ), X( ) or Z( ), then press the + INPUT key.

[TOOL TIP OFFSET] TOOL 2.1/4 #I : INC. #A : ABS. #1 X 0.000 Z 0.000 2 X 0.000 Z 0.000 3 X 0.000 Z 19.700

: : : : : : T M # ( 4 ) X ( ) Z ( )

[POSITION] X 123.456 Z 345.678

+INPUT =INPUT RETURN

(b) Change over to the absolute value setting mode

Set value in #( ), X( ) or Z( ), then press the = INPUT key.

[TOOL TIP OFFSET] TOOL 2.1/4 #I : INC. #A : ABS. #1 X 0.000 Z 0.000 2 X 0.000 Z 0.000 3 X 0.000 Z 19.700

: : : : : : T M # ( 4 ) X ( ) Z ( )

[POSITION] X 123.456 Z 345.678

+INPUT =INPUT RETURN

* When the cursor is moved to X( ) or Z( ) then the data key is pressed, =INPUT,+INPUT menu will

appear automatically. (c) Supplement If INPUT key is pressed while = INPUT, + INPUT are displayed, the offset data can be set for mode

selection method. = INPUT, + INPUT are displayed until BACK menu key is pressed or other screens are selected. The screen selection menu is displayed when TOOL OFFSET screen is selected again after other

screens are selected once. Mark of the screen selection menu indicates that the operation menu exist on the screen being

displayed. The operation menu is invalid during the tool measurement with manual tool length measurement

function. The operation menu during the tool measurement operates as follows. 1) When the screen select menu is displayed + INPUT, = INPUT dont appear during the tool measurement. If = INPUT, + INPUT with mark

are pressed during the tool measurement, ERROR (E74) will occur. 2) When the operation menu is displayed If = INPUT, + INPUT are pressed during the tool measurement, ERROR (E74) will occur. = INPUT, + INPUT are invalid during the manual numerical command mode. If = INPUT, + INPUT are pressed during the manual numerical command mode, ERROR (E74) will

occur. If the screen selection menu displayed with mark is pressed during the manual numerical command mode, ERROR (E74) will occur.

When the offset memory No. not displayed on the screen is set in setting area # ( ), the screen corresponding to the offset memory No. set in will appear by pressing = INPUT,+ INPUT key of one time. The offset data will be set by pressing = INPUT, + INPUT key again.

When the tool nose point data is set on the NOSE-R screen, the absolute setting is selected whichever of = INPUT and + INPUT key is pressed.

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data

I-82

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

3.2 Tool Length Data

The TOOL DATA screen will appear when the menu key

T-DATA is pressed.

T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU

[TOOL DATA] TOOL 2.1/4 [MACHINE] X 123.456 #I :INC. #A :ABS Z 345.678 # C 0.000 1 X -12.345 Z 23.456 C 0.000 2 X -100.100 Z 10.123 C 0.000 3 X 55.123 Z 100.234 C 0.000 4 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 5 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 6 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 7 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 8 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 9 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 10 X 0.000 Z 0.000 C 0.000 T M ( ) X ( ) Z ( ) C ( )

Set the tool length in respect to the program basic position of each tool used. When the tool compensation No. is designated by the tool command (T command), compensation is carried out matching the wear data of the previous screen. Generally, the program basic point position is either the turret center position or the basic tool nose position. (1) Turret center position

Data Function X X axis tool length offset Z Z axis tool length offset C Additional axis tool length offset

MACHINE Same value as on the MONITOR screen.

Program basic position

Z axis tool length offset

X axis tool length offset

(2) Basic tool nose position

Z axis tool length offset

Tool used for work

Basic tool

X axis tool length offset

Basic position

(Note) Whether to apply the tool length offset of the additional axis on the 3rd axis or 4th axis can be

selected with the parameter (#1520 Tchg34).

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data

I-83

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

3.2.1 Manual Tool Length Measurement I

(1) Outline This function automatically calculates the amount of tool length offset, by moving the tool to the measurement point with the manual feed. There are two types of measurement methods in manual tool length measurement I: the basic point method and the measurement value input method. The required method is selected by setting parameter #1102 tlm. (a) Basic point method

Obtain the tool length with the tool nose placed on the measurement point.

Measurement point

Set the measurement point in parameter #2015 tlml beforehand.

(b) Measurement value input method Actually cut the workpiece. Measure its dimensions, and obtain the tool length from the measured values.

Workpiece

Measurement basic point

Measurement value

The measurement basic point is characteristic for each machine (the center of the chuck face, etc.).

(Note) The tool length from tool length measurement I is as follows, depending on the whether the 1st reference point coordinate values have been set.

If the 1st reference point coordinate values have been set:

X-axis tool length

Program basic position

Z-axis tool length

If the 1st reference point coordinate values have been set, the tool length is the distance from the tool's hypothetical nose to the tool basic position.

If the 1st reference point coordinate values have not been set:

Z-axis tool length

X-axis tool length

If the 1st reference point coordinate values are set to "0", the tool length is the distance from the tool's hypothetical tool nose to the machine basic position.

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data

I-84

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

(2) Basic point method Set the type selection to the basic point method. (Set #1102 tlm to 0). To carry out the basic point method, a point to place the tool nose on (measurement point) is required. Set the measurement point in parameter #2015 tlml beforehand.

Measurement point

Z-axis + tlml

(Note) Always set the measurement

point with the radius, regardless of the diameter/ radius command.

Set the measurement point in the machine coordinate system.

Tool length = Machine value - Measurement point (tlml)

The expression above is used for automatic calculation in the basic point method. When the tool nose is placed on the measuring point, the distance from the tool nose to the tool length basic point is calculated.

Z-axis tool length

X-axis tool length

Tool nose

Tool length basic point

< Measuring procedure for the basic point method >

(1) Select the TOOL DATA screen. (2) Set the tool No. to be measured in #

( ). (Select the tool before this step. It can be selected using a manual numerical command.)

(Example) Select tool length No. "1".

(3) Manually place the tool nose on the

measuring point.

[TOOL DATA] TOOL 2.1/4 [MACHINE] X 212.350 #I :INC. #A :ABS Y 210.100 #1 X 0.000 Z 0.000 2 X 0.000 Z 0.000 3 X 0.000 Z 0.000 : : : : : : T M # ( 1 ) X ( ) Z ( )

1

Measurement point

Manual operation

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data

I-85

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

(4) Select the axis to be measured.

X

Z Press the address key of each axis. The selection is canceled by pressing the same address key twice. Measure the X and Z axes.

X axis

Z axis

# ( 1 ) X ( ) Z ( )

X

Z

(Note 1) (Note 2)

Characters are reversed.

No data must be set.

(5) The data is automatically calculated and written. (The data is written for the axis shown in highlighted characters.)

INPUT Confirm that the data has been written to X and Z of tool No. "1". Repeat the above steps for each tool.

#1 X 12.350 Z 10.100 2 X 0.000 Z 0.000 3 X 0.000 Z 0.000 # ( 2 ) X ( ) Z ( )

(Note 3)

Incremented The reversed character returns to usual display.

(Note 1) If the screen is changed back to the TOOL DATA screen after axis selection (after the characters

are highlighted), the selection is invalidated (the characters are not highlighted). (Note 2) If an axis having an error (reference point return incomplete axis, etc.) is selected, the characters

will not be highlighted. An error message will appear. (Note 3) For a diameter command, the diameter value is written. For a radius command, the radius value is written.

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data

I-86

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

(3) Measurement value input method Set the type selection to the measurement value input method. (Set #1102 tlm to 1). To carry out the measurement value input method, a workpiece for measuring is required. To measure the workpiece, set the basic point in parameter #2015 tlml beforehand.

(Note) Always set the measurement basic point with the radius, regardless of the diameter/ radius command. Set the measurement basic point in the machine coordinate system.

Measurement basic point

X-axis measurement value

X-axis + tlml

Measurement basic point

Z-axis + tlml Z-axis measurement value

Tool length = Machine value - Measurement basic point (tlml) - Measurement value The expression above is used for automatic calculation in the measurement value input method.

Z-axis tool length

X-axis tool length

Tool nose

Tool length basic point

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data

I-87

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

< Measuring procedure for the measuring value input method >

(1) Select the TOOL DATA screen. (2) Set the tool No. to be measured in #

( ). (Select the tool before this step. It can be selected using a manual numerical command.)

(3) Cut the surface corresponding to the

axis to be measured. To measure the X axis, cut the workpiece

in the longitudinal direction.

(For the Z axis, execute face turning.) (4) Do not retract the tool at the finish point

of the cutting, but press address key of the axis to be measured.

[TOOL DATA] TOOL 2.1/4 [MACHINE] X 212.350 #I :INC. #A :ABS Y 210.100 #1 X 0.000 Z 0.000 2 X 0.000 Z 0.000 3 X 0.000 Z 0.000 : : T M # ( 1 ) X ( ) Z ( )

(Example) Select tool length No."1".

X-axis measurement

X

In this way the machine coordinate values of the measured axis are stored in the memory. They are canceled by pressing the same key twice. Also repeat steps (3) and (4) for

the Z axis

X axis measurement...

# ( 1 ) X ( ) Z ( )

(Note 1) (Note 2)

Character is reversed.

(5) Retract the tool, and stop the spindle. (6) Measure the workpiece, and set the measurement values in the setting areas of each axis. Set the

values for all axes shown in highlighted characters.

(Example)

# ( 1 ) X (10.0) Z (35. 0 ) (Note 3)

X-axis diameter command example Cutting surface

Measurement basic point

10.0

35.0

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data

I-88

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

(7) The data is automatically calculated and written. (The data is written for the axis shown in highlighted characters.)

INPUT # 1 X 12.350 Z 10.000 2 X 0.000 Z 0.000 3 X 0.000 Z 0.000 # ( 2 ) X ( ) Z ( )

(Note 4)

Incremented The reversed character returns to usual display.

Blanked

Repeat the above steps for each tool.

(Note 1) If the screen is changed back to the TOOL DATA screen after the characters are highlighted, the characters will return to the usual display. Retry processing, beginning with step (3) or (4).

(Note 2) If an axis having an error (reference point return incomplete axis, etc.) is selected, the characters will not be highlighted. An error message will appear.

(Note 3) For a diameter command, the diameter value is written. For a radius command, the radius value is written. (Note 4) An error occurs in the following cases: # ( 1) X ( ) Z ( 35.0) ... The X axis measurement value was not set.

# ( 1) X ( 10.0) Z ( 35.0) ... The character was not highlighted although the X axis measurement value was set.

In these cases the status is held, so reset correctly and then repress

INPUT key.

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data

I-89

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

3.2.2 Manual Numeric Command Operation on the TOOL DATA Screen (M, T)

When carrying out a manual numeric command of the TOOL OFFSET screen, the mode must first be changed from the normal data setting mode to the manual numeric command mode. M and T commands can be executed by screen operation in this mode.

(1) Changing from the normal data setting mode to the manual numerical command mode A cursor appears in the data setting area in the normal data setting mode, but a cursor does not appear in the manual numerical command mode. Confirm that the mode has changed over by checking this difference. The operation is as follows:

T M

#( )DATA ( )

Set

M (manual) in the first set of parentheses in the setting area.

T M

#( M )DATA ( )

1) This operation is the same for M or T

commands.

Press the

INPUT key. The mode changes to the manual numerical command mode.

T M

#( )DATA ( )

1) The data in the setting area is cleared, and

the cursor disappears from the screen. (2) Executing the manual numeric command ..... Carry out this step after (1) above. 1. Press the address key corresponding to the command. The display area of the corresponding

command value is highlighted, and a manual numeric command input status results. Execute tool function commands with

T , and miscellaneous function commands with

M . 2. Key-input the numerical value to be commanded. 3. Press the

INPUT key. The command is executed.

(Note) The manual numeric command operation is the same as the operation on the POSITION screen. Refer to the section on manual numeric commands for the MONITOR and POSITION screens for details.

(3) Operation for returning the mode from the manual numeric command mode to the normal data setting

mode

Press the

key. The normal data setting mode returns.

T20 M6

#( )DATA ( )

1) The cursor appears in the first set of

parentheses, and the normal setting mode is enabled.

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data

I-90

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

3.2.3 Manual Tool Length Measurement II

(1) Outline By using a device having a touch sensor, the tool compensation amount can be calculated just by contacting the tool nose against the touch sensor with manual feed. The calculated results are stored in the tool compensation amount memory. After setting the tool compensation amount for each tool, the Z axis external workpiece coordinate offset data can be set by cutting the edges of the workpiece with manual operation and inputting the workpiece measurement signal.

(2) Detailed explanation

(a) Tool compensation amount measurement

X axis tool compensation amount

Z axis tool compensation amount

X axis contact surface

X axis + contact surface

Z axis + contact surface

Z axis contact surface

Z axis

X axis

Program basic position

1) Measurement method 1. Set the machine coordinate values of the touch sensor's contact surface in the parameters

beforehand as the measurement basic value. 2. Select the tool for which the tool compensation amount is to be measured. 3. Using manual feed, contact the nose of the tool against the touch sensor. The tool compensation amount will be calculated from the machine coordinate value when the

touch sensor is contacted and the measurement basic value, and will be saved in the memory as the tool compensation amount.

Tool compensation amount = Machine coordinate value measurement basic value (sensor position)

After measuring, the tool wear amounts for the individually designated tool numbers are

cleared.

2) Number of set systems and axes The system 1 X (1st axis), Z (2nd axis), additional axis, and system 2 X (1st axis), Z (2nd axis), additional axis can be set. The additional axis is determined with the #1520 Tchg34 additional axis tool compensation operation selection parameter.

#1520 Tchg34 Additional axis 0 3rd axis selection 1 4th axis selection

Note that the tools in the two systems cannot be measured simultaneously.

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data

I-91

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

(b) Z axis workpiece coordinate offset data measurement

Machine coordinate zero point

Workpiece coordinate zero point

X axis

Z axis

Turret

Workpiece

1) Setting method 1. Select the tool and cut the workpiece edge. 2. When the workpiece measurement signal is input, the Z axis external workpiece coordinate

offset data will be calculated from the machine coordinate value, the length of the tool used and the tool nose wear compensation amount. This value will be saved in the memory.

2) No. of set systems and axes

The external workpiece coordinate offset for the system 1 Z axis (2nd axis) and system 2 Z axis (2nd axis) can be set. Note that the workpiece coordinate values for the two systems cannot be measured simultaneously.

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data

I-92

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

(3) Operation flow

Start of operation

Measure other axes?

Zero point return

End of operation

Select manual mode

Turn tool measurement mode [TLMS] ON

Set No. of tool to be measured

Contact tool against sensor

Retract tool

Set measurement basic value

Select tool

Cut workpiece edges

Input workpiece measurement signal

Turn tool measurement mode [TLMS] OFF

Measure other tools?

Yes

No

Yes

No

Turn ON Y229 (tool measurement mode).

Preset the following axis specification parameter as the sensor position. #2015 tlml, #2016 tlml+

Turn OFF Y229 (tool measurement No.)

Turn ON Y329 (workpiece measurement No.)

Set the compensation No. of the tool to be measured in the R register. Tool No.: R2970, Wear data compensation No.: R186

Set the compensation No. of the tool to be used for cutting in the R register.

The tool length offset amount is automatically calculated from the contacted position, and is stored in the tool compensation amount memory. Tool compensation amount = Machine coordinate value Measurement basic value (Sensor position) The wear amount is cleared after measurement.

The Z axis workpiece coordinate offset will be measured and set in the external workpiece offset. Workpiece coordinate offset = Machine coordinate value Tool compensation data

Interface and operation with NC

Do not move the tool in the Z axis direction after cutting.

The axis movement will stop, and can be moved only in the direction away from the sensor.

External workpiece offset

The tool compensation amount is measured one axis at a time.

Tool compensation amount

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data

I-93

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

(4) Explanation of operations

(a) Setting the tool compensation amount

1) Zero point return After turning the power ON, establish the coordinate system by carrying out dog-type zero point return. When using the absolute position detection specifications, carry out initialization if the absolute position is not established.

2) Select the mode

Set the mode selection switch to the manual mode (either [handle], [jog] or [rapid traverse]).

3) Input the tool measurement mode signal Set the tool measurement mode signal to "1". The tool measurement mode is entered with steps 1), 2) and 3).

4) Confirm measurement basic value (sensor position)

The following parameter must be set before carrying out tool setter operations.

#2015 tlml, #2016 tlml+ (sensor position) Axis specification parameter p. 2

Zp

Xp Zm

Z axis

Xm

X axis

Xm : X axis sensor machine coordinate value (position measured by moving in direction) #2015 tlml X axis

Zm : Z axis sensor machine coordinate value (position measured by moving in direction) #2015 tlml Z axis

Xp : X axis + sensor machine coordinate value (position measured by moving in + direction) #2016 tlml+ X axis

Zp : Z axis + sensor machine coordinate value (position measured by moving in + direction) #2016 tlml+ Z axis

If the axis to be measured is the additional axis, the axis set with #2015 tlml-/#2016 tlml+ will differ according to the additional axis tool compensation operation selection parameter (#1520 Tchg34).

#1520 Tchg34 #2015 tlml/#2016 tlml+ setting 0 3rd axis 1 4th axis

5) Select the tool

Select the tool to be measured. Set the compensation No. of the tool to be selected as a BCD code in R2970. Set the compensation No. of the wear data to be cleared after measurement as a BCD code in R186. (The tool No. data is input from the PLC to the NC.)

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data

I-94

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

6) Measure tool compensation amount with sensor contact Approach the tool nose to the sensor with manual or handle feed. Stop the feed when the tool nose contacts the sensor. The tool length offset amount will be automatically calculated from the contacted position, and will be stored in the tool length memory. After measuring, the wear amount of the designated compensation No. will be cleared.

Note) The sensor contact surface is judged by the NC according to the manual axis movement

direction, so measure the tool compensation amount one axis at a time. The direction of the axis movement when the sensor contacts the tool will be output to R90 (R290).

The tool compensation amount is automatically calculated with the following expression.

Tool compensation amount = Machine coordinate value Measurement basic value

Z axis

X axis tool compensation amount

X axis Turret

Xm

Zm Z axis tool compensation amountMachine value

M ac

hi ne

v al

ue

Turret

Tool compensation amount calculation diagram

7) Retract the tool. 8) Set the tool compensation amount for the X axis and Z axis using steps 5) to 7). 9) Repeat steps 5) to 8) for the required tools.

10) Turn the tool measurement mode signal OFF.

This completes the measurement of the tool compensation amount.

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data

I-95

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

(b) Setting the external workpiece coordinate offset data

1) Zero point return After turning the power ON, establish the coordinate system by carrying out dog-type zero point return. When using the absolute position detection specifications, carry out initialization if the absolute position is not established.

2) Select the mode

Set the mode selection switch to the manual mode (either [handle], [jog] or [rapid traverse]).

3) Input the tool measurement mode signal Set the tool measurement mode signal to "1". The tool measurement mode is entered with steps 1), 2) and 3).

4) Select the tool

Issue the T command with MDI operation, etc., and select the tool. Notes) 1. Set the compensation No. of the tool to be selected in the R register (R register

corresponding to the compensation No.). 2. Preset the tool length data and wear data for the tool to be used.

5) Cut workpiece edges

If the workpiece edges have not been cut, cut them slightly to flatten the workpiece edges. Notes) 1. Do not move the tool in the Z axis direction after cutting the workpiece edges. 2. If the edges do not need to be cut, position to the measurement position.

6) Set the Z axis external workpiece offset data with the workpiece measurement signal input

Turn ON the workpiece measurement signal. The Z axis external workpiece coordinate offset data will be automatically calculated from the machine value at the time the signal is turned ON and the tool compensation data of the tool used. The data will then be set.

(i) Details of automatic calculation expression

The external workpiece coordinate offset data is automatically calculated with the following expression. (Refer to "External workpiece coordinate offset calculation diagram")

External workpiece coordinate offset = Machine coordinate value Tool compensation data

The tool compensation data used for the measurement is selected with the base specification parameter "#1226 aux10 bit0".

aux10 bit0 Tool compensation data 0 Tool length data + tool nose wear data 1 Tool length data

Workpiece coordinate system zero point

Tool compensation amount

Basic machine coordinate zero point

External workpiece coordinate offset

Machine value

External workpiece coordinate offset calculation diagram

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.2 Tool Length Data

I-96

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

(ii) Selected tool's compensation No. The number set in the R registers, shown in the table below, are used as the tool length and tool nose wear data compensation numbers for automatic calculation.

Compensation No. R registers

#1098 Tlno. #1130 set_t #1218 aux02 bit4

Tool length compensation No.

Tool nose wear compensation No.

0 0/1 0 1 0/1

R192, R193 R192, R193

0 R36, R37 R192, R193 0

1 R194, R195 R192, R193 1 1 0/1 R194, R195 R192, R193

Notes) 1. If the compensation No. is 0, the compensation amount will be calculated as "0". 2. If the compensation No. exceeds the number of offset sets in the specifications, the "E76

TOOL No. ERROR" error will occur. 3. The details of the parameters are shown below.

# Items Details 1098 Tlno. Tool length

offset number Specify the No. of digits in the tool length offset No. in the T command.

0: The 2 or 3 high-order digits are the tool No. The 2 or 1 Iow-order digits are the tool length offset and wear compensation Nos.

1: The 2 or 3 high-order digits are the tool No. and tool length offset Nos.

The 2 or 1 Iow-order digits are the wear compensation No. 1130 set_t Display

selected tool number

Specify the tool command value display on the POSITION screen.

0: T-modal value of program command is displayed. 1: Tool number sent from PLC is displayed.

1218 aux02 (bit4)

Tool number selection

Specify the R register that contains the tool number used for automatic calculation when measuring the coordinate offset of an external work piece.

0: Conforms to #1130 set_t. 1: Uses the tool number indicated by user PLC

7) Turn the tool measurement mode signal OFF. This completes the measurement of the external workpiece coordinate offset. When carrying out this operation independently, follow steps 1) to 7), and when carrying out after measuring the tool compensation amount, carry out steps 4) to 6) between 9) and 10) of "(a) Setting the tool compensation amount".

(5) Precautions

1) When entering the sensor area, the axis can move only in one direction selected from +X, X, +Z, Z, (+Y, Y). If two axes (ex. +X, Z) are moved simultaneously, it will not be clear which contact surface was contacted, so the measurement will not be made. Note that the error "E78 AX UNMATCH (TLM )" will occur and the movement will stop for safety purposes.

2) After entering the sensor area, if the tool nose is contacting the sensor, the axis can be moved only in the direction away from the sensor. (An interlock is applied on the entry direction by the NC.) The axis can move in both directions when the tool nose is separated from the sensor. The conditions for the axis to move in both directions are as follow: 1. The sensor signal has been OFF for more than 500ms 2. The axis has moved 100m or more after the sensor signal has turned OFF. 1 and 2 can be selected with the parameter #1227 aux11/bit 2 tool setter chattering measures. The interlock direction during interlock is output to R91 (R291).

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.3 Tool Nose Data

I-97

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

3.3 Tool Nose Data

The NOSE-R screen will appear when the menu key

NOSE-R is pressed.

T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU

[NOSE - R] TOOL 3.1/4 # 1 R 5.000 r 0.045 P 3 2 R 10.000 r 0.099 P 8 3 R 6.000 r 0.099 P 2 4 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 3 5 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 3 6 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 3 7 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 3 8 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 3 9 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 3 10 R 0.000 r 0.000 P 3 # ( ) R ( ) r ( ) P ( )

Set the tool nose radius R (nose R), wear r, and tool nose point for each tool used. When the tool nose R compensation (G41, G42, G46) command is given, the tool nose is assumed to be a half-circular arc with radius R (R + r) corresponding to the tool No. Compensation is then carried out so that the half-circular arc contacts the designated machining program path.

Data Function P0 to P8 Tool nose point

R Tool radius (nose R) (no sign) r Wear (no sign)

X

2

7

3

6 1

0

8

5

4

Z r

R

3

Tool nose point

(Note) The incremental value/absolute value setting mode changeover follows the tool length data setting mode for R, and the tool wear data setting mode for r.

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.4 Tool Life Management I

I-98

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

3.4 Tool Life Management I (#1096 T_L type is 1)

The TOOL LIFE DATA screen will appear when the menu key

LIFE is pressed.

T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU

[TOOL LIFE DATA] TOOL 4.1/4 [TIME] [COUNT] [STATUS] # USED MAX USED MAX 1 0: 0: 0/ 0: 0 0/ 0 0: 0 2 0: 0: 0/ 0: 0 0/ 0 0: 0 3 0: 0: 0/ 0: 0 0/ 0 0: 0 4 0: 0: 0/ 0: 0 0/ 0 0: 0 5 0: 0: 0/ 0: 0 0/ 0 0: 0 6 0: 0: 0/ 0: 0 0/ 0 0: 0 7 0: 0: 0/ 0: 0 0/ 0 0: 0 8 0: 0: 0/ 0: 0 0/ 0 0: 0 9 0: 0: 0/ 0: 0 0/ 0 0: 0 10 0: 0: 0/ 0: 0 0/ 0 0: 0 # ( ) ( : : / : ) ( / ) ( : )

Tool life management is valid when parameter #1103 T_Life is set to 1. Tool life management is then carried out according to the tool usage time or the No. of times the tool is used (also called count). When the tool usage time reaches the service life time, or when the tool count exceeds the service life count, a tool life expiration signal (X20E) is output to the user PLC and the tool No. (#) is highlighted on the TOOL LIFE DATA screen. Tool life management is possible for up to 80 tools (tool Nos. 1 to 80). This function is useful for setting tool abrasion and wear data, and for knowing when to replace tools with new ones, etc.

Item Details Setting range

USED The cumulative time the tool is used. This timer value is incremented during cutting.

0 : 0 to 99 : 59 (h: min)

TIME

MAX The tool service lifetime setting. Set the max. time the tool can be used. Seconds are discarded.

0 : 0 to 99 : 59 (h: min) (0 : 0 = no warning given)

USED The cumulative count the tool is used. The counter value is incremented each time the tool is used.

0 to 9999 (times) COUNT

MAX The tool service life count. Set the max. count the tool can be used.

0 to 9999 (times) (0 : 0 = no warning given)

Left side

The tool life management status is indicated.

0: Not used 1: Current tool (tool being used) 2: Service lifetime (service life count) is exceeded.

0 to 2 STATUS

Right side (Machine maker free area) 0 to 99

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.4 Tool Life Management I

I-99

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

3.4.1 Tool Life Management Method

By setting the service lifetime (or service life count) to "0" for each tool, the following four tool life management methods can be selected.

Life management method Service lifetime setting

Service life count setting

1. Time only Set to "0". 2. Count only Set to "0". 3. Time and count 4. No management Set to "0". Set to "0".

(1) Tool life management by time

The cutting time (G01, G02, G33, etc.) after a tool selection (T) command is carried out is incremented to the usage time corresponding to the commanded tool. If the usage time reaches the service lifetime when a tool selection command is executed, a warning is output to the user PLC. When the usage time reaches the service lifetime, the corresponding tool No. (#) on the TOOL LIFE DATA screen is highlighted.

(2) Tool life management by count

The count for the commanded tool is incremented when the first cutting feed starts after a tool selection (T) command is carried out. If no cutting feed is executed after the selection of a tool, the count is not incremented. If the count equals the service life count for the commanded tool when a tool selection command is executed, a warning is output to the user PLC. When the count exceeds the service life count (when the cutting feed starts after a tool selection command), the corresponding tool No. (#) on the TOOL LIFE DATA screen is highlighted.

(3) Tool life management by time and count The tool life is managed simultaneously by time and count. If the usage time reaches the service lifetime, or the count equals the service life count for the commanded tool when a tool selection command is executed, a warning is output to the user PLC. When the usage time reaches the service lifetime, or when the count exceeds the service life count, the corresponding tool No. (#) on the TOOL LIFE DATA screen is highlighted.

(4) No management The usage time and count are incremented, but no warning is output to the user PLC, and the tool No. (#) on the TOOL LIFE DATA screen is not highlighted.

3.4.2 Conditions for Counting (incrementing)

The usage time (or count) is incremented when a cutting feed (G1, G2, G3, G33) is executed. Note that they are not incremented in the following conditions:

When the base specification parameter "#1103 T-Life" is OFF. During machine lock During miscellaneous function lock (input signal from the PLC) During dry run During single block operation When the count ON signal of the data used is OFF. (Input signal from the PLC)

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.4 Tool Life Management I

I-100

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

3.4.3 Setting Tool Life Management Data

(1) To set tool life management data, set the tool No. in # ( ). Then set the tool service lifetime and service life count data in the corresponding setting areas, and press the

INPUT key. (2) The operations in (1) update the tool life management data display, increment the tool No. in # ( ) by 1,

and deletes the service lifetime (life count) data in ( ). (3) If a tool No. and tool life management data is set for a tool No. other than the ones displayed, the screen

will change to one corresponding to the set tool No. when the

INPUT key is pressed once. The tool life management data can be set by pressing the

INPUT twice. (4) The tool No. that appears in # ( ) can be continually incremented or decremented by pressing the

and

keys. 3.4.4 Erasing Tool Life Management Data in Display Screen Units

Ten sets of tool life management data appear in one screen. All the displayed tool life management data (time-used, time-max, count-used, count-max) can be set to 0 by pressing the

SHIFT key, and then pressing the

C.B CAN key and

INPUT key.

(Note) If any other key has been pressed before the

INPUT key is pressed, the tool life management data will not be erased.

3.4.5 Precautions

(1) The cumulative time (count) is incremented, even if the service lifetime (service count) is set to "0". Note that a warning (TOOL LIFE EXPIRATION: X20E) is not output.

(2) For tool life management by time, a warning will not be output to the user PLC if the usage time reaches the service lifetime during cutting. Instead, the warning will be output when the next tool selection command is issued. During that interval, the usage time will continue to increment.

(3) When there are 20 offset pairs, the No. of tools whose lifetime can be managed is 20. (4) The TOOL LIFE screen cannot be selected in systems without the tool life management function. If the

tool life management menu key is pressed, alarm "E06 NO SPEC" will occur and the screen will not change.

(5) If a tool selection (T) command is carried out during cutting feed modal, the count will be incremented at that time.

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.5 Tool Life Management II

I-101

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

3.5 Tool Life Management II (#1096 T_Ltype is 2)

The tools used are classified into several groups. With this tool life management with spare tool function, tool life (usage time, count) is managed for each group. When a tool's life is reached, an equivalent spare tool is selected in order from the group to which that tool belongs. (1) No. of tool life management tools : 1-system: max. 80 tool, 2-system: max. 40 tools/system (2) No. of groups : 1-system: max. 80 tool, 2-system: max. 40 tools/system (3) Group No. : 1 to 9999 (4) No. of tools per group : Max. 16 tools (5) Service lifetime : 0 to 999999 min. (approx. 16667 hours) (6) Service life count : 0 to 999999 times

3.5.1 Group Registration

(1) Tool life management screen A group's life management information is set and displayed.

T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU

[TOOL LIFE] TOOL 4. 2/5 # G GROUP : 1234 FORM : 0 LIFE : 999999(MIN) # TOOL No. CMP.No. USED(MIN) ST TOOL No. CMP.No. USED(MIN) ST 1 111111 1 999999 2 9 123 9 000009 3 2 222222 2 999999 2 10 1234 10 000099 3 3 333333 3 999999 2 11 12345 11 000999 3 4 444444 4 999999 2 12 123456 12 123456 1 5 555555 5 999999 2 13 234567 13 000000 0 6 666666 6 999999 2 14 345678 14 000000 0 7 777777 7 999999 2 15 999999 15 000000 0 8 888888 8 999999 2 16 #(12) DATA(123456) (12) (123456) (1)

(Note) The (MIN) display following "LIFE" or "USED" will change according the method setting. FORM 0: Time (MIN) : Indicates that the data is displayed in minute units. 1: Count (SET) : Indicates that the data is displayed in count units.

1) Selecting a display group Select the group by setting # ( G) DATA (group No.). When the group No. is set, the tool life management information of the tools registered in that group will appear from #1 to #16. A highlighted # No. indicates that tool is a life-reached tool (or a skip tool). To display another group, set # ( G) DATA (group No.) again.

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.5 Tool Life Management II

I-102

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

2) Registering a group Register a group by setting # ( G) DATA (group No. to be registered) (FORM) (LIFE).

Designate a group No. from 1 to 9999. Set FORM with for group life management by either time or count. 0: Time 1: Count If the FORM setting is omitted, the method becomes "0" (time). Set LIFE with the service life setting value for that group's tools. (0 to 999999). If the LIFE setting is omitted, the life setting value becomes "0". (Note 1) The FORM and LIFE setting values can only be changed for a group being displayed.

This is to prevent mistaken settings. The setting is made with # ( G) DATA ( ) (FORM) (LIFE).

(Only FORM and LIFE setting values can be changed.) (Note 2) FORM and LIFE data is common data within that group. To suppress the LIFE value of a

specific tool, adjust by setting the offset value for the USED data. In this case, ST will be set to 1 (current tool), and the following new tool selection signal will not be output at tool selection.

(Note 3) The USED data will be incremented when the LIFE data is 0, but no judgment will be made when the service life count is reached.

3) Deleting a group registration

The group being displayed and its data can be deleted by pressing

SHIFT +

C.B CAN +

INPUT keys.

4) Registering tools Set the tools in order from the first tool to be used. If multiple compensation Nos. are used with one tool, set the tool No. and respective compensation Nos. for each compensation No.

Tool No. : Set the tool No. (1 to 999999: differs according to the specifications) Compensation No. : Set the compensation No. (1 to 80: differs according to the specifications) USED : When the designated tool is other than a not-used tool, the initial incrementation value can be adjusted by setting the USED data. If no data is set, this value becomes 0. (Can be omitted.) ST : Designate whether the tool is a tool skip tool or not. (Can be omitted.)

If the data is not set, or if 0 to 2 is set, the data will be automatically set according to the relation with the USED data and LIFE data.

0: Not used tool 1: Current tool (tool being used) 2: Normal life-reached tool 3: Tool skip tool (Example) Setting to use multiple compensation Nos. with one tool.

# Tool No. Compensation No. 1 520000 11 ..... Equivalent to a T52000011 command. 2 520000 12 ..... Equivalent to a T52000012 command. 3 520000 13 ..... Equivalent to a T52000013 command. (Note) Tool life management is carried out in group units with this function. Thus, if a tool is set in a

different group, the life will be managed according to the respective group, and that tool cannot be managed correctly.

5) Deleting a tool registration

Set 0 in the tool No. of the # No. to be deleted. All data of that # No. will be deleted, and the subsequent # Nos. and data will all move up a line.

6) Clearing a tools USED data

Setting up the following can clear the USED data: 0 is set in the USED data of each tool. Put - in front of the # number of tool, and set that number with - in # ( ). When the USED data of the all registration tools of 1 group are cleared, -99 is set in #( ).

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.5 Tool Life Management II

I-103

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

7) Displaying multiple groups The LIFE management information of multiple groups is set and displayed in 1 screen according to the parameter (#1107 Tllfsc) setting.

#1107 Tllfsc setting value 0 1 2 No. of display groups 1 2 4

Maximum number of registered tools 16 8 4

[TOOL LIFE] TOOL 4.1/12 GROUP: 1 FORM:0 LIFE: 100(MIN) GROUP: FORM:1 LIFE: 100(MIN) # TOOLNo. CMP.No. USED(MIN) ST # TOOLNo. CMP.No. USED(SET) ST 1 1 1 100 2 1 21 21 100 2 2 2 2 0 3 2 22 22 100 2 3 3 3 0 3 3 23 23 100 2 4 4 4 50 1 4 24 24 100 2 5 5 5 0 0 5 25 25 100 2 6 6 6 0 0 6 26 26 100 2 7 7 7 0 0 7 27 27 100 2 8 8 8 0 0 8 28 28 100 2 #( )DATA( )( )( )( ) T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU I

2

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

The LIFE management information of 2 groups in 1 screen

[TOOL LIFE] TOOL 4.1/7 GROUP: 1 FORM:0 LIFE: 100(MIN) GROUP: FORM:1 LIFE: 100(MIN) # TOOLNo. CMP.No. USED(MIN) ST # TOOLNo. CMP.No. USED(SET) ST 1 1 1 100 2 1 21 21 100 2 2 2 2 0 3 2 22 22 100 2 3 3 3 0 3 3 23 23 100 2 4 4 4 50 1 4 24 24 100 2 GROUP: 3 FORM:0 LIFE: 300(MIN) GROUP: 4 FORM:1 LIFE: 400(MIN) # TOOLNo. CMP.No. USED(MIN) ST # TOOLNo. CMP.No. USED(SET) ST 1 29 29 100 1 1 33 33 0 0 2 30 30 0 0 2 34 34 0 0 3 31 31 0 0 3 35 35 0 0 4 32 32 0 0 4 36 36 0 0 #( )DATA( )( )( )( ) T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU LIFE

2

1

1 2 3 4

The LIFE management information of 4 groups in 1 screen

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.5 Tool Life Management II

I-104

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

(2) Registration group list screen

The life management data of the tool currently being used and the list of registered groups of tools are displayed. This page is mainly used for monitoring tool life data in group units.

T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU

[TOOL LIFE] TOOL 4. 2/5 GROUP TOOL NO. COMP.NO. FORM USED TOTAL LIFE ST 1234 123456 12 0 123456 123456 999999(MIN) 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 111 222 333 444 555 666 777 888 999 1001 1101 1202 1303 1404 1505 1606 1100 2200 3300 4400 5500 6600 7700 8800 9900 1010 1111 1212 1313 1414 1515 1616 1234 2222 3333 4444 5555 6666 7777 8888 9999

1) Display details < CHOSEN TOOL >: The life management information of the tool currently being used appears here. FORM : The incrementation unit of the life data appears here. 0: Time 1: Count ST : The tool status appears here. 0: Not used tool 1: Current tool (tool being used) 2: Normal life-reached tool 3: Tool skip tool TOTAL : For tools using multiple compensation Nos., the total of the usage data for each compensation No. appears here. If there is only one compensation No., the data will be the same as "USED". < GROUP LIST > : All registered group Nos. appear here. A highlighted group No. indicates that the lives of all tools registered in that group have been reached.

2) Erasing all registered data of a group All registered data (including the group No.) of a group can be erased by pressing

SHIFT +

C.B CAN +

INPUT keys.

3.5.2 Tool Life Incrementation Methods

The tool life can be incremented either by time method or by the No. of uses (count) method. The count method and timing for the No. of uses (count) method can be changed to type 2 with the parameter setting (#1277 ext13/bit0). If the USED data equals or exceeds the LIFE data as a result of incrementation, a spare tool will be selected from that tool's group by the next relevant group selection command (T****99). After that, the incrementation will be for the newly selected tool (the spare tool selected). If the life of all tools in a group is reached, and a spare tool cannot be selected, the incrementation will continue for the last tool selected.

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.5 Tool Life Management II

I-105

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

(1) Time incrementation with the time method The time the tool is used in the cutting mode (G01, G02, G03, G31, G33, etc.) is incremented in 100ms units. The time is not incremented during dwell, machine lock, miscellaneous function lock, dry run or single block status.

(Note) The max. life value is 999999 min. The data on the TOOL LIFE screen is displayed in minute units.

(2) No. of uses (count) incrementation with the count method

(a) Type 1 (#1277 ext13/bit0: 0) Incrementation is carried out when the No. of the tool being used changes by the execution of a tool selection command (T****99) during the cutting mode (except during machine lock, miscellaneous function lock, dry run, and single block states). (If the mode never changes to the cutting mode after the tool No. changes, the count is not incremented.)

(Note) The max. life value is 999999 times. If only the compensation No. for the current tool changes, the count is not incremented. If the T code of the current tool is 12345678:

T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Compensation No.: The count is not incremented, even if this changes.

Tool No.: The count is incremented when this changes.

The count for group 01 is 1 time.

(Note) The count is for one program execution. If the program is executed again after resetting the count will be incremented.

The count for group 01 is 3 times.

<< Operation example >>

T0199 (1) : T0299 : T0199 (2) : T0299 : T0199 (3)

Program

T0199 (1) : T0199 : T0199

Program

(b) Type 2 (#1277 ext13/bit0: 1)

Only the group used for cutting from when the machining program starts to when it is reset is incremented by "1". The count is made at the reset. If recount M is commanded, the group used up to that point will be incremented by "1" in the counter.

(Note 1) A count is not made in the machine lock, miscellaneous function lock or dryrun states. (Note 2) During single block, select whether to count with the parameter. (Note 3) The maximum value of the life is 999999 times.

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.5 Tool Life Management II

I-106

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

(3) Incrementation when using one tool with multiple compensation Nos. With this function, each registered T No. (tool No. + compensation No.) has independent USED data, so the count for a tool using multiple compensation Nos. is incremented for each compensation No. Thus, life management for that tool's USED data is carried out with the total of the USED data for each compensation. Because of this, when only one # No. is looked at on the screen, the tool status (ST) may be 2 (life-reached tool), although that tool's USED data has not yet reached the life of the tool. The total of the currently selected tool's USED data appears in "TOTAL" of the column on Page 1.

Example of the screen display when using multiple compensation Nos.

Time method (life: 100000 min.) Count method (life: 100000 times)

The life of tool 101010 is the total count of #1 to #3.

The life of tool 101010 is the total usage time of #1 to #3.

# TOOL No. CMP.No. USED(MIN) ST

1 101010 1 40000 2

2 101010 2 40000 2

3 101010 3 30000 2

4 202020 4 20000 1

5 202020 5 20000 1

6 202020 6 15000 1

7 303030 7 0 0

# TOOL No. CMP.No. USED(SET) ST

1 101010 1 50000 2

2 101010 2 50000 2

3 101010 3 0 2

4 202020 4 40000 1

5 202020 5 40000 1

6 202020 6 0 1

7 303030 7 0 0

3.5.3 Parameters The tool life management specifications will differ according to parameter #1096 T_Ltype and #1106 Tcount. Confirm the explanation for the relevant setup parameter data item.

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.6 Tool Registration

I-107

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

3.6 Tool Registration

The TOOL REGISTRATION screen will appear when the menu key

LIFE is pressed, and the screen is changed using the

NEXT PAGE key. The use of this screen differs according to the user PLC, so refer to the

instruction manual issued by the machine maker for details. 3.6.1 Outline of Functions

(1) Tools used can be registered in the magazine pot. (2) When the magazine pot and the tool No. are changed by a tool selection command or a tool

replacement command, the new tool No. is displayed. (3) Random data can be set in AUX ( ) in the setting area and processed as a sequence with the user PLC. (4) Tools can be registered in USAGE on the upper portion of the screen. The displayed name and

displayed No. can be changed. (5) The No. of tool registrations differs according to the specifications, but a max. of 80 tools can be

registered, with a max. of 4 digits in the tool Nos. (6) Tools can be selected by a manual numeric command.

T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU

[T-REGISTRATION] TOOL 2.1/2 HEAD NEXT-1 NEXT-2 NEXT-3 SEARCH 10 20 21 30 22 MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D 1 101 0 11 201 0 21 301 0 2 102 0 12 202 0 22 302 0 3 103 0 13 203 0 23 303 0 4 104 0 14 204 0 24 304 0 5 105 0 15 205 0 25 305 0 6 106 0 16 206 0 26 306 0 7 107 0 17 207 0 27 307 0 8 108 0 18 208 0 28 308 0 9 109 0 19 209 0 29 309 0 10 110 0 20 210 0 30 310 0 T 0 M MG( ) TOOL( ) D( ) AUX( )

3.6.2 Tool Registration in the Magazine Pot

T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU

T 0 M MG( 1 ) TOOL( 1234 ) D( 2 ) AUX( ) Set 1 in MG ( ),

1234 in TOOL ( ), and 2 in D ( ).

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.6 Tool Registration

I-108

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

Press the

INPUT key. [T-REGISTRATION] TOOL 2.1/2 HEAD NEXT-1 NEXT-2 NEXT-3 SEARCH MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D 1 1234-0 11 21 2 12 22 3 13 23 4 14 24

The tool No. and data in D appear in the designated magazine pot, and the magazine No. in MG ( ) is incremented by 1. The data in the other ( ) disappears. When a No. other than the magazine No. in the data display area is set, the screen changes as follows: When the

INPUT key is pressed the 1st time, the screen corresponding to the magazine No. appears. When the

INPUT key is pressed the 2nd time, the data set in the data area appears.

(Note) Refer to the instruction manual issued by the machine maker for data on the function and purpose of the data in D.

3.6.3 Tool Registration in the Spindle, Standby and Indexing Areas

These commands are used to change the display data when the tool No. set in the magazine pot differs with the displayed tool No.

Press the

INPUT key.

Set N0 in MG ( ), and 8 in TOOL ( ).

Set to USAGE MG (N0) TOOL ( )

T-OFSET T-DATA NOSE-R LIFE MENU

[T-REGISTRATION] TOOL 2.1/2 HEAD NEXT-1 NEXT-2 NEXT-3 SEARCH 10 20 21 30 22 MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D 1 101 0 11 201 0 21 301 0 2 102 0 12 202 0 22 302 0 3 103 0 13 203 0 23 303 0 4 104 0 14 204 0 24 304 0 5 105 0 15 205 0 25 305 0 6 106 0 16 206 0 26 306 0 7 107 0 17 207 0 27 307 0 8 108 0 18 208 0 28 308 0 9 109 0 19 209 0 29 309 0 10 110 0 20 210 0 30 310 0 T 0 M MG( ) TOOL( ) D( ) AUX( )

"8" appears under USAGE in the data display area, and the display in the data setting area changes to MG (N1).

(Note) Although the title display in the upper portion of the screen differs according to the machine maker, the data is always set by an input of N0.

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.6 Tool Registration

I-109

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

3.6.4 Deleting Tool Registration Data

Press the

INPUT key. All data displayed in USAGE and MG1 to MGn is cleared to 0.

Set CL in MG ( ).

(Note) If any other key has been pressed before the

INPUT key is pressed, the tool registration data will not be deleted.

3.6.5 Manual Numeric Command Operation (M, T) on the TOOL REGISTRATION Screen

To carry out manual numeric commands on the TOOL REGISTRATION screen, the mode must first be changed from the normal data setting mode to the manual numeric command mode. M and T commands can be executed by screen operation in the manual numeric command mode.

(1) Changing from the normal data setting mode to the

manual numeric command mode A cursor appears in the data setting area in the normal data setting mode, but a cursor does not appear in the manual numeric command mode. Confirm that the mode has changed over by checking this difference. The operation is as follows:

Set

M (manual) in the first set of parentheses in the setting area.

T M

MG( M ) TOOL( ) D( ) AUX( )

1) This operation is the same for M or T

commands.

Press the

INPUT key. The mode changes to the manual numerical command mode.

T M MG( ) TOOL( ) D( ) AUX( )

1) The data in the setting area is cleared, and the cursor disappears from the screen.

T M

MG( ) TOOL( ) D( ) AUX( )

3. Tool Offset (L system) 3.6 Tool Registration

I-110

Refer to "3 (II). Tool Offset (M system)" for M system.

(2) Executing the manual numeric command ..... Carry out this step after (1) above. 1) Press the address key corresponding to the command. The display area of the corresponding

command value is highlighted, and a manual numeric command input status results. Execute tool function commands with

T , and miscellaneous function commands with

M . 2) Key-input the numerical value to be commanded. 3) Press the

INPUT key. The command is executed.

(Note) The manual numeric command operation is the same as the operation on the POSITION screen. Refer to the section on manual numeric commands for the MONITOR and POSITION screens for details.

(3) Operation for returning the mode from the manual numeric command mode to the normal data setting mode

Press the

key. The normal data setting mode returns.

T20 M6 MG( ) TOOL( ) D( ) AUX( )

1) The cursor appears in the first set of parentheses, and the normal setting mode is enabled.

3. Tool Offset (M system)

I-111

Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.

3 (II). Tool Offset (M system) The following menu will display if the function selection key

TOOL PARAM is pressed.

TOOL menu No.1 to 4

TOOL OFFSET #1 to #20

or #1 to #10

T- REGISTRATION MG 1 to MG 20

TOOL LIFE

: :

# to #

WORK PROCESS I/O BASE PARAM

SETUP PARAMETER

CONTROL

AXIS

BARRIER

PARAM

Refer to PARAMETERS.

#1 to #40 or #11 to #20

MG 61 to MG 80

MG 41 to MG 60

MG 21 to MG 40

TOOL DATA

: :

TOOL DATA

PARAM menu display (No.1 to 4) TOOL menu display (No.1 to 4)

OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU

Menu selection keysPrevious page key Next page key

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

PREVIOUS PAGE

NEXT PAGE

PARAM menu (No.1 to 4)

PREVIOUS PAGE

NEXT PAGE

PARAM

PARAM

PARAM

MENU

CAUTION

If a tool offset or workpiece coordinate system offset is changed during automatic operation (including during single block stop), the new offset is validated from the command of the next block or blocks onwards.

3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.1 Tool Offset

I-112

Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.

3.1 Tool Offset When the menu key

OFFSET is presented, the TOOL OFFSET screen is displayed. (1) Tool offset memory (type I: parameter #1037 cmdtyp 1) Form compensation memory is not distinct from wear compensation memory. Set the sum amount of

form compensation and wear compensation. Offset data is common to the tool length, tool offset, and tool radius compensation. (2) Tool offset memory (type II: parameter #1037 cmdtyp 2) Set the form compensation amount and wear compensation amount separately. The form

compensation amount is separated into the length dimensions and diameter dimension. Of offset data, the length dimension data is used for tool length and the diameter dimension data is

used for tool radius compensation.

OFFSET REGIST LIFE NEMU

[TOOL OFFSET] TOOL 1.1/ 2 #A:ABS. #I:INC. [MACHINE] Z 0.000

SURFACE #0 = 50.000 # LENG WEAR RADIUS WEAR 1 120.000 0.020 50.000 0.099 2 100.000 0.004 30.000 0.000 3 100.000 0.000 60.000 0.010 4 20.000 0.005 150.000 0.008 5 20.000 0.530 150.000 0.059 6 300.000 0.032 50.000 0.111 7 250.000 0.000 50.000 0.000 8 150.000 0.006 80.000 0.009 9 200.000 0.000 150.000 0.003

10 500.000 0.667 100.000 0.888 T 0 M

OFFSET REGIST LIFE NEMU

[TOOL OFFSET] TOOL 1.1/ 2 #A:ABS. #I:INC. [MACHINE] Z 0.000

SURFACE #0 = 50.000 # 1 120.000 11 300.000 2 50.000 12 50.000 3 100.000 13 250.000 4 30.000 14 50.000 5 100.000 15 150.000 6 60.000 16 80.000 7 20.000 17 200.000 8 150.000 18 150.000 9 20.000 19 500.000

10 150.000 20 100.000 T 0 M #( ) DATA( )

......

......

......

......

Tool offset memory type I Tool offset memory type II Tool offset data can be set in either absolute or incremental value.

Display item Description #A: ABS. #I: INC. The valid setting mode, either absolute or incremental mode, is

displayed in reverse video. Before setting data, check that the setting mode is proper.

3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.1 Tool Offset

I-113

Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.

3.1.1 Tool Offset Data Setting (1) For type I To set tool offset data, set the offset memory number in # ( ) and offset data in DATA ( ), then press

the

INPUT key. (2) For type II To set tool offset data, set the offset memory number in # ( ) and offset data in the setting area

corresponding to LENG, WEAR, RADIUS and WEAR, then press the

INPUT key. (3) If the

INPUT key is pressed after the offset memory number and tool offset data are set, the tool offset data set in the offset memory number position is displayed, the offset memory number in the setting area # ( ) is incremented by one, and the contents of DATA ( ) disappear. At the time, the cursor moves to the right end of the same setting field as the input time.

(4) If tool offset data is set with an offset memory number not contained in the displayed offset memory numbers, the screen changes to the screen corresponding to the setup offset memory number when the

INPUT key is first pressed. When the

INPUT key is pressed again, the tool offset data set in the offset memory number position is displayed.

(5) The offset memory number displayed in # ( ) can be consecutively incremented or decreased by one by pressing the

or

key. (6) To set the incremental mode, enter

in # ( ), then press the

INPUT key. In incremental mode, the set data is added to the data indicated in the display area. To cancel the incremental mode, enter

A in # ( ), then press the

INPUT key; the absolute mode is set. (For details, see Sections 3.1.3.)

3.1.2 Tool Offset Data Clear (1) Clear in display screen units 20 sets of tool offset data (10 sets for type II) are displayed on one screen. To clear all displayed offset

data, press the

SHIFT key, then press the

C.B CAN and

INPUT keys.

(Note) If any other key has been pressed before the

INPUT key is pressed, the offset data will not be cleared.

3.1.3 Tool Offset Data Setting Modes (Absolute and Incremental)

There are two types of selection method in the absolute value setting or incremental value setting for the tool offset data: the mode selection method and the menu selection method. The required method is selected with the parameter #1136 optype. (1) Mode selection method (#1136=0)

(a) Absolute value setting Change to the absolute value setting mode as follows:

Enter A in # ( ), then press the

INPUT key. # ( A) DATA ( )

[TOOL OFFSET]

#A:ABS. #I:INC.

"#A: ABS." is displayed in reverse video indicating that the absolute value setting mode is valid.

3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.1 Tool Offset

I-114

Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.

Example of setting tool offset data in absolute mode

Radius comp. Absolute value 3.0 setting

Length comp. 40.0

Old New

Radius comp. 5.0

Length comp. Absolute value setting 37.0

Display #3 40.000

Setting Display # ( 3) ( 37) #3 37.000

(#3 length compensation data)

(b) Incremental value setting Change to the incremental value setting mode as follows:

[TOOL OFFSET]

#A:ABS. #I:INC.

Enter I in # ( ), then press the

INPUT

key. # ( I) DATA( )

"#I: INC." is displayed in reverse video indicating that the incremental value setting mode is valid.

Example of setting tool offset data in incremental value setting mode

Radius comp. Incremental -2.0 value setting

Length comp. 40.0

Old New

Radius comp. 5.0

Length comp. Incremental value setting -3.0

Display #3 40.000

Setting Display # ( 3) ( -3) #3 37.000

(#3 length compensation data)

The mode thus set is retained even after the screen is changed or after power has been turned OFF.

3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.1 Tool Offset

I-115

Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.

(2) Menu selection method (#1136=1) (a) Change over to the absolute value setting mode

Set value in #( ), X( ) or Z( ), then press the = INPUT key.

[TOOL OFFSET] TOOL 2.1/2 #A : ABS. #I : INC. [POSITION] Z 0.000 SURFACE 0# = 50.000 # 1 X 120.000 11 300.000 2 X 50.000 12 50.000 3 X 100.000 13 250.000

: : : : : : T O M # ( ) DATA ( )

=INPUT +INPUT RETURN

(b) Change over to the incremental value setting mode

Set value in #( ), X( ) or Z( ), then press the + INPUT key.

[TOOL OFFSET] TOOL 2.1/2 #A : ABS. #I : INC. [POSITION] Z 0.000 SURFACE 0# = 50.000 # 1 X 120.000 11 300.000 2 X 50.000 12 50.000 3 X 100.000 13 250.000

: : : : : : T O M # ( ) DATA ( )

=INPUT +INPUT RETURN

* When the cursor is moved to X( ) or Z( ) then the data key is pressed, =INPUT,+INPUT menu will

appear automatically. (c) Supplement If INPUT key is pressed while = INPUT, + INPUT are displayed, the offset data can be set for mode

selection method. = INPUT, + INPUT are displayed until BACK menu key is pressed or other screens are selected. The screen selection menu is displayed when TOOL OFFSET screen is selected again after other

screens are selected once. Mark of the screen selection menu indicates that the operation menu exist on the screen being

displayed. The operation menu is invalid during the tool measurement with manual tool length measurement

function. The operation menu during the tool measurement operates as follows. 1) When the screen select menu is displayed + INPUT, = INPUT dont appear during the tool measurement. If = INPUT, + INPUT with mark

are pressed during the tool measurement, ERROR (E74) will occur. 2) When the operation menu is displayed If = INPUT, + INPUT are pressed during the tool measurement, ERROR (E74) will occur. = INPUT, + INPUT are invalid during the manual numerical command mode. If = INPUT, + INPUT are pressed during the manual numerical command mode, ERROR (E74) will

occur. If the screen selection menu displayed with mark is pressed during the manual numerical command mode, ERROR (E74) will occur.

When the offset memory No. not displayed on the screen is set in setting area # ( ), the screen corresponding to the offset memory No. set in will appear by pressing = INPUT,+ INPUT key of one time. The offset data will be set by pressing = INPUT, + INPUT key again.

When the tool nose point data is set on the NOSE-R screen, the absolute setting is selected whichever of = INPUT and + INPUT key is pressed.

3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.1 Tool Offset

I-116

Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.

3.1.4 Manual Tool Length Measurement By moving a tool manually from the reference to measurement point, the travel distance from the basic to

measurement point can be measured and set as tool offset. (1) Tool length measurement I When the tool is placed in the machine coordinate zero point, the distance from the tool tip to

measurement point (workpiece top end) can be measured and set as tool offset data.

When TLM basic length (#1102 tlm) = 0 and SURFACE #0 = 0 are set, tool length measurement I mode is set.

Machine coordinate zero point

Workpiece Table

Manual travel distance (tool length offset data)

(2) Tool length measurement II When the tool is placed in the machine coordinate zero point, the distance from the reference point to

tool tip can be measured and set as tool offset data.

Manual travel distance

Machine coordinate zero point

Gauge block SURFACE #0=

Tool offset data (internal calculation value)

TL M

b as

ic le

ng th

Table

3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.1 Tool Offset

I-117

Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.

(3) Tool offset data setting by tool length measurement

OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU

[TOOL OFFSET] TOOL 1.1/ 2 #A:ABS. #I:INC. [MACHINE] Z 0.000 SURFACE #O = 50.000

# 1 0.000 11 300.000 2 50.000 12 50.000 3 100.000 13 250.000 4 0.000 14 50.000 5 100.000 15 150.000 6 60.000 16 80.000 7 20.000 17 200.000 8 150.000 18 150.000 9 20.000 19 500.000

10 0.000 20 100.000 T 0 M #( ) DATA( )

1) Tool length measurement I

Position the tool to the machine coordinate zero point.

START

Select a measurement tool.

Set the absolute value setting mode.

Turn ON the machine operation board "TLM" switch.

Move the tool to the measurement point by making jog feed or manual handle feed.

Upon completion of measurement, specify the tool offset number.

Select the TOOL OFFSET screen. Enter

A in # ( ), then press the

INPUT key. "#A: ABS." is displayed in reverse video. To message "TLM" is displayed on the TOOL OFFSET screen. 0 is displayed in DATA ( ) field. The measurement value is displayed in DATA ( ) field in sequence. The measurement value is also displayed under [TLM]. The current value of the measurement axis is displayed under [MACHINE] Z. Set the offset number in # ( ) and press the

INPUT key. The measurement data is displayed at the position of the specified offset number.

Setting and display on the TOOL OFFSET screen

(Note) For operation procedure, see Machine Operation manual.

3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.1 Tool Offset

I-118

Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.

2) Tool length measurement II

Position the tool to the machine coordinate zero point.

START

Select measurement tool.

To use gage block, etc., set the value of the basic height.

Turn ON the machine operation board "TLM" switch.

Move the tool to the measurement point by making jog feed or manual handle feed.

Upon completion of measurement, specify the tool offset number.

Check axis specification parameter "#2015 tlml" data of machine parameter. (Set the value of the distance from the reference point to table surface.) Set # ( 0 ) DATA ( . ) and press the

INPUT key. The data is displayed in SURFACE # 0 = . The message "TLM" is displayed on the TOOL OFFSET screen. Dummy tool length data "parameter tlml" - "#0" is displayed in the DATA ( ) field. The measurement value is displayed in the DATA ( ) field in sequence. The current value of the measurement axis is displayed under [MACHINE] Z. Set the offset number in # ( ) and press the

INPUT key. The measurement data is displayed at the position of the specified offset number.

Setting and display on the TOOL OFFSET screen

On measurement, first check the TLM basic length.

.........

.........

.........

.........

.........

3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.1 Tool Offset

I-119

Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.

3.1.5 Manual Numeric Command Operation on the TOOL OFFSET Screen (M, T) To execute a manual numeric command on the TOOL OFFSET screen, first change the mode from usual

data setting to manual numeric command. The M and T commands can be executed by screen operation in manual numeric command mode.

(1) Changing the mode from usual data setting to manual

numeric command In the usual data setting mode, the cursor is

displayed in the data setting field. It is not displayed in manual numeric command

mode. By checking this difference, make sure that the mode has changed. Change the mode by the following operations:

T M

#( )DATA( )

Set

M (Manual) in the first parenthesis pair of the setting field.

T M

#( M )DATA( )

1) This operation is necessary regardless of the

command (M, T).

Press the

INPUT key. The mode changes to manual numerical command.

T M

#( )DATA( )

1) Data is cleared from the setting field. The cursor is

also cleared from the screen. (2) Execution the manual numeric command ... Execute this after operation (1) above. 1) Press the address key corresponding to the command. The corresponding command value display

field is highlighted, and the manual numeric command input mode is activated. To execute the tool function, input

T . To execute the miscellaneous function, input

M . 2) Input the specified numerics from keys. 3) Press the

INPUT key. The command is executed.

(Note) The manual numeric command operation is the same as the operation for the POSITION screen. See "Manual numeric Command" in 'POSITION' of 'MONITOR' screen for details.

(3) Returning the mode from manual numeric command to usual data setting

Press the

key. The usual data setting mode returns.

T20 M6

#( )DATA( )

1) The cursor is displayed in first parenthesis pairs.

After this, usual data setting is enabled.

3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.2 Tool Registration

I-120

Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.

3.2 Tool Registration When the menu key

REGIST is pressed, the TOOL REGISTRATION screen is displayed. The use of this screen varies depending on the user PLC. For details, refer to the appropriate manual issued by the machine maker.

3.2.1 Function Outline (1) The used tools can be registered in magazine pots. (2) When magazine pots and tool numbers are changed by the tool selection or tool replacement

command, new tool numbers are displayed. (3) Any data can be set in setting area AUX ( ) and sequence processing can be performed by using user

PLC. (4) Tools can be registered under HEAD, NEXT 1 to NEXT 3, and INDEX displayed on the screen top. The

display names and the number of display pieces can also be changed. (5) Although the number of registered tools varies depending on the specifications, a maximum of 80 tools

can be registered (the maximum number of digits of a tool number is four.) (6) Tool selection and head replacement can be made by using manual numeric commands.

OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU

[T-REGISTRATION] TOOL 2.1/2 HEAD NEXT-1 NEXT-2 NEXT-3 SEARCH 10 20 21 30 22 MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D 1 101 0 11 201 0 21 301 0 2 102 0 12 202 0 22 302 0 3 103 0 13 203 0 23 303 0 4 104 0 14 204 0 24 304 0 5 105 0 15 205 0 25 305 0 6 106 0 16 206 0 26 306 0 7 107 0 17 207 0 27 307 0 8 108 0 18 208 0 28 308 0 9 109 0 19 209 0 29 309 0 10 110 0 20 210 0 30 310 0 T 0 M MG( ) TOOL( ) D( ) AUX( )

3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.2 Tool Registration

I-121

Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.

3.2.2 Tool Registration in Magazine Pot

OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU

T 0 M MG( 1 ) TOOL( 1234 ) D( 2 ) AUX( )

Set 1 in MG ( ), 1234 in TOOL ( ), and 2 in D ( ).

Press the

INPUT key. [T-REGISTRATION] TOOL 2.1/2 HEAD NEXT-1 NEXT-2 NEXT-3 SEARCH MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D 1 1234-2 11 21 2 12 22 3 13 23 4 14 24

The tool number and data in D are displayed in the specified magazine number area. The magazine number in setting area MG ( ) is incremented by one and the data in other parenthesis pairs disappears. If a number other than magazine numbers listed in the data display area is set, the screen is changed to the screen corresponding to the setup magazine number when the

INPUT key is first pressed. When the

INPUT key is pressed again, the data set in the area is displayed. (Note) For the functions and purpose of data in D, refer to the

appropriate manual issued by the machine maker.

3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.2 Tool Registration

I-122

Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.

3.2.3 Tool Registration in HEAD, NEXT, and INDEX This function is used to change display data when the tool number set in magazine pot differs from the

displayed tool number.

Press the

INPUT key.

Set SP in MG ( ), and 8 in TOOL ( ).

Set in HEAD MG (SP) TOOL ( ) Set in NEXT 1 MG (N1) TOOL ( ) Set in NEXT 2 MG (N2) TOOL ( ) Set in NEXT 3 MG (N3) TOOL ( ) Set in INDEX MG (N4) TOOL ( )

OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU

[T-REGISTRATION] TOOL 2.1/2 HEAD NEXT-1 NEXT-2 NEXT-3 SEARCH 10 20 21 30 22 MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D 1 101 0 11 201 0 21 301 0 2 102 0 12 202 0 22 302 0 3 103 0 13 203 0 23 303 0 4 104 0 14 204 0 24 304 0 5 105 0 15 205 0 25 305 0 6 106 0 16 206 0 26 306 0 7 107 0 17 207 0 27 307 0 8 108 0 18 208 0 28 308 0 9 109 0 19 209 0 29 309 0 10 110 0 20 210 0 30 310 0 T 0 M MG( ) TOOL( ) D( ) AUX( )

8 is displayed below HEAD in the data display area and a change is made to MG (N1) in the data setting area.

(Note) Although the title display on the screen top (HEAD,NEXT 1 to NEXT 3, INDEX) varies depending on the machine maker, data is set by using SP And N1 to N4.

3.2.4 Tool Registration Data Clear

Press the

INPUT key. All data displayed in HEAD, NEXT 1 to NEXT 3, INDEX, and MG1 to MGn is cleared.

Set CL in MG ( ).

(Note) If any other key has been pressed before the

INPUT key is pressed, the tool registration data will not be cleared.

3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.2 Tool Registration

I-123

Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.

3.2.5 Manual numeric Command Operation on the TOOL REGISTRATION Screen (M, T) To execute a manual numeric command on the TOOL REGISTRATION screen, first change the mode from

usual data setting to manual numeric command. The M and T commands can be executed by screen operation in manual numeric command mode.

(1) Changing the mode from usual data setting to manual numeric command In the usual data setting mode, the cursor is

displayed in the data setting field. It is not displayed in manual numeric command mode. By checking this difference, make sure that the mode has changed. Change the mode by the following operations:

T M

MG( )TOOL( )D( )AUX( )

Set

M (Manual) in the first parenthesis pair of the setting field.

T M

MG( M )TOOL( )D( )AUX( )

1) This operation is necessary regardless of the

command (M, T).

Press the

INPUT key. The mode changes to manual numerical command.

T M

MG( )TOOL( )D( )AUX( )

1) Data is cleared from the setting field. The cursor is

also cleared from the screen. (2) Execution of the manual numeric command ... Execute this after operation (1) above. 1) Press the address key corresponding to the command. The corresponding command value display

field is highlighted, and the manual numeric command input mode is activated. To execute the tool function, input

T . To execute the miscellaneous function, input

M . 2) Input the specified numerics from keys. 3) Press the

INPUT key. The command is executed.

(Note) The manual numeric command operation is the same as the operation for the POSITION screen. See "2.1.3 Manual numeric Command" in 'POSITION' of 'MONITOR' screen for details.

(3) Returning the mode from manual numeric command to usual data setting

Press the

. The usual data setting mode returns.

T20 M6

MG( )TOOL( )D( )AUX( )

1) The cursor is displayed in first parenthesis pairs.

After this, usual data setting is enabled.

3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.3 Tool Life

I-124

Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.

3.3 Tool Life When the menu key

LIFE is pressed, the TOOL LIFE screen is displayed. The TOOL LIFE screen consists of the HEAD, NEXT, GROUP LIST screen and TOOL LIFE data screen. 3.3.1 Function Outline Tool life management is configured of the following two functions.

(1) The use time or count of the tool mounted on the spindle is accumulated and the tool use state is monitored.

(2) A spare tool is selected among programmed tool commands. Tool position offset and tool diameter compensation are performed for the selected tool.

Related parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit) 1103 T_Life Validate life

management Select the usage of the tool life management function.

0: Do not use. 1: Perform tool life

management control.

1104 T_Com2 Tool command method 2

Select the command method for when #1103 T_Life is set to 1.

0: Handle the program tool command as the group No.

1: Handle the program tool command as the tool No.

0/1

1105 T_sel2 Tool selection method 2

Select the tool selection method for when #1103 T_Life is set to 1.

0: Select in order of registered No. from the tools used in the same group.

1: Select the tool with the longest remaining life from tools used in the same group and the unused tools.

0/1

(Note) Mainly the screen operations are explained in this manual. Refer to the "PLC Programming Manual (Ladder Section)" for details on using the tool life management function.

3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.3 Tool Life

I-125

Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.

3.3.2 TOOL LIFE Screen Data Display (1) HEAD, NEXT, GROUP LIST screen

(Display only. No data can be set).

OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU

[TOOL LIFE] TOOL 4.1/2 GROUP TOOL NO. ST FORM L-CMP R-CMP AUX LIFE USED

HEAD: 10000000 12345678 1 000 -345.678 100.000 12345 234 34(min)

NEXT: 80000000 87654321 0 000 45.678 30.000 12345 234 4(min)

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900

1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000

10000 20000 30000 40000 50000 60000 70000 80000 90000

100000 200000 300000 400000 500000 600000 700000 800000 900000

1000000 2000000 3000000 4000000 5000000 6000000 7000000 8000000 9000000

100000002000000030000000 40000000 50000000 60000000 70000000 80000000 90000000

Display item Explanation HEAD NEXT

The tool numbers and TOOL LIFE data of the tools in HEAD and NEXT are displayed. When TOOL LIFE is ineffective, only the tool numbers are displayed.

GROUP LIST The group numbers registered as TOOL LIFE data are displayed. A maximum of 90 group numbers are displayed on one screen. If the number of the group numbers

exceeds 90, the screen is scrolled every line by using the

or

key.

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900

1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000

10000 20000 30000 40000 50000 60000 70000 80000 90000

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900

1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000

10000 20000 30000 40000 50000 60000 70000 80000 90000

One-line scroll by pressing

key. OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU

OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU

3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.3 Tool Life

I-126

Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.

(2) TOOL LIFE data screen The TOOL LIFE data displays tool data in group units. If the number of lines displayed exceeds one

screen area, press the

NEXT PAGE or

PREVIOUS PAGE key to scroll the screen.

The data to control the life of a group of tools can be displayed and set.

[TOOL LIFE] TOOL 4.2/2

GROUP 10000000

# TOOL NO. ST FROM L-CMP R-CMP AUX LIFE USED

1 12345678 4 220 -345.678 100.000 12345 1234 234(min)

2 1234567 3 120 112.340 30.000 11111 123 45(min)

3 123456 2 111 122.220 20.000 44444 100 50(set)

4 12345 1 002 11.234 100.123 100 50 15(cyc)

5

6

7

8

9

10

# ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU

Display item Explanation Setting range GROUP Group number of the tools which carry out tool life

control. A tool having the same group number is handled as a spare tool.

1 to 99999999

#1 to #10 These are data setting numbers, not magazine pot numbers.

TOOL NO. Number given to each tool. A maximum of 400 tool numbers can be registered depending on the specifications. This is a number unique to the tool actually output during the tool command, etc.

1 to 99999999

ST

Tool status

Open to machine maker Tool Status 0: Unused tool. Normally, it is set to 0 when the tool is replaced

with a new tool. 1: Used tool. It is set to 1 when actual cutting is begun. 2: Normal life tool. It is set to 2 when the use data (time, count)

exceeds the life data. 3: Tool error 1 tool 4: Tool error 2 tool

(Note) 3 and 4 depend on the machine maker specifications.

3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.3 Tool Life

I-127

Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.

Display item Explanation Setting range

FORM

Tool life control mode

Tool diameter compensation data

Tool length offset data format (a) Tool life control mode 0: Use time Controlled by the time during which cutting feed

is performed. 1: Mount count Controlled by the number of times the tool is

used as a spindle tool. Note that if cutting feed (G01, G02, G03, etc.) is not commanded even once after the tool is set as the spindle tool, the mounting will not be counted.

2: Work count Work count The work count is made whenever a rapid

traverse feed (G00, etc.) command is replaced by a cutting feed command (G01, G02, G03, etc.). However, rapid traverse feed or cutting feed commands inducing no movement are ignored.

G00 G01 G04G00 G00 G01 G04 G01

Cutting feed

Increment by 1

Cutting feed

Increment by 1 (b) Tool diameter compensation data format 0: Compensation number Compensation data in tool data is handled as

compensation number. It is replaced with the compensation number commanded in a work program for compensation.

1: Addition compensation amount Compensation data in tool data is handled as

addition compensation amount. It is added to the compensation amount indicated by the compensation number commanded in a work program for compensation.

2: Direct compensation amount Compensation data in tool data is handled as

direct compensation amount. It is replaced with the compensation amount indicated by the compensation number commanded in a work program for compensation.

3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.3 Tool Life

I-128

Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.

Display item Explanation Setting range

FORM (c) Tool length offset data format 0: Offset number 1: Addition offset amount 2: Direct offset amount The functions are the same as in (b) above.

L-CMP R-CMP

These depend on the data format specified in "FORM". Compensation number 1 to 400 Addition compensation amount 1 to 99999.999 Direct compensation amount 1 to 99999.999

AUX This depends on the machine maker specifications. 0 to 65535 LIFE Life of each tool. It is displayed in the use time

(minutes), mount count (the number of times the tool has been mounted on the spindle), or work count (the number of times hole drilling has been performed) as specified in "FORM". If it is set to 0, life infinity is specified.

Use time 0 to 4000 (min) Mount count 0 to 9999/65000 (times) Work count 0 to 9999/65000 (times)

USE Use data of each tool is displayed in the form as specified in FORM (a. Tool life control mode). (Note) Use data is not counted during machine lock, miscellaneous function lock, dry run, or single block mode.

Use time 0 to 4000 (min) Mount count 0 to 9999/65000 (times) Work count 0 to 9999/65000 (times)

(Note) The No. of uses/No. of mounts depends on the model.

3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.3 Tool Life

I-129

Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.

3.3.3 TOOL LIFE Data Display and Setting (TOOL LIFE Data Screen Page 2) (1) Data display When the menu key

NEXT PAGE is pressed on the HEAD, NEXT, GROUP list screen (previously described),

the TOOL LIFE screen is displayed. The data in the group previously set is displayed. If no data is set, the screen is displayed with blank in

the data area.

Press the

INPUT key.

Set G123 in # ( ).

[TOOL LIFE] TOOL 4.2/2

GROUP 123

# TOOL NO. ST FROM L-CMP R-CMP AUX LIFE USED

1 12345678 4 220 -345.678 100.000 12345 1234 234(min)

2 1234567 3 120 112.340 30.000 11111 123 45(min)

3 123456 2 111 122.220 20.000 44444 100 50(set)

4 12345 1 002 11.234 100.123 100 50 15(cyc)

5

6

7

8

9

10

# ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU

Set necessary data of TOOL NO. to USED in the corresponding parenthesis pairs in the ascending order of the (#) numbers, then press the

INPUT key.

Set G in # ( ), then press the

INPUT key.

(2) Data registration Select TOOL LIFE data screen for the group in which data is to be registered.

OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU

[TOOL LIFE] TOOL 4.2/2

GROUP 123

# TOOL NO. ST FROM L-CMP R-CMP AUX LIFE USED

1 12345678 4 220 -345.678 100.000 12345 1234 234(min)

2 1234567 3 120 112.340 30.000 11111 123 45(min)

3 123456 2 111 122.220 20.000 44444 100 50(set)

4 12345 1 002 11.234 100.123 100 50 15(cyc)

5

6

7

8

9

10

# ( 5) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

The data is registered, and a setting number incremented by one is set in #().

(Note 1) If TOOL NO. and ST (status) are not set, setup data becomes invalid. (Note 2) A single tool cannot be registered in more than one group.

The tool data registered in group 123 is displayed in the registration order. If the data exceeds one screen, the remaining data can be seen by using the

NEXT PAGE key.

3. Tool Offset (M system) 3.3 Tool Life

I-130

Refer to "3 (I). Tool Offset (L system)" for L system.

Set 11 in # ( ), then press the

INPUT key.

To register data exceeding the number of data pieces that can be displayed on a screen, set the # number only. New data can be registered.

OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU

7 12345678 4 220 -345.678 100.000 12345 1234 234(min)

8 1234567 3 120 112.340 30.000 11111 123 45(min)

9 123456 2 111 122.220 20.000 44444 100 50(set)

10 12345 1 002 11.234 100.123 100 50 15(cyc)

# ( 11) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

[TOOL LIFE] TOOL 4.2/2

GROUP 123

# TOOL NO. ST FROM L-CMP R-CMP AUX LIFE USED

11

12

13

14

(3) Data change 1) Display the TOOL LIFE data screen for the group in which the tool whose data is to be changed is

registered. 2) Set the # number of the data to be changed and new data in given parenthesis pairs of the setting

area, then press the

INPUT key. 3) After setting, the # number is incremented by one and is set in setting area ( ). 4) To change data under # number not displayed on the screen, change the screen by using the

NEXT PAGE or

PREVIOUS PAGE key or setting the number in setting area # ( ).

5) By changing a registered tool number to 0, the tool can be deleted. (4) Deletion in group units To delete all data in one group, select the TOOL LIFE data screen for the group to be deleted and press

the

SHIFT key,

C.B CAN key, then

INPUT key.

(Note) If any other key has been pressed before the

INPUT key is pressed, the TOOL LIFE data will not be deleted.

3.3.4 Clear of All TOOL LIFE Data (HEAD, NEXT, GROUP LIST Screen Page 1) To clear all data, select the HEAD, NEXT, GROUP LIST screen and press

SHIFT key,

C.B CAN key, then

INPUT key.

(Note) If any other key has been pressed before the

INPUT key is pressed, the TOOL LIFE data will not be cleared.

4. Parameters (User)

I-131

4. Parameters (User) When the function selection key

TOOL

PARAM is pressed, the following menu appears: TOOL menu is displayed after the power is turned ON. To display PARAM menu, use menu key

MENU on the TOOL screen.

WEAR DATA

#1 to #10

TOOL LENGTH

DATA #1 to #10

TOOLNOSE DATA

#1 to #10

TOOL LIFE DATA

#1 to #10

# to #

# to #

# to #

# to #

WORK PROCESS I/O BASE

PARAM

SETUP

PARAMETER

CONTROL

AXIS

BARRIER PARAM

PARAM

PARAM

PARAM

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

Menu selection keysPrevious page key Next page key

TOOL menu display (No.1 to 4) PARAM menu display (No.1 to 4)

WEAR DATA

TOOL LENGTH DATA

TOOL NOSE DATA

TOOL LIFE DATA MENU

PARAM menu (No.1 to 4)

[L system] TOOL menu (No.1 to 4)

[M system] TOOL menu (No.1 to 4)

MG61 to MG80

MG41 to MG60

MG21 to MG40

T- REGISTRATION

MG1 to MG20

# to #

#21 to #40 or #11 to #20

TOOL OFFSET #1 to #20

or #1 to #10

TOOL DATA

TOOL LIFE

CHOSEN TOOL GROUP LIST

TOOL DATA

Refer to TOOL OFFSET

PREVIOUS PAGE

NEXT PAGE

PREVIOUS PAGE

NEXT PAGE

PREVIOUS PAGE

NEXT PAGE

MENU

BACKUP

4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate

I-132

4.1 Workpiece Coordinate Pressing the menu key

WORK displays the WORK OFFSET screen. The workpiece coordinate system offset data can be set or displayed for the number of axes. [WORK OFFSET] TOOL 5. 1/1

#A: ABS. #I: INC. [MACHINE] 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 [TLM] 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 # 54 G54 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 55 G55 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 56 G56 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 57 G57 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 58 G58 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 59 G59 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 60 EXIT 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 # ( ) DATA ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

[When workpiece position measurement specifications are added (M system)]

[WORK OFFSET] TOOL 5. 1/18 #A:ABS. #I:INC.

MACHINE 1.234 -10.987 5.000 0.000 TLM 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 # 54 G54 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 55 G55 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 56 G56 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 60 EXT 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

#1 TLM P.A 0.000 0.000 #2 TLM P.B 0.000 0.000 #3 TLM P.C 0.000 0.000 WLM #( 1) DATA ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) LSK mm INC G40 G54 MEMORY

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate

I-133

# Parameter Explanation Setting range (units)

54 55 56 57 58 59 60 101 : 148

G54 offset G55 offset G56 offset G57 offset G58 offset G59 offset EXT offset P1 : P48

Specify the workpiece coordinate system and external workpiece coordinate offset from G54 to G59, and P1 to P48. Workpiece coordinate system offset data can be specified in absolute or incremental values.

M

R

W2

Basic machine coordinate system

G55 workpiece coordinate system

Reference point

External (EXT) offset

G54 workpiece coordinate system

W1

(Note) P1 to P48 are options.

99999.999 (mm)

#1 TLM P.A (M system)

The coordinate value of the measured position (X, Y) of the first point of he hole center workpiece offset Measurement or the width center workpiece offset Measurement is set. Then TLM P.A is highlighted. If the measurements switch ON or workpiece coordinate is set, the coordinates value of measured position is cleared to 0.

#2 TLM P.B (M system)

The coordinate value of the measured position (X, Y) of the first point of he hole center workpiece offset Measurement or the width center workpiece offset Measurement is set. Then TLM P.B is highlighted. If the measurements switch ON or workpiece coordinate is set, the coordinates value of measured position is cleared to 0.

#3 TLM P.C (M system)

The coordinate value of the measured position (X, Y) of the first point of he hole center workpiece offset Measurement or the width center workpiece offset Measurement is set. Then TLM P.C is highlighted. If the measurements switch ON or workpiece coordinate is set, the coordinates value of measured position is cleared to 0.

4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate

I-134

Display item Explanation

#A: ABS. #I : INC.

The currently effective one of the setting modes (absolute and incremental) is displayed in reverse video. Before setting data, check the mode.

4.1.1 Setting Workpiece Coordinate System Offset Data (1) Enter the number corresponding to the workpiece coordinate system in # ( ), put offset data in DATA

( ), then press the

INPUT key. This defines workpiece coordinate system offset data. (2) The workpiece coordinate system offset data thus defined is then displayed at the position of the

workpiece coordinate system and the number in # ( ) changes to the next setting number and the data in DATA ( ) disappears.

(3) The number displayed in # ( ) is incremented and decremented by pressing the arrow keys

. (4) Typing

in # ( ) and pressing the

INPUT key puts the setting mode to the incremental mode. Data entered in the incremental mode is added to the data in the setting field.

Typing

A in # ( ) and pressing the

INPUT key cancels the incremental mode and restores the absolute mode.

4.1.2 Setting External Workpiece Coordinate System Offset Data By measuring the coordinate system deviation with an external touch sensor, etc., all workpiece coordinate

systems G54 to G59 can be offset. External workpiece coordinate system data can be defined in one of two ways: inputting external data

directly to the external offset (EXT) or entering it into the setting field on the screen (EXT). The setting method is the same as for workpiece coordinate system offset data. 4.1.3 Displaying Machine Position Data As with the POSITION screen, data of each axis displayed at the [MACHINE] on the WORK OFFSET

screen indicates the current machine position in reference to the zero point on the basic machine coordinate system; it cannot be changed on this screen.

4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate

I-135

4.1.4 Workpiece Coordinate Offset Measurement Function (L System) (1) Outline The workpiece coordinate offset data is automatically calculated when the tool nose is aligned to the

workpiece coordinate zero point and the

INPUT

SHIFT keys (

CALC key) are pressed. The calculation results are displayed in the setting area on the screen.

(2) Operation procedures

Start

(a) Returning to zero point

Confirmation of tool length and nose wear

(b) Selecting the tool

(c) Positioning the tool nose

Shift to WORK OFFSET screen

(d) Selecting the measurement workpiece coordinate and axis

(e) Automatically calculating the workpiece coordinate system's offset data

Error?

(f) Setting the data

Continue measurement?

End

No

Yes

Yes

No

No option

Setting error

Measurement axis R point incomplete

Compensation number illegal

Data range exceeded

Steps for measuring workpiece coordinate offset (L system)

4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate

I-136

(a) Returning to zero point After turning the power ON, establish the coordinate system with the dog-type zero point return. If the absolute position is not established when using the absolute position detection specifications,

carry out initialization first. (Note) This is not required if the axis to be measured is an axis with no zero point ("#2031 noref"

= 1). (b) Selecting the tool Execute the T command with the "manual numeric command" on the "POSITION" screen or with

the MDI operation, select the tool. (Note 1) Set the offset number of the selected tool in the R register. (When setting from the user PLC, set as a BCD code.) (Note 2) Preset the "tool length/wear data" for the tool to be used.

(c) Positioning the tool nose Using JOG or the handle, move the nose of the axis to be measured above the workpiece coordinate

system zero point. The workpiece coordinate system offset data is measured one axis at a time.

1) 1st axis (X axis) workpiece coordinate offset measurement

Workpiece

Machine zero point

Turret

Workpiece coordinate system zero point

Z

2) 2nd axis (Z axis) workpiece coordinate offset measurement

Workpiece

Machine zero point Turret

Workpiece coordinate system zero point

Z

X

X

4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate

I-137

(d) Selecting the measurement workpiece coordinate and axis Set the workpiece coordinates to be measured in the # ( ) setting area, and then move the cursor

to the setting area of the axis to be measured. (Example) To measure the X axis (1st axis) of the G55 workpiece coordinate system.

Set 55 in # ( ). 1)

WORK

#(55) DATA ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

Move the cursor to the X axis setting area.

2)

WORK

#(55) DATA ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

(e) Automatically calculating the workpiece coordinate system offset data When the

INPUT

SHIFT keys are pressed, the selected axis' workpiece coordinate offset data will be automatically calculated from the machine value, tool length data and tool nose wear data. The calculation results will be displayed in the setting area.

The setting mode (absolute value setting/increment value setting) will automatically be set to the absolute value setting.

(Example) To calculate X axis (1st axis) in G55 workpiece coordinate system (Step after (d) Selecting the measurement workpiece coordinate and axis.)

Press the

INPUT

SHIFT keys. 3)

WORK

#(55) DATA ( 9.889)( )( )( )

The automatically calculated workpiece coordinate offset data will be displayed at the cursor position (X axis).

1) Details of automatic calculation expression The workpiece coordinate offset data is calculated with the following expression. Workpiece coordinate offset data = machine value (tool length data + tool nose wear data)

Workpiece coordinate offset data (1st axis)

Machine value (1st axis) Machine zero point

Turret

Workpiece coordinate system zero point

Tool length (2nd axis) + tool nose wear offset amount (2nd axis)

Tool length (1st axis) + tool nose wear offset amount (1st axis)

Workpiece coordinate offset data (2nd axis)

Machine value (2nd axis)

4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate

I-138

2) Offset number for selected tool The number set in the following R register is used as the offset number of the tool length and tool

nose wear data used for the automatic calculation.

#1098 TLno.

#1130 set_t

#1218 aux02 /bit4

Tool length offset number

Tool nose wear offset number

0 0/1 0/1 $1: R192,R193 $2: R392,R393

0 $1: R36,R37 $2: R236,R237 0

1 1

1 0/1 $1: R194,R195 $2: R394,R395

$1: R192,R193 $2: R392,R393

(Note 1) The offset amount will be calculated as "0" when the offset number is 0. (Note 2) If the offset number exceeds the specified number of offset sets, the error "#76 TOOL

No. ERROR" will occur. (Note 3) The tool nose wear offset amount will be calculated as "0" when "#1226 aux10/

bit0" is set to 1.

3) Calculating the workpiece coordinate offset data for an additional axis The workpiece coordinate offset data for the 5th to 8th axes is calculated with the tool length

data/tool nose wear data set to "0". As a result, the value will be the same as the machine value. The workpiece coordinate offset data for the 3rd and 4th axes follows the value set in "#1520

Tchg34".

#1520 Tchg34

Workpiece coordinate offset data for 3rd axis

Workpiece coordinate offset data for 4th axis

0 Calculated using the machine value, tool length and wear offset data.

Same as 4th axis' machine value.

1 Same as 3rd axis' machine value. Calculated using the machine value, tool length and wear offset data.

(f) Setting the data If the calculation results displayed in the setting area are correct, press the

INPUT key and set the data.

(Example) To set the G55 workpiece coordinate system's X axis (1st axis) (Step after (e) Automatically calculating the workpiece coordinate system offset data)

Press the

INPUT key. 4)

WORK

54 G54 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 55 G55 9.889 0.000 0.000 0.000

The data is set in G55 X axis.

(3) Precautions

(a) If data is set at the cursor position, it will be overwritten with the calculated value when the

INPUT

SHIFT keys are pressed.

(b) This data cannot be set while the program is running.

4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate

I-139

4.1.5 Workpiece Coordinate Offset Measurement Function (M System) (1) Outline

The current machine position is displayed in the setting area when the

INPUT

SHIFT keys (

CALC key) are pressed.

(2) Operation procedures

(Example) To measure the X axis (1st axis) of the G54 workpiece coordinate system.

Set 54 in # ( ). 1)

WORK

#(54) DATA ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

Move the cursor to the X axis setting area.

2)

WORK

#(54) DATA ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

Press the

INPUT

SHIFT keys. 3)

WORK

#(54) DATA ( 3.987)( )( )( )

The machine position is displayed at the cursor position (X axis).

Press the

INPUT key. 4)

WORK

54 G54 3.987 0.000 0.000 0.000 55 G55 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

The data is set in G54 X axis.

(3) Precautions

(a) The workpiece coordinate offset measurement function will not activate while the tool measurement mode signal is ON (while the TLM switch is ON.) (The

INPUT

SHIFT keys will be ignored.)

(b) If data is set at the cursor position, it will be overwritten with the calculated value when the

INPUT

SHIFT keys are pressed.

(c) This data cannot be set while the program is running.

4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate

I-140

4.1.6 Workpiece position Measurement Function (M System) The workpiece position measurement function is used to measure each axis coordinate point by the sensor

installed on the spindle contacting the workpiece with the manual feed or handle feed. The surface, hole center and width center coordinates are calculated from the measured coordinates, and

those calculated results are set in the workpiece coordinate offset. Only 1st part system is available for the workpiece position measurement. (1) Surface workpiece offset measurement procedure

Perform an operation such as a reference point return to position the tool on the reference point.

1)

Turn ON the measurement switch on the machine operation board.

2) The message " WLM " appears.

Move the sensor near the workpiece using manual feed and manual handle feed.

3)

Put the sensor in contact with the workpiece in the X-axis direction.

4) X

Automatic re-contact movements are performed by the axis at the time of contact. The measurement coordinate value of the moved axis is displayed to the setting column. #( )( 123.456 )( )( )

Set the setting number of workpiece coordinate system, then press the INPUT key. #( 54 )( 123.456 )( )( )

5) The value that subtracted external workpiece offset value from the measurement value is set to the X-axis specified workpiece coordinate system offset. The setting column will change to blanks.

Carry out the operations in steps 3) to 5) in the same way for the Y-axis and Z-axis.

6)

4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate

I-141

Return the sensor to the reference point, and turn OFF the measurement switch.

7) The message " WLM " disappears.

(2) Hole center workpiece offset measurement procedure

Perform an operation such as a reference point return to position the tool on the reference point.

1)

Turn ON the measurement switch on the machine operation board.

2) The message " WLM " appears.

Move the sensor into the hole using manual feed and manual handle feed.

3)

Put the sensor in contact with the inner walls of the hole. Only one axis performs contact to the workpiece.

4)

Automatic re-contact movements are performed by the axis that did contact. The measurement coordinate value of the moved axis is displayed to the setting column. #( )( 123.45 )( )( )

Set the contact position data (measurement coordinate) as point A. #( 1) INPUT

5) The measurement coordinate value is set to point A (X, Y). The setting column is updated to #( 2). The measurement A and data of movement axis are highlighted. The setting column will change to blanks. #1 TLM P. A 12.345 45.678

4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate

I-142

Measure points B and C in the same way, and set them.

6)

(Note) Width center workpiece offset measurement is performed when only points A and B are set. Perform the measurement by one axis.

Point A Point B

Point C

Set the setting number of workpiece coordinate system, then press the INPUT key. #( 54 )( )( )( )

7) The hole center is calculated from points A, B and C. The value that subtracted external workpiece offset value from the calculated hole center value is set. The setting column highlight returns to normal and the value is cleared to 0.

Return the sensor to the reference point, and turn OFF the measurement switch.

8) The message " WLM " disappears.

(3) Width center workpiece offset measurement procedure

Perform an operation such as a reference point return to position the tool on the reference point.

1)

Turn ON the measurement switch on the machine operation board.

2) The message " WLM " appears.

Move the sensor into the groove using manual feed and manual handle feed.

3)

4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate

I-143

Put the sensor in contact with the inner walls of the groove. Only one axis performs contact to the workpiece.

4)

Automatic re-contact movements are performed by the axis at the time of contact. The measurement coordinate value of the moved axis is displayed to the setting column. #( )( 10.567 )( )( )

Set the contact position data (measurement coordinate) as point A.

5) The measurement coordinate value is set to #1 point A (X, Y). The setting column is updated to #( 2). TLM P. A and data of movement axis are highlighted. The setting column will change to blanks. #1 TLM P. A 10.567 5.678

Put the sensor in contact with the opposite side of the groove.

6)

Point A

Set the contact position data (measurement coordinate) as point B.

7) The measurement coordinate value is set to #2 point B (X, Y). TLM P. B and data of movement axis are highlighted.

(Note) Hole center workpiece offset measurement is performed when point C is set to data.

Set the setting number of workpiece coordinate system, then press the INPUT key. #( 54 )( )( )( )

8) The width center is calculated from points A and B. The value that subtracted external workpiece offset value from the calculated width center value is set. The setting column highlight returns to normal and the value is cleared to 0.

4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate

I-144

Return the sensor to the reference point, and turn OFF the measurement switch.

9) The message " WLM " disappears.

(4) Subtracting external workpiece offset when workpiece coordinate offset is set

When workpiece coordinate G54 to G59, offset of expend workpiece coordinate offset P101 to P148 are set ([INPUT]) in the surface, hole center and width center workpiece offset measurement, the coordinate value that subtracted external workpiece offset value from the measurement position coordinate (or hole, width center coordinate) is set.

When External workpiece offset (#1237 set09/bit0) is OFF The workpiece coordinate offset = The measurement (center) coordinate value - The external workpiece offset When External work offset (#1237 set09/bit0) is ON The workpiece coordinate offset = The measurement (center) coordinate value + The external workpiece offset

(5) Automatic re-contact movements at the time of contact

When the measurement is performed during jog mode or handle mode, perform following operation after contact.

Move to the measurement point in jog mode.

1)

Stop on the measurement point. 2)

skip

Return by the return amount of measurement parameter (#8705).

3) Return amount

Move to the measurement point again by feed rate of measurement parameter (#8706).

4)

Stop on the measurement point. (Readout of skip coordinates)

5) skip

4. Parameters (User) 4.1 Workpiece Coordinate

I-145

Return by the return amount of measurement parameter (#8705).

6) Return amount

Complete the measurement. Next measurement can be performed.

7)

The speed for returning of 3), 6) are 40 times higher than the feed rate of measurement parameter (#8706). However, when the speed for returning is higher than rapid traverse feed rate (override 100%), the rapid traverse feed rate of parameter (override 100%) will be applied.

(6) Restrictions a) Measurement points A, B and C are unhighlighted and reset to 0 (not set) when the measurement

switch is turned ON/OFF, setting to the workpiece coordinate offset ends, and when the reset key is pressed.

b) Only 1st system axes can be used as measurement target axes. The measurement target axis corresponds to base-axis (#1026 base_I, #1027 base_J, #1028 base_K).

c) An error will not occur during the measurement, even if there is the axis movement other than that of the base-axis.

d) The skip machine position and measurement points A, B and C are held even when the screen changes during measurement.

e) An axis other than the measurement axis cannot be moved during the automatic re-contact movement.

f) When the return amount of measurement parameter or feed rate is 0, first contact point is measurement point, so automatic re-contact movement is not performed.

g) Perform the measurement during the movement by moving only one axis. h) The settings of the workpiece coordinate offset of surface, hole center and width center measurement

during measurement are set in absolute value mode. i) If rotary axis is set to measurement axis, the hole center / width center cannot be calculated properly by

the angle of the rotation axis.

4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters

I-146

4.2 Machining Parameters Pressing the menu key

PROCESS displays the PROCESS PARAMERTER screen. The number of digits in the decimal section of the parameters related to length is determined by the input

setting unit. The input setting unit is set with parameter "#1003 iunit".

Input setting unit No. of digits in decimal section Example of setting range B 3 0 to 999.999 (mm) C 4 0 to 99.9999 (mm) D 5 0 to 9.99999 (mm)

The setting ranges indicated in this manual use the input setting unit "B". 4.2.1 PROCESS PARAMERTER [PROCESS PARAMETER] PARAM 1.1/8

# - # - # -

8001 WRK COUNT M 0 8007 OVERRIDE 0 8012 G73 n 0.000

8002 WRK COUNT 0 8008 MAX ANGLE 0 8013 G83 n 0.000

8003 WRK LIMIT 0 8009 DSC.ZONE 0.000 8014 CDZ-VALE 0

8015 CDZ-ANGLE 0

8016 G71 MINIMUM 0.000

# - # - 8017 DELTA-D 0.000

8004 SPEED 0 8010 ABS.MAX. 0.000 8018 G84/G74n 0.000

8005 ZONE r 0.000 8011 INC.MAX. 0.000

8006 ZONE d 0.000

# ( )DATA ( )

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

(No. of workpieces machined) # Item Contents Setup range (unit)

8001 WRK COUNT M Set the M code that counts the No. of workpiece repeated machining. The No. will not be counted when set to 0.

0 to 99

8002 WRK COUNT The current machining No. is displayed. Set the initial value.

0 to 999999

8003 WRK LIMIT Set the maximum No. of workpieces machined. A signal is output to PLC when the No. of machining times is counted to this limit.

0 to 999999

(Automatic tool length measurement)

# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8004 SPEED Set the feedrate during automatic tool length

measurement. 1 to 60000 (mm/min)

8005 ZONE r Set the distance between the measurement position and deceleration start point.

0 to 99999.999 (mm)

8006 ZONE d Set the tolerable zone of the measurement position. If the sensor signal turns ON in front of d before the measurement position or if the signal does not turn ON after d is passed an alarm will occur.

0 to 99999.999 (mm)

4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters

I-147

(Automatic corner override) # Item Contents Setup range (unit)

8007 OVERRIDE Set the override value for automatic corner override. 0 to 100 (%) 8008 MAX ANGLE Set the max. corner opening angle where

deceleration should start automatically. If the angle is larger than this value deceleration will not start.

0 to 180 ()

8009 DSC. ZONE Set the position where deceleration starts at the corner. Designate at which length point before the corner deceleration should start.

0 to 99999.999 (mm)

(Wear data input)

# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8010 ABS. MAX.

(For L system only) Set the max. value when inputting the tool wear compensation amount. A value exceeding this setting value cannot be set.

0 to 999.999 (mm)

8011 INC. MAX. (For L system only)

Set the max. value for when inputting the tool wear compensation amount in the addition mode.

0 to 999.999 (mm)

(Fixed cycle)

# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8012 G73 n

(For M system only) Set the return amount for G73 (step cycle). 0 to 99999.999 (mm)

8013 G83 n Set the return amount for G83 (deep hole drilling cycle).

0 to 99999.999 (mm)

8014 CDZ-VALE (For L system only)

Set the screw cut up amount for G76 G78 (thread cutting cycle).

0 to 127 (0.1 lead)

8015 CDZ-ANGLE (For L system only)

Set the screw cut up angle for G76 G78 (thread cutting cycle).

0 to 89 ()

8016 G71 MINIMUM (For L system only)

Set the minimum cut amount for the final cutting in G71 G72 (rough cutting cycle). If the final cutting amount is smaller than this value the final cut will not be performed.

0 to 999.999 (mm)

8017 DELTA-D (For L system only)

Set the change amount to the command cut amount D for G71 G72 (rough cutting cycle). Each cut amount will be the value obtained by adding or subtracting this value from command D and thus the amount can be changed each cut.

0 to 999.999 (mm)

8018 G84/G74 return (For M system only)

Set up return length m at a G84/G74 pecking tap cycle. Note: Set 0 to specify a usual tap cycle.

0 to 999.999 (mm)

4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters

I-148

(High precision control) # Item Contents Setup range (unit)

8019 R COMP Set up a compensation factor for reducing a control error in the reduction of a corner roundness and arch radius. Indicates a maximum control error (mm) in parentheses. The larger the setup value, the smaller the theoretical error will be. However, since the speed at the corner goes down, the cycle time is extended. Coefficient = 100 setting value Note: This is valid when #8021 COMP CHANGE

is set to 0.

0 to 99 (%)

8020 DCC ANGLE Set up the minimum value of an angle (external angle) that should be assumed to be a corner. When an inter-block angle (external angle) in high-precision mode is larger than the set value, it is determined as a corner and the speed goes down to sharpen the edge.

If the set value is smaller than , the speed goes down to optimize the corner.

Note: If 0 is set, it will be handled as 5 degrees.

The standard setting value is 0.

0 to 89 (degrees) 0: The angle will be

5.

8021 COMP CHANGE Select whether to share or separate the compensation coefficient at the corner/curve during the high-accuracy control mode. 0: Share (#8019 R COMP) 1: Separate Corner (#8022 CORNER COMP) Curve (#8023 CURVE COMP) Note: Set "1" when using SSS control.

0/1

8022 CORNER COMP Set the compensation coefficient to further reduce or increase the roundness at the corner during the high-accuracy control mode. Coefficient = 100 setting value Note: This is valid when #8021 COMP CHANGE

is set to 1.

1000 to 99 (%)

8023 CURVE COMP Set the compensation coefficient to further reduce or increase the radius reduction amount at the curve (arc, involute, spline) during the high-accuracy control mode. Coefficient = 100 setting value Note: This is valid when #8021 COMP CHANGE

is set to 1.

1000 to 99 (%)

8024 EDGE ANGLE Not used.

4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters

I-149

(High precision control) # Item Contents Setup range (unit)

8025 SPLINE ON (for M system only)

Specify whether to enable the fine spline function. 0: Disable the fine spline function. 1: Enable the fine spline function.

0/1

8026 CANCEL ANG. (for M system only)

When the angle made by blocks exceeds the set value, spline interpolation is canceled temporarily. In consideration of the pick feed, set a value a little smaller than the pick feed angle.

0 to 180 0: 180

8027 Toler-1 (for M system only)

Specify the maximum chord error in a block that includes an inflection point. Set the tolerance applicable when the applicable block is developed to fine segments by CAM. (normally about 10 m) When 0.000 is set, the applicable block is linear.

At 1m 0.000 to 100.000mm At 0.1m 0.0000 to

10.0000mm 8028 Toler-2

(for M system only) Specify the maximum chord error in a block that includes no inflection point. Set the tolerance applicable when the applicable block is developed to fine segments by CAM. (normally about 10 m) When 0.000 is set, the applicable block is linear.

At 1m 0.000 to 100.000mm At 0.1m 0.0000 to

10.0000mm 8029 FairingL

(for M system only) Set the length of the block subject to fairing. (Valid when #8033 Fairing ON is set to 1.)

0 to 100.000mm

8030 MINUTE LENGTH (for M system only)

When the length of one block exceeds the set value, spline interpolation is canceled temporarily and linear interpolation is performed. Set a value a little smaller than linear block length of the workpiece to be machined. If - 1 is set, spline interpolation is performed regardless of block length.

1 to 127mm 0: 1mm

8033 Fairing ON (for M system only)

Set whether to use the fairing function. 0: Fairing invalid 1: Fairing valid

0/1

8034 AccClamp ON (for M system only)

Set the method for clamping the cutting speed. 0: Clamp with parameter #2002 clamp or the

corner deceleration function. 1: Clamp the cutting speed with acceleration

judgment. (Valid when #8033 Fairing ON is set to 1.)

0/1

8035 AccClampMag Not used. 8036 CordecJudge

(for M system only) Change the conditions for judging a corner. 0: Judge the corner from the angle of the

neighboring block. 1: Judge the corner from the angle of the

neighboring block, excluding minute blocks. (Valid when #8033 Fairing ON is set to 1.)

0/1

8037 CorJudgeL (for M system only)

Set the length of the block to be excluded. (Valid when #8036 CordecJudge is set to 1.)

0 to 99999.999 (mm)

4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters

I-150

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)

8041 C-rot.R This is valid with normal line control type II. Set the length from the center of the normal line control axis to the end of the tool. This is used to calculate the turning speed at the block joint.

0.000 to 99999.999 (mm)

8042 C-ins.R This is valid with normal line control type I. Set the radius of the arc to be automatically inserted into the corner during normal line control.

0.000 to 99999.999 (mm)

# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8051 G71 THICK Set the amount of cut-in by the rough cutting cycle

(G71, G72) 0 to 99999.999 (mm)

8052 PULL UP Set the amount of recess after cutting by the rough cutting cycle (G71, G72).

0 to 99999.999 (mm)

8053 G73 U Set the X-axis cutting margin of the forming rough cutting cycle (G73).

99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

8054 W Set the Z-axis cutting margin of the forming rough cutting cycle (G73).

99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

8055 R Set the number of times cutting is performed by the forming rough cutting cycle (G73).

0 to 99999 (times)

8056 G74 RETRACT Set the amount of retract (amount of cut-up) of the push-cut cycle (G74, G75).

0 to 999.999 (mm)

8057 G76 LAST-D Set the amount of final cut-in by the composite threading cycle (G76).

0 to 999.999 (mm)

8058 TIMES Set the number of times the amount of final cut-in (G76 finish margin) is divided in the composite threading cycle (G76).

0 to 99 (times)

8059 ANGLE Set the angle (thread angle) of the tool nose in the composite threading cycle (G76).

0 to 99 ()

# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8071 3-D CMP

(for M system only) Value of p in the following denominator constants for three-dimensional tool radius compensation Vx = i x r/p, Vy = j x r/p, Vz = k x r/p Vx, Vy, Vz: X, Y, and Z axes or vectors of horizontal axes i, j, k: Program command value r: Offset

p = 222 kji ++ when the set value is 0.

0 to 99999.999

4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters

I-151

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)

8072 SCALING P (for M system only)

Set the scale factor for reduction or magnification for the machining program for which the G50 or G51 command is issued. This parameter is effective when the program specifies no scale factor.

0 to 99.999999

# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8073 OfsetPosition

(for M system only) Set the tool offset memory number position for writing the tool information data's tool length offset amount, tool radius compensation amount, tool length wear amount and tool radius wear amount into the tool offset data. Note: If 0 or a value exceeding the number of tool

compensation sets is set, the data will not be written into the tool offset data.

0 to 999

8074 IDMacroTop (for M system only)

Set the head position when writing the tool information data's user areas 4 to 9 in the macro variables.

0 to 999

# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8075 SpiralEndErr

(for M system only) Designate the tolerable error range (absolute value) when the end point position commanded with the command format type 2 spiral interpolation or conical interpolation command differs from the end point position obtained from the speed and increment/ decrement amount.

0 to 99999.999 (mm)

8076 SpiralMinRad (for M system only)

Not used.

# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8077 InvoluteErr

(for M system only) Set the tolerable error value of the involute curve that passes through the start point and the involute curve that passes through the end point during involute interpolation.

0 to 99999.999 (mm)

# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8078 Screen Saver Set the time to turn the screen OFF.

The screen saver will not turn ON if 0 is set. (Note) This parameter setting is valid only for the

LCD display unit.

0 to 60 (min) 0: Do not turn screen

OFF.

4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters

I-152

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)

8083 G83S modeM (for M system only)

Set the M command code for changing to the small diameter deep hole drilling cycle mode.

1 to 99999999

8084 G83S Clearanse (for M system only)

Set the clearance amount for the G83 small diameter deep hole drilling cycle.

0 to 999.999 (mm)

8085 G83S Forward F (for M system only)

Set the feedrate from the R point to the cutting start position in the G83 small diameter deep hole drilling cycle.

0 to 99999 (mm/min)

8086 G83S Back F (for M system only)

Set the speed for returning from the hole base during the G83 small diameter deep hole drilling cycle.

0 to 99999 (mm/min)

# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8090 SSS ON

(for M system only) Set whether to validate SSS control with G05 P10000.

0: Invalid 1: Valid

0/1

8091 StdLength (for M system only)

Adjust the maximum value of the range for recognizing the shape. To eliminate the effect of steps or errors, etc., set a large value. To enable sufficient deceleration, set a small value. If "0.000" is set, the standard value (1.000mm) will be applied.

0 to 100.000 (mm)

8092 ClampCoeff (for M system only)

Adjust the clamp speed at the curved section configured of fine segments.

Coefficient = setting value

1 to 100

8093 StepLeng (for M system only)

Set the width of the step at which the speed is not to be decelerated. (Approximately the same as the CAM path difference [Tolerance].) If 0 is set, the standard value (5m) will be applied. If a minus value is set, the speed will decelerate at all minute steps.

-0.001 to 0.100 (mm)

8094 DccWaitAdd (for M system only)

Set the time to wait for deceleration when the speed FB does not drop to the clamp speed.

0 to 100 (ms)

8095 Tolerance (for M system only)

Set the tolerable error when the error between the command path and tool path is large. The error will decrease when a small value is set, but the machining time will increase. If "0.000" is set, the error will not be adjusted.

0 to 100.000 (mm)

4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters

I-153

4.2.2 Control Parameters [CONTROL PARAMETER] PARAM 1.5/8

# # 8101 MACRO SINGLE 0 8113 MillingInitG16 8102 COLL. ALM OFF 0 8114 MillingInitG19 8103 COLL. CHK OFF 0 8115 8104 8116 8105 EDIT LOCK B 0 8117 8106 G46 NO REV-ERR 0 8118 8107 R COMPENSATION 0 8119 8108 R COMP Select 0 8120 8109 HOST LINK 0 8121 8110 G71/G72 POCKET 0 8122 8111 Milling Radius 0 8123 8112 DECIMAL PNT-P 0 8124 # ( ) DATA( )

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8101 MACRO SINGLE Select the control of the blocks where the user

macro command continues. 0: Do not stop while macro block continues. 1: Stop every block during signal block

operation.

0/1

8102 COLL. ALM OFF Select the interference (bite) control to the workpiece from the tool diameter during tool radius compensation and nose R compensation.

0: An alarm is output and operation stops when an interference is judged.

1: Changes the path to avoid interference.

0/1

8103 COLL. CHK OFF Select the interference (bite) control to the workpiece from the tool diameter during tool radius compensation and nose R compensation.

0: Performs interference check. 1: Does not perform interference check.

0/1

8105 EDIT LOCK B Select the edit lock for program Nos. 8000 to 9999. 0: Program can be edited. 1: Editing of above program is prohibited.

0/1

8106 G46 NO REV-ERR (For L system only)

Select the control for the compensation direction reversal in G46 (nose R compensation).

0: An alarm is output and operation stops when the compensation direction is reversed (G41 G42 G42 G41).

1: An alarm does not occur when the compensation direction is reversed and the current compensation direction is maintained.

0/1

4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters

I-154

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)

8107 R COMPENSATION 0: In arc cutting mode, the machine moves to the inside because of a delay in servo response to a command, making the arc smaller than the command value.

1: In arc cutting mode, the machine compensates the movement to the inside because of a delay in servo response to a command

0/1

8108 R COMP Select Specify whether to perform arc radius error correction over all axes or axis by axis.

0: Perform correction over all axes. 1: Perform correction over axis by axis. Note: This parameter is effective only when

#8107 R COMPENSATION is 1.

0/1

8109 HOST LINK Specify whether to enable computer link B instead of the RS-232C port.

0: Disable computer link B to enable normal RS-232C communication.

1: Enable computer link B to disable normal RS-232C communication.

0/1

8110 G71/G72 POCKET Set the pocket machining if there is a dimple (pocket) in the rough cutting cycle (G71, G72) finishing program.

0: Pocket machining OFF 1: Pocket machining ON

0/1

8111 Milling Radius Select the diameter and radius of the linear axis for milling (cylindrical/pole coordinate) interpolation.

0: All axes radius command 1: Each axis setting (follows #1019 dia diameter

designated axis) Note: This parameter is valid only in the milling

(cylindrical/pole coordinate) interpolation mode.

0/1

8112 DECIMAL PNT-P 0: The decimal point command for G04 address P is invalidated.

1: The decimal point command for G04 address P is validated.

0/1

8113 MillingInitG16 0: Plane other than G16

1: Select G16 plane

8114 MillingInitG19

Designate which plane to use for milling machining after the power is turned ON or reset.

#8113 #8114 Plane 0 0 G17 plane 0 1 G19 plane 1 0 1 1 G16 plane

Note: This parameter is valid for the G code system

2, 3 (#1037 cmdtyp=3, 4).

0: Plane other than G19

1: Select G19 plane

4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters

I-155

4.2.3 Axis Parameters [AXIS PARAMETER] PARAM 1.6/8

# 8201 AX. RELEASE 0 0 0 0 8202 OT-CHECK OFF 0 0 0 0 8203 OT-CHECK-CANCEL 0 0 0 0 8204 OT-CHECK-N 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 8205 OT-CHECK-P 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 8206 TOOL CHG.P 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 8207 G76/87 IGNR 0 0 0 0 8208 G76/87 (-) 0 0 0 0 8209 G60SHIFT 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 8210 OT INSIDE 0 0 0 0 8211 8212 # ( ) DATA( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)

8201 AX. RELEASE Select the function to remove the control axis from the control target.

0: Control as normal. 1: Remove from control target.

0/1

8202 OT-CHECK OFF Select the stored stroke limit II function set in #8204 and #8205.

0: Stored stroke limit II valid 1: Stored stroke limit II invalid

0/1

8203 OT-CHECK-CANCEL When the simple absolute position method (#2049 type is 9) is selected the stored stroke limits I, II (or IIB) and IB will be invalid until the first zero point return is executed after the power is turned ON.

0: Stored stroke limit II valid (according to #8202)

1: Stored stroke limit II invalid Note: Temporary cancel of #8203 soft limit affects

all the stored stroke limits.

0/1

8204 OT-CHECK-N This sets the coordinates of the () direction in the moveable range of the stored stroke limit II or the lower limit coordinates of the prohibited range of stored stroke limit IIB. If the sign and value are the same as #8205, the stored stroke limit II (or IIB) will be invalid. If the stored stroke limit IIB function is selected, the prohibited range will be between two points even when #8204 and #8205 are set in reverse. When II is selected, the entire range will be prohibited.

99999.999 (mm)

4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters

I-156

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)

8205 OT-CHECK-P This sets the coordinates of the (+) direction in the moveable range of the stored stroke limit II or the upper limit coordinates of the prohibited range of stored stroke limit IIB.

99999.999 (mm)

8206 TOOL CHG. P Set the coordinates of the tool change position for G30. n (tool change position return). Set with coordinates in the basic machine coordinate system.

99999.999 (mm)

8207 G76/87 IGNR (For M system only)

Select the shift operation at G76 (fine boring) and G87 (back boring).

0: Shift effective 1: No shift

8208 G76/87 () (For M system only)

Specifies the shift direction at G76 and G87. 0: Shift to (+) direction

1: Shift to () direction

8209 G60 SHIFT (For M system only)

Set the last positioning direction and distance for a G60 (uni-directional positioning) command.

99999.999 (mm)

8210 OT INSIDE The stored stoke limit function to be set in #8204 and #8205 prevents the machine from moving to the inside or outside of the specified range.

0: Inhibits outside area (select stored stroke limit II.)

1: Inhibits inside area (select stored stroke limit II B.)

0/1

8211 MIRR. IMAGE Enable or disable the parameter mirror image function.

0: Disable 1: Enable

0/1

4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters

I-157

4.2.4 Barrier Data [BARRIER] PARAM 1.7/8

# 8300 P0 X 0.000 8301 P1 X 0.000 Z 0.000 8302 P2 X 0.000 Z 0.000 8303 P3 X 0.000 Z 0.000 8304 P4 X 0.000 Z 0.000 8305 P5 X 0.000 Z 0.000 8306 P6 X 0.000 Z 0.000 # ( ) X( ) Z( )

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

P1 P4

P2 P5

P3 P6

P0

# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8300 PO

(For L system only) Set the reference X-coordinates of the chuck and the tail stock barrier. Set the center coordinate (Radius value) of workpiece by the basic machine coordinate system.

99999.999 (mm)

8301 8302 8303 8304 8305 8306

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 (For L system only)

Set the area of the chuck and tail stock barrier. (Radius value) Set the coordinate value from the center of workpiece for X-axis. Set the coordinate value by basic machine coordinate system for Z-axis.

99999.999 (mm)

8310 Barrier ON (For L system only)

Select the validity of the chuck and tailstock barrier. 0: Invalid (Setting from special display unit valid) 1: Valid

0/1

8311 8312

P7 P8 (For L system only)

Set the area of the left spindle section. X axis: Set the coordinate value from the

workpiece center (P0). (radius value) Z axis: Set the coordinates in the basic

machine coordinate system.

99999.999 (mm)

8313 8314

P9 P10 (For L system only)

Set the area of the right spindle section. X axis: Set the coordinate value from the

workpiece center (P0). (radius value) Z axis: Set the coordinates in the basic

machine coordinate system.

99999.999 (mm)

8315 BARRIER TYPE (L) (For L system only)

Set the shape of the left chuck and tailstock barrier. 0: No area 1: Chuck 2: Tailstock

0/1/2

4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters

I-158

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)

8316 BARRIER TYPE I (For L system only)

Set the shape of the right chuck and tailstock barrier.

0: No area 1: Chuck 2: Tailstock

0/1/2

8317 DELIV. AX. NAME (For L system only)

When the right chuck and tailstock barrier is movable, set the name of the delivery axis. When using the 2-system method and the delivery axis is an axis in the other system, designate the system as 1A, 1B or 2A, 2B. If the system is not designated as A and B, the set system will be used.

A/B/.. (axis address)

1A/1B/.. 2A/2B/.. (system designation)

0 (cancel) 8318 STOCK ANGLE (L)

(For L system only) Set the angle for the left tailstock end section. The angle will be interpreted as 90 if there is no setting (0).

0 to 180 () 0: 90 default

8319 STOCK ANGLE I (For L system only)

Set the angle for the right tailstock end section. The angle will be interpreted as 90 if there is no setting (0).

0 to 180 ()

4. Parameters (User) 4.2 Machining Parameters

I-159

4.2.5 Tool Measurement Parameter [TLM PARAMETER] PARAM 1.8/8

# 8701 Tool Length 8702 Tool Dia 8703 OFFSET X 8704 Y 8705 RETURN 8706 FEED # ( ) X( ) Z( )

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8701 Tool length Set the length to the end of the touch tool. 99999.999 (mm) 8702 Tool Dia Set the spherical diameter of the touch tool end. 99999.999 (mm) 8703 OFFSET X Set the spindle center deviation amount from the

touch tool center in the X axis direction. 99999.999 (mm)

8704 Y Set the spindle center deviation amount from the touch tool center in the Y axis direction.

99999.999 (mm)

8705 RETURN Set the return distance to contact the touch tool against the workpiece again.

99999.999 (mm)

8706 FEED Set the ederate when contacting the touch tool against the workpiece again.

1 to 60000 (mm/min)

4. Parameters (User) 4.3 I/O Parameters

I-160

4.3 I/O Parameters Pressing the menu key

I/O PARA displays the I/O BASE PARAM screen. There are basically two types of input/output parameters which must be set when inputting, outputting or

referring to data, or when performing tape operation. One type is the parameters related to the input/output device. The baud rate, etc., is set according to each device. Up to five types of input/output devices can be registered. The other type of input/output parameters is the I/O base parameters which determine which device is connected to which channel per input/output application.

4.3.1 I/O BASE PARAM [I/O BASE PARAM] PARAM 2.1/7

# # DATA IN 9001 - 9002 - DATA OUT 9003 - 9004 - NC RUNNING 9005 - 9006 - MACRO PRINT 9007 - 9008 - PLC IN/OUT 9009 - 9010 - REMOTE PROG IN 9011 2 9012 0 RIN EXT UNIT 9013 0 9014 0 # ( ) DATA( )

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

# #

Specify the board No. to which the serial input/output device is connected to 2. Set 1 to use ch1. Set 2 to use ch2.

Set the input/output device No. for each application. The device Nos. are 0 to 4 and correspond to the input/output device parameters. The device name set in the input/output device parameter is also displayed for identification.

DATA IN 9001 Specify the port for inputting the data such as machine program and parameters.

9002 Specify the No. of the device that inputs the data.

DATA OUT 9003 Specify the port for outputting the data such as machine program and parameters.

9004 Specify the No. of the device that outputs the data.

TAPE MODE 9005 Specify the input port for running with the tape mode.

9006 Specify the No. of the device to be run with the tape mode.

MACRO PRINT

9007 Specify the output port for the user macro DPRINT command.

9008 Specify the No. of the device for the DPRINT command.

PLC IN/OUT 9009 Specify the port for inputting/outputting various data with PLC.

9010 Specify the No. of the device for the PLC input/output.

REMOTE PROG IN

9011 Specify the port for inputting remote programs.

9012 Specify the number of the device used to input remote programs.

EXT UNIT 9013 Specify the port for communication with an external unit.

9014 Specify the number of the unit used for communication with an external unit

4. Parameters (User) 4.3 I/O Parameters

I-161

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)

9015 PORT NO. (tool ID)

Set the number of the port connected with the tool ID. (Either ch1 or ch2 can be used.) Set 1 to use ch1. Set 2 to use ch2.

1/2 (M64)

9016 DEV. NO. (tool ID)

Set the number of the input/output device to be used. (Any device No. can be used.)

0 to 4 (M64)

4. Parameters (User) 4.3 I/O Parameters

I-162

4.3.2 I/O DEVICE PARAM

Parameters for up to five types of input/output devices can be set in DEV <0> to <4>. [I/O DEVICE PARAM] DEV 0 PARAM 2.2/7

# # # 9101 DEVICE NAME - 9111 DC2/DC4 OUTPUT - 9121 EIA CODE [ - 9102 BAUD RATE - 9112 CR OUTPUT - 9122 ] - 9103 STOP BIT - 9113 EIA OUTPUT - 9123 # - 9104 PARITY CHECK - 9114 FEED CHR. - 9124 - 9105 EVEN PARITY - 9115 PARITY V - 9125 = - 9106 CHR. LENGTH - 9116 TIME-OUT(sec) - 9126 : - 9107 TERMINATOR TYPE - 9117 DR OFF - 9127 $ - 9108 HAND SHAKE - 9118 DATA ASCII - 9128 ! - 9109 DC CODE PARITY - 9119 INPUT TYPE - 9129 9110 9120 9130 # ( ) DATA ( )

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

# Item Contents Setup range (unit) 9101 DEVICE NAME Set the device name corresponding to the device

No. Set a simple name for quick identification.

Use alphabet characters numerals and symbols to set a name within 3 characters.

9102 BAUD RATE Set the serial communication speed. 0: 19200 (bps) 1: 9600 2: 4800 3: 2400 4: 1200 5: 600 6: 300 7: 150

9103 STOP BIT Set the stop bit length used in the start-stop system. 1: 1 (bit) 2: 1.5 3: 2

9104 PARITY CHECK Specify whether to add the parity check bit to the data during communication.

0: Parity bit not added

1: Parity bit added 9105 EVEN PARITY Specify the odd or even parity when it is added to

the data. 0: Odd parity 1: Even parity

9106 CHR. LENGTH Set the length of the data bit. 0: 5 (bit) 1: 6 2: 7 3: 8

9107 TERMINATOR TYPE The code to terminate data reading can be selected. 0 and 3: EOR 1 and 2: EOB or EOR

4. Parameters (User) 4.3 I/O Parameters

I-163

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)

9108 HAND SHAKE Specify the transmission control method. The method will be no procedure if a value except 1 to 3 is set.

1: RTS/CTS method 2: No procedure (No

handshaking) 3: DC code method

9109 DC CODE PARITY Specify the DC code when the DC code method is selected.

0: No parity to DC code (DC3 = 13H)

1: DC code with parity (DC3 = 93H)

9111 DC2/DC4 OUTPUT Specify the DC code handling when outputting data to the output device.

DC2 / DC4 0: None / None 1: Yes / None 2: None / Yes 3: Yes / Yes

9112 CR OUTPUT Specify whether to insert the code just before the EOB (L/F) code during output.

0: Do not add 1: Add

9113 EIA OUTPUT In data output mode, select the ISO or EIA code for data output. In data input mode, the ISO and EIA codes are identified automatically.

0: ISO code output 1: EIA code output

9114 FEED CHR. Specify the length of the tape feed to be output at the start and end of the data during tape output.

0 to 999 (characters)

9115 PARITY V Specify whether to check the parity of the No. of characters in block during data input. The No. of characters is factory-set so that the check is valid at all times.

0: Do not perform parity V check

1: Perform parity V check

9116 TIME-OUT Set the time out time to detect an interruption in communication. Time out check will not be executed when set to 0 to 30 seconds.

0 to 30 (s)

9117 DR OFF Specify whether to check the DR data at the data input/output.

0: DR valid 1: DR invalid

9118 DATA ASC II 0: Output in ISO/EIA code (Depends on whether #9113, #9213, #9313, #9413, or #9513 EIA output parameter is set up)

1: Output in ASC II code

0/1

9119 INPUT FORM Specify the mode for input (collation). 0: Standard input (Data from the very first EOB is

handled as significant information.) 1: EOBs following the first EOB of the input data are

skipped until data other than EOB is input.

0/1

4. Parameters (User) 4.3 I/O Parameters

I-164

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)

9121 9122 9123 9124 9125 9126 9127 9128

EIA CODE [ ] # = : $ !

When output with EIA code data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code not included in EIA is specified. Specify the codes which do not duplicate the existing EIA codes by hexadecimal for respective special codes.

0 to FF (hexadecimal)

9201 Set the same settings for device 1.

9301 Set the same settings for device 2.

9401 Set the same settings for device 3.

9501 Set the same settings for device 4.

4. Parameters (User) 4.3 I/O Parameters

I-165

4.3.3 COMPUTER LINK PARAMETER [COMPUTER LINK PARAMETER] PARAM 2.7/7

# # # 9601 BAUD RATE 0 9611 LINK PARAM. 3 00 9621 DC1 OUT SIZE 0 9602 STOP BIT 0 9612 LINK PARAM. 4 00 9622 POLLING TIMER 0 9603 PARITY EFFECTIVE 0 9613 LINK PARAM. 5 00 9623 TRANS. WAIT TMR 0 9604 EVEN PARITY 0 9614 START CODE 0 9624 RETRY COUNTER 0 9605 CHR. LENGTH 0 9615 CTRL. CODE OUT 00 9625 0 9606 HAND SHAKE 0 9616 CTRL. INTERVAL 0 9626 9607 TIME-OUT SET 0 9617 WAIT TIME 0 9627 9608 DATA CODE 0 9618 PACKET LENGTH 0 9628 9609 LINK PARAM. 1 00 9619 BUFFER SIZE 0 9629 9610 LINK PARAM. 2 00 9620 START SIZE 0 9630 #( )DATA( )

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)

9601 BAUD RATE Specify the rate at which data is transferred. 0: 19200 (bps) 1: 9600 2: 4800 3: 2400 4: 1200 5: 600 6: 300 7: 110 8: 38400

9602 STOP BIT Specify stop bit length used in start-stop mode. See PARITY EFFECTIVE in #9603. The number of characters is adjusted in output mode so that no problems occur if the parity check is enabled.

1: 1 2: 1.5 3: 2

9603 PARITY EFFECTIVE This parameter is set when using a parity bit separately from the data bit.

ON OFF

Start bit Data bit

b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 bn

1 character

Stop bitParity bit Set this to match the input/output device specifications.

0: No parity bit used in I/O mode

1: Parity bit used in I/O mode

9604 EVEN PARITY Specify whether even or odd parity is used when parity is used. This parameter is ignored when no parity is used.

0: Odd parity 1: Even parity

9605 CHR. LENGTH Specify data bit length. See PARITY EFFECTIVE in #9603.

2: 7 3: 8

4. Parameters (User) 4.3 I/O Parameters

I-166

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)

9606 HAND SHAKE RS-232C transmission control mode DC control mode should be set for computer line B.

0: No control 1: RTS/CTS method 2: No handshaking 3: DC control mode

9607 TIME-OUT SET Specify time-out time at which an interruption of data transfer during data input/output should be detected. If 0 is set, time infinity is specified.

0 to 999 (1/10s)

9608 DATA CODE Specify the code to be used. See PARITY EFFECTIVE in #9603.

0: ASCII code 1: ISO code

9609 LINK PARAM. 1 Bit 1: DC1 output after NAK or SYN Specify whether to output the DC1 code after the

NAK or SYN code is output. Bit 7: Enable/disable resetting Specify whether to enable resetting in the

computer link.

0: Don't output the DC1 code.

1: Output the DC1 code.

0: Enable resetting

in the computer link.

1: Disable resetting in the computer link

9610 LINK PARAM. 2 Bit 2: Specify the control code parity (even parity for the control code).

Set the parity in accordance with the I/O device specifications.

Bit 3: Parity V Specify whether to enable checking of parity V in

one block in data input mode.

0: No control code parity added

1: Control code parity added

0: Disable 1: Enable

9611 LINK PARAM. 3 Not used 9612 LINK PARAM.4 Not used 9613 LINK PARAM.5 Not used 9614 START CODE Specify the code by which file data transfer begins

at first. This parameter is used for a specific user, and set 0 in this parameter for normal operation.

0: DC1 (11H) 1: BEL (07H)

4. Parameters (User) 4.3 I/O Parameters

I-167

# Item Contents Setup range (unit)

9615 CTRL. CODE OUT Bit 0: NAK output Specify whether to send the NAK code to the host if a communication error occurs in computer link B.

Bit 1: SYN output Specify whether to send the SYN code to the host if NC resetting or an emergency stop occurs in computer link B.

Bit 3: DC3 output Specify whether to send the DC3 code to the host when communication ends in computer link B.

0: Do not output the NAK code.

1: Output the NAK code.

0: Do not output the

SYN code. 1: Output the SYN

code. 0: Do not output the

DC3 code. 1: Output the DC3

code. 9615 CTRL. CODE OUT Bit 0: NAK output

Specify whether to send the NAK code to the host if a communication error occurs in computer link B.

Bit 1: SYN output Specify whether to send the SYN code to the host if NC resetting or an emergency stop occurs in computer link B.

Bit 3: DC3 output Specify whether to send the DC3 code to the host when communication ends in computer link B.

0: Do not output the NAK code.

1: Output the NAK code.

0: Do not output the

SYN code. 1: Output the SYN

code. 0: Do not output the

DC3 code. 1: Output the DC3

code. 9616 CTRL. INTERVAL Not used 9617 WAIT TIME Not used 9618 PACKET LENGTH Not used 9619 BUFFER SIZE Not used 9620 START SIZE Not used 9621 DC1 OUT SIZE Not used 9622 POLLING TIMER Not used 9623 TRANS. WAIT TMR Not used 9624 RETRY COUNTER Not used

4. Parameters (User) 4.4 Setup Parameters

I-168

4.4 Setup Parameters Pressing the menu key

SETUP displays the OPEN SETUP PARAM screen. The system's basic parameters are normally hidden as setup parameters to prevent mistaken operations

and to simplify the display. The setup parameters can be displayed and set by making a declaration to open the setup parameters on

this screen. [OPEN SETUP PARAM] PARAM 3. 1/2

Open the menu setup parameter?

YES : "Y" "INPUT"

NO : "N" "INPUT"

# ( )

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU 1) Select the setup parameter. Key-in "Y" in # ( ), and then press

INPUT key. The normally hidden setup parameter menu will display when the menu changes over. The required menu can be selected to display and set the setup parameters. 2) Cancel the setup parameter selection. Key-in "N" in # ( ), and then press

INPUT key. The setup parameter menu will disappear. (Note) The setup parameters are not displayed when the power is turned ON. Refer to Alarm/Parameter Manual (BNP-B2201) for details on the setup parameters. Always turn the power OFF after selecting the setup parameters.

4. Parameters (User) 4.5 BACKUP Screen

I-169

4.5 BACKUP Screen If the page key

NEXT PAGE is pressed on the SETUP screen, the BACK UP screen will open.

[OPEN BACKUP] PARAM 3. 2/2

Open the BACKUP screen?

YES : "Y" "INPUT"

NO : "N" "INPUT"

# ( )

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU Input "Y" in the setting area # ( ), and press the

INPUT key. The BACKUP screen will open. [BACKUP] PARAM 3

Please execute "EMERGENCY STOP" before operation. #1 BACKUP BACKUP INFORMATION #2 RESTORE SAVE DATE 01/09/05 16:24 SER.NO. M6123456789

# ( ) ( )

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

The date and time that the backup data was saved, and the serial No. are displayed on this screen.

4. Parameters (User) 4.5 BACKUP Screen

I-170

4.5.1 Backup Operations The parameters are backed up in the maintenance memory cassette with the following steps.

"EMG EMERGENCY" will appear at the operation message area.

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

#( ) ( ) EMG EMERGENCY

Execute emergency stop. (1)

#(1) ( ) PLC STOP Y/N EMG EMERGENCY

Input "1" at the setting area # ( ), and press the

INPUT key.

(2)

"PLC STOP Y/N" will appear at the message area. WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

#(1) ( Y) BACKUP EXEC Y/N EMG EMERGENCY

Input "Y" at the setting area ( ), and press the

INPUT key.

(3)

"BACKUP EXEC Y/N" will appear at the message area.

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

Input "Y" at the setting area ( ), and press the

INPUT key.

(4) #(1) ( Y) BACKUP EXECUTION EMG EMERGENCY

(a) The message "BACKUP EXECUTION" will appear while the parameters are being backed up.

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

(b) The message "BACKUP COMPLETE" will appear when backup is completed.

#( ) ( ) BACKUP COMPLETE EMG EMERGENCY

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

(Note 1) Other screens cannot be opened during this operation. (Note 2) If the PLC is already stopped, step (3) is skipped. The PLC will not start running even when the operations are completed. (Note 3) If the

INPUT key is pressed without inputting anything at the "~Y/N" display, the error "E01 SETTING ERROR" will occur.

(Note 4) Even if the PLC RUN/STOP changeover is prohibited (R2925/bit2 ON), the PLC will stop with step (3).

4. Parameters (User) 4.5 BACKUP Screen

I-171

4.5.2 Restoration Operations The parameters are restored from the maintenance memory cassette to the NC with the following steps.

"EMG EMERGENCY" will appear at the operation message area.

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

#( ) ( ) EMG EMERGENCY

Execute emergency stop. (1)

#(2) ( ) PLC STOP Y/N EMG EMERGENCY

Input "2" at the setting area # ( ), and press the

INPUT key.

(2)

"PLC STOP Y/N" will appear at the message area. WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

#(2) ( Y) RESTORE EXEC Y/N EMG EMERGENCY

Input "Y" at the setting area ( ), and press the

INPUT key.

(3)

"RESTORE EXEC Y/N" will appear at the message area.

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

Input "Y" at the setting area ( ), and press the

INPUT key.

(4) #(2) ( Y) RESTORE EXECUTION EMG EMERGENCY

(a) The message "RESTORE EXECUTION" will appear while the parameters are being restored.

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

(b) The message "RESTORE COMPLETE" will appear when the restoration is completed.

#( ) ( ) RESTORE COMPLETE EMG EMERGENCY

WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU

(Note 1) Other screens cannot be opened during this operation. (Note 2) If the PLC is already stopped, step (3) is skipped. The PLC will not start running even when the operations are completed. (Note 3) If the

INPUT key is pressed without inputting anything at the "~Y/N" display, the error "E01 SETTING ERROR" will occur.

(Note 4) Even if the PLC RUN/STOP changeover is prohibited (R2925/bit2 ON), the PLC will stop with step (3).

5. Program

I-172

5. Program Pressing the function selection key

EDIT MDI displays the following menu.

Edit menu MDI Menu Edit master menu

MDI EDIT

Menu selection keysPrevious page key Next page key

MDI-ENT

SEARCH PROGRAM LARGE FILE

Selecting

MDI or

EDIT displays the following menu:

MDI-ENT

PREVIOUS PAGE

NEXT PAGE

MDI menu

SEARCH PROGRAM

PREVIOUS PAGE

NEXT PAGE

SMALL LARGE

FILE Edit menu

5. Program 5.1 Function Outline

I-173

5.1 Function Outline (1) Function outline When the function selection key

EDIT MDI is pressed, the EDIT or MDI screen appears.

The EDIT screen enables you to add, delete, or change the machining program contents stored in memory. It also enables you to register a new program number in memory and prepare a new program on the screen.

The MDI screen enables you to set, correct, or erase MDI data. It also enables you to register a program prepared as MDI data in memory as a machining program.

(2) Display when the screen is selected When the

EDIT MDI key is first pressed after the power is turned ON, the MDI screen appears.

To edit a machining program on the EDIT screen, use the menu key to change the screen. No programs to be edited are called on the initial edit screen. Perform

SEARCH or

MAKE operation. To edit a program already registered in memory, perform

SEARCH operation. To register a new program in memory, perform

MAKE operation. If the MDI screen is selected, MDI data can be entered as it is without operation such as a search. If

EDIT MDI screen operation is interrupted and any other function is executed, the previous screen selected

(MDI or EDIT) will appear and the previous data will be displayed by again selecting the

EDIT MDI screen.

Then, the data input or edit operation can be continued. (3) Fixed cycle program edit To edit a fixed cycle program, set a given parameter. The EDIT screen can be used to edit a fixed cycle program by setting "1" in parameter #1166 "fixpro". (4) Editing macro operators If a character string that matches a macro operator exists in the machining program (including a

comment statement), it is automatically converted into the corresponding intermediate code during editing. This may cause a string different from that entered to be displayed during editing.

(Example) ATN ATAN SQR SQRT RND ROUND

5. Program 5.2 Menu Function

I-174

5.2 Menu Function 5.2.1 MDI Screen Menu Function (1) Menu when

EDIT MDI screen is selected

MDI EDIT

MDI G28 Z100.0 ; G0 X250.0 ; %

$1

(Note 1)

Menu Function

MDI Reverse display of MDI menu means that MDI screen is selected. MDI data can be set on the MDI screen.

Edit Use this key to change the MDI screen to the EDIT screen.

(Note 1) When using the 2-part system, the system name of the currently selected system is displayed as

$1 (system 1) and $2 (system 2). This is not displayed when using a 1-part system. (Only L system)

(Note 2) Whether to show or hide name of the selected system can be switched with the parameters. #1050 MemPrg Details

0, 2, 4, 6 The name of the selected system is not displayed. 1, 3, 5, 7 The name of the selected system is displayed.

5. Program 5.2 Menu Function

I-175

(2) MDI screen extension operation menu MDI-ENT

Menu Function

MDI-ENT MDI data can be registered in memory as a work program.

Extension operation menu is also highlighted when it is selected. When one extension operation menu

is selected, its corresponding extension operation is enabled and MDI data cannot be set. When no extension operation menu is selected, MDI data can be set.

When an extension operation menu key is once pressed, the extension operation menu is selected. When the key is again pressed, the extension operation menu is unselected. At normal completion of setting processing, automatically it becomes unselected.

(Note 1) When using the 2-part system, the method for registering the MDI data as a machining program in the memory can be switched with the parameters.

#1050 MemPrg

#1285 ext21/bit0 Details

0, 4 - The MDI data common for the systems is registered as a machining program common for the systems.

1, 5 OFF The MDI data common for the systems is registered as a machining program for the selected system.

ON The MDI data common for the systems is registered as a machining program for the selected system. If the system is not selected, an empty (only EOR [%]) machining program is registered.

2, 6 - The MDI data for the selected system is registered as a machining program common for the systems.

3, 7 OFF The MDI data for the selected system is registered as a machining program for the selected system.

ON The MDI data for the selected system is registered as a machining program for the selected system. If the system is not selected, an empty (only EOR [%]) machining program is registered.

5. Program 5.2 Menu Function

I-176

(3) MDI data setting

(1) Enter MDI data by pressing the data keys in sequence according to the machining program listing.

N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N3 G00 X-100. Y-100. ; N4 G01 X-300. F2000; N5 Y-300. ; N6 X-100. ; N7 Y-100. ; N8 M02 ;

N1G28X0Y0Z0;N2G92X0Y0Z0;N3G00X-100.Y- 100.;N4G01X-300.F2000;N5Y-300.;N6X-100 .;N7Y-100.;N8M02;

EDITING

1) The data is written into the MDI memory area.

2) It is displayed on every line per block. 3) The message "MDI SETTING COMPLET"

is displayed and MDI operation is enabled. The running start position is the starting block of data. The cursor is displayed in the starting block.

(2) Press the

INPUT key. N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N3 G00 X-100.Y-100.; N4 G01 X-300.F2000 ; N5 Y-300.; N6 X-100.; N7 Y-100.; N8 M02 ; %

MDI SETTING COMPLET

CAUTION

Because of key chattering, etc., during editing, "NO NOS. FOLLOWING G" commands become a "G00" operation during running.

(Note 1) If the

INPUT key is not pressed, data is simply displayed on the screen and is not actually stored in memory. Be sure to press the

INPUT key. (Note 2) See 5.3 for details of key operation to set MDI data. (Note 3) Check the "MDI SETTING COMPLET" message before starting MDI operation. If the "EDITING"

or "MDI NO SETTING" message is displayed, MDI operation cannot be started. If the

INPUT key is pressed at the time, the "MDI SETTING COMPLET" message is displayed.

(Note 4) If the system is changed while correcting the MDI data, the corrections will be canceled.

5. Program 5.2 Menu Function

I-177

(4) Setting the MDI running start position To start processing with a halfway block after setting MDI data, specify the starting block. First, set the

data according to "Setting MDI Data". At this time, the running start position is set in the starting block of data. If it is desired to be changed, move the cursor to the head of the block to be defined as the starting position. Then, press the

INPUT key.

(Example) When the block containing M02 is desired to be executed.

1) MDI running is enabled, beginning with the specified block.

2) The specified block is displayed at the top of the screen head with "MDI SETTING COMPLET" displayed.

1) The "MDI NO SETTING" status returns.

Press the

INPUT key.

N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N3 G00 X-100.Y-100.; N4 G01 X-300.F2000 ; N5 Y-300.; N6 X-100.; N7 Y-100.; N8 M02 ; % MDI NO SETTING

Move the cursor to the head of the block to be defined as the starting position.

N8 M02 ; % MDI SETTING COMPLET

5. Program 5.2 Menu Function

I-178

5.2.2 EDIT Screen Menu Function (1) Menu when

EDIT MDI screen is selected

MDI EDIT

0 1000 TEST CUT PROGRAM EDIT N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0; N3 G00 X-300. Y-300; N4 G01 X-200. F2000; N5 Y-200.; N6 X200.; N7 Y200.; M02 ; %

$1

(Note 1)

Menu Function

Edit Reverse display of EDIT menu means that EDIT screen is selected. Machining program can be set on the EDIT screen.

MDI Use this key to change the EDIT screen to the MDI screen.

(Note 1) When using the 2-part system, the system name of the currently selected system is displayed as

$1 (system 1) and $2 (system 2). This is not displayed when using a 1-part system. (Only L system)

(Note 2) Whether to show or hide name of the selected system can be switched with the parameters. #1050 MemPrg Details

0, 2, 4, 6 The name of the selected system is not displayed. 1, 3, 5, 7 The name of the selected system is displayed.

(2) EDIT screen extension operation menu

SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE or SEARCH MAKE SMALL FILE

Menu Function

SEARCH 1. Any desired character string can be searched. 2. Program number and sequence number for edit can be searched.

PROGRAM New machining programs can be prepared and stored on the screen.

FILE 1. A list of the machining programs registered in memory can be checked. 2. Comments can be set.

LARGE 40 characters are displayed in one line on the screen.

SMALL 80 characters are displayed in one line on the screen.

5. Program 5.2 Menu Function

I-179

Extension operation menu is also highlighted when it is selected. When one extension operation menu is selected, its corresponding extension operation is enabled and programs cannot be edited. When no extension operation is selected, program can be edited.

When an extension operation menu key is once pressed, the extension operation menu is selected. When the key is again pressed, the extension operation menu is unselected. At normal completion of setting processing, automatically it becomes unselected.

(3) Edit program call To edit a program on the EDIT screen, first press the extension operation menu key

SEARCH or

MAKE . To edit an already stored program in memory, press

SEARCH . To store a new program in memory, press

MAKE . For details, see 5.5. Once the program edit operation begins, the operation is as follows: If another function screen is

operated during program edit operation and then the EDIT screen is reselected, the previously edited data will be displayed. In the following cases, the system enters the status in which nothing has been called. Thus, retry data search before edit operation.

The program being edited on the EDIT screen is condensed by the condense function. The EDIT screen is then selected.

The program being edited on the EDIT screen is merged with another program by the merge function. The EDIT screen is then selected.

(4) Large-size mode/small-size mode The EDIT and MDI screens can be switched between the large-size and small-size modes.

O123 EDIT

Machining program edit area (39 characters x 12 lines)

SEARCH MAKE SMALL

O123 EDIT

Machining program edit area (39 characters x 12 lines)

Machining program address menu display area

SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

40 characters

18 li

ne s

80 characters

Large-size mode Small-size mode

18 li

ne s

In large-size mode, data search and program creation are enabled. The FILE menu is not available; refer to the data input/output program list to check the stored

programs. (Note 1) Switching the mode in the EDIT screen automatically changes the mode in the MDI screen. (Note 2) During editing (while message "EDITING" is displayed on the lower right of the screen),

menu keys

LARGE and

SMALL are disabled, i.e., pressing it does not change the mode. To

change the mode, the

INPUT key must be pressed to end editing. (Note 3) The mode thus set is held after the screen is changed or after power is turned OFF. (Note 4) If the system is changed while editing the machining program, the edited details will be

canceled.

5. Program 5.3 Program Edit Operation

I-180

5.3 Program Edit Operation Program edit operation is common to the EDIT and MDI screens. 5.3.1 Data Display Update (One Screen Scroll) Data display on the screen can be

updated in screen units by using the page key

PREVIOUS PAGE or

NEXT PAGE .

When the

NEXT PAGE key is pressed, the

data displayed at the screen bottom is moved to the screen top; when the

PREVIOUS PAGE key is pressed, the data

displayed at the screen top is moved to the screen bottom.

N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N11 X100. Y10. ; N12 Z300. ; N13 Y200. ; N22 X30. Y20. ; N23 X12 Y25. ; N24 G00 X10. ; %

NEXT PAGE

NEXT PAGE

NEXT PAGE

PREVIOUS PAGE

PREVIOUS PAGE

PREVIOUS PAGE

For example, assume that data is displayed as shown in the right. N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ;

N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N3 G00 X-300. Y-300.; N4 G01 X-200. F2000 ; N5 Y-200.; N6 X200.; N12 Z300.;

Press the

NEXT PAGE key.

N12 Z300.; N13 Y200.; N14 N15 N22 X30. Y20.; N23 X12. Y25.;

5. Program 5.3 Program Edit Operation

I-181

5.3.2 Data Display Update (One Line Scroll)

Data display on the screen can be updated in line units by using the

or

key. If the

key is pressed when the cursor is placed at the screen bottom or if the

key is pressed when the cursor is placed at the screen top, display is scrolled one line.

N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0; N3 G00 X-300. Y-300.; N4 G01 X-200. F2000; N5 Y-200.; N11 N12 Z300.; N13 Y200.; N14 N15

The cursor is moved on a single screen.

The cursor is not moved and the screen is scrolled.

The cursor is moved downward each time the

key is pressed.

N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N3 G00 X-300. Y-300.; N4 G01 X-200. F2000 ; N5 Y-200.; N6 X200.; N12 Z300.;

1) Whenever the key is pressed, the cursor is moved downward one line.

2) If the key is pressed when the cursor

reaches the screen bottom, display data is scrolled up one line. The cursor remains at the screen bottom.

3) If the key is furthermore pressed, the display data is scrolled up one line and new data is displayed at the screen bottom.

4) In contrast, whenever the

key is pressed, the cursor is moved upward one line. If the key is pressed when the cursor reaches the screen top, the display data is scrolled down one line and the previous block data is displayed at the screen top.

N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N3 G00 X-300. Y-300.; N4 G01 X-200. F2000 ; N5 Y-200.; N6 X200.; N12 Z300.; N13 Y200.;

5. Program 5.3 Program Edit Operation

I-182

5.3.3 Data Change

A machining program can always be edited unless it is run in memory mode. For example, when the data to be edited is displayed as shown in the right, let's try to change the N7 Y200. ; block to G03 Y200. J100. ;

N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N3 G00 X-300. Y-300.; N4 G01 X-200. F2000 ; N5 Y-200.; N6 X200.; N7 Y200.; M02; %

N7 Y 2 0 0 .; M02; %

Move the cursor to the data to be replaced.

(1)

Set new data. G03 Y200. J100. ;

N7 G03Y200.J100.; M02; % EDITING

(2)

1) Each time a character is set the cursor is automatically moved one column to the right.

2) When data is entered by using the keys, the message "EDITING" is displayed.

After completion of correction, press the

INPUT key.

N7 G03 Y200. J100.; M02; %

(3)

1) The new data is written into memory. 2) The new data is also displayed with each word

being both preceded and followed by space code.

3) When the data has been written into memory, the "EDITING" message disappears.

5. Program 5.3 Program Edit Operation

I-183

5.3.4 Data Insertion (

SHIFT

DELETE INS )

For example, let's try to insert data F5000 in the block N7 G03 Y200. J100.;.

Move the cursor to the character following the position in which the data is to be inserted.

N7 G03 Y200. J100. ; M02; %

(1)

Press the

SHIFT key, then

DELETE INS key.

N7 G03 Y200. J100. ; M02; %

(2)

1) The characters to the right of the cursor are

moved to the right (; in this case). 2) Data can be inserted in the position indicated by

the cursor.

Insert the data. F5000

N7 G03 Y200.J100.F5000 ; M02; % EDITING

(3)

1) When the key for the character to be inserted is

pressed, the character is set in the position indicated by the cursor.

2) Each time one character is inserted, the cursor is automatically moved one column to the right and the characters to the right of the cursor (; in this case) are also moved to the right.

3) Any number of characters can be consecutively inserted by repeating 1) and 2) above. However, when there is no space to the right of the cursor on the screen, no more data can be inserted.

4) When data is entered by using the keys, the message "EDITING" is displayed.

After completion of correction, press the

INPUT key. N7 G03 Y200.J100.F5000 ; M02; %

(4)

1) The new data is written into memory. 2) The new data is also displayed with each word

being both preceded and followed by space. 3) When the data has been written into memory,

the "EDITING" message disappears.

5. Program 5.3 Program Edit Operation

I-184

5.3.5 Deletion of One Character (

DELETE INS )

For example, let's try to delete the character 0 to change F5000 in the block N7 G03 Y200. J100. F5000.;

to F500.

Move the cursor to the position of the character to be deleted.

N7 G03 Y200. J100.F5000; M02; %

(1)

Press the

DELETE INS key.

N7 G03 Y200. J100.F500 ; M02; % EDITING

(2)

1) The character 0 is deleted. 2) The cursor is automatically moved one

column to the right. 3) When the key is pressed, the message

"EDITING" is displayed.

After completion of correction, press the

INPUT key.

N7 G03 Y200.J100.F500 ; M02; %

(3)

1) The new data is written into memory. 2) The characters to the right of the deleted

character, (; in this case) are moved to the left. 3) When the data has been written into memory,

the "EDITING" message disappears.

5. Program 5.3 Program Edit Operation

I-185

5.3.6 Deletion of One Block (

C.B CAN )

For example, let's try to delete the entire block N7 G03 Y200. J100. F500 ; .

Move the cursor to the position of the block to be deleted.

N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N6 X200.; N7 G03 Y200. J100. F500 ; M02; %

(1)

Press the

C.B CAN key.

(2)

1) Data in the entire block is deleted. 2) When the key is pressed, the message

"EDITING" is displayed.

N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N6 X200.; M02; % EDITING

After completion of correction, press the

INPUT key.

N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N6 X200.; M02; %

(3)

1) The data in the block is deleted from memory. 2) The blocks following the deleted data block

(M02; and % in this case) are moved forward for display.

3) When the data in the block has been deleted from memory, the "EDITING" message disappears.

5. Program 5.3 Program Edit Operation

I-186

5.3.7 Deletion of Data on One Screen For example, assume that data is displayed as

shown in the right. Let's try to delete all blocks (sequence numbers 1 to 12) displayed on the screen.

N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N12 Y-300.;

Press

SHIFT key, then

C.B CAN key.

EDITING

(1)

1) The full screen becomes blank. 2) When the keys are pressed, the message

"EDITING" is displayed.

Press the

INPUT key. N13 X-100.; N14 Y-100.;

(2)

1) The data displayed on the entire screen is

deleted from memory. 2) Display is started at the block following the

deleted data. 3) When the data has been deleted from memory,

the "EDITING" message disappears.

5. Program 5.4 MDI Screen Extension Operation

I-187

5.4 MDI Screen Extension Operation 5.4.1 MDI Data Registration in Memory (

MDI-ENT ) Data set on the MDI screen can be registered in memory. Comments can be added to indicate the contents

of the program to be registered.

Memory operation

Registra- tion

MDI data

Machine control

Memory O 1 O 100 O 1000 O 1234

For example, assume that MDI data is set as shown in the right. The MDI data registration procedure in memory is described below:

MDI N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N3 G00 X-100. Y-100.; N8 MO2 ; %

MDI-ENT

(1)

1) The setting area for "MDI-ENT" is displayed. MDI-ENT

O( ) COMMENT( )

Press the menu key

MDI-ENT .

(2)

MDI-ENT

O( 1234) COMMENT( )

Set the registered program number. A comment can also be set at the same time. (Example) O ( 1 2 3 4 ) COMMENT ( )

1) If the program has been registered normally into memory, the message "MDI ENTRY COMPLETE" is displayed. The display is cleared from the setting area; the MDI-ENT menu display returns to normal display from the reverse display.

Press the

INPUT key. (3)

MDI ENTRY COMPLETE

MDI-ENT

(Note) If preparing comment, space (

SP ) can be written in it. But, the space is ignored after registration for efficient use of memory.

5. Program 5.5 Edit Screen Extension Operation

I-188

5.5 Edit Screen Extension Operation 5.5.1 Edit Data Call (

SEARCH ) The calling method of the program or block to be edited is explained. The search function is also used to call

a separate machining program from the currently running one for background edit. A search can be executed for the program head, character string, and sequence number.

(1) Search for the program head In the setting field, specify the program number of the program to be called. The operating procedure is as follows:

1) The setting area for "SEARCH" is displayed. SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

O( ) N ( ) - ( )

Press the menu key

SEARCH .

(1)

SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

O( 1000) N ( ) - ( )

Set the called program number. (Example) O ( 1 0 0 0 ) N ( ) - ( )

(2)

Press the

INPUT key.

(3)

SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

SEARCH EXECUTION O( 1000) N ( ) - ( )

1) The message "SEARCH EXECUTION" is displayed during searching.

2) The specified program is displayed, beginning with top of the program.

3) The cursor is displayed at the top of the screen.

4) At normal completion of program head search, display of the setting area disappears and SEARCH menu display is restored to normal mode from reverse mode.

O 1000 EDIT N1 G28 X0Y0Z0 ; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N3 G00 X-300. Y-300.; N4 G01 X-200. F2000 ; N5 Y-200.; N6 X200.; N7 Y200.; M02 ; %

SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

5. Program 5.5 Edit Screen Extension Operation

I-189

(2) Character string search The character string search is useful particularly

to search the word data to be corrected. Specify the called program number and character string in the setting area. However, the program number need not be specified if the program already displayed on the screen is searched for a given character string.

O 1000 EDIT N1 G28 X0Y0Z0 ; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N3 G00 X-300. Y-300.; N4 G01 X-200. F2000 ; N5 Y-200.; N6 X200.; N7 Y200.; M02 ; %

SEARCH MAKE SMALL FILE

The operation procedure is described below:

1) The setting area for "SEARCH" is displayed. SEACH MAKE LARGE FILE

O( ) N ( ) - ( )

Press the menu key

SEARCH . (1)

SEACH MAKE LARGE FILE

O( ) N ( G01) - ( )

Set the called program number and character string. (Example) O ( ) N ( G 0 1 ) - ( )

(2)

Press the

INPUT key.

(3)

SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

SEARCH EXECUTION O( ) N ( G01) - ( )

1) The message "SEARCH EXECUTION" is

displayed during searching. 2) A search for the specified character string is

started at the top of the specified program. The program is displayed starting at the block containing the found character string. However, for the program already displayed on the screen, a search for the specified character string is started at the displayed portion.

3) The cursor is displayed at the top of the found character string.

4) At normal completion of character string search, display of the setting area disappears and SEARCH menu display is restored to normal mode from reverse mode.

O 1000 EDIT N4 G01 X-200. F2000 ; N5 Y-200.; N6 X200.; N7 Y200.; M02 ; %

SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

5. Program 5.5 Edit Screen Extension Operation

I-190

(Note 1) When a given character string is not found, a "NO CHARACTERS" message is displayed. (Note 2) A string of up to 11 characters may be specified. (Note 3) The specified character string is searched and identified in the specified number of character

strings regardless of the preceding and subsequent characters. That is, for example, if G2 is to be searched, G2 of G20 to G29 and G200 and up cannot be classified and will become target character strings.

[Setup example of character string data] N (N10 ) The character string "N10" is searched. (N10 and N100 are also searched.) N (N10 X100.) The character string "N10 X100". is searched. N (X01234.567) The character string "X01234.567" is searched (X1234.567 is not searched.) N (EOR ) The character string "%" (EOR code) is searched.

5. Program 5.5 Edit Screen Extension Operation

I-191

(3) Sequence number, block number search Specify the called program number, sequence number, and block number in the setting area. If only

digits are set in N ( ), a sequence number search is made. (If an alphabetic character or symbol is contained, a character string search is made.) To search the top of a program, specify only the program number. To search an already displayed program on the screen for a given sequence number, program number specification may be omitted.

The operation procedure is described below. SEARCH MAKE SMALL FILE

O 1000 EDIT N1 G28 X0Y0Z0 ; N2 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N3 G00 X-300. Y-300. F2000; N4 G01 X-200.; N5 Y-200.; N6 X200.; N7 Y200.; M02 ; %

SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

O( ) N ( ) - ( ) Press the menu key

SEARCH . (1)

1) The setting area for "SEARCH" is displayed.

Set the called program number, sequence number, and block number. (Example) O ( ) N ( 6) - ( )

(2)

SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

O( ) N ( 6 ) - ( )

SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

SEARCH EXECUTION O( ) N ( 6 ) - ( ) Press the

INPUT key. (3)

1) The message "SEARCH EXECUTION" is

displayed during searching. 2) A search for a given N number is started at

the top of the specified program. The program is displayed starting at the block containing the found N number. However, for the program already displayed on the screen, a search for the specified N number is started at the displayed portion.

3) The cursor is displayed at the top of the found block.

4) At normal completion of search, display of the setting area disappears and SEARCH menu display is restored to normal mode from reverse mode.

SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

O 1000 EDIT N6 X200.; N7 Y200.; M02 ; %

(Note 1) When a given N number is not found, an "NB NOT FOUND" message is displayed. (Note 2) If a given program number is not found, a "PROG NOT FOUND" message is displayed. (Note 3) The sequence number can be specified in a maximum of five digits.

5. Program 5.5 Edit Screen Extension Operation

I-192

(4) Action to be taken when the "NO CHARACTERS" or "NB NOT FOUND" error occurs If a search can be executed for the currently displayed screen, the search starts with the starting block

being displayed. If the specified data is not found before the program end (%), the "NO CHARACTERS" or "NB NOT FOUND" occurs. By pressing the

INPUT key at this time, the search is retried beginning with the program head. If a search is executed for data in a block that is before the currently displayed data, the search will be accomplished by the second search.

(Example)

N1; N2; N3; N4; N5; N6; N7; %

Program head

Data being displayed on screen

(1)

(2) (Example 1) For search for N4: (1) First search ... Error "NB NOT FOUND" (2) Second search ... N4 can be found. (Example 2) For search for N7: (1) First search ... N7 can be found. (Example 3) For search for N8: (1) First search ... Error "NB NOT FOUND" (2) Second search ... "NB NOT FOUND"

(5) Precautions for 2-part system When using the 2-part system, the methods for searching the program or block to be edited can be

switched with the parameters. #1050

MemPrg #1285

ext21/bit0 Details

0, 2, 4, 6 - The machining program registered in the memory common for the systems is searched for with the designated program No., sequence No. and block No.

1, 3, 5, 7 OFF Selected system: The machining program registered in the memory for each system is searched for with the designated program No., sequence No. and block No.

System that is not selected: The searched machining program is held. ON Selected system: The machining program registered in the memory for

each system is searched for with the designated program No., sequence No. and block No.

System that is not selected: The machining program registered in the memory for each system is searched for with the designated program No.

When using the 2-part system and the same number batch generation for all system programs is valid, the program is erased in the following manner according to whether programs are present for each system.

Presence of program System 1 System 2

Operation

Yes Yes The System 1 and System 2 machining programs are searched for simultaneously.

Yes No The System 2 machining program is newly created, and the System 1 and System 2 machining programs are searched for simultaneously. (Note) An error (E14) will occur if the number of programs is insufficient.

No Yes The System 1 machining program is newly created, and the System 1 and System 2 machining programs are searched for simultaneously. (Note) An error (E14) will occur if the number of programs is insufficient.

No No An error (E14) occurs.

5. Program 5.5 Edit Screen Extension Operation

I-193

5.5.2 New Program Registration and Preparation This function is used to prepare a new machining program. To prepare a machining program on the EDIT screen, first press the menu key

MAKE and register the machining program number, then enter the program directly by using the keys.

SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

EDIT

SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

O( ) COMMENT ( ) Press the menu key

MAKE .

(1)

1) The setting area for "PROGRAM" is

displayed.

Set the new registered program number. A comment can also be set at the same time if necessary. (Example) O ( 1 0 0 0 )

COMMENT ( T E S T )

(2)

SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

O( 1000) COMMENT ( TEST)

SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

1) When the program number and comment are registered in memory, they are displayed at the screen top.

2) At the time, only one character of "%" is automatically registered in memory as data. Thus, the screen as shown in the right is displayed.

Press the

INPUT key.

(3) O 1000 TEST EDIT %

Enter the work program in sequence by using the keys. Key operation is the same as normal program edit operation.

(4)

(Note 1) To later edit the work program registered in memory by using this function, also call it by pressing

SEARCH as with other programs. (Note 2) If preparing comment, space (

SP ) can be written in it. But, the space is ignored after registration for efficient use of memory.

5. Program 5.5 Edit Screen Extension Operation

I-194

(Note 3) When using the 2-part system, the methods for registering a new program can be switched with the parameters.

#1050 MemPrg

#1285 ext21/bit0 Details

0, 2, 4, 6 - The machining program is newly registered in the memory common for the systems.

1, 3, 5, 7 OFF The machining program is newly registered in the memory for the selected system.

ON The machining program is newly registered in all system memories. (Note 4) When using the 2-part system and the same number batch generation for all system programs is

valid, an error (E11) will occur if the number being registered is already used in one of the systems.

5. Program 5.6 PLAYBACK

I-195

5.6 PLAYBACK The playback function enables creation of a program while trying sample machining by manual (handle or

jog) feed or mechanical handle feed. A machining program can be created with move distance data obtained by manual operation used as

programmed command values.

SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

O 100 PLAYBACK N1 G28 XYZ; N2 G00 X10.Y10.;

EDIT [MACHINE] [PLAYBACK : ABS] X -10.100 X -10.000 Y -10.101 Y -10.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 [MEMORY] [ADD]

Playback Edit

x1 Manual feed y1 Move distance

Start

Check the parameter: Use parameter #1126 PB-G90 to determine absolute/incremental values.

Search the edit screen for the number of the machining program to be created in playback mode.

Turn the playback switch ON.

Error? Y

N Move the machine in manual mode.

Create data such as G codes, X and Y axis commands, and F commands.

Error? Y

N

Does playback edit continue?

Y

N

Turn the playback switch OFF.

End

% O 12345678 N1G28X0Y0Z0 ; N2G00X-10. Y-10.; N3G01X-10. Y-20. F1000 ; Machining program

Machining program

% O 12345678 N1G28XYZ; N2G00X-10. Y-10.; N3G01X20. Y-10.F1000;

Machining program creation flowchart in playback mode

5. Program 5.6 PLAYBACK

I-196

5.6.1 Playback Operation (1) PLAYBACK screen (a) Creating a program and editing it in playback mode (1) Create a program:

SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

O ( 100) COMMENT( ) Press the

EDIT MDI key, then press

menu keys

EDIT and

MAKE .

The setting area for "PROGRAM" is displayed.

Set the program number and comment in the data setting area. (Example) O ( 100) COMMENT (TESTPROG)

SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

O ( 100) COMMENT(TESTPROG)

SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

O 100 TESTPROG %

EDIT Press the

INPUT key.

The specified program number and comment are displayed on the upper part of the screen, and one character data "%" is automatically stored in memory.

(2) Display the PLAYBACK screen:

SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

O 100 PLAYBACK %

EDIT [MACHINE] [PLAYBACK:ABS] X 10.100 X 0.000 Y 20.125 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 [MEMORY] [ADD]

Press the playback switch prepared on the machine side.

Because no program has been made, only "%" is displayed on the left side on the screen. The [MEMORY] field on the right side is blank.

5. Program 5.6 PLAYBACK

I-197

(b) Editing a stored program in playback mode (1) Display the EDIT screen.

Press the

EDIT MDI key, then press

menu keys

EDIT and

SEARCH . SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

O ( ) N ( )-( )

The setting area for "SEARCH" is displayed.

SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

O 100 PLAYBACK N5 G01 X50. Y50.; N6 X10. Y10. Z10;

EDIT [MACHINE] [PLAYBACK:ABS] X 10.100 X 0.000 Y 20.125 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 [MEMORY] N5 G01 X50. Y50; [ADD]

Press the playback switch prepared on the machine side.

Set the numbers of the program and sequence to call in the data setting area, then press the

INPUT key.

(Example) O ( 100) N ( 5) - ( )

1) The specified program is searched from the

beginning of the block containing the specified character string, then the program is displayed with the block placed on the top.

2) A cursor is placed on the top of the character string displayed.

3) Program editing starts with the block next to the specified one. The specified block is displayed in the [MEMORY] field.

4) Another cursor is displayed in the [ADD] field, allowing the program to be edited.

In either creating and editing a new program or editing a stored program in playback mode, select the

PROGRAM screen and perform editing on the screen. Editing in playback mode is performed using the [ADD] field displayed on the right side on the screen. This therefore prevents the machining program displayed on the left half on the screen from being edited.

The cursor displayed on the left screen indicates the block displayed in the [MEMORY] field on the right screen.

(c) Invoking and editing an another program in playback mode Press menu key

SEARCH again, then repeat the operation described under item (2) .

5. Program 5.6 PLAYBACK

I-198

(2) Playback editing 1) Set the parameter to specify whether to perform playback editing in absolute or incremental mode. To edit with absolute values, set #1126 PB-G90 to 1, and to edit with incremental values, set to 0. If the incremental mode is selected, INC is displayed after PLAYBACK on the screen. If the absolute

mode is selected, ABS is displayed. 2) Select the EDIT screen.

SEARCH MAKE SMALL FILE

Press the

EDIT MDI key, then press

menu key

EDIT .

Select "SEARCH".

SEARCH MAKE SMALL FILE

O ( ) N ( )-( ) Press menu key

SEARCH .

Specify the program number and playback mode.

SEARCH MAKE LARGE FILE

O 100 PLAYBACK N1 G28 XYZ.; N2 G00 X10. Y10.;

EDIT [MACHINE] [PLAYBACK:ABS] X 10.100 X 0.000 Y 20.125 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 [MEMORY] [ADD]

Press the playback switch prepared on the machine side.

Specify the numbers of the program, sequence and block to be edited in playback mode, then press the

INPUT key. (Example) O ( 100) N ( ) - ( )

This operation displays the PLAYBACK screen on the right half. A data insertion position can be selected by operating the cursor keys. For the details, see Section 5.6.2, "Edit Operation".

3) Move the machine in manual mode.

Move the machine from the work origin to the target position in handle or jog feed mode.

[PLAYBACK : ABS] X 0.125 Y 1.034 Z 0.381

5. Program 5.6 PLAYBACK

I-199

4) Convert the playback move distance into machining program data.

Enter the necessary data, such as sequence number and G code. (Example)

N

1

0

G

0

0

[PLAYBACK : ABS] X 0.125 Y 1.034 Z 0.010 [MEMORY] [ADD] N10G00

Press axis address keys such as X and Y. (Example)

X

Y

[PLAYBACK : ABS] X 0.125 Y 1.034 Z 0.010 [MEMORY] [ADD] N10G00X0.125Y1.034

1) When an axis address key is pressed, the playback move distance is displayed after the corresponding axis address.

2) If an axis address key is pressed while the playback counter is operating, playback data at that time is displayed.

Press the

INPUT key. [PLAYBACK : ABS] X 0.125 Y 1.034 Z 0.010 [MEMORY] N10G00X0.125Y1.034; [ADD]

5) End playback editing. Turn the playback switch OFF to end playback editing; the screen returns to the normal editing screen. (3) Notes on playback operation 1) The number of characters specified in the [ADD] field must not exceed 96. 2) If an EOB (;) is omitted at the end of the program created in the [ADD] field, it is automatically

appended when the

INPUT key is pressed. 3) Blocks can be delimited by inserting an EOB (;) between X and Y. 4) If an incorrect data is entered, the error message is displayed when the

INPUT key is pressed. (See the operation messages.)

5) Do not edit macro statements in playback mode; otherwise, for example, if an attempt is made to input "XOR", input of the X may play back the X.

6) If one of the following items is operated during playback editing, another program may be called or the state where no program has been called may occur:

SEARCH ERASE CONDENSE PROGRAM NO. CHANGE

5. Program 5.6 PLAYBACK

I-200

(4) Playback counter display Operation of the playback counter may depend on the control unit mode.

#1126 PB-G90=0 #1126 PB-G90=1 Counter display at start of playback

Displays 0. Displays the current value (2) (added by a manual interrupt value if any).

Setting by position data [PLAYBACK: ***]

X 10.002 [ADD] G01X10. ;

INPUT

[PLAYBACK: INC] X 0.002 MEMORY] G01X10. ; [ADD]

The difference between an axis command value and playback counter remains in the playback counter.

[PLAYBACK: ABS] X 10.002 [MEMORY] G01X10. ; [ADD]

The playback counter is not changed and the move distance is accumulated.

Setting G92 (counter preset) [PLAYBACK: ***]

X 20.000 [ADD] G92X10. ;

INPUT

[PLAYBACK: INC]

X 0.000 [MEMORY] G92X10. ; [ADD]

Regardless of the axis command value following G92, the playback counter is cleared to 0.

[PLAYBACK: ABS]

X 10.000 [MEMORY] G92X10. ; [ADD]

The axis command value following G92 is set in the playback counter.

(5) Coordinates to be stored 1) A coordinate value is stored in memory with a decimal point in playback mode. The trailing 0s are

omitted. (Example) Playback counter Memory

X 0.000 X0 X 10.000 X10.

2) The No. of digits in the axis command value during playback will depend on the input unit (#1015 cunit) for each axis.

5. Program 5.6 PLAYBACK

I-201

5.6.2 Edit Operation (1) Moving the cursor The block insertion position or deletion block can be specified by moving the cursor vertically on the left

side on the screen. (a) Moving the cursor down

[ADD]

Move the cursor in the [ADD] field down to the third line. (

)

N1 N2 N3 N4 N5

[ADD]

Press the

key again. N1 N2 N3 N4 N5

This moves the cursor on the left side on the screen down. When the cursor key

is further pressed with the cursor located at the bottom of the data field, data scrolls up one line each time. The cursor remains on the bottom.

(b) Moving the cursor up

[ADD]

Move the cursor in the [ADD] field up to the first line. (

)

N1 N2 N3 N4 N5

[ADD]

Press the

key again. N1 N2 N3 N4 N5

This moves the cursor on the left side on the screen up. When the cursor key

is further pressed with the cursor placed at the top of the data field, data scrolls down one line each time; previous block data is displayed at the top.

5. Program 5.6 PLAYBACK

I-202

(2) Insertion of block A block can be inserted following the block specified by the cursor on the left side on the screen. (3) Deletion of block

Move the cursor to the block to be

deleted. (

)

N11 N12 N13

N11 N13

The N12 block is deleted, and the updated data is written in memory.

Press the

SHIFT and

C.B CAN keys at

the same time.

(4) [ADD] Program deletion ( C B

CAN ) The program being created in the [ADD] field

on the right side of the screen is completely deleted. The cursor automatically returns to the head of the [ADD] field.

Deleted. [ADD]

5.6.3 Limitations (1) Playback editing is disabled in the machine lock state. (A move distance during machine lock is ignored.) (2) The program that is running under automatic operation cannot be edited in playback mode. (Generally, programs that are running under automatic operation cannot be edited.) (3) A subprogram used in the fixed cycle cannot be edited in playback mode. (Generally, subprograms used in the fixed cycle cannot be edited.) If the playback switch is set to ON on the SEARCH screen, an error results.) (4) While message "EDITING" is displayed, playback editing is disabled. If the playback switch is set to ON, an operation error results. (5) Playback editing is disabled in large-size mode. If the playback switch is set to ON, an operation error results.

5. Program 5.7 Word Editing

I-203

5.7 Word Editing

In addition to the conventional editing function, program editing in word units can be selected. The word editing function allows deletion, replacement, insertion, etc., of the program in word units, enabling concise creation of programs.

(Note 1) Word editing is valid when SETUP PARAMETER "#1139 edtype" is set to 2. (Note 2) Use the word editing function with #1050 MemPrg = 0 (system common program control). If

#1050 MemPrg is set to a value other than 0, the functions may be limited as shown below.

#1050 MemPrg Display Editing, cursor movement Menu operations

0 Enabled Enabled Enabled 2, 4, 6 Disabled Enabled Enabled

1, 3, 5, 7 Disabled Disabled [error (E05)] Disabled [error (E74)]

O12345678 TEST CUT PROGRAM EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ; N4 G01 X200.0 Z200.0 F500 ; N5 X300.0 ; N6 Z300.0 ; N7 ; N8 ; N9 ; > N10 ; N11 ; N12 ;

LOOK UP DELETE REPLACE INSERT MENU (1) EDIT Screen Operation Menu

The operation menu format changes according to bit 6 of the SETUP PARAMETER "#1227 aux11/bit6".

When the bit is OFF (menu type 1)

WORD WORD STR. STR. RETURN

LOOK UP DELETE REPLACE INSERT MENU

COPY PROGRAM MENU

COM.SRH B.G SRH B.G END COMMENT RETURN

5. Program 5.7 Word Editing

I-204

When the bit is ON (menu type 2)

WORD WORD STR. STR. RETURN

Menu Function SEARCH This changes the menu for selecting the search direction. DELETE The word at the cursor position can be deleted.

(The deleted word is set in the EDIT BUFFER area.) REPLACE The word at the cursor position can be replaced with the data in the EDIT

BUFFER area. (The EDIT BUFFER area data is not cleared.)

INSERT A word in the EDIT BUFFER area can be inserted in the location immediately after the word at the cursor position. (The EDIT BUFFER area data is not cleared.)

COPY The word at the cursor position can be copied into the EDIT BUFFER area. PROGRAM The menu changes to the one for searching the program. The searched

program and a list of programs are displayed. COM. SRH The program Nos., sequence Nos., and block Nos. for carrying out automatic

operation can be searched from the machining programs registered in the NC memory.

B.G SRH The program Nos. sequence Nos. and block Nos. for background editing can be searched. If a program No. not registered in the NC memory is set, a new machining program will be registered.

B.G-END This quits the background editing function. COMMENT An outline of the machining program functions, specifications, applications,

etc., can be set as a comment. RETURN This returns to the top menu. WORD This searches in the downward direction. The word matching the search data

is searched, and the cursor moves to that word. (The search data is not cleared.)

WORD This searches in the upward direction. The word matching the search data is searched, and the cursor moves to that word. (The search data is not cleared.)

STR. This searches in the downward direction. The character string matching the search data is searched, and the cursor moves to that word. (The search data is not cleared.)

STR. This searches in the upward direction. The character string matching the search data is searched, and the cursor moves to that word. (The search data is not cleared.)

LOOK UP PROGRAM MENU

COPY DELETE REPLACE INSERT MENU

COM.SRH B.G SRH B.G END COMMENT RETURN

5. Program 5.7 Word Editing

I-205

(2) Foreground/Background Editing Explanation

(a) In the background editing mode

1) The background editing mode lasts from the BG search to the BG quit.

2) "BACKGROUND EDITING" is displayed on the screen.

3) Program indexing is carried out if the

INPUT key is pressed during background editing.

4) Even during program execution, programs besides the one in execution can be edited.

5) If an operation search is commanded from the EDIT screen during background editing, the background editing mode is quit.

6) During background editing, programs not in the background editing mode can be externally searched, searched & started, or operation searched from a screen besides the EDIT screen, and the background editing mode will not quit. Note that background editing mode will quit if a program in the background editing mode is externally searched, searched & started, or operation searched from a screen besides the EDIT screen.

(Note) A BG search is not possible for programs in an operation search or programs in operation. (The error message "E190 FORE EDITING")

(b) In the foreground editing mode

1) The foreground editing mode is a status where the display request during program operation is turned OFF, and the machine is not in the background editing mode.

2) When the system is not running (operation stopped), the edit cursor successively moves to the various steps being executed in automatic operation.

3) Cursor movement is possible in the foreground editing mode, even in a write-protected status.

4) Machining programs in an operation stop status can be edited in single block mode.

5) The foreground editing mode is entered when the power is turned ON. If there is a program that is already being operation searched, that program will become the foreground editing program.

6) Program indexing is carried out with a reset when not in operation.

(Note1) "EDIT POSSIBLE" is displayed on the screen when editing is possible, "EDIT IMPOSSIBLE" is displayed when editing is not possible.

(Note2) "EDIT IMPOSSIBLE" is displayed in the fixed cycle mode during feed hold or single block stop.

(c) In modes besides the foreground editing mode

1) When the display request (Y23C) is ON during program operation, the program in operation is displayed on the left side of the screen.

5. Program 5.7 Word Editing

I-206

5.7.1 Handling of the Various Keys During Word Editing

Various keys during word editing

Key data Edit area (left side)

Edit buffer (right side) Details

Cursor keys (, , , )

: This key moves the cursor to the next word in the order direction.

: This key moves the cursor to the previous word in the opposite direction of the order.

: This key moves the cursor to the head word of the next block.

: This key moves the cursor to the head word of the previous block.

Page keys NEXT : This key changes the screen to the next page in one screen units, and moves the cursor to the head word.

BACK : This key changes the screen to the previous page in one screen units, and moves the cursor to the head word.

DEL This key functions the same as the "DELETE" menu key.

INS This key functions the same as the "INSERT" menu key. Alphabetic keys, numeric keys, symbol keys (0 to 9, A to Z, etc.)

These keys input characters in the edit buffer/search data. The edit buffer/search data is cleared at the alphabetic, numeric, or symbol key input.

C. B This key deletes the last character input in the edit buffer and search data. (This key functions the same as the Back Space key.)

CAN Invalid INPUT When the cursor is at the head of the block:

That block is searched. The operation starts from the designated block.

When the cursor is at a position besides the head of the program block:

The top of the program is searched. Operation starts from the top of the program.

CALC Invalid

Word character judgment method

(1) Data with any of the following head characters are handled as words. A to Z ( ), # / ! % ; [ ]

(2) Macro statements are handled as word characters. Examples of macro statements: GOTO, DO, WHILE, IF, OR, XOR, etc.

5. Program 5.7 Word Editing

I-207

5.7.2 Searching Word Units

(1)

key

This key moves the cursor to the next word in the order direction.

(2)

key This key moves the cursor to the previous word in the opposite direction of the order.

(3)

key This key moves the cursor to the head word of the next block.

(4)

key

This key moves the cursor to the head word of the previous block.

N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ;

N3 Z100.0 ;

5. Program 5.7 Word Editing

I-208

5.7.3 Word Search

The word matching the search data is searched, and the cursor moves to the head of that word. (The search data is not cleared.)

1) The message "SEARCH EXECUTION" appears during the search. 2) Words matching the search data are searched, starting from the word at the cursor position. 3) The cursor moves to the top of the word that was searched. 4) The search data is not cleared. 5) The screen returns to the 1st menu after the search is finished. (The search data is not cleared.) 6) The screen returns to the 1st menu if the menu key

RETURN is pressed. (Note 1) The message "NO CHARACTERS" appears on the screen if the designated word cannot be found. (Note 2) If a word character is input in the search data after the menu key is pressed, the character will be

input after the search data buffer is cleared. (Note 3) The search data is valid until ; (EOB). Only one block can be searched at a time. (Note 4) The

C.B CAN ,

SHIFT , and

DELETE INS keys are invalid while the search menu is displayed.

Select a search in the upward or downward direction. (Ex.)

WORD

O12345678 N3 Z100.0 ;

WORD WORD STR. STR. RETURN

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING

> Z100.0

Press the menu key

SEARCH . EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING >

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

WORD WORD STR. STR. RETURN

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING

> Z100.0

WORD WORD STR. STR. RETURN

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING

>

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

LOOK UP

Key input the word data to be searched. (Ex.)

Z

1

0

0

.

0

Use the

WORD and

WORD keys in the word search.

1) The cursor moves to . (The edit data is not cleared.)

1) Up to 11 characters of search data can be designated.

5. Program 5.7 Word Editing

I-209

5.7.4 Character String Search The character string matching the search data is searched, and the cursor moves to the top of that word. (The search data is not cleared.)

Use the

STR. and

STR. keys in the character string search.

1) The cursor moves to .

1) Up to 11 characters of search data can be

designated.

Select a search in the upward or downward direction. (Ex.)

STR.

O12345678 N3 Z100.0 ;

WORD WORD STR. STR. RETURN

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING

> Z10

Press the menu key

SEARCH . EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING >

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

WORD WORD STR. STR. RETURN

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING

> Z10

WORD WORD STR. STR. RETURN

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING

>

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

LOOK UP

Key input the character string data to be searched. (Ex.)

Z

1

0

1) The message "SEARCH EXECUTION" appears during the search. 2) Character strings matching the search data are searched, starting from the

character string at the cursor position. 3) The cursor moves to the top of the word that was searched. 4) The search data is not cleared. 5) The screen returns to the 1st menu after the search is finished. 6) The screen returns to the 1st menu if the menu key

RETURN is pressed. (Note 1) The message "NO CHARACTERS" appears on the screen if the designated character string cannot

be found. (Note 2) Matching is checked with referring the No. of designated character strings, regardless of the

character strings before and after the ones designated. For example, even if G2 is designated, the character strings G20 to G29, G200 onward, etc., become search targets.

(Note 3) Macro statements are not handled as 1 word of data during a character string search, so the operation differs from that of normal character string searches. For example, if the character "GO" is designated for [GOTO], and a character string search is executed, the cursor will appear at the [GOTO] position.

(Note 4) If a word character is input in the search data after the menu key is pressed, the character will be input after the search data buffer is cleared.

(Note 5) The search data is valid until; (EOB). Only one block can be searched at a time. (Note 6) The

C.B CAN ,

SHIFT , and

DELETE INS keys are invalid while the search menu is displayed.

5. Program 5.7 Word Editing

I-210

5.7.5 Deleting Words

The word at the cursor position can be deleted.

1) The word at the cursor position is deleted. 2) The cursor moves to the next word. 3) The deleted word is set in the "EDIT BUFFER" area.

Move the cursor to the word to be deleted.

NEXT PAGE

PREVIOUS PAGE

Press the menu key

DELETE .

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING >

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING >

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING

Z

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

>Y0

DELETE

5. Program 5.7 Word Editing

I-211

5.7.6 Deleting Lines

The line from the current cursor position to

EOB (;) is deleted.

1) The line from the word at the cursor position

to EOB (;) is deleted. 2) The cursor moves to the head word of the

next line. 3) The deleted line is set in the "EDIT

BUFFER" area.

Press the menu key

DELETE .

Move the cursor to the head word of the line to be deleted.

NEXT PAGE

PREVIOUS PAGE

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING >

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ; N4 G01 X200.0;

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING >;

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ; N4 G01 X200.0 ;

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING

Z

O12345678 N1 N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ; N4 G01 X200.0 ;

>G28X0Z0;

DELETE

Deletion starts from this position

N1 G01 X100. Y150. Z0 ; Deletion

Deletion ends at this position

Key input

EOB .

(Note 1) Only the EOB (;) key input in the EDIT BUFFER area is valid. (Note 2) Up to 96 characters of the deleted line, starting from the head word, are set in the EDIT BUFFER

area. (Note 3) After the line is deleted, the deleted words (lines) will be added into the EDIT BUFFER area every

time deleting operation is carried out. Up to 96 characters can be stored in the EDIT BUFFER, so the other characters will be ignored.

5. Program 5.7 Word Editing

I-212

5.7.7 Replacing Words

The word at the cursor position can be replaced with a word in the EDIT BUFFER area data. (The EDIT BUFFER area data is not cleared.)

Move the cursor to the word to be replaced.

NEXT PAGE

PREVIOUS PAGE

Key input the word to be replaced into the EDIT BUFFER area. (Ex.)

Y

1

2

.

3

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING >

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING >

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING >Y12.3

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

REPLACE

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING >Y12.3

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Y12.3 ;

Press the menu key

REPLACE .

1) The word at the cursor position is replaced with the EDIT BUFFER area data.

2) The cursor appears at the word that was replaced.

3) The EDIT BUFFER area data is not cleared.

5. Program 5.7 Word Editing

I-213

5.7.8 Inserting Words

(1) A word in the EDIT BUFFER area can be inserted in the location immediately after the word at the cursor position.

(The EDIT BUFFER area data is not cleared.)

Move the cursor to the word immediately before the position of the word to be inserted.

NEXT PAGE

PREVIOUS PAGE

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING >

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING >

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING >M12

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING

>M12

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 M12 ;

INSERT

Key input the word to be inserted into the EDIT BUFFER area. (Ex.)

M

1

2

Press the menu key

INSERT .

1) The EDIT BUFFER area data is inserted immediately after the word at the cursor position.

2) The cursor moves to the word that was inserted.

3) The EDIT BUFFER area data is not cleared.

5. Program 5.7 Word Editing

I-214

(2) A Word in the EDIT BUFFER can be inserted before the head word of the program (The EDIT BUFFER area data is not cleared.)

Move the cursor to the empty line at the top of the program.

NEXT PAGE

PREVIOUS PAGE

Key input the word to be inserted into the EDIT BUFFER area. (Ex.)

N

1

Press the menu key

INSERT .

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING >N1

O12345678 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING >N1

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

INSERT

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING >

O12345678 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0;

1) Deletion and replacement operations are ignored in this state. The word insert function will be canceled if the

NEXT PAGE key is pressed.

1) The EDIT BUFFER area data is inserted at the top of the program.

2) The cursor moves to the word that was inserted.

3) The EDIT BUFFER area data is not cleared.

5. Program 5.7 Word Editing

I-215

5.7.9 Copying Words

The word at the cursor position can be copied into the EDIT BUFFER area.

Press the menu key

COPY .

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING >

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING >

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

>Y0

COPY

Move the cursor to the word to be copied.

NEXT PAGE

PREVIOUS PAGE

1) The word at the cursor position is set in the EDIT BUFFER area.

2) The cursor moves to the next word.

(Note 1) "%" cannot be copied.

5. Program 5.7 Word Editing

I-216

5.7.10 Program

When the menu key

PROGRAM is pressed, the searched program appears on the left side of the screen, and a list of programs registered in the memory appears on the right side of the screen. The operation search menu (COM.SRH) is highlighted, and the setting area is displayed.

O12345678 TEST CUT PROGRAM EDIT 1/2 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ; N4 G01 X200.0 Z200.0 F500 ; N5 X300.0 ; N6 Z300.0 ; N7 ; N8 ; N9 ; N10 ; N11 ; N12 ; O( )N( )-( )

COM. SRH B.G SRH B.G END COMMENT RETURN

[PROGRAM FILE] PROGRAM ENTRY 11 REMAIN 189 CHARACTER 591 REMAIN 125000 1 25 TESTCUT 2 19 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Display item Details 012345678 This item displays the program No. that was searched. N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ; N4 G01 X200.0 Z200.0 F500 ; N5 X300.0 ; N6 Z300.0 ;

This item displays the program that was searched.

PROGRAM ENTRY and REMAIN

The No. of programs already registered as user machining programs appears in the PROGRAM ENTRY column. The remaining No. of programs that can be registered appears in the REMAIN column. The total of the No. of registered programs and the remainder is the max. No. of programs. This figure is determined by the specifications.

CHARACTER and REMAIN The No. of characters already registered as user machining programs appears in the CHARACTER column. The remaining No. of characters that can be registered appears in the REMAIN column. The value in the REMAIN column is displayed in 250-character units.

This item shows the Nos. of the machining programs already registered. The Nos. are displayed in order from the smallest No. The display range is from 1 to 99999999.

This item shows the No. of characters registered in the memory for the corresponding machining program No.

This item shows the machining program status. An outline of the machining program functions,

specifications, applications, etc., can be displayed as a comment in this item. The comment can be set with up to 18 alphanumeric and symbol characters.

5. Program 5.7 Word Editing

I-217

5.7.11 Deleting Programs

A program to carry out automatic operation can be deleted from the machining programs registered in the memory.

1) The list of programs is updated. 2) The message "DELETE? (Y/N)" appears.

1) Deletion is started. 2) When the designated program No. is found,

that program is deleted. 3) The screen returns to the WORD EDIT

screen (1st menu) if the menu key

RETURN is pressed.

Press

DELETE INS key.

Set the No. of the program to be deleted. (Ex.) O ( 3 ) N ( ) ( )

O 3 N45 G00 X0 Z0 ; N50 G00 X100.0 ; N55 Z100.0 ;

[PROGRAM FILE] 1 25 TESTCUT 2 19 3 4 5

O( 3) N( )-( )

DELETE? (Y/N)

O( 3) N( )-( )

Press

Y Key.

[PROGRAM FILE] 1 25 TESTCUT 2 19 3 4 5

RETURN

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

[PROGRAM FILE] 1 25 TESTCUT 2 19 3 4 5

The program is deleted when

INPUT key is pressed.

(Note 1) Even if there is data in the N ( ) ( ) area during program deletion, it will be ignored. (Note 2) If a sub-program is called from the main program currently being executed, deletion will still be

possible as long as the sub-program is not executed. However, the operation of the program being executed cannot be assured. An error will occur if deletion is designated for a sub-program being executed.

(Note 3) Batch deletion of a setting area is not possible. (Note 4) The list of programs is updated when a program is deleted, but the program display area (left side)

is not.

5. Program 5.7 Word Editing

I-218

5.7.12 Newly Creating Programs

Programs to carry out automatic operation can be created and stored in the memory.

1) The list of programs is updated. 2) Program creation is enabled. 3) The screen returns to the WORD EDIT

screen (1st menu) if the menu key

RETURN is pressed.

Press

SHIFT and

DELETE INS keys.

Set the No. of the program to be registered. (Ex.) O ( 6 ) N ( ) ( )

O 6 %

O( 6) N( )-( )

COM.SRH

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

[PROGRAM FILE] 1 25 TESTCUT 2 19 3 4 5

EDIT

(Note 1) Even if there is data in the N ( ) ( ) area when newly creating the program, it will be ignored. (Note 2) The

SHIFT and

DELETE INS keys are only valid when the COM.SRH menu is highlighted.

(Note 3) An operation search will result if the set program No. has already been registered.

5. Program 5.7 Word Editing

I-219

5.7.13 Operation Search Calling a program

The program Nos., sequence Nos., and block Nos. for carrying out automatic operation can be called from the machining programs registered in the memory.

1) The setting area for "COM. SRH" is displayed.

1) The search starts. 2) When the designated program Nos.,

sequence Nos., and block Nos. are found, that program is displayed, and the screen returns to the WORD EDIT screen (1st menu)

Press

INPUT key.

Press the menu key

COM-SRH .

Set the No. of the program to be called. Set the sequence No. and block No. if required. (Ex.) O ( 1 2 3 ) N ( 4 5 ) ( )

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

[PROGRAM FILE] 1 25 TESTCUT 2 19 3 4 5

O( ) N( )-( )

COM.SRH

O( 123) N( 45)-( )

COM.SRH

SEARCH EXECUTION

O( 123) N( 45)-( )

COM.SRH

EDIT

O 123 N45 G00 X0 Z0 ; N50 G00 X100.0 ; N55 Z100.0 ;

(Note 1) The search will not be executed when the

INPUT key is pressed if only the N No. and B No. have been input.

Always set the program No. before searching. (Note 2) A program deletion operation will be carried out if the program No. is input when the setting area is

displayed and the

C.B CAN key is pressed.

5. Program 5.7 Word Editing

I-220

5.7.14 B. G Search

Calling the program

The program Nos., sequence Nos., and block Nos. to be edited can be called to carry out background editing. New machining programs can be registered if a program No. not registered in the memory is set.

1) The message "SEARCH EXECUTION" appears during the search.

2) The designated program is displayed, and the screen returns to the WORD EDIT screen (1st screen). If the designated program No. does not exist at this time, a new program creation operation will result.

Press

INPUT key.

Set the No. of the program to be background edited. (Ex.) O ( 1 2 3 ) N ( ) ( )

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

[PROGRAM FILE] 1 25 TESTCUT 2 19 3 4 5

O( 123) N( )-( )

B.G SRH

SEARCH EXECUTION

O( 123) N( )-( )

B.G SRH

EDIT BACK GROUND EDITING

O 123 N1 G28 X0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X200.0 ; N5 Z200.0 ;

(Note 1) A program deletion operation will be carried out if the program No. is input when the setting area is displayed and the

C.B CAN key is pressed.

5. Program 5.7 Word Editing

I-221

5.7.15 B. G Quit

The "B.G-END" menu is used to quit the function after carrying out background editing. If a running program is displayed on the EDIT screen, changeover to that program display will not occur unless the "B.G-END" menu is pressed and the background editing is canceled. (The button does not have to be specially pressed even when quitting the background editing if the program in operation is not displayed on EDIT screen.)

5.7.16 Comments

An outline of the machining program functions, specifications, applications, etc., can be set as a comment.

(Note 1) A program deletion operation will be carried out if the program No. is input when the setting area is displayed and the

C.B CAN key is pressed.

1) The "COMMENT" setting area is displayed.

1) The comment is set to the designated program

No. When the designated program No. does not appear on the screen, the page with designated program No. will be displayed. Press

INPUT key again to set the comment.

Press

INPUT key.

Press the menu key

COMMENT .

Set the No. of the program to which the comment will be set. (Ex.) O ( 2 ) COMMENT ( A B C )

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

[PROGRAM FILE] 1 25 TESTCUT 2 19 3 4 5

O( ) COMMENT ( )

COMMENT

O( 2) COMMENT ( ABC )

COMMENT

O12345678 N45 G28 Z0 ; N48 G00 Z200.0 ; N50 Z300.0 ;

[PROGRAM FILE] 1 25 TESTCUT 2 19 ABC 3 4 5

5. Program 5.7 Word Editing

I-222

5.7.17 Setting the Program Operation Start Position

After setting a program for memory operation, the operation can be started from the designated block in the program by designating the starting block. The operation start position in normal word editing is set at the head block of that program. To change this start position, move the cursor to the head of the required starting position block, and press the

INPUT key.

1) The "SEARCH COMPLETE" message

appears, and operation from the designated block is enabled.

Press the

INPUT key.

EDIT >

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

EDIT >

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

EDIT >

O12345678 N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N2 G00 X100.0 ; N3 Z100.0 ;

SEARCH COMPLETE

Move the cursor to the head of the required starting position block.

NEXT PAGE

PREVIOUS PAGE

(Note 1) If the

INPUT key is pressed when the cursor is at a position besides the head of the block, the top of the program will be searched. The program will also be displayed from the top.

(Note 2) Up to 96 characters can be key-input in the EDIT BUFFER area.

Caution

If a block in the program is set as the operation start position is set from a block in the program and the program is started, the program before the set block is not executed. If there are coordinate system shift commands or M, S, T, and B commands before the block set as the starting position, carry out the required commands using the MDI, etc. There is a danger of interference with the machine if the operation is started from the set starting position block without carrying out these operations and commands.

6. Data In/Out

I-223

6. Data In/Out When the function selection key

DIAGN IN/OUT is pressed, the following menu is displayed:

Diagnosis menu (No.5 to 8) Diagnosis menu (No.1 to 4) Diagnosis menu (No.9 to 10) Input/output menu (No.5), Program sever menu (No.1 to 3) Input/output menu (No.1 to 4)

ABS-SRV ADJUST HISTORY CONFIG MENU

ALARM SERVO SPINDLE PLC-I/F MENU

AUX-PRM AUX-MON MENU

COPY HOSTSET HOST IC CARD MENU

INPUT OUTPUT ERASE FILE MENU

Menu selection keys Previous page key Next page key

Input/output menu No.1 to 4

PREVIOUS PAGE

NEXT PAGE

DATA INPUT

1:IN 2:COMP

DATA

OUTPUT

PROGRAM

ERASE

(Note) Use

I/O PARA of

TOOL PARAM to define the data input/output parameter.

Input/output menu No.5

PROGRAM

COPY COPY CONDENSE

Diagnosis menu Refer to the section on diagnosis.

Program server menu Refer to the section on program server.

MENU

MENU

MENU

PROGRAM

FILE

PROGRAM

FILE

(Note) When connected to MELSEC GPPQ/GPPW or GOT, the RS-232C communication port is used constantly, so the input/output device cannot be used. Thus, if input/output operations are attempted when the parameters are set to MELSEC GPPQ/ GPPW or GOT connection, the "E60 IOP ERR-2" error will occur.

6. Data In/Out 6.1 DATA INPUT

I-224

6.1 DATA INPUT Pressing the menu key

INPUT displays the DATA INPUT screen. The DATA INPUT screen allows the operator to input user-created machining programs (main program and

subprogram), tool offsets, parameters, common variables and history data.

[DATA INPUT] IN/OUT 1 #10 MODE # 1 MAIN PROGRAM 1:IN 2:COMP # 2 TOOL DATA OFF #11 PORT No.2 # 3 PARAMETER OFF #12 DEVICE No.1 # 5 COMMON VARI OFF (FDD:9600bps) #30 MACRO PROGRAM #28 AUX-PARA #60 TRACE DATA #99 MAINTENANCE #( ) DATA( ) ( )

INPUT OUTPUT ERASE FILE MENU

$1

(Note 3)

# Item Explanation 1 MAIN PROGRAM (Note 1) The types of data that can be input are indicated.

(1) Used when inputting the machining program. 2 TOOL DATA (2) Used when inputting the tool data. 3 PARAMETER (3) Used when inputting the parameter data. 5 COMMON VARI (4) Used to input a common variable. 28 AUX-PARA (5) Used to input an auxiliary axis parameter data. 30 MACRO PROGRAM (6) Used to input a macro program. 60 TRACE DATA (7) Used to input history data. 10 MODE

1: IN 2: COMP

The operation mode on the DATA INPUT screen is changed between IN (input) and COMP (comparison). After power is turned ON, IN mode is initiated. Since indication in active mode is highlighted, make sure that correct mode is selected before input or comparison operation.

11 PORT NO. The I/O port number and device number required to input data are set.

12 DEVICE NO. If they are already set on the I/O BASE PARAM screen, the setup values are displayed. They may be changed on either screen.

(Note 1) To input a fixed cycle program, set the parameter. Refer to the Appendix 4 "Registration/Editing of Fixed Cycle Program". (Note 2) The screen cannot be changed during data input. (Note 3) When using the 2-part system, the system name of the currently selected system is displayed as

$1 (system 1) and $2 (system 2). This is not displayed when using a 1-part system. (Only L system)

(Note 4) Whether to show or hide name of the selected system can be switched with the parameters. #1050

MemPrg #1286

ext22/bit0 Details

0, 2, 4, 6 - The name of the selected system is not displayed. 1, 3, 5, 7 OFF The name of the selected system is displayed.

ON The name of the selected system is not displayed.

6. Data In/Out 6.1 DATA INPUT

I-225

6.1.1 Change of Input and Comparison To perform data input operation, select the "IN" mode; to perform data comparison operation, select the

"COMP" mode. Before performing input or comparison operation, check the MODE display to ensure that the appropriate mode is set.

To change the mode between input and comparison, perform the following: For example, if the "IN" mode is selected, "IN" is highlighted. (Example) Change to the comparison mode.

# (1 0) DATA (2)

#( 10) DATA ( 2 )

Press the

INPUT key.

1) A change is made to the comparison

mode and the word "COMP" is highlighted.

2) To change to the input mode, set 10 in # ( ) and 1 in DATA ( ), then press the

INPUT key.

6. Data In/Out 6.1 DATA INPUT

I-226

6.1.2 Machining Program Input To input a user-prepared machining program, perform the following: (1) When inputting the program number output onto tape. The program can be input simply by specifying machining program data type #1. If the program number

is specified, the number on tape takes precedence over that number.

1) Data input is started. The program number being entered is displayed in the setting area.

2) When normal data input is

executed to the end and the EOR code is read, data input is terminated.

Press the

INPUT key.

Set the data type. # ( 1 ) DATA ( )

# ( 1 ) DATA ( )

O1234 (TEST-PRO.#1) ; DATA IN EXECUTION # ( 1 ) DATA ( 1234)

% DATA IN COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( )

E E E E E E O O O 1234(TEST-PRO,#1) O N1G28 X0 Y0 Z0 O N2 M02 O O R B B B B R

Program main unit Program number and comment

CAUTION

" ; " "EOB" and " % " "EOR" are explanatory notations. The actual codes are "Line feed" and "%" for ISO, and "End of Block" and "End of Record" for EIA.

To prevent influence from data omission and data transformation in the communication circuit, always verify the data after inputting and outputting machining programs.

6. Data In/Out 6.1 DATA INPUT

I-227

(2) When program number does not exist on tape Specify machining program data type #1 and the program number to be registered.

E E E E E O O N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 O N2 G00X-100 M02 O O R B B B R

1) Data input is started. 2) The program is registered in

memory with the specified program number.

3) When normal data input is

executed to the end and the EOR code is read, data input is terminated.

Press the

INPUT key.

Set the data type and program number. (Example) To register the program with O1000 # ( 1 ) DATA ( 1 0 0 0 )

# ( 1 ) DATA ( 1000)

N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; DATA IN EXECUTION # ( 1 ) DATA ( 1000)

% DATA IN COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( )

Program main unit

6. Data In/Out 6.1 DATA INPUT

I-228

(3) Precaution for using 2-part system When using the 2-part system, the machining program input operation can be switched with the

parameters. #1050

MemPrg #1285

ext21/bit0 #1286

ext22/bit0 Details

0, 2, 4, 6 - The input machining program is registered in the memory common for the systems.

1, 3, 5, 7 OFF OFF The input machining program is registered in the memory for the selected systems.

OFF ON The input machining program is registered in the memory for the selected systems. If the system is not selected, an empty (only EOR [%]) machining program is registered in the memory.

ON OFF The input machining program is separated into machining programs for each system at the $ mark, and is registered in the memory for each system.

ON ON The input machining program is separated into machining programs for each system at the $ mark, and is registered in the memory for each system. If the system does not have a $ mark, an empty (only EOR [%]) machining program is registered in the memory.

(Example) When parameter "#1050 MemPrg" is set to 1, 3, 5 or 7, and "#1286 ext22 bit0" is set to 1,

the file (tape) delimited into systems with the $ mark is separated and input for each system.

E E E E E E E E E E O O O1234 O $1 O N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 O N2 G00 X100. O N2 $2 O G28 X0 O O O R B B B B B B B B R

Program body for System 1 Program body for System 2

6. Data In/Out 6.1 DATA INPUT

I-229

6.1.3 Inputting Tool Offset Data Data which is output by tool offset data output operation can be input. Data which is created in the same format as output data can be input as tool offset data and workpiece

coordinate offset data. (Note) Tool offset data input operation cannot be made during automatic operation. (1) Inputting tool offset data

Set the data type to tool data. # ( 2 ) DATA ( )

# ( 2 ) DATA ( )

1) Paper tape read is initiated. The contents of input data and message "DATA IN EXECUTION" are displayed.

2) When all data to the end has been input and the tape end code % (EOR) is read, data input ends with message "DATA IN COMPLETE" displayed.

Press the

INPUT key. G10 L10 P; DATA IN EXECUTION # ( 2 ) DATA ( )

% DATA IN COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( )

(2) When an error occurs during offset tape input: If an error occurs during offset tape input, the error number and error message will be displayed on the

screen. At this time, input operation stops. (E02, E25, E71, or E86 error) In this case, data input can resume by repressing the

INPUT key while the input screen is being displayed. The data input can resume, beginning with the block next to the erroneous block, which is not input in this case.

6. Data In/Out 6.1 DATA INPUT

I-230

6.1.4 Inputting Parameter Data Parameter data which has been output by parameter output operation can be input. The input parameter may go effective immediately after it is input or after the power is once turned OFF/ON.

(This is the same as when setting from the screen.) After data is input, turn OFF/ON the power. (Note) Parameter data input operation cannot be made during automatic operation. (1) Inputting parameter data

Set the data type to parameter. # ( 3 ) DATA ( )

# ( 3 ) DATA ( )

1) The parameter data input is started. The contents of input data and message "DATA IN EXECUTION" are displayed.

Press the

INPUT key. P5 N1 L; DATA IN EXECUTION # ( 3 ) DATA ( )

% DATA IN COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( )

2) When writing is completed, the message "DATA IN COMPLETE" will display.

Turn the power OFF and ON once.

(2) Input parameter skip operations

1) Skipping N No. data not found in the specifications When "S" is set in the second setting area during data input or compare, and the

INPUT key is pressed, an error will not occur even if parameter No. (N No.) data not found in the specifications is input. Data input and compare of that number will be skipped.

(With normal input and compare, an error will occur if N No. data not found in the specifications is input, and data input/compare will be stopped.)

2) Skipping axis data not found in the specifications When "S" is set in the second setting area during data input or compare, and the

INPUT key is pressed, an error will not occur even if data with a different number of axes is input. Axis parameters not found in the specifications will be skipped during the input and compare.

3) Skipping spindle data not found in the specifications When "S" is set in the second setting area during data input or compare, and the

INPUT key is pressed, an error will not occur even if data with a different number of spindles is input. Spindle parameters not found in the specifications will be skipped during the input and compare.

6. Data In/Out 6.1 DATA INPUT

I-231

6.1.5 Inputting Common Variables Common variable data that has been output by common variable output operation can be input. (Note) Common variable data input operation cannot be performed during automatic operation. (1) Inputting common variable data

Set the data type to common variable. # ( 5 ) DATA ( )

# ( 5 ) DATA ( )

1) Read of the data is started. The contents of input data and message

"DATA IN EXECUTION" are displayed. 2) When all data through the end has been input

and the tape end code % (EOR) is read, data input ends with message "DATA IN COMPLETE" displayed.

Press the

INPUT key. DATA IN EXECUTION # ( 5 ) DATA ( )

% DATA IN COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( )

6. Data In/Out 6.1 DATA INPUT

I-232

6.1.6 Inputting History Data History data that has been output by history data output operation can be input. History data input operation is performed with DATA IN/OUT 1 screen. (Note) History data input operation cannot be performed during automatic operation. (1) Inputting history data

Set the data type to history data. # ( 6 0 ) DATA ( )

# ( 60 ) DATA ( )

1) Read of the data is started. The contents of input data and message "DATA IN EXECUTION" are displayed.

2) When all data through the end has been input and the tape end code % (EOR) is read, data input ends with message "DATA IN COMPLETE" displayed.

Press the

INPUT key. DATA IN EXECUTION # ( 60 ) DATA ( )

% DATA IN COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( )

6. Data In/Out 6.1 DATA INPUT

I-233

6.1.7 Inputting Waveform Data Waveform data that has been output by waveform data output operation can be input. (1) Inputting waveform data

Set the data type to waveform data. # ( 2 2 ) DATA ( )

# ( 22 ) DATA ( )

1) Read of the data is started. The contents of input data and message "DATA IN EXECUTION" are displayed.

2) When all data through the end has been input and the tape end code % (EOR) is read, data input ends with message "DATA IN COMPLETE" displayed.

Press the

INPUT key. DATA IN EXECUTION # ( 22 ) DATA ( )

% DATA IN COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( )

(Note 1) If input operations are attempted while the waveform is displayed, the operation message "V-ANALYZER EXEC." will appear, and the waveform display data will not be input.

(Note 2) If input operations are attempted while the Visual analyzing function is invalid, the error "E01 SETTING ERROR" will occur.

6. Data In/Out 6.1 DATA INPUT

I-234

6.1.8 Inputting Auxiliary Axis Parameter Data Auxiliary axis parameter data that has been output by auxiliary axis parameter output operation can be

input. (1) Inputting auxiliary axis parameter data

Set the data type to auxiliary axis parameter. # ( 2 8 ) DATA ( )

# ( 28 ) DATA ( )

1) Read of the data is started. The contents of input data and message "DATA IN EXECUTION" are displayed.

2) When all data through the end has been input and the tape end code % (EOR) is read, data input ends with message "DATA IN COMPLETE" displayed.

Press the

INPUT key. DATA IN EXECUTION # ( 28 ) DATA ( )

% DATA IN COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( )

(Note 1) If MR-J2-CT is not connected, "E01 SETTING ERROR" will occur and input will not be carried out. (Note 2) Whether to input the auto-tuning parameters depends on the "#7 ATU" parameter settings in the

input data and NC data.

#7 ATU in input data #7 ATU set in NC Auto-tuning parameter input

Auto-tuned (0 or 1) Auto-tuned (0 or 1) Not input Not auto-tuned (2) Auto-tuned (0 or 1) Input (Note 3) Auto-tuned (0 or 1) Not auto-tuned (2) Input (Note 3) Not auto-tuned (2) Not auto-tuned (2) Input (Note 3)

(Note 3) Which parameters can be input depends on the setting of "#7 ATU" parameter.

Refer to "6.2.7 Outputting Auxiliary Axis Parameter Data" for details on auto- tuning target parameters.

6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT

I-235

6.2 DATA OUTPUT Pressing the menu key

OUTPUT displays the DATA OUTPUT screen. The DATA OUTPUT screen allows the operator to output user-created machining programs (main program

and subprogram), tool offset data, parameters, common variables and history data that have been stored in memory.

[DATA OUTPUT] IN/OUT 2 # 1 MAIN PROGRAM # 2 TOOL DATA OFF #11 PORT No.2 # 3 PARAMETER OFF #12 DEVICE No.1 # 5 COMMON VARI OFF (FDD:9600bps) #30 MACRO PROGRAM #28 AUX-PARA #60 TRACE DATA #99 MAINTENANCE #( ) DATA( ) ( )

INPUT OUTPUT ERASE FILE MENU

$1

(Note 4)

# Item Explanation 1 MAIN PROGRAM (Note 1) The types of data that can be output are as follows.

(1) Used to output a machining program. 2 TOOL DATA (2) Used to output tool data. 3 PARAMETER (3) Used to output parameter data. 5 COMMON VARIABLE (4) Used to output a common variable. 28 AUX-PARA (5) Used to output an auxiliary axis parameter data. 30 MACRO PROGRAM (6) Used to output a macro program. 60 TRACE DATA (7) Used to output history data. 11 PORT NO. The I/O port number and device number required to output data

are set. 12 DEVICE NO. If they are already set on the I/O BASE PARAM screen, the setup

values are displayed on the DATA OUTPUT screen. They may be changed on either screen.

(Note 1) To output a fixed cycle program, set the parameter. Refer to the Appendix "Registration and editing of fixed cycle programs". (Note 2) If the data protection, edit lock B, or edit lock C condition is set, data may not be output. For the

details, see the descriptions in "Data protection" and "Edit lock" in Section 6.7. (Note 3) The screen cannot be changed during data output.

Output inhibit condition Output method

Data protection key on Machining programs, tool data, parameters

Edit lock B on Machining programs

8000 to 9999

Edit lock C on Machining programs

9000 to 9999 Specifying individual machining programs

No data is output. Machining programs O8000 to 9999 are not output.

Machining programs O9000 to 9999 are not output.

Specifying ALL Specifying a range

No data is output. Machining programs other than O8000 to 9999 are output.

Machining programs other than O9000 to 9999 are output.

(Note 4) When using the 2-part system, the system name of the currently selected system is displayed as $1 (system 1) and $2 (system 2). This is not displayed when using a 1-part system. (Only L system)

6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT

I-236

(Note 5) Whether to show or hide name of the selected system can be switched with the parameters.

#1050 MemPrg

#1286 ext22/bit0 Details

0, 2, 4, 6 - The name of the selected system is not displayed. 1, 3, 5, 7 OFF The name of the selected system is displayed.

ON The name of the selected system is not displayed. Operation procedure for outputting data

Check that the output device is connected.

Select the output screen.

Set data for # ( ) DATA ( ) then press the

INPUT key.

Start of data output

Execution of data output

"DATA OUT EXECUTION"

"DATA OUT COMPLETE"

"DATA OUT EXECUTION"

1. Output of one machining program # (1) DATA ( ) ( ) number 2. Output of all data # (1) DATA ( ALL) ( ) 3. Output of data in the specified range # (1) DATA ( ) ( ) min. value max. value

E01 SETTING ERROR E03 NO. NOT FOUND E06 NO SPEC E24 PLC RUNNING

Parameter set value

Parameter set value

Parameter set value

Parameter set value

Is the set data correct?

Continuous output (ALL)?

No

Yes

No

Yes

1. Feed by parameter value and EOR 2. Feed by parameter value and EOB 1. Header data and EOB 2. Data 3. Feed by parameter value 1. EOR and feed by parameter value

Header Data Feed

Feed Feed

O E O B

N1

E O B

E O R

E O R

E O B

Feed

End of data output

Data output

6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT

I-237

6.2.1 Machining Program Output To output user-prepared machining programs, perform the following: (1) When only one machining program is output Specify machining program data type #1 and the number of the program to be output.

E E E E E E O O O 1000(TEST) O N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 O M02 O O R B B B B R

% DATA OUT COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( ) ( )

1) Data output is started.

Press the

INPUT key.

Set the data type and program number. (Example) To output program O1000 # ( 1 ) DATA ( 1 0 0 0 )

# ( 1 ) DATA ( 1000) ( )

O1000(TEST); DATA OUT EXECUTION # ( 1 ) DATA ( 1000) ( )

Main program unit Program number and comment (2) When all machining programs are output To output all machining programs registered in memory in batch, specify machining program data type

#1 and "ALL" in DATA ( ).

Press the

INPUT key.

Set 1 in # ( ) and "ALL" in DATA ( ). # ( 1 ) DATA ( A L L )

# ( 1 ) DATA ( ALL ) ( )

All programs are output in the program number ascending order.

E E O O R B

First program

O 100 (Program number and comment) (Program main unit)

E O R

Second program

O 101 (Program number and comment) (Program main unit)

Third and later program (Note 1) When all data of one machining program is output, % is displayed. Note that % is not displayed

each time individual data items are output.

6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT

I-238

When output of the first program is completed, %

is displayed before indicating the next program.

% DATA OUT EXECUTION # ( 1 ) DATA ( ALL ) ( )

O 100; DATA OUT EXECUTION # ( 1 ) DATA ( ALL ) ( )

Also for each of the second and succeeding programs, % is displayed each time one complete program is output.

After all the specified machining programs are output, EOR is output. EOR is not output for individual program output.

% DATA OUT EXECUTION # ( 1 ) DATA ( ALL ) ( )

O 101; DATA OUT EXECUTION # ( 1 ) DATA ( ALL ) ( )

CAUTION

To prevent influence from data omission and data transformation in the communication circuit, always verify the data after inputting and outputting machining programs.

6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT

I-239

(3) When the machining programs in the specified range are to be output A group of programs can be output by specifying a range of program numbers. To specify the range, set the

largest and smallest numbers of the machining programs to be output in the data setting area. The machining programs in the specified range are output sequentially in order of their program numbers.

Last program in the specified range

Machining program Feed

1) Data output starts. 2) The number and the contents of the machining

program being output are displayed in the display area.

3) When all the specified machining programs are output, data set in the data setting area disappears and instead message "DATA OUT COMPLETE" is displayed.

The output tape format is as follows:

# ( 1 ) DATA ( 9000 ) ( 9999 )

% DATA OUT COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( ) ( )

Press the

INPUT key.

Specify the data type, and then the smallest and largest program numbers. (Example) To output program numbers O9000 to O9999, specify: # ( 1 ) DATA ( 9 0 0 0 )

( 9 9 9 9 )

O 9000(M150.SUBPRO); DATA OUT EXECUTION # ( 1 ) DATA ( 9000 ) ( 9999 )

The machining programs are output sequentially.

Feed

Program number and comment

Machining program Feed Program number

and comment

First program in the specified range Programs of the numbers between the first and last numbers

E E E E E E O O O9000( ); N1 M02O O 9XXX M02O O9999( ); N1 M99O O R B B B B R

Feed Feed

(Note) 1. If the number specified as the smallest number is not found, output starts with the machining

program with the number nearest to that number. Likewise, if the number specified as the largest number is not found, output ends with the

machining program with the number nearest to that largest number. 2. Specify the smallest number first, then the largest number. If the numbers are specified

reversely, program error "E01 SETTING ERROR" occurs.

6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT

I-240

(4) For 2-part system When using the 2-part system, the machining program output operation can be switched with the

parameters. #1050

MemPrg #1286

ext22/bit0 Details

0, 2, 4, 6 The machining program registered in the memory common for the systems is output.

1, 3, 5, 7 OFF The machining program registered in the memory for the selected system is output.

ON The machining program registered in the memory for each system is output as one file (tape) delimited with the $ mark.

(Example) When parameter "#1050 MemPrg" is set to 1, 3, 5 or 7, and "#1286 ext22 bit0" is set to 1,

the machining programs registered in each system memory are output as one file (tape) delimited with the $ mark.

E E E E E E E E E E O O O1234 O $1 O N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 O N2 G00 X100. O N2 $2 O G28 X0 O O O R B B B B B B B B R

Program body for System 1 Program body for System 2

6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT

I-241

6.2.2 Outputting Tool Offset Data Tool offset data and workpiece coordinate offset data which is set and displayed on the screen can be

output. The output operation can be made also during automatic operation. The output tape length varies with the tool offset type, the number of sets, and the offset data numeric. For

the 40-set specification, this length is 3 to 4m for type I and 12 to 16m for type II. (1) Tool offset data is output as follows:

Set the data type to tool data. # ( 2 ) DATA ( )

# ( 2 ) DATA ( )

G10 L10 P; DATA OUT EXECUTION # ( 2 ) DATA ( )

1) Output to paper tape is started. The contents of output data and message "DATA OUT EXECUTION" are displayed.

2) After the tape end code % (EOR) is output, data output ends with message "DATA OUT COMPLETE" displayed.

Press the

INPUT key.

% DATA OUT COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( )

(2) Output tape format

Feed

Data area Feed Feed Feed

E E E E O O G10L10P O O R B B R

The data area format is the same as tool offset input (G10) and work offset input (G10) by the program. The data is output in the order of the tool offset and workpiece coordinate offset data.

(Note) For the multiple system, data will be output following the parameters below. #1286 ext22/bit1 0: The data for each system will be output. 1: The data for the system selected with the system selection switch will be output. #1051 MemTol 0: The output will follow ext22 bit1. 1: The common tool offset data specifications will be used between the systems, so the same output as the single system will be used.

6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT

I-242

6.2.3 Outputting Parameter Data Parameter data which is set and displayed on the screen can be output. The output operation can be made

also during automatic operation. This format allows the details of the parameters to be read when the parameter data is output to a printer, etc.

The output tape length varies with the number of axes and parameter numeric. For the three-axis specification, this length is 40 to 50m. The following data is output:

User parameters (Machining parameters, control parameters, axis parameters) Data input/output parameters (I/O BASE PARAM, I/O DEVICE PARAM) All setup parameters Internal parameter data (absolute position internal data) (Note 1) The TOOL OFFSET, TOOL REGISTRATION, TOOL LIFE, and WORK OFFSET data are not

output. (1) Outputting parameter data

1) Output to parameter data is started. The message "DATA OUT EXECUTION" are displayed.

2) After the tape end code % (EOR) is output, data output ends with the message "DATA OUT COMPLETE" displayed.

# ( 3 ) DATA ( TEST1) ( )

DATA OUT COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( ) ( )

Press the

INPUT key.

Set the data type to parameter. # ( 3 ) DATA ( T E S T 1 )

DATA OUT EXECUTION # ( 3 ) DATA ( TEST1) ( )

(2) Output tape format

Comment Data area Feed Feed

E E E E O O PARA100 ( TEST1 ) O N1001T1P1 O R B B B

Feed Data area Feed

E E O O B R

Header (For tape identification)

The set comment is output.

6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT

I-243

(3) Data format The data format is as follows:

Address Definition Details N Parameter number The parameter # number is shown with the value following N. A Axis number For axis data, the axis number is shown with the value following A.

The first axis will be AI. T Axis system number For data per system, the system number is shown with the value

following T. (1st system: T1, 2nd system: T2, PLC axis: T3)

P Parameter data The parameter data is shown with the value following P. The following types of data format are used according to parameter type and display method. (The address order in one block must use the following format.) 1) Common parameter (one data item per one # number)

N1084P0.001;

Parameter setting value

Parameter # number

(1) The output parameter setting value is the same format as the screen display. 2) Axis parameter

N2001A1P10000;

Parameter setting value Axis number 1 to 4

# number on screen

(1) When multiple axes are displayed on one screen The parameter data for when the parameters for multiple axes are displayed on one screen are

output per axis. [Output example]

:

N2001A1P120000 ;

N2002A1P4000 ; N2003A1P21 ;

:

N2001A2P12000 ;

N2002A2P4000 ; N2003A2P21 ;

:

Axis 2 data

Axis 1 data

6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT

I-244

3) System parameter

N1001T1P1;

Parameter setting value System number (1: 1st system, 2: 2nd system, 3: PLC axis) Parameter # number

(1) The parameter data on the screen when the parameters are displayed per system are output as

follows. [Output example] : N1001T1P1 ; N1001T2P1 ; N1001T3P0 ; N1002T1P2 ; N1002T2P1 ; N1002T3P0 ; : (2) The parameter data per system displayed by changing over the system (

$ key) is output per system screen.

[Output example] : N8001T1P99 ; N8002T1P0 ; N8003T1P10000 ; : N8001T2P30 ; N8002T2P1 ; N8003T2P20000 ; :

6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT

I-245

6.2.4 Outputting Common Variable Data Common variable data can be output. The output operation can be performed even during automatic

operation. (1) Common variable data output operation

1) Data output starts and the contents of the output data and message "DATA OUT EXECUTION" are displayed.

2) When tape end code % (EOR) is output, the data output completes with message "DATA OUT COMPLETE" displayed.

# ( 5 ) DATA ( )

% DATA OUT COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( )

Press the

INPUT key.

Set the data type to the common variable. # ( 5 ) DATA ( )

DATA OUT EXECUTION # ( 5 ) DATA ( )

(Note) For the multiple system, data will be output following the parameters below. #1303 V1comN (#100 to set number) system common variables #1304 V0comN (#500 to set number) system common variables The number of data items designated in the parameter will be output in the same manner as the single system. The other common variables will be output for each system.

6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT

I-246

6.2.5 Outputting History Data History data can be output. The output operation can be performed even during automatic operation. The DATA IN/OUT 2 screen is used to output history data. (1) History data output operation

1) Data output starts and the contents of the output data and message "DATA OUT EXECUTION" are displayed.

2) When tape end code % (EOR) is output, the data output completes with message "DATA OUT COMPLETE" displayed.

# ( 60 ) DATA ( 1000 )

% DATA OUT COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( )

Press the

INPUT key.

Set the data type to the history data. # ( 6 0 ) DATA ( )

DATA OUT EXECUTION # ( 60 ) DATA ( )

6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT

I-247

6.2.6 Outputting Waveform Data Waveform data can be output. (1) Waveform data output operation

1) Data output starts and the contents of the output data and message "DATA OUT EXECUTION" are displayed.

2) When tape end code % (EOR) is output, the data output completes with message "DATA OUT COMPLETE" displayed.

# ( 22 ) DATA ( )

% DATA OUT COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( )

Press the

INPUT key.

Set the data type to the waveform data. # ( 2 2 ) DATA ( )

DATA OUT EXECUTION # ( 22 ) DATA ( )

(Note 1) If output operations are attempted while the waveform is displayed, the operation message "V-ANALYZER EXEC." will appear, and the waveform display data will not be output.

(Note 2) If output operations are attempted while the Visual analyzing function is invalid, the error "E01 SETTING ERROR" will occur.

6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT

I-248

6.2.7 Outputting Auxiliary Axis Parameter Data Auxiliary axis parameter data can be output. (1) Auxiliary axis parameter data output operation

1) Data output starts and the contents of the output data and message "DATA OUT EXECUTION" are displayed.

2) When tape end code % (EOR) is output, the data output completes with message "DATA OUT COMPLETE" displayed.

# ( 28 ) DATA ( )

% DATA OUT COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( )

Press the

INPUT key.

Set the data type to the auxiliary axis parameter. # ( 2 8 ) DATA ( )

DATA OUT EXECUTION # ( 28 ) DATA ( )

(Note) If MR-J2-CT is not connected, "E01 SETTING ERROR" will occur and output will not be carried out.

6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT

I-249

MR-J2-CT Parameters and N No. Correspondence Table

No. Symbol name N No. Remarks 1 MSR 50001 Automatic setting2 2 RTY 50002 3 PC1 50003 4 PC2 50004 5 PIT 50005 6 INP 50006 7 ATU 50007 8 PG1 50008 Auto-tuning 9 50009

10 EMG 50010 11 50011

13 MBR 50013 14 NCH 50014

16 JIT 50016

19 PG2 50019 Auto-tuning 20 VG1 50020 Auto-tuning 21 VG2 50021 Auto-tuning 22 VIS 50022 Auto-tuning 23 VDC 50023 Auto-tuning 24 DG2 50024 Auto-tuning

30 MTY 50030 1 31 TMX 50031 1 32 PMS 50032 1 33 BAS 50033 1 34 MAX 50034 1 35 AMR 50035 1 36 JMK 50036 1 37 KCM 50037 1 38 KVI 50038 1 39 VGM 50039 1 40 MLD 50040 1 41 KEC 50041 1 42 IQG 50042 1 43 IDG 50043 1 44 IQI 50044 1 45 IDI 50045 1

50 MD1 50050 Automatic setting2 51 MO1 50051 Automatic setting2

53 MD2 50053 Automatic setting2 54 MO2 50054 Automatic setting2

56 sty02 50056

No. Symbol name N No. Remarks 100 *station 50100 101 Cont1 50101 102 Cont2 50102 103 EmgCont 50103 104 tleng 50104 105 Axis nam 50105 110 ZRNspeed 50110 111 ZRNcreep 50111 112 grid mask 50112 113 grspc 50113 114 ZRNshift 50114 115 ST.ofset 50115 116 ABS Base 50116 117 Limit(+) 50117 118 Limit() 50118

120 ABS Type 50120 123 ABScheck 50123 130 backlash 50130

132 yobi16a 50132 133 yobi16b 50133 134 yobi32a 50134 135 yobi32b 50135 150 Aspeed1 50150 151 Mspeed1 50151 152 time1.1 50152 153 time1.2 50153 154 TL1 50154 155 OD1 50155 156 just1 50156 157 near1 50157 158 Aspeed2 50158 159 Mspeed2 50159 160 time2.1 50160 161 time2.2 50161 162 TL2 50162 163 OD2 50163 164 just2 50164 165 near2 50165 166 Aspeed3 50166 167 Mspeed3 50167 168 time3.1 50168 169 time3.2 50169 170 TL3 50170 171 OD3 50171 172 just3 50172 173 near3 50173

6. Data In/Out 6.2 DATA OUTPUT

I-250

No. Symbol name N No. Remarks

174 Aspeed2 50174 175 Mspeed4 50175 176 time4.1 50176 177 time4.2 50177 178 TL4 50178 179 OD4 50179 180 just4 50180 181 near4 50181 190 stpos2 50190 191 stpos3 50191 192 stpos4 50192 193 stpos5 50193 194 stpos6 50194 195 stpos7 50195 196 stpos8 50196 197 stpos9 50197 200 PSWcheck 50200 201 PSW1dog1 50201 202 PSW1dog2 50202 203 PSW2dog1 50203 204 PSW2dog2 50204 205 PSW3dog1 50205 206 PSW3dog2 50206 207 PSW4dog1 50207 208 PSW4dog2 50208 209 PSW5dog1 50209 210 PSW5dog2 50210 211 PSW6dog1 50211 212 PSW6dog2 50212 213 PSW7dog1 50213 214 PSW7dog2 50214 215 PSW8dog1 50215 216 PSW8dog2 50216 220 push.L 50220 221 push.t1 50221 222 push.t2 50222 223 push.t3 50223

(Note 1) The parameters marked with *1 cannot be set from the screen. (Setting is possible only from the optional setup software.) Note that these parameters can be input/output or backed up to SRAM same as the other parameters.

(Note 2) The items marked with *2 are automatically set, but these parameters can be input/output or backed up to SRAM same as the other parameters.

6. Data In/Out 6.3 PROGRAM ERASE

I-251

6.3 PROGRAM ERASE When the menu key

ERASE is pressed, the PROGRAM ERASE screen is displayed. User-prepared work programs (main program and subprogram) can be erased in any desired program

number or group units on the PROGRAM ERASE screen.

INPUT OUTPUT ERASE FILE MENU

[PROGRAM ERASE] IN/OUT 3 #1 MAIN PROGRAM A 1-- 7999 10000--99999999 #2 B 8000-- 8999 #3 C 9000-- 9999 #4 FIXED CYCLE # ( ) DATA ( )

$1

(Note 1)

Data setting range

# Item Explanation Program number

specification Program

group erase

All program

erase 1 MAIN

PROGRAM

This is specified to erase data in the range of work program numbers 1 to 7999 and 10000 to 99999999.

1 to 7999 and 10000 to 99999999

ALL

2 MAIN PROGRAM

This is specified to erase data in the range of standard subprogram 8000 to 8999 mainly prepared by the user.

8000 to 8999 ALL

3 MAIN PROGRAM

This is specified to erase data in the range of custom programs 9000 to 9999 mainly provided by the machine maker.

9000 to 9999 ALL

CLR

4 FIXED CYCLE Although this is specified to erase a fixed cycle program, normally it cannot be operated. To erase a fixed cycle program, set the parameter. Refer to the Appendix "Registration and editing of fixed cycle programs". When NC is operated without setting the parameter, SETTING ERROR occurs.

(Note 1) When using the 2-part system, the system name of the currently selected system is displayed as

$1 (system 1) and $2 (system 2). This is not displayed when using a 1-part system. (Only L system)

(Note 2) Whether to show or hide name of the selected system can be switched with the parameters. #1050

MemPrg #1285

ext21/bit0 Details

0, 2, 4, 6 - The name of the selected system is not displayed. 1, 3, 5, 7 OFF The name of the selected system is displayed.

ON The name of the selected system is not displayed.

6. Data In/Out 6.3 PROGRAM ERASE

I-252

(1) To erase one machining program To erase a specified machining program from the machining programs registered in memory, perform

the following:

1) Program erase is started and the message "ERASE EXECUTION" is displayed in the message field. Usually program erasure is terminated in a moment.

2) When the erase is complete, the message "ERASE COMPLETE" is displayed in the message field and the data setting area becomes blank.

# ( 1 ) DATA ( 1001 )

ERASE COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( )

Press the

INPUT key.

Set the data type and program number of the machining program to be erased. (Example) To erase machining program O1001 # ( 1 )

DATA ( 1 0 0 1 )

ERASE EXECUTION # ( 1 ) DATA ( 1001 )

PROGRAM ENTRY 20 REMAIN 180 CHARACTER 21234 REMAIN 39750 1 123 2 300 10 222 100 312 1000 125 1001 313 1020 297

PROGRAM ENTRY 19 REMAIN 181 CHARACTER 20921 REMAIN 40250 1 123 2 300 10 222 100 312 1000 125 1001 313 1020 297

PROGRAM FILE before erase execution PROGRAM FILE after erase execution Erase execution

Program O1001 for which the erase function is executed disappears from the PROGRAM FILE screen. The new values are displayed in PROGRAM ENTRY, CHARACTER, and REMAIN.

6. Data In/Out 6.3 PROGRAM ERASE

I-253

(2) To erase machining program group To erase any of <1> 1~7999 and 10000~99999999, <2> 8000~8999, and <3> 9000~9999 of the data

types of machining programs registered in memory, perform the following:

Program erase is executed and terminated in a moment. The message "ERASE COMPLETE" is displayed in the message field and the data setting area becomes blank.

# ( 1 ) DATA ( ALL )

ERASE COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( )

Press the

INPUT key.

Set the data type to be erased and "ALL" in DATA ( ). (Example) To erase the entire machining program A group # ( 1 ) DATA ( A L L )

ERASE EXECUTION # ( 1 ) DATA ( ALL )

PROGRAM ENTRY 4 REMAIN 196 CHARACTER 1539 REMAIN 60750 8000 265 8001 321 9000 560 9050 393

Check , etc. on the PROGRAM FILE screen.

6. Data In/Out 6.3 PROGRAM ERASE

I-254

(3) To erase all machining programs registered in memory To erase all of machining programs 1~99999999 registered in memory, perform the following:

# ( ) DATA ( CLR )

ERASE COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( )

Press the

INPUT key.

Set "CLR" in DATA ( ). # ( ) DATA ( C L R )

ERASE EXECUTION # ( ) DATA ( CLR )

PROGRAM ENTRY 0 REMAIN 200 CHARACTER 0 REMAIN 64000

Check the PROGRAM FILE screen.

1) All machining program erase is executed and terminated almost in a moment. The message "ERASE COMPLETE" is displayed in the message field and the data setting area becomes blank.

1) "PROGRAM ENTRY" is set to 0 and "REMAIN" is set to the maximum number of programs defined in the specifications.

2) "CHARACTER" is set to 0 and "REMAIN" is set to the maximum number of stored characters defined in the specifications.

The number of programs and the number of characters are as listed below according to the specifications: Tape storage

length Number of programs

Number of characters

40m 64 17500 80m 128 32000 160m 200 64000 320m 200 128000 600m 400 236250 1280m 1000 512000 2560m 1000 1024000 5120m 1000 2048000

3) The PROGRAM FILE screen becomes blank, indicating that no programs are registered.

1) No value needs to be entered in # ( ).

6. Data In/Out 6.3 PROGRAM ERASE

I-255

(4) Precautions for 2-part system When using the 2-part system, the machining program erase operation can be switched with the

parameters. #1050

MemPrg #1285

ext21/bit0 Details

0, 2, 4, 6 - Of the machining programs registered in the memory common for the systems, the designated machining program is erased.

1, 3, 5, 7 OFF Of the machining programs registered in the memory for the selected systems, the designated machining program is erased.

ON Of all the machining programs registered in the memory for each system, the designated machining program is erased.

When using the 2-part system and the same number batch generation for all system programs is valid, the program is erased in the following manner according to the presence of programs in each system.

Presence of program System 1 System 2

Operation

Yes Yes The System 1 and System 2 programs are erased simultaneously. Yes No Only the System 1 program is erased. No Yes Only the System 2 program is erased. No No An error (E14) occurs.

6. Data In/Out 6.4 PROGRAM COPY

I-256

6.4 PROGRAM COPY When the menu key

COPY is pressed, the PROGRAM COPY screen is displayed. Copy, condense, merge, and number change of user-prepared machining programs (main program and

subprogram) can be performed on the PROGRAM COPY screen.

COPY MENU

[PROGRAM COPY] IN/OUT 5 #1 COPY #2 CONDENSE #3 MERGE #4 PROGRAM NO. CHANGE #( ) O( ) --> O( )

$1

(Note 1)

(Note 1) When using the 2-part system, the system name of the currently selected system is displayed as

$1 (system 1) and $2 (system 2). This is not displayed when using a 1-part system. (Only L system)

(Note 2) Whether to show or hide name of the selected system can be switched with the parameters. #1050

MemPrg #1286

ext22/bit0 Details

0, 2, 4, 6 - The name of the selected system is not displayed. 1, 3, 5, 7 OFF The name of the selected system is displayed.

ON The name of the selected system is not displayed.

6. Data In/Out 6.4 PROGRAM COPY

I-257

6.4.1 Machining Program Copy A machining program selected among work programs registered in memory can be copied as another

program having a different program number. The source program remains intact. Set 1 in # ( ) for the copy command. Set the program number of the copy source program and the program

number of new program.

Press the

INPUT key.

(Example) To copy program O1000 into O2000 # ( 1 )

O ( 1 0 0 0 ) O ( 2 0 0 0 )

# ( 1 )O ( 1000)O( 2000)

COPY EXECUTION # ( 1 ) O( 1000)O( 2000)

COPY COMPLETE # ( ) O( )O( )

1) A copy is started and the message "COPY EXECUTION" is displayed in the message field. It may be terminated in a moment (when there is less copy data).

2) When the copy is complete, the message "COPY COMPLETE" is displayed in the message field.

(Note 1) When using the 2-part system, the machining program copy operation can be switched with the

parameters. #1050

MemPrg #1285

ext21/bit0 Details

0, 2, 4, 6 - Of the machining programs registered in the memory common for the systems, the designated machining program is copied to the memory common for the systems with a different machining program number.

1, 3, 5, 7 OFF Of the machining programs registered in the memory for the selected systems, the designated machining program is copied to the memory for the selected system as a different machining program number.

ON Of all the machining programs registered in the memory for each system, the designated machining program is copied to the memory for each system with a different machining program number.

(Note 2) When using the 2-part system and the same number batch generation for all system programs is valid, an error (E64) will occur if the copy destination program is found in any of the systems.

6. Data In/Out 6.4 PROGRAM COPY

I-258

(Note 3) When using the 2-part system and the same number batch generation for all system programs is valid, the program will be copied in the following manner according to the presence of the copy source program in each system.

Presence of program System 1 System 2 Operation

Yes Yes

The copy source program for System 1 is copied to the copy destination program for System 1. The copy source program for System 2 is copied to the copy destination program for System 2.

Yes No

The copy source program for System 1 is copied to the copy destination program for System 1. The System 2 copy destination program is newly created. (An empty program is created.)

No Yes

The System 1 copy destination program is newly created. (An empty program is created.) The copy source program for System 2 is copied to the copy destination program for System 2.

No No An error (E14) occurs.

6. Data In/Out 6.4 PROGRAM COPY

I-259

6.4.2 Machining Program Condense The storage efficiency of the machining programs registered in memory may be lowered when correction

such as data deletion or addition is made. When memory is used wastefully, the condense function can be used to move the intermediate blank portions forward and increase the remaining number of characters that can be registered.

Set 2 in # ( ) for the condense command. To execute the condense function for all machining programs registered in memory, set ALL in first 0 ( ).

Press the

INPUT key.

To condense all work programs registered in memory # (2) O (ALL) O ( )

# (2) O ( ALL)O( )

CONDENSE EXECUTIN # (2) O ( ALL)O( )

CONDENSE COMPLETE # ( ) O ( )O( )

1) Condense is started and the message "CONDENSE EXECUTION" is displayed in the message field.

2) The time required for condense varies depending on the total number of the registered machining programs. Do not turn off the NC power during condense execution.

(Note 1) When using the 2-part system, the machining program condense operation can be switched with

the parameters. #1050

MemPrg #1285

ext21/bit0 Details

0, 2, 4, 6 - Of the machining programs registered in the memory common for the systems, the designated machining program is condensed.

1, 3, 5, 7 OFF Of the machining programs registered in the memory for the selected systems, the designated machining program is condensed.

ON Of the machining programs registered in the memory for each system, the designated machining program is condensed.

(Note 2) When using the 2-part system and the same number batch generation for all system programs is valid, an error (E14) will occur if the all system condense program is not found.

(Note 3) When using the 2-part system and the same number batch generation for all system programs is valid, the programs cannot be condense in a system that does not have the condense program.

(Note 4) When using the 2-part system, and ALL is set, all machining programs registered in the memory for all systems will be condensed.

6. Data In/Out 6.4 PROGRAM COPY

I-260

6.4.3 Machining Program Merge To prepare a new machining program by using the machining program contents stored in memory, one

machining program can be followed by a copy of another program. The two programs are merged into a new program.

Set 3 in # ( ) for the merge command. Set the copy source and destination program numbers in order.

Press the

INPUT key.

(Example 1) To move program O1001 to the area following program O1000 for merge # ( 3 )

O ( 1 0 0 1 ) O ( 1 0 0 0 ) # ( 3 ) O( 1001)O( 1000)

MERGE EXECUTION # ( 3 ) O( 1001)O( 1000)

MERGE COMPLETE # ( ) O( )O( )

1) Merge is executed and the message "MERGE EXECUTION" is displayed in the message field. It may be terminated in a moment (when there is less transfer data).

2) When the merge is completed, the message "MERGE COMPLETE" is displayed in the message field.

(Example 2) When program O1002 is moved to the area following program O1000 for merge after

operation in (Example 1) above, a new program is prepared as shown below. The three programs are merged into O1000. O1001 and O1002 remain unchanged.

(Empty)

(Empty)

(Program O1001)

(Program O1002)

250 characters

(Empty)

O1000 (Program O1000)

(Program O1001)

(Program O1002)

O1001

O1002

Marge

Marge

250 characters

250 characters

250 characters

6. Data In/Out 6.4 PROGRAM COPY

I-261

(Note 1) When using the 2-part system, the machining program merge operation can be switched with the parameters.

#1050 MemPrg

#1285 ext21/bit0 Details

0, 2, 4, 6 - Of the machining programs registered in the memory common for the systems, the machining programs with the designated program numbers are merged together.

1, 3, 5, 7 OFF Of the machining programs registered in the memory for the selected system, the machining programs with the designated program numbers are merged together.

ON Of all the machining programs registered in the memory for each system, the machining programs with the designated machining program numbers are merged together in each system.

(Note 2) When using the 2-part system and the same number batch generation for all system programs is valid, an error (E14) will occur if the merge source program for all systems is not found.

(Note 3) When using the 2-part system and the same number batch generation for all system programs is valid, the program will be merged in the following manner according to the presence of the merge destination program in each system.

Presence of program System 1 System 2

Operation

Yes Yes

The System 1 merge source program will be merged with the System 1 merge destination program. The System 2 merge source program will be merged with the System 2 merge destination program.

Yes No

The System 1 merge source program will be merged with the System 1 merge destination program. The System 2 merge destination program will be newly created, and then the System 2 merge source program will be merged with the System 2 merge destination program.

No Yes

The System 1 merge destination program will be newly created, and then the System 1 merge source program will be merged with the System 1 merge destination program. The System 2 merge source program will be merged to the System 2 merge destination program.

No No An error (E14) occurs. (Note 4) When using the 2-part system and the same number batch generation for all system programs is

valid, the programs in the systems having the merge source program are merged. The programs in systems that do not have the merge source program will not be merged.

6. Data In/Out 6.4 PROGRAM COPY

I-262

6.4.4 Changing the Machining Program Number The program number of a machining program registered in memory can be changed. To execute the number change command, set #4. Set the current and new program numbers in order.

Press the

INPUT key.

(Example) When O1000 is changed to O3000: # ( 4 )

O ( 1 0 0 0 ) ( 3 0 0 0 )

# ( 4 ) O (1000)O(3000)

NO. CHANGE EXECUTION # ( 4 ) O (1000)O(3000)

NO. CHANGE COMPLETE # ( ) O ( )O( )

1) Number change processing is initiated with "NO. CHANGE EXECUTION" displayed in the message field. This processing is completed in a moment. Then, the message "NO. CHANGE COMPLETE" is displayed.

(Note 1) When using the 2-part system, the machining program number change operation can be

switched with the parameters. #1050

MemPrg #1285

ext21/bit0 Details

0, 2, 4, 6 - Of the machining programs registered in the memory common for the systems, the designated machining program will be registered in the memory common for the systems with a different program number.

1, 3, 5, 7 OFF Of the machining programs registered in the memory for the selected systems, the designated machining program will be registered in the memory for the selected system with a different program number.

ON Of all the machining programs registered in the memory for each system, the designated machining program will be registered in each system memory with a different program number.

(Note 2) When using the 2-part system and the same number batch generation for all system programs is valid, an error (E64) will occur if the rename destination program is found in any of the systems.

(Note 3) When using the 2-part system and the same number batch generation for all system programs is valid, the program in the system having the rename source program will be renamed. Programs in a system that does not have the rename source program will not be renamed.

6. Data In/Out 6.5 PROGRAM FILE

I-263

6.5 PROGRAM FILE When the menu key

FILE is pressed, the PROGRAM FILE screen is displayed. The PROGRAM FILE screen lists the user-prepared machining programs stored in memory.

INPUT OUTPUT ERASE FILE MENU

[PROGRAM FILE] IN/OUT 4.1/1 PROGRAM ENTRY 20 REMAIN 180

CHARACTER 21234 REMAIN 39750

1 123 TESTCUT

2

10

100

1000

1001

1020

2000 456

0( ) COMMENT ( )

$1

(Note 3)

Item Explanation PROGRAM ENTRY and REMAIN

The number of programs already registered as user machining programs is displayed in the PROGRAM ENTRY field. The remaining number of programs that can be registered is displayed in the REMAIN field. The sum total of the PROGRAM ENTRY and REMAIN values is the maximum number of registered programs. This value is defined in the specifications. Note) When using the 2-part system, the total number of programs for the

all systems will be displayed at PROGRAM ENTRY and REMAIN. CHARACTER and REMAIN The number of characters already registered as user machining programs

is displayed in the CHARACTER field. The remaining number of characters that can be registered is displayed in the REMAIN field. The sum total of the CHARACTER and REMAIN values is the maximum number of stored characters. This value is defined in the specifications. A value in 250-character units is displayed in REMAIN. Note) When using the 2-part system, the total number of characters for all

systems will be displayed at CHARACTER and REMAIN.

The numbers of the already registered machining program are indicated in the ascending order in the range of 1 to 99999999.

The number of stored characters is indicated for each machining program number.

The machining program status is indicated. (Not used) A summary of the machining program functions,

specifications, and applications can be displayed as a comment of up to 18 alphanumeric and symbol characters.

It can also be specified during input from paper tape. It can also be set on the screen.

6. Data In/Out 6.5 PROGRAM FILE

I-264

(Note 1) If a large number of short programs are registered or edit operation is performed frequently, the memory use efficiency lowers because of the memory configuration and (CHARACTER + REMAIN) becomes less than the maximum number of available characters that are stored. If the difference between them is extremely large, the condense function can be used to improve the memory use efficiency.

(Note 2) If preparing comment, space (

SP ) can be written in it. But, the space is ignored after registration for efficient use of memory.

(Note 3) When using the 2-part system, the system name of the currently selected system is displayed as $1 (system 1) and $2 (system 2). This is not displayed when using a 1-part system. (Only L system)

(Note 4) Whether to show or hide name of the selected system can be switched with the parameters. The list of machining program numbers can also be switched with the parameters.

#1050 MemPrg

#1285 ext21/bit0

#1286 ext22/bit0 System name display Program number list display

0, 2, 4, 6 -

-

The name of the selected system is not displayed.

The numbers of the machining programs registered in the memory common for the systems are listed.

1, 3, 5, 7 OFF - -

OFF

The name of the selected system is displayed.

The numbers of the machining programs registered in the memory for the selected system are listed.

ON

ON

The name of the selected system is not displayed.

The numbers of the machining programs registered in the memory for all systems are listed.

6. Data In/Out 6.6 RS-232C I/O Device Connection

I-265

6.6 RS-232C I/O Device Connection 6.6.1 Connection of Tape Reader, Tape Puncher, Printer, FLD Refer to Appendix "RS-232C I/O Device Parameter Setting Examples and Cable Connections" for the

parameter settings of each I/O device.

CAUTION

Always turn the power OFF before connecting/disconnecting the input/output device cable. Failure to do so could damage the I/O device and control unit.

6. Data In/Out 6.7 Data Protection

I-266

6.7 Data Protection 6.7.1 Data Protection Key Data protection keys can inhibit data from being set or erased. There are three types of data protection keys

as shown below (the key names depend on the machine makers. For the details, refer to the manuals issued by individual machine makers).

1) KEY 1: Protection of all tool data and coordinate system values preset by origin setting 2) KEY 2: Protection of user parameters and common variables 3) KEY 3: Protection of work programs The data protection keys protect data when they are turned off.

CRT data

setting screen

KEY1 Tool data

User parameters

Machining programs

Data protection key Target data

KEY2

KEY3

1) Protection of tool data (KEY 1) When KEY 1 is OFF, the operation items listed in Table 1 are inhibited.

Table 1 Data protection by KEY 1

No. Operation Screen 1 Origin setting MONITOR/POSITION 2 Setting/erasing of tool nose wear compensation TOOL/COMP TOOL TIP OFFSET 3 Setting/erasing of tool length offset TOOL/COMP TOOL DATA

4 Setting/erasing of nose-R compensation, wear compensation and tool nose point TOOL/COMP NOSE-R/P

5 Setting/erasing of tool life data TOOL/COMP TOOL LIFE

6 Setting/erasing of workpiece coordinate offset data PARAM/WORK OFFSET

7 Tape input of tool offset data IN/OUT INPUT 8 Tape output of tool offset data IN/OUT OUTPUT

(Note) When key 1 is OFF, no data is input by pressing any key other than the MENU key on the

screens corresponding to numbers 2 to 6 in Table 1. Instead, it will display the message "DATA PROTECT".

You can't set the origin by pressing the

C.B CAN key on the POSITION/COORDINATE screen.

Only the message "DATA PROTECT" will be displayed. Manual numeric command also cannot be carried out on the TOOL screen. When an attempt is made to perform the operation of number 7 or and/or 8, you cannot input or

output data through the input key. Instead, the message "DATA PROTECT" will be displayed.

6. Data In/Out 6.7 Data Protection

I-267

2) Protection of user parameters and common variables (KEY 2) When KEY 2 is turned OFF, the operation items listed in Table 2 are inhibited.

Table 2 Data protection by KEY 2

No. Operation Screen 1 Machining parameter setting PARAM/PROCESS 2 Control parameter ON/OFF PARAM/CONTROL 3 Axis parameter setting PARAM/AXIS 4 Barrier data PARAM/BARRIER 5 Common variable setting MONITOR/COMMON VARIABLE 6 I/O basic parameter setting IN/OUT (PARAMETER) 7 Parameter tape input IN/OUT/INPUT 8 Parameter tape output IN/OUT/OUTPUT

(Note) When KEY 2 is OFF, pressing any key other than the MENU key on the screens corresponding

to numbers 1 to 6 in Table 2 does not enter any data, but displays message "DATA PROTECT".

When an attempt is made to perform the operation of number 7 or 8, pressing the

INPUT key cannot input or output any data, causing message "DATA PROTECT" to be displayed.

3) Protection of machining program (KEY 3) When KEY 3 is turned OFF, the operation items listed in Table 3 are inhibited.

Table 3 Data protection by KEY 3

No. Operation Screen Extended

operation menu 1 Storing MDI data in memory MDI MDI ENTRY 2 Editing machining program EDIT 3 Creating machining program EDIT PROGRAM 4 Setting comments of stored program EDIT FILE

5 Storing and checking machining program in memory IN/OUT/INPUT

6 Erasing machining program (single, group, all) IN/OUT/ERASE 7 Setting comment of stored program IN/OUT/FILE

8 Copying, condensing, and merging a machining program, and changing its number IN/OUT/COPY

9 Outputting machining program IN/OUT/OUTPUT

10 Modifying the buffer of machining program MONITOR/ COORDINATE

(Note 1) When KEY 3 is OFF, pressing any key other than the MENU key on the screens corresponding to

numbers 1 to 4 and 6 to 8 in the above table or the extended operation menu screen causes message "DATA PROTECT" to be displayed; no data can be input.

When an attempt is made to perform the operation of number 5, 9, or 10 in Table 3, pressing the

INPUT key (for 5 and 9) or the cursor key (for 10) causes message "DATA PROTECT" to be displayed without the operation coming into effect.

(Note 2) When using the 2-part system, editing, input and output of the machining programs in all systems can be prohibited with the data protection key 3 (Y23A).

6. Data In/Out 6.7 Data Protection

I-268

6.7.2 Edit Lock B, C The edit lock function B or C inhibits machining program B or C from being edited or erased when these

programs require to be protected.

Machining program A 1~ 7999

Machining program B (User-prepared standard subprogram) 8000~ 8999

Editing is inhibited by edit lock B.

Machining program C (Machine maker customized program) 9000~ 9999

Editing is inhibited by edit lock C.

Machining program A 10000~ 99999999

Editing is inhibited by data protect (KEY 3).

Setting an edit lock affects the following operations on the EDIT/MDI and IN/OUT screens. : Enabled : Disabled

Edit lock B Edit lock C

Screen Operation Work program Work program A B C A B C EDIT/ MDI

SEARCH PROGRAM MDI ENTRY

Data search Edit Edit MDI entry

IN/ OUT

IN OUT COPY ERASE COMMENT

Input Collation Output Copy Condense Merge Program number change Erase Comment setting

MONI- TOR

PROGRAM Buffer

An attempt to perform any of the locked operations causes error message "E15 EDIT LOCK B" or "E16

EDIT LOCK C" to be displayed. (Note 1) When using the 2-part system, the machining programs in all systems are protected with edit lock

B and C.

6. Data In/Out 6.7 Data Protection

I-269

When an edit lock function is effective, the processing by the machining programs is executed except for those I/O functions that are locked. To prevent any negligence of necessary operation, the data protection conditions of machining programs are displayed in the DATA IN/OUT screen. Information displayed and the screen formats are as follows:

Information displayed

Data Protection state

Explanation

#1 Main program ABC Programs A, B, and C are protected (Protection KEY 3 OFF)

BC Programs B and C are protected - Edit lock B (Protection KEY 3 ON)

C Program C is protected - Edit lock C (Protection KEY 3 ON, edit lock B OFF)

#2 Tool data ON Tool data is protected (Protection KEY 1 OFF)

OFF (Protection KEY 1 ON) #3 Parameter ON User parameter data is protected

(Protection KEY 2 OFF) OFF (Protection KEY 2 ON)

DATA INPUT screen DATA OUTPUT screen

[DATA INPUT] IN/OUT 1 #1 MAIN PROGRAM C #2 TOOL DATA OFF #3 PARAMETER OFF #5 COMMON VARI OFF

#10 MODE 1:IN 2:COMP #11 PORT NO. 2 #12 DEVICE NO. 1 (FDD : 9600bps) #60 TRACE DATA #99 MAINTENANCE

[DATA OUTPUT] IN/OUT 2

#1 MAIN PROGRAM C #2 TOOL DATA OFF #3 PARAMETER OFF #5 COMMON VARI OFF

#11 PORT NO. 2 #12 DEVICE NO. 1 (FDD : 9600bps) #60 TRACE DATA #99 MAINTENANCE

7. Diagnosis

I-270

7. Diagnosis When the function selection key

DIAGN IN/OUT is pressed, the following menu is displayed.

Diagnosis menu (No.9 to 10) Input/output menu (No.5), Program sever menu (No.1 to 3) Input/output menu (No.1 to 4) Diagnosis menu (No.5 to 8) Diagnosis menu (No.1 to 4)

AUX-PRM AUX-MON SUPPORT MENU

COPY HOSTSET HOST IC CARD MENU

INPUT OUTPUT ERASE FILE MENU

ABS-SRV ADJUST HISTORY CONFIG MENU

ALARM SERVO SPINDLE PLC-I/F MENU

Menu selection keys Previous page key Next page key

OPERATION HISTORY

NC-DATA SAMPLING

H/W MONITOR

ABS POSITION SET

PS DIAGNOSIS

SERVO DIAGNOSIS-2

SERVO DIAGNOSIS

DIAGN menu No.1 to 4

PREVIOUS PAGE

NEXT PAGE

ALARM

MESSAGE

SPINDLE MONITOR

DIAGN menu No.5 to 8

Input/Output menu Refer to the section on data input/output.

Program server menu Refer to the section on program server.

DIAGN menu No.9 to 10

AUXILIARY

AXIS PARAMETER

AUXILIARY

AXIS MONITOR

PLC-I/F

SERVO

MONITOR-2

SERVO

MONITOR

ABS SERVO

MONITOR

OPERATION

HISTORY

S/W

MODULE TREE

ADJUST

S-ANALOG

PREVIOUS PAGE

NEXT PAGE

MENU

MENU

MENU

MENU

MELDASNET

SUPPORT PARAMETER

7. Diagnosis 7.1 ALARM MESSAGE

I-271

7.1 ALARM MESSAGE When the menu key

ALARM is pressed, the ALARM/DIAGN screen is displayed.

(1) Alarm The code and number or message relating to an operation alarm, program error, MCP alarm, servo

alarm, or system error are displayed. (2) Stop code The automatic operation disable state or stop state in automatic operation mode is displayed in code

and error number. (3) Alarm message The alarm messages specified by the

user PLC (built-in) are displayed. (4) Operator message The operator messages specified by

the user PLC (built-in) are displayed.

ALARM SERVO SPINDLE PLC-I/F MENU

ALARM/DIAGN 1 M01 OPERATION ERROR 0102

Refer to the Appendix. List of Alarms for details on the alarms. When an alarm occurs, the class code will display on all screens. 7.1.1 Tracing of Alarm and Stop Codes The alarm data will be stored if an alarm occurs. The stop code displayed at automatic operation stop, etc.,

is also stored. The alarm data and stop codes are stored separately. Up to 24 of each is registered, and the last 24 occurrences can be traced.

(1) Diagnosis of stored alarm and stop code data The data in which the latest 24 alarms or stop codes are stored can be displayed on the alarm diagnosis

screen and traced. The procedure is shown below.

Press either of the following cursor keys.

The stored alarm data will display.

1 Third to previous

Second to previous Previous

Latest alarm

Latest stop code

The digit to the right of the display shows the occurrence of the data.

7. Diagnosis 7.1 ALARM MESSAGE

I-272

The display can be changed to the previous and next alarms with the

keys.

The

key will show the previous data occurrence. The

key will show the next data occurrence.

Press the

SHIFT and

C.B CAN keys. The display will return to the normal

current alarm display screen. This is the same for changing over to other screens once.

(Note) The number of items to be registered depends on the machine model.

7. Diagnosis 7.2 SERVO MONITOR

I-273

7.2 SERVO MONITOR 7.2.1 Servo Monitor When the menu key

SERVO is pressed, the SERVO MONITOR screen is displayed.

ALARM SERVO SPINDLE PLC-I/F MENU

[SERVO MONITOR] ALARM/DIAGN 2. 1/5 GAIN (1/sec) 0 0 0 0 DROOP (i) 0 0 0 0 SPEED (rpm) 0 0 0 0 CURRENT (%) 2 2 2 0 MAX CUR1 (%) 52 37 29 14 MAX CUR2 (%) 2 2 3 0 OVER LOAD (%) 0 0 0 0 OVER REG (%) 0 0 0 0 AMP DISP D1 D2 D3 C4 ALARM

Data Display

unit Explanation

GAIN 1/s The position loop gain is displayed. The position loop gain is:

DROOP i An error of the actual machine position to the command position is called droop. This error is proportional to the command speed value.

SPEED r/min Actual rotation speed of motor. CURRENT % The motor current is displayed in terms of continuous current during

stalling. MAXCUR1 % The current FB ratio to the current limit is shown with a percentage.

1) The peak value is constantly sampled, and the value is updated every second.

2) The maximum value of the current FB peak sampled after the power was turned on is constantly displayed.

MAXCUR2 % The maximum value of the current FB peak sampled in the last two seconds is constantly displayed.

OVER LOAD % Data used to monitor overload. OVER REG % This is the data used to monitor the resistance load state when the

resistance regenerative power supply is connected. AMP DISP The same details as the driver's 7-segment LED are displayed. ALM The alarms and warnings other than the driver display are displayed.

feedrate (mm/s) tracking delay error (mm)

7. Diagnosis 7.2 SERVO MONITOR

I-274

7.2.2 Servo Monitor (2)

ALARM SERVO SPINDLE PLC-I/F MENU

[SERVO MONITOR(2)] ALARM/DIAGN 2.2/9 CYC CNT (p) 1000000 1000000 1000000 1000000 GRDSP 10.000 10.000 10.000 10.000 GRID -99999.999 -99999.999 -99999.999 -99999.999 MAC POS -99999.999 -99999.999 -99999.999 -99999.999 MOT POS -99999.999 -99999.999 -99999.999 -99999.999 SCA POS -99999.999 -99999.999 -99999.999 -99999.999 FB ERROR (i) -500 -500 -500 -500 DFB COMP (i) -332 -332 -332 -332 DIS TO GO -99999.999 -99999.999 -99999.999 -99999.999 POSITION (2) -99999.999 -99999.999 -99999.999 -99999.999 MANUAL IT -99999.999 -99999.999 -99999.999 -99999.999

Data Display

unit Explanation

CYC CNT Pulse The position within one rotation of the encoder detector is displayed. The position uses the grid point value as 0, and will display the position within one rotation within the range of 0 ~ RNG (movement unit) 1000.

GRDSP Command unit

The grip interval for zero point return is displayed.

GRID Command unit

The length from the dog-off to grip point when dog-type reference point return is executed is displayed. The grid mask amount is not included.

MAC POS Command unit

Basic machine coordinate system position

MOT POS Command unit

The feedback position of the speed detector is displayed.

SCA POS Command unit

The feedback position of the machine end position detector is displayed.

FB ERROR i The error of the motor end FB and machine end FB is displayed. DFB COMP This is not used. DIS TO GO Command

unit The remaining movement distance of one block is displayed.

POSITION (2) Command unit

The value of the tool compensation amount subtracted from the current value is displayed.

MANUAL IT Command unit

The amount of interrupt movement in the manual absolute off state is displayed.

7. Diagnosis 7.2 SERVO MONITOR

I-275

7.2.3 Servo Diagnosis

ALARM SERVO SPINDLE PLC-I/F MENU

[SERVO DIAGNOSIS] ALARM/DIAGN 2.3/5 UNIT TYP A-SVJ A-SVJ A-SVJ A-SVJ UNIT NO S/W VER 510000AO 510000AO 510000AO 510000AO CONTROL SEMI SEMI SEMI SEMI MOT DT OHE25K OHE25K OHE25K OHE25K MAC DT MOTOR HA80 HA80 HA80 HA80

Display item Explanation UNIT TYP This is the servo driver type. UNIT NO This is the servo driver manufacturing number. S/W VER This is the servo drivers software version. CONTROL SEMI: semi-closed MOT DT This is the motor detector type. MAC DT This is the machine end detector type.

If the SEMI control method is used, will display. MOTOR This is the motor type.

7. Diagnosis 7.2 SERVO MONITOR

I-276

7.2.4 Servo Diagnosis (2)

ALARM SERVO SPINDLE PLC-I/F MENU

[SERVO DIAGNOSIS(2)] ALARM/DIAGN 2.4/5 # 1 WORK TIME 2 ALM HIST 1 [00] 0 [00] 0 [00] 0 [00] 0 2 [00] 0 [00] 0 [00] 0 [00] 0 3 [00] 0 [00] 0 [00] 0 [00] 0 4 [00] 0 [00] 0 [00] 0 [00] 0 5 [00] 0 [00] 0 [00] 0 [00] 0 6 [00] 0 [00] 0 [00] 0 [00] 0 7 [00] 0 [00] 0 [00] 0 [00] 0 8 [00] 0 [00] 0 [00] 0 [00] 0 MNT F]F] F]F] F]F] F]F] /SYS F]F]/F F]F]/F F]F]/F F]F]/F #( ) AXIS< >

Display item Explanation WORK TIME This is the cumulative ready ON time.

ALM HIST1

The No. of the servo alarm that has occurred is displayed. [aa] b aa : Alarm No. b : Operation time at alarm occurrence

MNT/SYS Maintenance history NVRAM status

7. Diagnosis 7.2 SERVO MONITOR

I-277

7.2.5 PW Diagnosis

ALARM SERVO SPINDLE PLC-I/F MENU

[PS DIAGNOSIS] ALARM/DIAGN 2.5/5 # <1> UNIT TYP UNIT NO S/W VER CON AXIS 1 WORK TIME 2 ALM HIST 1 [00] 0 2 [00] 0 3 [00] 0 4 [00] 0 5/6 [00] / [00] 7/8 [00] / [00] MNT /SYS / #( ) AXIS< >

Data Display

unit Explanation

UNIT TYP This is the power supply unit type. UNIT NO This is the power supply unit manufacturing number. S/W VER This is the software version. CON AXIS This is the driver connecting each power supply unit. WORK TIME Time This is the cumulative ready ON time. ALM HIST This is the No. history of the servo alarms that have occurred. Time This is the occurrence time history of the servo alarms that have

occurred. MNT/SYS Maintenance history NVRAM status

7. Diagnosis 7.2 SERVO MONITOR

I-278

7.2.6 Display Items for the Synchronous Error

The various data related to the synchronous error is monitored.

MESSAGE SERVO SPINDLE PLC-I/F MENU

[SYNCHRONOUS] ALARM/DIAGN 2. 6/6

X - Y

ERR COMAND 0.000

ERR FB 0.012

MACHINE X-12345.678

Z - W

ERR COMAND 0.000

ERR FB 0.012

MACHINE Z-12345.678

MESSAGE SERVO SPINDLE PLC-I/F MENU

[SYNCHRONOUS] ALARM/DIAGN 2. 6/6

C - C

ERR COMAND 0.000

ERR FB 0.012

MACHINE C-12345.678

ERR COMAND 0.000

ERR FB 0.000

MACHINE 0.000

Display item Explanation ERR COMAND This is the deviation of the slave axis in respect to the master axis. The

error of the command value to the servo control section is displayed. For simple C axis synchronous control, this indicates the difference of the command value to the C axis control section caused by deviation of the slave axis in respect to the master axis. If this error occurs, the parameters that should be the same for the synchronous axes are different. Check the setting value. The command difference is calculated with the following expression. Command error = Command S command M Command S : Slave axis command value Command M : Master axis command value

: Command S when synchronous operation is selected command M

ERR FB This is the deviation of the slave axis feedback value in respect to the feedback value from the master axis servomotor. The error of the actual machine position is displayed. For simple C axis synchronous control, this indicates the error in the actual machine position caused by deviation of the slave axis feedback value in respect to the feedback value from the master axis' C axis motor. The synchronous error check is carried out on this error. FB error = FB S FB M FB S : Slave axis feedback value FB M : Master axis feedback value

: FB S when synchronous operation is selected FB M MACHINE This displays the machine position of the master axis.

(Note 1) If the operation method is changed due to changes in the R435/436 register, the error offset will

be created at the rising edge of the changes. Note that if the zero point is not set, the error offset will be created after the zero point is set.

7. Diagnosis 7.2 SERVO MONITOR

I-279

(Note 2) The axis names in this screen are displayed only during the synchronous or independent operation. The value of "ERR COMAND", "ERR FB" and "MACHINE" are displayed only during the synchronous operation. These are all "0.000" during independent or asynchronous operation.

For simple C axis synchronous control, the axis name on the SYNCHRONOUS screen is displayed only during synchronization. The command error, FB error and machine values indicate the values only for synchronization. These are all "0.000" during asynchronous operation.

(Note 3) If the FB error exceeds the tolerable value, the operation alarm (51: Synchronization error too large) will occur, and the motor feed will stop at the point the tolerable value is exceeded. If the synchronization error too large alarm occurs, refer to the SYNCHRONOUS screen, and move the axis in the correction mode so that it is positioned within the tolerable range. Note that movement commands that cause the synchronization error to increase will not move the axis during the operation alarm (51: Synchronization error too large) so the alarm cannot be reset. The FB error is also checked during the correction mode, so if the tolerable error range is exceeded during the correction mode, the operation alarm (51: Synchronization error too large) will occur.

If the synchronization error too large alarm occurs during simple C axis synchronous control, cancel the synchronization designation (asynchronous), and input reset.

(Note 4) If the FB error is "0" (acceleration/deceleration type or acceleration/deceleration time constant differ, etc.) during the operation alarm (51: Synchronization error too large), the operation alarm (51: Synchronization error too large) will be held. This alarm can be canceled by resetting.

(Note 5) The error will not be checked before the first reference point return and when the synchronization error tolerance value is 0 (synchronization error check invalid).

(Note 6) Positions where NC interprets synchronization error as 0 (position used as reference for synchronization error check) (a) When zero point is established

(i) For relative position detection or dog type absolute position detection ... 1st reference point (ii) For dogless absolute position detection ... Basic machine coordinate system zero point (G53 zero point)

(b) When setting operation method after establishing zero point (i) When operation method is set with first ladders after power ON ... 1st reference point after zero point is established (during relative position detection) The current error is held (during absolute position detection)

(ii) When operation method is set with other method Machine position when synchronous control is turned ON

Positions where NC interprets synchronization error as 0 during simple C axis synchronous control (position used as reference for synchronization error check) (a) When first zero point is established after power ON 1st reference point (b) When setting operation method after zero point is established Machine position at synchronous control ON

7. Diagnosis 7.3 SPINDLE MONITOR

I-280

7.3 SPINDLE MONITOR

ALARM SERVO SPINDLE PLC-I/F MENU

[SPINDLE MONITOR] ALARM/DIAGN 3. 76543210 # GAIN (1/sec) 0 CMD 3 L 00000000 UNIT TYP DROOP (i) 0 H 00000000 UNIT NO SPEED (rpm) 0 4 L 00000000 S/W VER LOAD (%) 0 H 00000000 1 WORK TIME AMP DISP C 5 2 ALARM HIST 1 [00] 0 ALARM STS 1 L 00000001 2 [00] 0 CYC CNT (p) 0 H 00000000 3 [00] 0 2 L 00000000 4 [00] 0 76543210 H 00000000 5 [00] 0 CMD 1 L 00000001 3 L 00000000 6 [00] 0 H 00000000 H 00000000 7 [00] 0 2 L 00000000 4 L 00001010 8 [00] 0 H 00000000 H 00000000 MNT F] F] /SYS F] F] /F

Data Display unit Explanation GAIN 1/s Spindle position loop gain DROOP i Position deflection amount SPEED r/min Motor rotation speed LOAD % Motor load AMP DISP 7-segment display of driver ALARM Alarms other than the amplifier display (max. 3 alarms) CYC CNT pulse Angle data from detection basic position (Z phase) CMD Control input signal from control unit STS Control output signal from driver UNIT TYP This is the spindle controller type. UNIT NO This is the spindle controller manufacturing number. S/W VER This is the spindle controller side software version. WORK TIME The cumulative ready ON time is displayed. ALM HIST The No. of the spindle alarm that occurred is displayed. MNT Maintenance history /SYS Status

7. Diagnosis 7.3 SPINDLE MONITOR

I-281

Display item Explanation

Control input 1 Control input signal from control unit F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

In G

1 m

od al

To rq

ue li

m it

m od

e

S er

vo a

la rm

re se

t c om

m an

d

P ar

am et

er c

on ve

rs io

n co

m m

an d

S er

vo O

N c

om m

an d

R ea

dy O

N c

om m

an d

Control input 2 Control input signal from control unit

Control input 3 Control input signal from control unit

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

S

ub -m

ot or

s el

ec tio

n co

m m

an d

0

:M ai

n m

ot or

2:

S ub

m ot

or 2

1

:S ub

m ot

or 1

3 : S

ub m

ot or

3

L w

in di

ng s

el ec

tio n

co m

m an

d

O rie

nt s

ta rt

In de

xi ng

re ve

rs e

ru n

In de

xi ng

fo rw

ar d

ru n

R ev

er se

ru n

st ar

t c om

m an

d

Fo rw

ar d

ru n

st ar

t c om

m an

d

G ea

r s el

ec tio

n

c

om m

an d

S pi

nd le

c on

tro l m

od e

se

le ct

io n

co m

m an

d

0: No. 1 gear 1: No. 2 gear 2: No. 3 gear 3: No. 4 gear 4: No. 5 gear 5: No. 6 gear 6: No. 7 gear 7: No. 8 gear

7. Diagnosis 7.3 SPINDLE MONITOR

I-282

Display item Explanation

Control input 4 Control input signal from control unit

Control output 1 Driver control output signal F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

In c

ur re

nt li

m it

In in

-p os

iti on

Z- ph

as e

pa ss

ed

To rq

ue li

m it

m od

e

In s

er vo

a la

rm

In p

ar am

et er

c on

ve rs

io n

In d

riv er

w ar

ni ng

In

s er

vo O

N

In re

ad y

O N

Control output 2 Driver control output signal

7. Diagnosis 7.3 SPINDLE MONITOR

I-283

Display item Explanation

Control output 3 Driver control output signal

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

I

n su

b- m

ot or

s el

ec tio

n

0:

M ai

n m

ot or

2:

S ub

m ot

or 2

1: S

ub m

ot or

1 3

: S ub

m ot

or 3

In L

w in

di ng

s el

ec tio

n

In o

rie nt

s ta

rt

In in

de x

re ve

rs e

ru n

In in

de x

fo rw

ar d

ru n

In re

ve rs

e ru

n st

ar t

In fo

rw ar

d ru

n st

ar t

In g

ea r s

el ec

tio n

In s

pi nd

le c

on tro

l m od

e se

le ct

io n

0: No. 1 gear 1: No. 2 gear 2: No. 3 gear 3: No. 4 gear 4: No. 5 gear 5: No. 6 gear 6: No. 7 gear 7: No. 8 gear

Control output 4 Driver control output signal F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

N o.

2 in

-p os

itio n

O rie

nt c

om pl

et ed

Ze ro

s pe

ed d

et ec

tio n

S pe

ed re

ac he

d

S pe

ed d

et ec

tio n

C ur

re nt

d et

ec tio

n

7. Diagnosis 7.4 PLC Interface Diagnosis

I-284

7.4 PLC Interface Diagnosis When the menu key

PLC-I/F is pressed, the PLC-I/F screen is displayed. The PLC-I/F screen enables you to set and display input/output signals for PLC (Programmable Logic

Control) control. It can be used to check machine sequence operation during PLC development, check input/output data

between control unit and PLC in operation trouble, and make forcible definition.

ALARM SERVO SPINDLE PLC-I/F MENU

[PLC-I/F] ALARM/DIAGN 4 X0008=0001 Y0015=0000 X000A=0001 D0005=0064 76543210 HEX 76543210 HEX X0000 oooooooo 00 D0005 oooooooo 00 X0008 ooooo1o1 05 o11oo1oo 64 X0010 oooooooo 00 D0006 1oooooo1 81 X0018 o1o1oooo 50 ooooo1oo 04 X0020 1o1ooo11 A3 D0007 o1oooo1o 42 X0028 1ooooo1o 82 1oooo1oo 84 X0030 oooooooo 00 D0008 oooooo1o 02 X0038 oooo11oo 0C 11oooooo C0 DEVICE DATA MODE DEVICE DATA MODE ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

7.4.1 PLC-I/F Setting and Display (1) Data setting area DEVICE ( ) Set the device number used with PLC

(input X , output Y , and timer T ).

ALARM SERVO SPINDLE PLC-I/F MENU

DEVICE DATA MODE DEVICE DATA MODE ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

For left block For right block

DATA ( ) To forcibly define PLC data, set data corresponding to the setup device number. Set "1" or "0" for bit

data. Set hexadecimal (HEX) data for byte data. MODE ( ) Specify the type of forcible definition. 1: Single-shot type 2: Modal type (2) Device data display area Data corresponding to the device numbers

specified in the setting area is displayed. Data is displayed in both binary notation

and hexadecimal notation. The device numbers can be displayed in

the left and right blocks separately.

76543210 HEX 76543210 HEX X0000 oooooooo 00 D0005 oooooooo 00 X0008 ooooo1o1 05 o11oo1oo 64 X0010 oooooooo 00 D0006 1oooooo1 81 X0018 o1o1oooo 50 ooooo1oo 04 X0020 1o1ooo11 A3 D0007 o1oooo1o 42 X0028 1ooooo1o 82 1oooo1oo 84 X0030 oooooooo 00 D0008 oooooo1o 02 X0038 oooo11oo 0C 11oooooo C0

Left block Right block

7. Diagnosis 7.4 PLC Interface Diagnosis

I-285

(3) Forcible definition data display (modal type) When forcible definition data and mode are set,

the device numbers and data are displayed and setup data is forcibly defined.

(Note) To use this function during machine running, pay extreme attention to sequence operation.

(4) How to read device numbers and display data

76543210 HEX 76543210 HEX X0000 oooooooo 00 D0005 oooooooo 00 X0008 ooooo1o1 05 o11oo1oo 64 X0010 oooooooo 00 D0006 1oooooo1 81 X0018 o1o1oooo 50 ooooo1oo 04 X0020 1o1ooo11 A3 D0007 o1oooo1o 42 X0028 1ooooo1o 82 1oooo1oo 84 X0030 oooooooo 00 D0008 oooooo1o 02 X0038 oooo11oo 0C 11oooooo C0

Device number (bit type)

X0000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

X0008 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0

X0010 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XF XE XD XC XB XA X9 X8

X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10

The device number are assigned bitwise.

State display of signal corresponding to each device number (1 or 0)

2-byte data corresponding to each device number

Device number (2-byte type)

D0005 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

High-order data

0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0

This data indicates decimal number 100.

Low-order data

X0008=0001 Y0015=0000 X000A=0001 D0005=0064

Up to four devices that have been forcibly defined are displayed.

7. Diagnosis 7.4 PLC Interface Diagnosis

I-286

7.4.2 PLC Device Data Display Monitor display of state signals and register data used with PLC can be made. When the PLC-I/F screen is first selected, 8-byte input/output data starting at device X0000 is displayed in

the left block; 8-byte input/output data starting at device Y0000 is displayed in the right block. The screen always monitor-displays the PLC signal state. When PLC signal changes, the displayed state

also changes with the PLC signal change. However, a lag occurs between PLC signal change and signal display, thus signal display may be delayed

or a response to a very short signal change may not be made. (1) Display device number setting Set the device number in DEVICE ( ). If a different device number or device address is set in the right

DEVICE ( ), the specified device numbers are displayed in the left and right halves of the screen from the display area top to bottom.

(Example 1)

Press the

INPUT key.

Set M0 in left DEVICE ( ) and D5 in right DEVICE ( ).

ALARM SERVO SPINDLE PLC-I/F MENU

DEVICE DATA MODE DEVICE DATA MODE ( M0 ) ( ) ( ) ( D5 ) ( ) ( )

[PLC-I/F] ALARM/DIAGN 4 X0008=0001 Y0015=0000 X000A=0001 D0005=0064 76543210 HEX 76543210 HEX M0000 oooooooo 00 D0005 oooooooo M0008 ooooo1o1 05 o11oo1oo M0016 oooooooo 00 D0006 1oooooo1 M0024 o1o1oooo 50 ooooo1oo

(2) Device number display change in 8-byte units The current device number display at the top can be changed in 8-byte units by using the

PREVIOUS PAGE or

NEXT PAGE key.

When the display screen shown in (Example 1) appears, press the

NEXT PAGE key once.

[PLC-I/F] ALARM/DIAGN 4 X0008=0001 Y0015=0000 X000A=0001 D0005=0064 76543210 HEX 76543210 HEX M0064 oooooooo 00 D0009 o11oo1oo 64 M0072 ooooo1o1 05 oooooooo 00 M0080 oooooooo 00 D0010 1oooooo1 81 M0088 o1o1oooo 50 ooooo1oo 04

(3) When the last device number is exceeded by feeding pages, the data display screen of the last device

number remains. (4) If a number exceeding the preset numbers in specifications or an invalid address is set, a setting error

results.

7. Diagnosis 7.4 PLC Interface Diagnosis

I-287

7.4.3 PLC Interface Signal Forcible Definition (Single-shot Type) This function is used to forcibly define signals to check the PLC functions. This function is available for the following device numbers: X, Y, U, W, S, M, G, F, L, E, T, Q, C, B, D, and R. (1) Mode setting Set the device number to be forcibly set in DEVICE ( ), definition data in DATA ( ), and 1 in MODE

( ), then press the

INPUT key. The setup data is processed and forcibly defined at the top of one cycle of user PLC.

Press the

INPUT key.

Set M23 in DEVICE ( ), 1 in DATA ( ), and 1 in MODE ( ).

ALARM SERVO SPINDLE PLC-I/F MENU

[PLC-I/F] ALARM/DIAGN 4 76543210 HEX 76543210 HEX M0000 oooooooo 00 D0005 oooooooo 00 M0008 ooooo1o1 05 o11oo1oo 64 M0016 oooooooo 00 D0006 1oooooo1 81 M0024 o1o1oooo 50 ooooo1oo 04 DEVICE DATA MODE DEVICE DATA MODE ( M23 ) ( 1 ) ( 1) ( ) ( ) ( )

[PLC-I/F] ALARM/DIAGN 4 76543210 HEX 76543210 HEX M0016 oooooooo 80 D0005 oooooooo 00 M0024 ooooo1o1 50 o11oo1oo 64 M0032 oooooooo A3 D0006 1oooooo1 81 M0040 o1o1oooo 82 ooooo1oo 04

M0016 is displayed at the beginning and bit 7 changes to 1. (If device M23 OUT instruction comes within one cycle of user PLC, the sequence processing results will follow.)

(Example 2)

Data is not displayed in the SET DATA field at the screen top.

CAUTION

When forcibly setting (forcibly outputting) data on the I/F diagnosis screen during machine operation, pay careful attention to the sequence operation.

(Note) An input signal (X or U) to the PLC is updated at the beginning of each cycle of the PLC. Therefore,

the signal, once forcibly defined in single-shot type mode, is restored after one cycle.

7. Diagnosis 7.4 PLC Interface Diagnosis

I-288

7.4.4 PLC Interface Signal Forcible Definition (Modal Type) This is PLC interface signal forcible definition of modal type. Once it is set, it is held until canceled. The device signals that can be set by using this function are X, Y, U, W, S, M, G, F, L, E, T, Q, C, B, D and

R. (1) Mode setting Set the device number to be forcibly defined in DEVICE ( ), definition data in DATA ( ), and 2 in

MODE ( ), then press the

INPUT key. The data is processed and forcibly defined.

[PLC-I/F] ALARM/DIAGN 4 X0008=0001 76543210 HEX 76543210 HEX X0008 ooooo1o1 05 D0005 oooooooo X0010 oooooooo 00 o11oo1oo X0018 o1o1oooo 50 D0006 1oooooo1 X0020 1o1ooo11 A3 ooooo1oo

[PLC-I/F] ALARM/DIAGN 4 76543210 HEX 76543210 HEX X0000 oooooooo 00 D0005 oooooooo 00 X0008 ooooo1o1 04 o11oo1oo 64 X0010 oooooooo 00 D0006 1oooooo1 81 X0018 o1o1oooo 50 ooooo1oo 04 DEVICE DATA MODE DEVICE DATA MODE ( X8 ) ( 1 ) ( 2) ( ) ( ) ( )

Press the

INPUT key.

Set X8 in DEVICE ( ), 1 in DATA ( ), and 1 in MODE ( ).

ALARM SERVO SPINDLE PLC-I/F MENU

X0008 is displayed at the beginning and bit 0 changes to "1".

(Example 3)

A maximum of four sets of forcibly defined device numbers and numeric data are displayed.

A maximum of four sets can be forcibly defined in mode 2. If four sets have been defined and additional

setting is made, forward feed is made and the subsequent four sets become effective.

7. Diagnosis 7.4 PLC Interface Diagnosis

I-289

(2) Cancel of forcibly defined data

Set two slashes // in DEVICE ( ).

Press the

INPUT key.

ALARM SERVO SPINDLE PLC-I/F MENU

DEVICE DATA MODE DEVICE DATA MODE ( // ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

The field display becomes all blank and forcibly defined data is canceled. (Setting of data 0 is not a cancel. Data of 0 is forcibly defined.)

Forcibly defined data is also canceled by turning ON/OFF power. 7.4.5 Diagnosis Executed When an Emergency Stop Status Occurs When the NC is put in an emergency stop status, the message "EMG" (emergency stop) is displayed in the

running status display area of the setting and display unit. At this time, the cause can be known. (1) Check using the DIAGN screen

Set R69 in the DEVICE ( ) and then press

INPUT key. DEVICE DATA MODE ( R69 ) ( ) ( )

[PLC-I/F] 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HEX R0069 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FF

Bit F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

State 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

R0069

(0: EMG stop 1: Normal)

Built-in PLC Stop state

Control unit EMG connector Emergency stop state

Built-in PLC Software emergency stop output device Y29F is "1".

Servo amplifier emergency stop output

Spindle amplifier emergency stop output

Door interlock, dog/OT arbitrary allocation device illegal

External PLC FROM, TO command not executed

External PLC Not ready

User PLC Illegal codes exist.

PLC high-speed processing error

External PLC Renewal error

7. Diagnosis 7.5 Absolute Position Monitor

I-290

7.5 Absolute Position Monitor 7.5.1 ABS SERVO MONITOR The servo state in the absolute position detection system is displayed. This can be used to confirm each

detector data for the current machine value.

ABS-SRV ADJUST HISTORY CMPOSIT MENU

[ABS SERVO MONITOR] ALARM/DIAGN 5.1/2 ABS SYS ES ES ES ES POF POS 0.002 -0.005 -0.005 0.000 PON POS 0.002 -0.008 -0.008 359.998 MAC POS 0.002 -0.008 -0.008 359.998 R0 21202 21202 21202 21202 P0 1379 1379 1379 1379 E0 -331 -331 -331 -331 Rn -32747 24 21503 165 Pn 3388 2550 1192 834 En -331 -331 -331 -331 ABSn 459995 -650015 -20015 -23

Data Display

unit Explanation

ABS SYS The status of the absolute position detection system on the servo side is displayed. ES : Semi-closed encoder ESS : Semi-closed high-speed serial encoder INC : Incremental

POF POS Command unit

The absolute position when the power is turned OFF is displayed.

PON POS Command unit

The absolute position when the power is turned ON is displayed.

MAC POS Command unit

The coordinate value in the basic machine coordinate system is displayed.

R0 The multi-rotation counter value of the detector, saved when the basic point was set, is displayed.

P0 Output unit The position in one rotation of the detector, saved when the basic point was set, is displayed.

E0 The absolute position error, saved when the basic point was set, is displayed.

Rn The motor accumulated speed is displayed. Pn The position in one rotation is displayed.

One rotation is divided into 4096, 8192 or 32768. The No. of divisions differs according to the detector.

En The absolute position error when the power is turned OFF is displayed. ABSn The current absolute position is displayed.

7. Diagnosis 7.5 Absolute Position Monitor

I-291

7.5.2 Absolute Position Initialization Pressing the menu key

ABS-SRV displays the ABS SERVO MONITOR screen. When the

NEXT PAGE key is

pressed on that screen, the ABS POSITION SET screen will display. This screen is used to set the parameter data used to establish the zero point and to display the initialization.

[ABS POSITION SET] ALARM/DIAGN 5. 2/2 TYPE NO-STOPPER STOPPER NO-STOPPER STOPPER

STATE OK NG ORIG-RTN NG

TO END -12345.678 0.000 1.234 0.000

MACHINE -12345.678 NOT PASS 0.000 NOT PASS

#

0 INIT SET 0 1 1 1

1 ORIGIN 0 0 1 0

2 ZERO -12345.678 0.000 1.234 0.000

#( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

ABS-SRV ADJUST HISTORY CMPOSIT MENU

Display item Explanation TYPE The position detection system selected by the absolute position

parameter is displayed. INC. : Incremental system DOG : Dog type absolute position detection STOPPER : Dogless absolute position detection machine end

method NO STOPPER : Dogless absolute position detection marked point

alignment method STATE The progress of initialization is displayed, such as "OK" if the absolute

position has been established or "NG" if the absolute position is lost. TO END The distance between the machine basic position and the first grid point

is displayed.

TO END

Machine basic position Grid point right before

machine end stopper

If the first grid point is covered by the grid mask, the distance to the next grid point is displayed.

TO END

Machine basic position

Grid mask

Grid point right before machine end stopper

MACHINE "NOT PASS" is displayed until the machine passes a grid point after power ON. After the machine passes the grid, the current machine position is displayed.

7. Diagnosis 7.5 Absolute Position Monitor

I-292

# Parameter Explanation Setting range (unit)

0 INIT. SET Select the axis for which absolute position initialization is to be performed: 0: Do not perform initialization. 1: Perform initialization. (Note) "0" is set when the power is turned ON again.

0/1

1 ORIGIN This parameter is valid when the marked point alignment method is used. Specify "1" when the machine has been positioned to the basic point. (Note) This parameter is invalid for other methods.

0/1

2 ZERO This parameter is used to determine the basic machine coordinate system. Specify the coordinates of the machine basic position seen from the zero point of basic machine coordinate system or absolute position basic point. (Whether the machine basic position or absolute position basic point is used is determined by data specified for "#2059 zerbas" of the setup parameter.)

Zero point of basic machine coordinate system

Values set to #2[ZERO]

Machine basic position

99999.999 (mm)

This section explains only the ABS POSITION SET screen.

For details of the actual absolute position initialization and display contents, see Chapter III Section 4 "Absolute Position Detection System".

7. Diagnosis 7.6 Adjustment

I-293

7.6 Adjustment Pressing the menu key

ADJUST displays the ADJUST S-ANALOG screen.

ABS-SRV ADJUST HISTORY CMPOSIT MENU

[ADJUST S-ANALOG] ALARM/DIAGN 6 INPUT : SET START / FIN # : HIGHER VOLTAGE 100 AUTO ADJUST : LOWER VOLTAGE 101 ch0 offset 120 107 ch2 offset 0 102 +gain -55 108 +gain 0 103 -gain -55 109 -gain 0 104 ch1 offset 0 110 ch3 offset 0 105 +gain 0 110 +gain 0 106 -gain 0 112 -gain 0 TEMP. DATA : EXECUTING AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT #(100)

7.6.1 Adjustment Preparation (1) The PLC must be stopped before adjusting the S-analog output. The following two methods can be used to stop the PLC. 1) Stopping with rotary switch Set the rotary switch NCSYS on the bottom of the unit to 1. 2) Stopping with PLC onboard Press the

F0 ,

MENU ,

FILE and

RUN/ STOP keys, and input "1".

(2) Select the ADJUST S-ANALOG screen. Press the

DIAGN IN/OUT ,

MENU and

ADJUST keys. 7.6.2 Automatic Analog Output Adjustment Select #100 to execute automatic adjustment. "AUTO ADJUST" will be highlighted, and the message "EXECUTING AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT" will

display. Automatic adjustment will execute offset adjustment and +gain adjustment for the remote I/O analog

outputs (max. 4ch) connected to the main unit. The gain will be handled as the +gain. After adjustment is completed, the message "AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT COMPLETE" will display, and

the "AUTO ADJUST" item will return to the normal display.

7. Diagnosis 7.6 Adjustment

I-294

7.6.3 Adjustment Procedure 1) Offset adjustment (Ex. ch0) (1) Select #101. "ch0 offset" will be highlighted, indicating that it is being adjusted. The current setting value will display in the "TEMP.DATA" column. (2) Monitor the analog output voltage. (3) Adjust the monitor voltage to 0V 3.5mV. (Setting range: 999~999) For a positive voltage, press the

key. The adjustment value will decrement in units of 100 when

SHIFT

are pressed. For a negative voltage, press the

key. The adjustment value will increment in units of 100 when

SHIFT

are pressed. (4) Press

INPUT after completing the adjustment. The TEMP DATA will be saved as the setting value and the adjustment will be validated. The "ch0 offset" display will return to the normal display. 2) +gain adjustment (Ex. ch0) (1) Select #102. "+gain" will be highlighted, indicating that it is being adjusted. (2) The current setting value will display in the "TEMP.DATA" column. (3) Monitor the analog output voltage. Adjust the monitor voltage to 10V 3.5mV. (Setting range: 999~999) For 10V or more, press the

key. The adjustment value will decrement in units of 100 when

SHIFT

are pressed. For 10V or less, press the

key. The adjustment value will increment in units of 100 when

SHIFT

are pressed. (4) Press

INPUT after completing the adjustment. The TEMP DATA will be saved as the setting value and the adjustment will be validated. The "+gain" display will return to the normal display. 3) gain adjustment (Ex. ch0) (1) Select #103. "gain" will be highlighted, indicating that it is being adjusted. The current setting value will display in the "TEMP.DATA" column. (2) Monitor the analog output voltage. (3) Adjust the monitor voltage to 10V 3.5mV. (Setting range: 999~999) For 10V or more, press the

key. The adjustment value will decrement in units of 100 when

SHIFT

are pressed. For 10V or less, press the

key. The adjustment value will increment in units of 100 when

SHIFT

are pressed. (4) Press

INPUT after completing the adjustment. The TEMP DATA will be saved as the setting value and the adjustment will be validated. The "gain" display will return to the normal display.

7. Diagnosis 7.6 Adjustment

I-295

7.6.4 Parameter Input/Output The settings #101 to #112 of this function can be input and output as parameters.

# number Name

Parameter No.

Data range (decimal)

#101 ch0 offset N10101 999~999 #102 +gain N10102 999~999 #103 gain N10103 999~999

#104 ch1 offset N10104 999~999 #105 +gain N10105 999~999 #106 gain N10106 999~999

#107 ch2 offset N10107 999~999 #108 +gain N10108 999~999 #109 gain N10109 999~999

#110 ch3 offset N10110 999~999 #111 +gain N10111 999~999 #112 gain N10112 999~999

7. Diagnosis 7.7 OPERATION HISTORY

I-296

7.7 OPERATION HISTORY Pressing the menu key

HISTORY displays the OPERATION HISTORY screen. This function keeps tracing operation information, which is useful for failure diagnosis.

Information that can be traced includes alarm data, and stop code and input signal change data. This data is held even after the power is turned OFF.

Latest data is displayed on the upper left of the screen, previous data is displayed toward the right, and the least recent data is displayed on the lower part of the screen.

This screen has four pages. The least recent data is displayed on the lower right of the fourth page. The pages can be switched by the

PREVIOUS PAGE and

NEXT PAGE keys.

Up to 256 points of data can be displayed.

[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

ABS-SRV ADJUST HISTORY CMPOSIT MENU

[OPERATION HISTORY] ALARM/DIAGN 7.1/ 4 #P : ON #I : OFF INPUT 6 MENU2 MENU3 F4 INPUT 0 SHIFT CURSR CURSR 0 B SHIFT 4 6 NEXT NEXT BACK X000 !X000 P.OFF INPUT 0 0 1 CURSR 2 1 MENU1 F3 3 1 X01E 1 !X020 X020 DELET !X02E + !X030 INPUT 0 0 2 X CURSD CURSD CURSD INPUT 3 2 1 MENU2 MENU1 F4 !X00E RESET NEXT MENU3 F1 X000 !X000 1 !X016 !X017 !X018 X022 P.OFF #( )

[ X000 ] ~ [ X2FF ] : Change in input signal (ON OFF) [ !X000 ] ~ [ !X2FF ] : Change in input signal (OFF ON) + [ X000 ] ~ + [ !X2FF ] : Simultaneous input [ F1 ] ~ [ F6 ] : Function keys [ 1 ] ~ [ Z ] : Alphanumeric keys [CURSL ] : Cursor left movement [CURSR ] : Cursor right movement [CURSU ] : Cursor up movement [CURSD ] : Cursor down movement [P. OFF ] : Power OFF [MENU1 ] ~ [MENU5 ] : MENU key n [ !X000 ] Display in : n: Number of alarms: An asterisk () is displayed if the number reverse video exceeds 9.

(Note 1) If two or more input signals change at the same timing, those signals except the first one are indicated with a plus sign (+).

(Note 2) The NC alarm 5 (X2A1/U121) is not saved in the operation history. (1) Suppressing the operation history function Data is kept updated according to changes in input signals and key inputs. If it is desired to suppress

the operation history function and retain the current data, enter "I" in # ( ) in the setting field and press the

INPUT key. This prevents operation history data from being updated. "TRACE OFF" is displayed in reverse video

on the upper right of the alarm message screen. To resume the operation history function, enter "P" in # ( ) in the setting field and press the

INPUT key.

(2) Clearing operation history data Pressing the

C.B CAN key while holding down the

SHIFT key and then pressing the

INPUT key clears operation history data completely. "X00" is displayed all over the screen.

7. Diagnosis 7.8 Configuration

I-297

7.8 Configuration The software control number and hardware mounting state are displayed on this screen. Refer to this

screen when contacting the service department in case of trouble, etc. 7.8.1 S/W MODULE TREE Pressing the menu key

CMPOSIT displays the S/W MODULE TREE screen.

[S/W MODULE TREE] ALARM/DIAGN 8.1/ 2 TYPE MELDAS65M-A MP BND-363W000-A0 SV1 BND-510W000-A0 SV2 510W000-A0 SV3 510W000-A0 PLCu 400W000-A0 SV4 510W000-A0 CT 801W960-A0 SP1 520W000-A0

ABS-SRV ADJUST HISTORY CMPOSIT MENU

(Note) The "SERIAL" display may not be provided depending on the model. 7.8.2 H/W MONITOR Pressing the menu key

CMPOSIT and then

NEXT PAGE displays the H/W MONITOR screen.

[H/W MONITOR] ALARM/DIAGN 8.2/ 2

1 HR114 1 DX111 1 DX100 1 DUT32 1 2 HR337 2 DX100 2 2 HR171 3 3 DX100 3 HR831 4 4 4 HR832 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 -CBUS- 1 1 2

ABS-SRV ADJUST HISTORY CMPOSIT MENU

7. Diagnosis 7.8 Configuration

I-298

7.8.3 Option The following screen will open when the

NEXT PAGE key is pressed.

[OPTION] ALARM/DIAGN 8.3/ 3

# 1 00 9 00 17 00 25 00 2 00 10 00 18 00 26 00 3 00 11 00 19 00 27 00 4 00 12 00 20 00 28 00 5 00 13 00 21 00 29 00 6 00 14 00 22 00 30 00 7 00 15 00 23 00 31 00 8 00 16 00 24 00 32 00

ABS-SRV ADJUST HISTORY CMPOSIT MENU

7. Diagnosis

7.9 Auxiliary Axis Parameter

I-299

7.9 Auxiliary Axis Parameter 7.9.1 Auxiliary Axis Parameter Screen Pressing the menu key

AUX-PRM displays the AUX-PARA. screen.

AUX-PRM AUX-MON MENU

[AUX-PARA.] ALARM/DIAGN 9.1/11 # <1> AUX1 <2> AUX2 <3> AUX3 <4> AUX4 1 MSR FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF 2 RTY FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF 3 PC1 32767 32767 32767 32767 4 PC2 32767 32767 32767 32767 5 PIT 32767 32767 32767 32767 6 INP 32767 32767 32767 32767 7 ATU FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF 8 PG1 1000 1000 1000 1000 9 0 0 0 0 10 EMG 32767 32767 32767 32767 11 0 0 0 0 12 FFC 100 100 100 100

#( ) DATA ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

Refer to "MR-J2-CT Specifications and Instruction Manual" (BNP-B3944) for details of the parameters.

7. Diagnosis

7.9 Auxiliary Axis Parameter

I-300

7.9.2 Backup SRAM backup of the auxiliary axis parameters and absolute position restoration during amplifier replacement are executed on the BACKUP screen. Only execute the operations during amplifier replacement. (1) Procedure during MR-J2-CT amplifier replacement

The following shows the procedure during MR-J2-CT amplifier replacement. The operation is carried out on the BACKUP screen. The absolute position of the current MR-J2-CT must be established first before carrying out this operation.

(a) SRAM backup of the auxiliary axis parameters

The current amplifier data is backed up in the SRAM of the CNC when the amplifier is replaced. The following shows the procedure for SRAM backup of the auxiliary axis parameters.

[BACKUP] ALARM/DIAGN 9. 11/11 AUX-PARA #1 MR-J2-CT-> SRAM #2 SRAM -> MR-J2-CT ABS POS. #3 ABS POS RESTORE #(1) (1) (Y) BACKUP COMPLETE

AUX-PRM AUX-MON MENU

Input "(1) (a)" from the BACKUP screen. (a: axis No. (1 to 4)) After inputting, the message "CONTINUE Y/N" will appear for confirmation of the data backup. The data is backed up in the SRAM only if "(Y)" is input. The message " BACKUP EXECUTION " will appear when the backup operation is carried out. The message "BACKUP COMPLETE" will appear when the backup operation is finished. If MR-J2-CT is not connected, the message "E01 SETTING ERROR" will occur, and the data will not be backed up. After the procedure is finished, turn OFF the CNC and MR-J2-CT power supply, and replace MR-J2-CT amplifier. After replacing the MR-J2-CT amplifier, set the MR-J2-CT rotary switch to "7". Turn the CNC and MR-J2-CT power supply ON, wait for the 7-segment display to change from dot display, and then turn the power OFF. The auxiliary axis parameter data is written and the absolute position restored after the axis is set with the rotary switch and the power is turned ON again.

(Note) Turning ON the power supply with the MR-J2-CT rotary switch set to "7" initializes the parameters. If an amplifier with the absolute position established is replaced without carrying out this operation, the machine position will be created with the old amplifier's data.

7. Diagnosis

7.9 Auxiliary Axis Parameter

I-301

(b) Writing auxiliary axis parameters to MR-J2-CT

After backing up the auxiliary axis parameters in the SRAM, turn the NC and MR-J2-CT power OFF, and replace the MR-J2-CT amplifier. The replacement amplifier must be initialized beforehand. After replacing the MR-J2-CT amplifier, turn the NC and MR-J2-CT power. Then, write in the auxiliary axis parameter data and restore the absolute position. The data in the CNC SRAM is written to the new amplifier. The following describes the procedure for writing the auxiliary axis parameters to MR-J2-CT.

[BACKUP] ALARM/DIAGN 9. 11/11 AUX-PARA #1 MR-J2-CT-> SRAM #2 SRAM -> MR-J2-CT ABS POS. #3 ABS POS RESTORE #(2) (1) (Y) WRITE COMPLETE

AUX-PRM AUX-MON MENU

Input "(2) (a)" from the BACKUP screen. (a: axis No. (1 to 4)) After inputting, the message "CONTINUE Y/N" will appear for confirmation of the data backup. The auxiliary axis parameters are written to MR-J2-CT only if "(Y)" is input. The message "AUX. WRITTING EXEC." will appear when the writing operation is carried out. The message "WRITE COPLETE" will appear when the writing operation is finished. If MR-J2-CT is not connected, the message "E01 SETTING ERROR" will occur, and the data will not be written. Auto-tuning parameters are written as shown below, using the auto-tuning selection (parameter #7 ATU) of the SRAM data and the MR-J2-CT side.

#7 ATU in SRAM #7 ATU set in MR-J2-CT Auto-tuning parameter written

Auto-tuned (0 or 1) Auto-tuned (0 or 1) Not written Not auto-tuned (2) Auto-tuned (0 or 1) Written (Note 1) Auto-tuned (0 or 1) Not auto-tuned (2) Written (Note 1) Not auto-tuned (2) Not auto-tuned (2) Written (Note 1)

(Note 1) Which parameters can be input depends on the setting of #7 ATU parameter.

(Refer to "6.2.7 Outputting Auxiliary Axis Parameter Data" for details on auto-tuning target parameters.)

(Note 2) The NC does not hold the MR-J2-CT parameters.

The parameters are held on the MR-J2-CT side. When the MR-J2-CT unit is replaced, the parameters must be set again in the new unit.

7. Diagnosis

7.9 Auxiliary Axis Parameter

I-302

(c) Restoring the absolute position

After the procedure in "Writing auxiliary axis parameters to MR-J2-CT" is finished, restore the absolute position in the new amplifier. The following describes the procedure for restoring the absolute position.

[BACKUP] ALARM/DIAGN 9. 11/11 AUX-PARA #1 MR-J2-CT-> SRAM #2 SRAM -> MR-J2-CT ABS POS. #3 ABS POS RESTORE #(3) (1) (Y) ABS POS RESTORED

AUX-PRM AUX-MON MENU

Input "(3) (a)" from the BACKUP screen. (a: axis No. (1 to 4)) After inputting, the message "CONTINUE Y/N" will appear for confirmation of the data backup. The absolute position is restored only if "(Y)" is input. The message "ABS POS RESTORED" will appear when the absolute position restoration operation is finished.

If MR-J2-CT is not connected, the message "E01 SETTING ERROR" will occur, and the absolute position will not be restored.

(2) Messages displayed on the BACKUP screen

The following table shows the messages displayed on the BACKUP screen and their details.

Message Details CONTINUE Y/N Determine whether to execute the operation by selecting either "Y" or "N". BACKUP EXECUTION

The auxiliary axis parameters are being backed up in the SRAM.

BACKUP COMPLETE The SRAM backup of the auxiliary axis parameters is finished. AUX. WRITING EXEC.

The auxiliary axis parameters in the SRAM are being written into the MR-J2-CT.

WRITE COMPLETE The writing of the auxiliary axis parameters in the SRAM to the MR-J2-CT is finished.

ABS POS RESTORED

The absolute position in the SRAM has been restored to the MR-J2-CT.

7. Diagnosis

7.9 Auxiliary Axis Parameter

I-303

(3) Supplementary Items

The following shows the process when the No. of axes set in the set up parameters differs from the No. of MR-J2-CT axes connected.

No. of axes set No. of axes connected, or the No. of axes set = 0.

MR-J2-CT parameter input MR-J2-CT parameter input not carried out. MR-J2-CT parameter output MR-J2-CT parameter output not carried out.

The following shows the process when there are more input data axis Nos. than there are axes set in the setup parameters.

Input data axis No. > No. of axes set MR-J2-CT parameter input Input data exceeding the No. of set axes is not input.

7. Diagnosis

7.10 Auxiliary Axis Monitor

I-304

7.10 Auxiliary Axis Monitor Pressing the menu key

AUX-MON displays the AUX-MON screen.

AUX-PRM AUX-MON MENU

[AUX-MON <1>] AUX1 ALARM/DIAGN 10.1/1 DROOP (i) 0 UNIT TYP J2-10CT_ [J]Ope. test mode SPEED(rpm) 0 S/W num.BND-517W000-C0A [M]Ope. mode JOG CURRENT (%) 0 Motor HA-FF053__ [P]Paramete set 1 MAX CUR1 (%) 0 [S]Scale MAX CUR2 (%) 0 [Z]Abs. Pos. init Motor Load (%) 0 Pos. con. gain 1 0 Initial Origin type OVER REG (%) 0 Speed con. gain 1 0 Completion Cur. stn. 0 Pos. con. gain 2 0 [T]Origin set MAC POS 0.000 Speed con. gain 2 0 Inst. stn. 0 Speed int. comp 0 Normal Inst. pos. 0.000 Load inertia 0.0 AUX ALARM aaa 0000 aaa 0000 aaa 0000 aaa 0000 ALM HIST [S01 0000][S02 0000][S03 0000][S04 0000][S05 0000][S06 0000]

Item Data range MR-J2-CT data name Remarks MON DROOP 999 to 999 Position droop (i)

SPEED Motor rotation speed 1 (r/min)

CURRENT 999 to 999 Effective load rate (%) MAX CUR1 999 to 999 Command torque (%) MAX CUR2 999 to 999 Command torque peak hold (%) Motor Load 999 to 999 Motor load rate (%)

OVER REG 999 to 999 Regeneration resistor heat generation load rate (%)

Cur. stn. 1 to 360 J2CT status, station position MAC POS 99999.999 to 99999.999 Feedback machine position Inst. stn. 1 to 360 Target station No. Inst. pos. 99999.999 to 99999.999 Random command position AUX ALARM Alarm No. Alarm information System alarm Alarm No. Alarm information Servo alarm Alarm No. Alarm information System warning Alarm No. Alarm information Servo warning Alarm No. Alarm information Operation error ALM HIST [Type Error No.] Alarm history (type and error No.) 6 error max COND UNIT TYP S/W num. Motor TUNING DATA Pos. con. gain 1 0 to 999 Position control gain 1 rad/s Speed con. gain 1 0 to 999 Speed control gain 1 rad/s Pos. con. gain 2 0 to 999 Position control gain 2 rad/s Speed con. gain 2 0 to 999 Speed control gain 2 rad/s Speed int. comp 0 to 999 Speed integral compensation ms Load inertia 0 to 999.9 Load inertia ratio -fold

Refer to "7.10.2 Auxiliary Axis Adjustment Function" for details on the area on the screen.

7. Diagnosis

7.10 Auxiliary Axis Monitor

I-305

7.10.1 Alarm History Display

Up to 6 items of alarm history (alarm No. and alarm information) for the auxiliary axis are displayed. The items are displayed in order from left to right, with the newest item on the left.

History Newest Oldest

Display order 1 2 3 4 5 6 Alarm history

display [S01 0000] [S02 0000] [S03 0000] [S04 0000] [S05 0000] [S06 0000]

7.10.2 Auxiliary Axis Adjustment Function

The auxiliary axis adjustment function enables the auxiliary axes that were controlled using the PLC to be controlled using key operation from the screen. The adjustment function of the auxiliary axes is carried out in the area on the AUXILIARY AXIS MONITOR screen. The following explains the various display items in the area.

[Sxx ] Sxx : Alarm No. : Alarm information

7. Diagnosis

7.10 Auxiliary Axis Monitor

I-306

Display items of the area

Item Display details [J] Ope. test mode This displays the VALID/CANCELED status of the operation adjustment

mode. This item is highlighted when the mode is valid.

[M] Ope. mode The operation mode of the current auxiliary axis is displayed in the column to the right of the item. (Display details of the operation mode) AUTOMATIC : In automatic operation mode JOG : In JOG operation mode STEP : In incremental mode MANUAL : In manual operation mode HANDLE : In handle mode Zero-P.Ret : (dog-type return only) In zero point return mode

[P] Paramete set "Operation parameter group" means a series of MR-J2-CT parameters as shown below.

Parameter name Parameter No. Aspeed1-4 #150,158,166,174 Mspeed1-4 #151,159,167,175 time1.1-4.1 #152,160,168,176 time1.2-4.2 #153,161,169,177 TL1-4 #154,162,170,178 OD1-4 #155,163,171,179 just1-4 #156,164,172,180 near1-4 #157,165,173,181

There are 4 sets of these parameters, and the operation keys are used to changeover between them. The current operation parameter group No. is displayed in the column to the right of the item.

Operation parameter group item 1 2 3 4

Display details 1 2 3 4

[S] Scale When the operation mode is the incremental or handle mode, the setting details are displayed in the column to the right of the item. This column is empty when the operation mode is another mode. (Display details during the incremental mode) The feed amount per startup is displayed.

Feed amount 1 1/10 1/100 1/1000 Display details 1/1 1/10 1/100 1/1000

(Display details during the handle mode) The handle rotation magnification is displayed.

Rotation magnification 1 10 100 1000

Display details 1 10 100 1000

[Z] Abs. Pos. init. This shows the initialization selected/not selected status of the absolute position. This item is highlighted when initialization is selected.

7. Diagnosis

7.10 Auxiliary Axis Monitor

I-307

Item Display details

Initial The initialization method designated by the auxiliary axis parameter #120 ABS Type (ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION PARAMETER) is displayed in the column to the right of the item. (Display details of the initialization method) Dog type : Dog-type method Initial Stopper type : Stopper method Initial Origin type : Marked point alignment method The status at initialization is displayed in the column below the item. (Display details of the initialization status)

ABSOLUTE VALUE DETECTION PARAMETER MR-J2-CT status

Stopper method Marked point alignment method Dog-type method

ABSOLUTE POSITION LOSS Illegality Illegality Illegality

EXECUTING ABSOLUTE POSITION INITIALIZATION ON

Pressing Origin type

STOPPER Press Rel. EXECUTING BASIC POINT SETTING ON Ret. Ref. P

ZERO POINT RETURN Zero-P.Ret ABSOLUTE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Completion Completion Completion

Explanation of display details

Completion : This is displayed when the absolute position of the stopper, marked point alignment, or dog-type method is established. For the stopper and marked point alignment methods, this shows that the grid has been reached, and the initialization has been completed.

Illegality : This is displayed when the absolute position has been lost in the stopper, marked point alignment, or dog-type method.

Pressing : This is displayed during absolute position initialization when the zero point is being initialized by the stopper method. This status continues until the stopper is reached.

Press Rel. : This status is entered once the stopper has been reached, or when a fixed time has elapsed and the current limit has been reached.

Ret.Ref.P. : This shows the status after the stopper, from the time the stopper is released to the time immediately before the axis reaches the grid after moving in the opposite direction. For the marked point alignment method, this indicates the status when the tool is moving in the basic point direction set in parameter #120 ABS Type to a time just before the grid is reached.

Origin type : When the zero point is initialized by the marked point alignment method, this indicates the status when the tool is moving to the machine basic point from the time during absolute position initialization, until the basic point is designated.

Zero-P.Ret : This shows that the tool has returned to the zero point by a dog-type method initialization.

7. Diagnosis

7.10 Auxiliary Axis Monitor

I-308

Item Display details

[T] Origin set This shows the ON/OFF status of the origin point setting. This item is highlighted when selected.

Operation status The operation status is displayed in the column to the right of the item. Normal Rot. : Rotation is in the forward direction. Reverse Rot. : Rotation is in the reverse direction. Stop : The auxiliary axis is stopped.

7.10.3 Operation Method for the Auxiliary Axis Adjustment Function

The following shows the operation method for the auxiliary axis adjustment function. (1) Operating conditions for the operation adjustment mode (a) The operation adjustment function is a function of the AUXILIARY AXIS MONITOR screen. Change to the

AUXILIARY AXIS MONITOR screen when using this function. (b) Confirm the following items before entering the auxiliary axis adjustment mode. The auxiliary axis

adjustment mode cannot be used if the following conditions are not fulfilled.

1) There must not be the "Y03 AUX AMP UNEQU." error. (The MR-J2-CT must be connected, and in a usable state.)

2) The OPERATION ADJUSTMENT MODE VALID signal (R1784 bit0) must be ON.

3) The SERVO OFF signal and INTERLOCK CANCELED signal (R1703/R1709/R1715/R1721 bits 0, 4, 5) must be OFF.

4) The OPERATION START signal (R1702/R1708/R1714/R1720 bit 0) must be OFF. (c) Do not turn ON the OPERATION START signal command during the auxiliary axis operation adjustment

mode. The MR-J2-CT may make unanticipated movements when the operation adjustment mode is canceled.

(2) Validating/canceling the operation adjustment mode

Carry out the following operation to validate the auxiliary axis adjustment function.

Operation key:

J (SHIFT + Q on the operation board) Conversely, carry out the following operation to cancel the operation adjustment mode.

Operation key:

J (SHIFT + Q on the operation board), or carry out a screen changeover operation.

7. Diagnosis

7.10 Auxiliary Axis Monitor

I-309

(3) Functions of the various keys in the operation adjustment mode

(a) Setting the operation adjustment mode

The initial display of the operation adjustment mode reflects the current PLC settings. The following operations are validated when the operation adjustment mode is turned ON.

Function Operation key Details Ope. mode Operation key:

M This changes the operation mode. The operation mode changes over as follows every time the key is pressed. JOG INCREMENTAL MANUAL OPERATION HANDLE (dog-type method only) ZERO RTN JOG The initial display becomes "JOG" when the operation adjustment mode is validated from automatic adjustment.

Paramete set Operation key:

P Set the operation parameter group No. The operation parameter group changes as follows every time the key is pressed. 1 2 3 4 1

Scale Operation key:

S The settings for this function are only validated when the operation mode is the "Incremental" mode or the "Handle" mode. Incremental mode:

Set the feed amount per startup. The feed amount changes as follows every time the key is pressed. 1/1 1/10 1/100 1/1000 1/1

Handle mode Set the handle rotation magnification. The handle rotation magnification changes as follows every time the key is pressed. 1 10 100 1000

Abs. Pos. init Operation key:

Z The settings for this function are only validated when the zero point is initialized by the "Stopper" method or the "Marked point alignment" method. This function operates when initializing the absolute position. The function is turned ON/OFF every time the key is pressed.

Marked point set Operation key:

T The settings for this function are only validated when the zero point is initialized by the "Marked point alignment" method. Press this operation key to set the basic point. The function is turned ON/OFF every time the key is pressed.

7. Diagnosis

7.10 Auxiliary Axis Monitor

I-310

(b) Starting and stopping the operation

The following operation start and stop operations apply to the "JOG", "INCREMENTAL", and "MANUAL OPERATION" modes. After setting the mode with the operations described in item (a), the operation is started and stopped using the following operation keys.

Function Operation key Details Normal rotation Operation key:

This starts the rotation in the forward run direction. The rotation will stop if this key is pressed while starting.

Reverse rotation Operation key:

This starts the rotation in the reverse run direction. The rotation will stop if this key is pressed while starting.

Stop Operation key: Press any key other than the SHIFT key. (Example)

A key

This stops the rotation during forward or reverse run.

The operation is stopped and the operation adjustment mode is canceled if after starting, the screen is changed from the AUXILIARY AXIS MONITOR screen to another screen, or the monitor axis is changed. The following table shows the relation between the various key operations and the operation start/ stop.

Operation status (status before key operation)

Key operation Stop status Forward run status

Reverse run status

Screen change

FORWARD RUN START key

Normal Stop Stop No change

REVERSE RUN START key

Abnormal Stop Stop No change

ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTER key

Remain in stop status

Stop Stop No change

CNC FUNCTION, MENU KEY, NEXT/PREVIOUS PAGE key

Remain in stop status

Stop Stop Change

, TAB key, SHIFT, CB, DEL, INPUT key, MENU key, CYCLE START, RESET key, etc.

Remain in stop status

Remain in forward run status

Remain in reverse run status

No change

(Note 1) CNC axis handle movement is invalid in the MR-J2-CT handle mode. The No. 1 handle is fixed for the MR-J2-CT handle mode.

7. Diagnosis

7.11 MELDASNET Support Parameters

I-311

7.11 MELDASNET Support Parameters

Pressing the menu key

SUPPORT displays the MELDASNET SUPPORT PARAMETER screen.

AUX-PRM AUX-MON SUPPORT MENU

[SUPPORT] ALARM/DIAGN 11.1/2 Sampling #11 H/W CONFIG 0 #23 COORDINATE DATA 0 #12 S/W CONFIG 0 #13 KEY HISTORY 0 #1 Sampling #14 ALARM HISTORY 0 0: Start #15 PLC I/O HISTORY 0 #2 Sampl. data clear #16 AC ALARM HISTORY 0 1: Clear #17 SPINDLE DATA1 0 #18 SPINDLE DATA2 0 #5 System 0 #19 SERVO DATA1 0 #6 Spindle 0 #20 SERVO DATA2 0 #7 Servo 0000 #21 MODAL 0 #22 PROGRAM DATA 0 #( )( )

After setting #5 to #7 and #11 to #23, turn the NC power OFF. The settings will be validated after the power is turned ON again.

7. Diagnosis

7.11 MELDASNET Support Parameters

I-312

Main item # Item Details Setting range

STATE Sampling The sampling execution state is displayed. "sampling" : Sampling is being executed. "sampling stop" : Sampling is stopped. "sampling invalid" : The MELDASNET function is invalid.

1 Sampling Restart of sampling is designated. 0: Sampling is restarted.

0 OPE

2 Sampl. data clear

Sampling is stopped, and the sampled data is cleared. 1: The sampled data is cleared.

#(1)( 1) INPUT

Clear? (Y/N)

To clear sampled data

Y INPUT

"Data clear complete" appears

To not clear sampled data

N INPUT

(Note) Sampling will stop when the sampling data clear operation is executed. To restart sampling, the restart sampling operation will be executed or the power must be turned ON again.

1

Designate the system that is not to be sampled. Set the system with a bit unit.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0bit

Sy st

em 1

S y

st em

2

5 System

The entire system will be sampled when 0 is set.

Set with a HEX.

Designate the spindle that is not to be sampled. Set the spindle with a bit unit. bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

2n d

sp in

dl e

1s t s

pi nd

le

6 Spindle

The entire system will be sampled when 0 is set.

Set with a HEX.

Designate the axis that is not to be sampled. Set all servo axes with a bit unit regardless of the system. bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

6t h

ax is

5t

h ax

is

4t h

ax is

3r

d ax

is

2n d

ax is

1s

t a xi

s

SAMPLING SPEC

7 Servo

The entire system will be sampled when 0 is set.

Set with a HEX.

7. Diagnosis

7.11 MELDASNET Support Parameters

I-313

Main item # Item Details Setting range

11 H/W CONFIG

Select whether to sample the hardware configuration data. 0: Sample. 1: Do not sample.

0/1

12 S/W CONFIG

Select whether to sample the software configuration data. 0: Sample. 1: Do not sample.

0/1

13 KEY HISTORY

Select whether to sample the key history. 0: Sample. 1: Do not sample.

0/1

14 ALARM HISTORY

Select whether to sample the alarm history. 0: Sample. 1: Do not sample.

0/1

15 PLC I/O HISTORY

Select whether to sample the PLC input/output signal history. 0: Sample. 1: Do not sample.

0/1

16 AC ALARM HISTORY

Select whether to sample the AC input power error history. 0: Sample. 1: Do not sample.

0/1

17 SPINDLE DATA1

Select whether to sample the spindle current waveform (speed FB, current FB, current command, position FB, position command, droop). 0: Sample. 1: Do not sample.

0/1

18 SPINDLE DATA2

Select whether to sample the spindle current waveform (driver status 1, 3, 4). 0: Sample. 1: Do not sample.

0/1

19 SERVO DATA1

Select whether to sample the servo current waveform (speed FB, current FB, current command, position FB, position command, droop). 0: Sample. 1: Do not sample.

0/1

20 SERVO DATA2

Select whether to sample the servo current waveform (detector position Rn, Pn). 0: Sample. 1: Do not sample.

0/1

21 MODAL Select whether to sample the program and modal data. 0: Sample. 1: Do not sample.

0/1

22 PROGRAM DATA

Select whether to sample the program sampling data. 0: Sample. 1: Do not sample.

0/1

SAMPLING DATA SELECT

23 COORDI- NATE DATA

Select whether to sample the coordinate data. 0: Sample. 1: Do not sample.

0/1

7. Diagnosis

7.12 NC Data Sampling

I-314

7.12 NC Data Sampling

When the page key

NEXT PAGE is pressed on the MELDASNET SUPPORT PARAMETER screen, the

NC-DATA SAMPLING screen will open.

AUX-PRM AUX-MON SUPPORT MENU

[NC-DATA SAMPLING] ALARM/DIAGN 11.2/2 # 0 SMT START 0 SMT COUNTER 0 Sampling stop # 1 CYCLE 1 #11 ADR1 00000300 #21 PROCESS FORM 0 # 2 MARKS 2 #12 ADR2 00010000 #22 E-CONDITION 0 # 3 BAFFER 0 #13 ADR3 00000000 #23 VARIABLE NO. 0 # 4 CAPACITY 2 #14 ADR4 00000000 #24 PLC DEVICE 0 # 5 S-CONDITION 0 #15 ADR5 00000000 #25 ADDRESS 00000000 #16 ADR6 00000000 #26 DATA 00000000 #17 ADR7 00000000 #27 DATA MASK 00000000 #18 ADR8 00000000 #( ) ( )

Refer to section "8.2 Data Sampling" in "III. Setup" for details on the items displayed on the screen and on data sampling.

7. Diagnosis

7.13 Anshin-net

I-315

7.13 Anshin-net

Pressing the menu key

Anshin net displays the ANSHIN-NET screen.

PARAM. 1

[Anshin net] ALARM/DIAGN 14.1/1

Anshin net message Press [Call] menu to call NC service. Don't turn OFF a power supply while One-touch calling. NC service message

Telephone Number 1( )( )

Comment #1: Call #2: Notice Ope. #3: Tel No. 1 #4: Tel No. 2 #5: Tel No. 3 #6: optional No.

#( ) ( )

Detailed information services and speedy maintenance are provided by connecting the Ryoden Koki Engineering (RKE) call center with the end user's CNC over a network. A contract must be bound with Ryoden Koki Engineering, Co., Ltd. to use this service.

[Service menu]

(1) Anshin menu

Automatic alarm notification

The call center can see the state of an alarm occurrence during automatic operation. Quick measures can be taken even during unmanned operation.

One-touch call The machine status information can be sent just by pressing the one-touch button. Expert engineers provide technical support based on the received information.

Periodic monitor The warning messages are periodically monitored and analyzed to prevent faults.

Backup The parameter data is periodically backed up to provide swift service even if the memory is lost, etc.

(2) Handy menus

Operator notification

If machining ends or an error such as an alarm stop occurs, the state is automatically notified to the operator's cell phone with audio messages.

Periodic monitor warning

A report created by tabulating the monitor data is sent to help with controlling or planning production plans.

Remote monitor The machine's operation status can be understood by accessing the call center from a phone.

Sharing of machining data

The call center's server is opened to users for use as a medium to store programs.

Contact Ryoden Koki Engineering, Co., Ltd. for details.

7. Diagnosis

7.14 MTB net

I-316

7.14 MTB net

Pressing the menu key

MTB net displays the MTB net screen.

Anshin MTB net MENU

[MTB net] ALARM/DIAGN 23.1/2

Message Input "1" in #( ) and push "INPUT" to send the diagnosis. Do not turn the power OFF during sending MTB Message

**** #1: Send

#( )

MTB net is a function that connects the personal computer software "MELDAS Remote Diagnosis Tool Kit" (hereinafter, remote diagnosis tool kit) which Mitsubishi sells separately to machine makers and the NC with a communication line, and sends and receives the diagnosis information files required for service. MTB net has the following two functions.

(1) Machine tool diagnosis data send function

When Send is selected on the MTB net screen, a connection is established with the remote diagnosis tool kit, and the diagnosis information is sent. 1)

Set "1" at the setting area on the MTB net screen, and then press the

INPUT key.

The connection to the remote diagnosis tool kit will start. After connecting, the files are sent in the background according to the requests from the remote diagnosis tool kit.

(Note) If a send operation is attempted during communication, an operation error (E05) will occur.

(2) Reception response function When a phone connection is established from the remote diagnosis tool, the diagnosis information is sent. This function is carried out in the background, and does not require onscreen operations.

Contact the machine maker for more details on MTB.

8. High-speed Program Server

I-317

8. High-speed Program Server When the function selection key

DIAGN IN/OUT is pressed, the following menu is displayed.

Input/output menu (No.1 to 4) Diagnosis menu (No.5 to 8) Diagnosis menu (No.1 to 4) Diagnosis menu (No.9 to 10) Input/output menu (No.5) , Program sever menu (No.1 to 3)

INPUT OUTPUT ERASE FILE MENU

ABS-SRV ADJUST HISTORY CONFIG MENU

ALARM SERVO SPINDLE PLC-I/F MENU

AUX-PRM AUX-MON MENU

COPY HOSTSET HOST IC CARD MENU

Menu selection keys Previous page key Next page key

Program server menu.

HostSet

HOST

IC CARD

DIAGN menu No.1 to 10

Input/Output menu Refer to the section on data input/output.

Refer to the section on diagnosis.

MENU

MENU

8. High-speed Program Server 8.1 Host Setting

I-318

8.1 Host Setting When the menu key

HOSTSET is pressed, the HostSet screen is displayed.

COPY HOSTSET HOST IC CARD MENU

[HostSet] PROGRAM SERVER 1. 1/2 #1 User name (MELDAS65 ) #2 Pass word ( ) #3 DIR. (/MACHINE/PRG ) #4 Host address (127.126.125.124) #5 Comment (HOSTNAME ) #6 User name ( ) #7 Pass word ( ) #8 DIR. ( ) #9 Host address ( ) #10 Comment ( ) #( ) ( )

Host computer A

Host computer B

Up to four host computers (host computers A to D) can be set on the HostSet screen. Set host computers A and B on the first page, and host computers C and D on the second page. (Note) Depending on the model, only one screen equivalent to host computer A will appear.

Details

Item No. of input

characters #1 User name Set the user name for logging into the host computer. 15

#2 Password Set the user password for logging into the host computer. 15

#3 DIR. Designate the host directory to access. 63 #4 Host address Set the IP address of the host computer. 15 #5 Comment Set the comment of the host computer. 10 #6 to #10 Same as #1 to #5.

The following explanations indicate the case for setting the upper level (host computer A on page 1). (Note) Designate the path under the open directory set in the host computer's FTP server for the directory

designated in #3 and #8. (The open directory is the directory that can be referred to by the client (NC). The open directory is handled as the root directory (/) by the client.) (Example) When open directory is "c:\PRG" ... The NC handles the above directory as the root directory (/).

8. High-speed Program Server 8.1 Host Setting

I-319

8.1.1 Setting the User Name

COPY HOSTSET HOST

#(1) ( (1) Input "1" in the setting area # ( ), and press the cursor key

.

COPY HOSTSET HOST

#(1) (MELDAS65 (2) Input the user name for logging in into the setting area ( ).

The user name can have up to 15 alphanumeric characters. * Only uppercase alphabetic characters can

be set.

[HostSet] #1 User name MELDAS65 #2 Password #3 DIR. #4 Host address 0. 0. 0. 0 #5 Comment

(3) Press the

INPUT key.

The setting area will be cleared, and the "#1 User name" data will be updated. The password will also be cleared.

8.1.2 Setting the Password

COPY HOSTSET HOST

#(2) ( (1) Input "2" in the setting area # ( ), and press the cursor key

.

COPY HOSTSET HOST

#(2) (MELDAS (2) Input the user password for logging in into the setting area ( ). The password can have up to 15 alphanumeric characters. * Only uppercase alphabetic characters can

be set.

[HostSet] #1 User name MELDAS65 #2 Password #3 DIR. #4 Host address 0. 0. 0. 0 #5 Comment

(3) Press the

INPUT key.

The setting area will be cleared, and the "#2 Password" data will be updated. The display will change to "".

8. High-speed Program Server 8.1 Host Setting

I-320

8.1.3 Designating the Directory

COPY HOSTSET HOST

#(3) ( (1) Input "3" in the setting area # ( ), and press the cursor key

.

COPY HOSTSET HOST

#(2) (/MACHINE1/WORK1 (2) Designate the host computer directory as an absolute path in the setting area ( ). The directory can have up to 31 alphanumeric characters. * Only uppercase alphabetic characters can

be set.

[HostSet] #1 User name MELDAS65 #2 Password #3 DIR. /MACHINE1/WORK1 #4 Host address 0. 0. 0. 0 #5 Comment

(3) Press the

INPUT key.

The setting area will be cleared, and the "#3 DIR." data will be updated.

8.1.4 Setting the Host Address

COPY HOSTSET HOST

#(4) ( (1) Input "4" in the setting area # ( ), and press the cursor key

.

COPY HOSTSET HOST

#(4) (127. 126. 125. 124 (2) Input the host computer's IP address in the setting area ( ).

[HostSet] #1 User name MELDAS65 #2 Password #3 DIR. /MACHINE1/WORK1 #4 Host address 127. 126. 125. 124 #5 Comment

(3) Press the

INPUT key.

The setting area will be cleared, and the "#4 Host address" data will be updated.

8. High-speed Program Server 8.1 Host Setting

I-321

8.1.5 Inputting a comment

COPY HOSTSET HOST

#(5) ( (1) Input "5" in the setting area # ( ), and press the cursor key

.

COPY HOSTSET HOST

#(5) (HOSTNAME (2) Input the comment in the setting area ( ). Up to ten alphanumeric characters can be input for the comment. * Alphabetic characters can be input only in

uppercase.

[HostSet] #1 User name MELDAS65 #2 Password #3 DIR. /MACHINE1/WORK1 #4 Host address 127. 126. 125. 124 #5 Comment HOSTNAME

(3) Press the

INPUT key.

The setting area will be cleared, and the "#5 Comment" data will be updated.

8. High-speed Program Server 8.2 Host (Compatible with M60 Series)

I-322

8.2 Host (Compatible with M60 Series) When the menu key

HOST is pressed, the HOST screen is displayed.

[HOST] PROGRAM SERVER 2./ #1 File List #2 DwLoad (HOSTIC) #3 UpLoad (ICHOST) No. #( ) ( )( ) DIR.( )

COPY HOSTSET HOST IC CARD MENU Function Details

#1 File List Designate the host computer directory to be accessed. The list of the files in the designated directory can be displayed.

#2 DwLoad (HOST IC) Machining programs can be received from the host computer and saved in the IC card.

#3 UpLoad (IC HOST) Machining programs saved in the IC card can be transmitted to the host computer.

Item Details

The directory name designated in "HOSTSET" screen is displayed (absolute path).

[File List] The files in the designated directory are displayed as a list. Note that the subdirectory is not displayed.

The file name is displayed. If the file name is too long, the first 12 characters will be displayed.

The file size is displayed as a byte unit. If the file size exceeds 99999999 bytes, "" will display.

The date (following the host computer clock) that the file was saved is displayed. The display differs according to the saved period. File saved more than a year ago The year, month and date are displayed.

(Example: 1999/02/02) File saved within the year The month and date are displayed.

(Example: /02/02)

The time (following the host computer clock) that the file was saved is displayed. The display differs according to the saved period. File saved more than a year ago The time is not displayed. File saved within the year The time is displayed. (Example: 14:57)

If all of the saved files cannot be displayed on one page, the list will cover several pages. Display the previous and following pages by pressing the page keys (

PREVIOUS PAGE ,

NEXT PAGE ).

The file list is displayed in the order of the information sent from the host computer.

8. High-speed Program Server 8.2 Host (Compatible with M60 Series)

I-323

8.2.1 Displaying the File List

COPY HOSTSET HOST

#(1) ( )( ) (1) Input "1" in the setting area # ( ), and press the cursor key

three times.

(2) Designate the host computer directory as an

absolute path in the setting area DIR. ( ). The directory can have up to 31 alphanumeric characters. * Only uppercase alphabetic characters can

be set. * The designated directory is held until the

power is turned OFF. * The directory designation can be omitted.

HOST IC CARD MENU

DIR. ( /MACHINE1/WORK1/FINISHI)

(3) Press the

INPUT key.

The message "DATA IN EXECUTION" will appear. When the input is completed, the message "DATA IN COMPLETE" will appear, and the setting area will be cleared. The displayed file list will be updated.

HOST IC CARD MENU

DIR. ( /MACHINE1/WORK1/FINISHI)

DATA IN EXECUTION

8. High-speed Program Server 8.2 Host (Compatible with M60 Series)

I-324

8.2.2 Downloading (IC to host)

No. < NAME > < BYTE > < DATE > 1 12345678.PRG 12345678 1999 /04/29 2 1000.prg 123 /05/03 09:32 3 Test.prg 123 /05/04 09:32

An example of registering the machining program file "Test.prg (file No. 3)" saved in the host computer as "2000.prg" in the IC card is explained in this section.

COPY HOSTSET HOST

#(2) ( )( ) (1) Input "2" in the setting area # ( ), and press the cursor key

.

COPY HOSTSET HOST

#(2) ( )( ) (2) Input the file No. of file name to be uploaded from the file list in the setting area ( ), and press the cursor key

. * Up to 12 uppercase alphabetic characters

can be designated as the file name. * The values 1 to 10 are used only to

designate the "file No.".

COPY HOSTSET HOST

#(2) ( )( ) (3) Input the program No. to enter into the IC as a number in the following setting area. Up to eight digits can be designated for the program No.

(4) Press the

INPUT key.

The message "DATA IN EXECUTION" will appear. When the transmission is completed, the message "DATA IN COMPLETE" will appear, and the setting area will be cleared.

HOST IC CARD MENU

DIR. ( )

DATA IN EXECUTION

(Note 1) The machining program being input from the host computer cannot be automatically run. (The host computer machining program cannot be searched.)

(Note 2) The input cannot be canceled. (Note 3) Operations on the screen cannot be carried out during the input.

8. High-speed Program Server 8.2 Host (Compatible with M60 Series)

I-325

8.2.3 Uploading (Host to IC)

An example of saving the machining program "3000.prg" registered in the IC card as "TESTCUT2" in the host computer is explained in this section.

COPY HOSTSET HOST

#(3) ( )( ) (1) Input "3" in the setting area # ( ), and press the cursor key

.

COPY HOSTSET HOST

#(3) ( )( ) (2) Input the number of the program to be transmitted from the IC card to the host computer in the setting area ( ), and press the cursor key

. * Input only the program No. (The extension

".PRG" does not need to be input.)

COPY HOSTSET HOST

#(3) ( )( ) (3) Input the name of the file to be saved in the host computer in the following setting area .

Up to 12 uppercase alphabetic characters can be designated as the file name.

If the input is omitted, the program file name will be the same as that designated in step (2).

No. < NAME > < BYTE > < DATE >

1 12345678.PRG 12345678 1999 /04/29 2 1000.prg 123 /05/03 09:32 3 Testcut2 123 /05/04 09:32

(4) Press the

INPUT key.

HOST IC CARD MENU

DIR. ( )

DATA OUT EXECUTION

The message "DATA OUT EXECUTION" will appear. When the transmission is completed, the message "DATA OUT COMPLETE" will appear, and the setting area will be cleared. The displayed file list will be updated.

(Note 1) The transmission cannot be canceled. (Note 2) Operations on the screen cannot be carried out during the transmission.

8. High-speed Program Server 8.3 Host (Compatible with M60S Series)

I-326

8.3 Host (Compatible with M60S Series) 8.3.1 Host Communication Screen

When the menu key

HOST is pressed, the Host Communication screen is displayed.

A CHOICE B CHOICE CHANGE RETURN

[HOST] PROGRAM SERVER 2 DEVICE:[1.MEMORY 2.IC CARD A to D. HOST A to D] #1 DEVICE (HOST A ) HOSTNAME #2 DIR. (/MACHINE/PRG/TapCycle/Test ) #3 FILE (1.PRG ) #4 DEVICE (MEMORY ) #5 DIR. (/PRG ) #6 FILE ( ) #7 Transmit[A -> B] #10 File delete[A] #8 Transmit[B -> A] #11 File delete[B] #9 COL. [A : B] #( ) ( )

DEVICE B

DEVICE A

$1 (Note 5)

Menu Function

A CHOICE The "File Selection" screen opens, and the list of device files set in device A is displayed.

B CHOICE The "File Selection" screen opens, and the list of device files set in device B is displayed.

CHANGE Changes the alphabet key input between uppercase and lowercase. Use this when setting the directory and file. The menu is highlighted during selecting lowercase.

RETURN

Changes the display menu.

A CHOICE B CHOICE CHANGE RETURN

RETURN

HOST Press

COPY HOSTSET HOST IC CARD MENU

8. High-speed Program Server 8.3 Host (Compatible with M60S Series)

I-327

Item Details No. of input characters

#1 DEVICE

Set the device. The "HOST A" is set immediately after the power is turned ON. When host A to D is set, the comment set on the "HOST COMMUNICATION screen" will appear.

1 (Note 1)

#2 DIR. Set the directory. 63 (Note 2) D E

V IC

E A

#3 FILE Set the file. Several files can be set by using "". 63

#4 DEVICE

Set the device name. The "MEMORY" is set immediately after the power is turned ON. When host A to D is set, the comment set on the "HOST COMMUNICATION screen" will appear.

1 (Note 1)

#5 DIR. Set the directory. 63 (Note 2) D E

V IC

E B

#6 FILE Set the file. Several files can be set by using "". 63 #7 Transmit[A->B] The file (#3) set in device A is sent to device B. (Note 3) #8 Transmit[B<-A] The file (#6) set in device B is sent to device A. (Note 3)

#9 COL. [A:B] The file (#3) set in device A and the file (#6) set in device B are compared. (Note 3)

#10 File delete[A] The file (#3) set in device A is erased. (Note 4) #11 File delete[B] The file (#6) set in device B is erased. (Note 4)

(Note 1) Set the device as shown below.

Setting value Set device name

1 Memory (NC internal memory) 2 IC card A Host A B Host B C Host C D Host D

(Note 2) Up to 63 characters can be input at once. However, if a relative path is input, 63 characters could be

exceeded. In this case, the last 62 characters will be displayed, and the first character will be displayed as "" (tilde).

(Up to 127 characters can be set for the path.)

(Example) /MACHINE1/123456789/123456789/123456789/123456789/123456789/1234 ACHINE1/123456789/123456789/123456789/123456789/123456789/1234

8. High-speed Program Server 8.3 Host (Compatible with M60S Series)

I-328

(Note 3)

(1) If the same device is set for device A and device B, an error will occur. (2) Set the IC card device's file name as an identifier (max. 8 characters) + extension (max. 3

characters). If a file name exceeding this number of characters (a long file name), an operation error (E84) will occur, and the file will not be transmitted.

(Example) File name usable for IC card device

OK (transfer possible) ..................12345678.PRG NG (transfer not possible) ............123456789.PRG

(3) The directory created in the IC card (created on the personal computer) can have up to 18

hierarchies. If a file is transferred or a directory is moved (file list displayed) to a directory having more than 18 hierarchies, an operation error (E319) will occur, and the file cannot be transferred or listed.

(4) There is an upper limit to the number of files (approx. 200 files: differs for each IC card) that can be

created in the IC card's root directory (directory immediately below the IC card drive). If files exceeding this upper limit are transferred, an operation error (E51) will occur, and the file will not be transferred.

(Note) Normal file transfer may not be possible with an IC card used in (2) to (4) above. (This also

applies when operation are carried out on the PC.) If an operation error (E51) occurs, format the IC card.

(5) When the memory device programs and IC card or host device files are compared, the following

line will be ignored.

Line not subject to comparison Line containing a "%" code (when "%" is described at head of file) "0" No. + comment line

Use the CR+LF code for the carriage return code of the IC card or host device file. Files that do not

use the CR+LF code for carriage return cannot be compared. An operation error (E35) will occur if compare is attempted.

(Note 4) Only the files in the memory and IC card can be erased. (Note 5) When using the 2-part system, the device name is memory and the directory is /PRG/USER, the

name of the selected system can be displayed. Whether to show or hide name of the selected system can be switched with the parameters. #1050

MemPrg #1285

ext21/bit0 #1286

ext22/bit0 Details

0, 2, 4, 6 - - The name of the selected system is not displayed. 1, 3, 5, 7 OFF

OFF The name of the selected system is displayed.

ON ON The name of the selected system is not displayed. (Note 6) When parameter (#1220 aux04 (bit7)) is set, automatic start can be executed while communicating

with the host (during input/output). However, the machining performance could be affected.

8. High-speed Program Server 8.3 Host (Compatible with M60S Series)

I-329

8.3.2 File Selection Screen

When the menu key

A CHOICE or

B CHOICE is pressed on the Host Communication screen, the File Selection screen will appear. [A CHOICE]

REWRITE RETURN

[File List] PROGRAM SERVER 3 DEVICE (HOST A ) DIR. (/MACHINE/PRG/TapCycle/Test ) Back.. 100.PRG 0 2001/08/12 01:01:01 1000.PRG 12 2001/08/12 11:11:11 1001.PRG 1023 KB 2001/08/12 12:34:56 1002.PRG 1.00 KB 2001/08/12 23:56:00 TapOld.PRG 1.10 MB 1998/12/12 00:01:01 TapOld2.PRG 1023 MB 1999/12/12 00:02:02 TapOld3.PRG GB 2000/12/12 00:03:03 PreCut0107

2001/07/01 01:01:01 PreCut0108 2001/08/02 12:12:12 [B CHOICE] REWRITE RETURN [File List] PROGRAM SERVER 3 DEVICE (MEMORY ) DIR. (/PRG/USER ) Back.. 101.PRG 256 KB 2001/08/12 01:01:01 121.PRG 2012 KB 2001/08/12 11:11:11 1001.PRG 1023 KB 2001/08/12 12:34:56 1002.PRG 1.00 KB 2001/08/12 23:56:00 $1 If there are too many files saved to be listed on one page, the files will be displayed on several pages. Feed the pages by pressing the page keys ( PREVIOUS PAGE , NEXT PAGE ). If the host files are displayed, the information is displayed in the order that it was sent from the host computer. The time displayed in the " " field also follows the host computer's clock. When the IC card files are displayed, the files are displayed in the order that they were saved in the IC card's file system. If the files in the IC card are erased and files are output to the IC card repeatedly, the files will be written into the area opened by erasing the files. Thus, the files may not be displayed in the actually saved order. Menu Function REWRITE The contents displayed in the file list are redisplayed. RETURN The "Host Communication" screen is opened. (Note) If another screen is displayed while the files are listed and then the File Selection screen is opened again, the files will not be listed. Press the REWRITE menu to display the files again.

8. High-speed Program Server 8.3 Host (Compatible with M60S Series)

I-330

Item Details

DEVICE The designated device name is displayed. The device is set on the "Host Communication" screen.

DIR.

The directory name is displayed with the full path. (Note 1) The directory name display will be updated when the following step is carried out. Select Directory from the file list. Select "Back.." from the file list.

The files and directories in the designated directory are displayed. (Note 2) The selected file is highlighted. Another file can be selected using the

and

keys. If the device is "MEMORY", the file name and directory name will be fixed names. (Refer to "8.3.3 NC data file name".)

The file size is displayed. (Unit: Byte) The unit display will change according to the file size. When 1024Byte is exceeded: KB When 1024KB is exceeded: MB When 1024MB is exceeded: GB If 4.0GB is exceeded, the size will be displayed as "GB". A directory will be displayed as "

". Fi le L is t The date and time (hour, minute, second) that the file was saved are displayed. (Note 3) If the device is "MEMORY", the following will be displayed. When file is a program: A comment will display When file is not a program: There will be no display. (Note 1) If 63 characters are exceeded, the last 62 characters will be displayed, and the first character will be displayed as "" (tilde). (Up to 127 characters can be set for the path.) (Example) /MACHINE1/123456789/123456789/123456789/123456789/123456789/1234 ACHINE1/123456789/123456789/123456789/123456789/123456789/1234 (Note 2) If 36 characters are exceeded, the last 35 characters will be displayed, and the first character will be displayed as "" (tilde). (When a file name having more than 64 characters is selected, an error will occur during the transfer of the file. If a file with 63 characters or less and a "" at the head is selected, it will be correctly displayed on the Host Communication screen.) (Example) 123456789012345678901234567890123.PRG 3456789012345678901234567890123.PRG (Note 3) If the host computer's file type is UNIX, and the file was saved in the previous year, the time will not be displayed. (Note 4) When using the 2-part system with the B selection screen, the device name is memory and the directory is /PRG/USER, the name of the selected system can be displayed. Whether to show or hide name of the selected system can be switched with the parameters. #1050 MemPrg #1285 ext21/bit0 #1286 ext22/bit0 Details 0, 2, 4, 6 - - The name of the selected system is not displayed. 1, 3, 5, 7 OFF The name of the selected system is displayed. OFF ON ON The name of the selected system is not displayed.

8. High-speed Program Server 8.3 Host (Compatible with M60S Series)

I-331

8.3.3 NC Data File Name

When memory is selected as the device on the File Selection screen, a fixed directory name and file name will be displayed. (When host A to D or the IC card is selected, the random directory name and file name will appear.) The NC data can be input and output by selecting each file. The directory names (file names) displayed in the File List when memory is selected are shown below.

Directory name File name Data type

/PRG/USER/ (A list of the programs saved in the NC memory is displayed)

Machining program

/PRM/ ALL.PRM Parameters COMMON.VAR Common variables TOOL.OFS Tool compensation data TLIFE.TLF Tool life control data SRAM.BIN SRAM data

/DAT/

EXTSRAM.BIN Extension SRAM data /LAD/ USERPLC.LAD User PLC ladders

8. High-speed Program Server 8.3 Host (Compatible with M60S Series)

I-332

8.3.4 Using the Host Communication Screen

(1) Setting the device

1) Input "1" in the setting area # ( ), and press the cursor key

. (Input "4" when setting device B.) A CHOICE B CHOICE CHANGE

#(1) (

A CHOICE B CHOICE CHANGE

#(1) (A 2) Designate the device in the setting area ( ). (Example) To select memory 1 To select IC card 2 To select host A A To select host B B : : To select host D D

3) Press the

INPUT key. [HOST] DEVICE A

#1 DEVICE (HOST A ) #2 DIR. (/MACHINE1/PRG #3 FILE (

The setting area will be cleared, and the "#1 DEVICE" data will be updated. The previously selected files will be set in "#2 DIR." and "#3 FILE". 1. The previously selected files will each be

saved in host A to D. 2. If host A to D is selected immediately

after the power is turned ON, the directory set on the Host Communication screen will be set.

8. High-speed Program Server 8.3 Host (Compatible with M60S Series)

I-333

(2) Setting the directory 1 (direct input)

1) Input "2" in the setting area # ( ),

and press the cursor key

. (Input "5" when setting device B.) A CHOICE B CHOICE CHANGE

#(2) (

A CHOICE B CHOICE CHANGE

#(2) (/MACHINE2 2) Designate the directory name in the setting area ( ). To select the slave directory of the

directory set in #2, input only the directory name. (Relative path)

To change the directory set in #2, input the directory name after "/". (Absolute path)

3) Press the

INPUT key. [HOST] DEVICE A

#1 DEVICE (HOST A ) #2 DIR. (/MACHINE2 #3 FILE (

The setting area will be cleared, and the "#2 DEVICE" data will be updated.

(3) Setting the directory 2 (selective input)

1) Press the menu key

A CHOICE . (Press

B CHOICE when setting device B.)

[File List] DEVICE (HOST A ) DIR. (/MACHINE2

< Back.. PRG2

1000.PRG 123 1001.PRG 1 KB The File Selection screen will open. 2) Press the arrow keys and , and move to the target directory. (Refer to section "8.3.5 Using the File Selection Screen" for details on operations in the File Selection screen.) [File List] DEVICE (HOST A ) DIR. (/MACHINE2 < Back.. PRG 1000.PRG 123 1001.PRG 1 KB 3) Press the INPUT key, and then press the RETURN key. [HOST] DEVICE A #1 DEVICE (HOST A ) #2 DIR. (/MACHINE2/PRG #3 FILE ( The Host Communication screen will open, and "#2 DIR." will be updated.

8. High-speed Program Server 8.3 Host (Compatible with M60S Series)

I-334

(4) Setting the file 1 (direct input)

1) Input "3" in the setting area # ( ), and press the cursor key

. (Input "6" when setting device B.) A CHOICE B CHOICE CHANGE

#(3) (

A CHOICE B CHOICE CHANGE

#(3) (1.PRG 2) Designate the file name in the setting area ( ).

(To select multiple files, use "" (asterisk).) (Example) To select all files starting from

"1" and ending at ".PRG" "1.PRG"

(Only one asterisk can be used.)

3) Press the

INPUT key. [HOST] DEVICE A

#1 DEVICE (HOST A ) #2 DIR. (/MACHINE1/PRG #3 FILE (1.PRG

The setting area will be cleared, and the "#3 FILE" data will be updated.

(5) Setting the file 2 (selective input)

1) Press the menu key

A CHOICE . (Press

B CHOICE when setting device B.)

[File List] DEVICE (HOST A ) DIR. (/MACHINE1/PRG

< Back.. 1234.PRG2 1000 9999.PRG 1023 1001001.PRG 1 KB

The File Selection screen will open.

2) Press the arrow keys

and

, and move to the target file.

(Refer to section "8.3.5 Using the File Selection Screen" for details on operations in the File Selection screen.)

[File List] DEVICE (HOST A ) DIR. (/MACHINE1/PRG

< Back.. 1234.PRG 1000 9999.PRG 1023 1001001.PRG 1 KB

3) Press the

INPUT key, and then press the

RETURN key.

[HOST] DEVICE A

#1 DEVICE (HOST A ) #2 DIR. (/MACHINE1/PRG #3 FILE (1234.PRG

The Host Communication screen will open, and "#3 FILE" will be updated.

8. High-speed Program Server 8.3 Host (Compatible with M60S Series)

I-335

(6) Transferring files

1) Set the transfer origin and transfer destination files.

(Refer to steps (1) to (3) in the previous section for the operation methods.)

If the transfer destination file is omitted,

the file will be transferred with the same name as the transfer origin file. Note that when inputting and outputting the machining programs in the memory device, the extension (.PRG) will be added or deleted automatically.

[HOST] DEVICE A

#1 DEVICE (HOST A ) #2 DIR. (/MACHINE1/PRG #3 FILE (100.PRG

DEVICE B #4 DEVICE (MEMORY ) #5 DIR. (/PRG/USER #6 FILE (100

Automatically determining the transfer origin file name

Transfer origin device: /file name

Transfer destination

device: /file name

Transfer destination file

name Explanation

Memory: /PRG/USER/100

Host A: /

100.PRG Transferred as same file name + extension is automatically added

Memory: /PRG/USER/100

IC card: /

100.PRG Transfer to the IC card is the same as the host

Memory: /PRG/USER/100

Host A: /200

200.PRG Extension is automatically added

Memory: /PRG/USER/100

Host A: /200.TXT

200.TXT Transferred with designated file name

Host A: /100.PRG

Memory: /PRG/USER

100 Extension (PRG) is automatically deleted

Memory: /PRG/DAT/TOOL.OFS

Host A: /

TOOL.OFS Transferred as same file name

Memory: /PRG/DAT/TOOL.OFS

Host A: /OFFSET

OFFSET Extension is not added automatically

Host A: /100.PRG

IC card: /

100 Extension is not added automatically between host and IC card

A CHOICE B CHOICE CHANGE

#(7) ( 2) Input "7" in the setting area # ( ), and press the

INPUT key. When using #7 Transmit [AB], device A

will be the transfer origin. When using #8 Transmit [BA], device B

will be the transfer origin.

WRITE :NO SCR.CHG

The transfer will start, and the message "WRITE :NO SCR.CHG " will appear. When the transfer is completed, the message "WRITE COMPLETE" will appear, and then "DATA IN COMPLETE" or "DATA OUT COMPLETE" will appear.

(Note 1) When transferring multiple files with the "" designation, the message "WRITE :NO SCR.CHG" and

"WRITE COMPLETE" will appear each time a file is transferred. "DATA IN COMPLETE" or "DATA OUT COMPLETE" will appear when the last file has been transferred.

8. High-speed Program Server 8.3 Host (Compatible with M60S Series)

I-336

An operation error will occur in the following cases. When the transfer origin file cannot be found. (E313) When a file with the same name is found at the transfer destination. (E314) When transfer was not possible. (The host did not start up, etc.) When an operation error (E314) occurs, the file can be overwritten. [Overwriting a file]

A CHOICE B CHOICE CHANGE

#(7) ( E314 FILE DUPLICATE

When an operation error (E314) occurs, the cursor will move to the second setting area.

A CHOICE B CHOICE CHANGE

#(7) (Y 1) Input "Y" in the second setting area, and then press the

INPUT key.WRITE :NO SCR.CHG

Transfer and overwriting of the file will start, and the message "WRITE :NO SCR.CHG" will appear. When the transfer is completed, the message "WRITE COMPLETE" will appear, and then "DATA IN COMPLETE" or "DATA OUT COMPLETE" will appear.

(Note 1) When transferring multiple files with the "" designation, an operation error (E314) will occur each

time a duplicate file is found. Note that if "A" is input instead of "Y" when the operation error (E314) occurs, an operation error will not occur even if subsequent files are duplicated, and instead the files will be overwritten.

(Note 2) If a character other than "Y" or "A" is input when an operation error (E314) occurs, the file transfer will stop at that point.

8. High-speed Program Server 8.3 Host (Compatible with M60S Series)

I-337

8.3.5 Using the File Selection Screen

(1) Moving the directory (Example 1) To move from directory "/MACHINE1" to directory "/MACHINE1/PRG/TapCycle"

1) Using the arrow keys

and

, select the target directory ("PRG" for this example).

(If there are multiple directories (or files) in "/MACHINE1" and do not appear on one page, the target directory may not be displayed.

Press the page keys (

PREVIOUS PAGE ,

NEXT PAGE ) to

scroll the pages and display the required information.)

[File List] DEVICE (HOST A ) DIR. (/MACHINE1

< Back.. PRG

9999.PRG 1023 1001001.PRG 1 KB The selected directory (or file) will be highlighted. 2) Press the INPUT key. [File List] DEVICE (HOST A ) DIR. (/MACHINE1/PRG < Back.. TapCycle 1000.PRG 1000 KB 1001.PRG 1 MB "DIR." will be updated, and the files under "/MACHINE1/PRG" will appear in the file list at the same time. 3) Press the arrow keys and again to select the target directory ("TapCycle" in this example). [File List] DEVICE (HOST A ) DIR. (/MACHINE1/PRG < Back.. TapCycle 1000.PRG 1000 KB 1001.PRG 1 MB 4) Press the INPUT key. [File List] DEVICE (HOST A ) DIR. (/MACHINE1/PRG/TypCycle < Back.. 10.PRG 1000 KB "DIR." will be updated, and the files under "/MACHINE1/PRG/TapCycle" will appear in the file list at the same time.

8. High-speed Program Server 8.3 Host (Compatible with M60S Series)

I-338

(Example 2) To move from directory "/MACHINE1/PRG/TapCycle" to directory "/MACHINE1" 1) Press the arrow key

, and select "Back..".

(Even if a page other than the first page has been displayed by pressing the page key (

PREVIOUS PAGE ,

NEXT PAGE ), "Back.." will always

appear at the top line.)

[File List] DEVICE (HOST A ) DIR. (/MACHINE1/PRG/TapCycle

< Back.. 10.PRG 1000 KB

2) Press the

INPUT key. [File List] DEVICE (HOST A ) DIR. (/MACHINE1/PRG

< Back.. TapCycle

1000.PRG 1000 KB 1001.PRG 1 MB "DIR." will be updated, and the files under "/MACHINE1/PRG" will appear in the file list at the same time. 3) Press the arrow key again, and select " Back..". ("Back.." will appear immediately after the directory is moved.) [File List] DEVICE (HOST A ) DIR. (/MACHINE1/PRG < Back.. TapCycle 1000.PRG 1000 KB 1001.PRG 1 MB 4) Press the INPUT key. [File List] DEVICE (HOST A ) DIR. (/MACHINE1 < Back.. PRG 9999.PRG 1023 1001001.PRG 1 KB "DIR." will be updated, and the files under "/MACHINE1" will appear in the file list at the same time.

8. High-speed Program Server 8.3 Host (Compatible with M60S Series)

I-339

(2) Selecting a file/directory

1) Move to the directory containing the target file.

Refer to "8.3.5 Using the File Selection screen" (1) Moving the directory for details on moving.

[File List] DEVICE (HOST A ) DIR. (/MACHINE1/PRG

< Back.. TapCycle

1000.PRG 1000 KB 1001.PRG 1 MB 2) Using the arrow keys and , select the target file. (If there are multiple directories (or files) and do not appear on one page, the target file may not be displayed. Press the page keys ( PREVIOUS PAGE , NEXT PAGE ) to scroll the pages and display the required information.) [File List] DEVICE (HOST A ) DIR. (/MACHINE1/PRG < Back.. TapCycle 1000.PRG 1234 KB 1001.PRG 1 MB The selected directory (or file) will be highlighted. 3)-1 After pressing the INPUT key, press the menu key RETURN . [HOST] DEVICE A #1 DEVICE (HOST A ) #2 DIR. (/MACHINE1/PRG #3 FILE (1000.PRG The Host Communication screen will open, and "#2 DIR." and "#3 FILE" will be updated. 3)-2 Press the menu key RETURN . [HOST] DEVICE A #1 DEVICE (HOST A ) #2 DIR. (/MACHINE1/PRG #3 FILE ( The Host Communication screen will open, and "#2 DIR." will be updated.

8. High-speed Program Server 8.4 IC card

I-340

8.4 IC Card When the menu key

IC CARD is pressed, the IC CARD screen is displayed. A list of the machining programs in the IC card will appear on the IC Card Input/Output screen. The machining programs can be input, output, deleted, searched and listed on this screen.

[IC CARD] PROGRAM SERVER 3./ #1 IN(ICNC) PROGRAM ENTRY #2 OUT(NCIC) BYTE #3 PROGRAM ERASE #4 PROGRAM SEARCH #( )O( )

COPY HOSTSET HOST IC CARD MENU Function Details

#1 IN (IC NC) Selects the machining program input operation (IC card NC memory).

#2 OUT (NC IC) Selects the machining program output operation (NC memory IC card).

#3 PROGRAM ERASE Erases the machining program in the IC card. #4 PROGRAM SEARCH Searches for machining programs saved in the IC card.

Item Details

PROGRAM ENTRY The number of machining programs saved in the IC card is displayed.

BYTE The remaining number of bytes that can be saved in the IC card is displayed. The machining program No. (1 to 99,999,999) saved in the IC card is displayed. The number of machining program bytes saved in the IC card is displayed. A machining program comment (up to 18 characters) is displayed.

(Note 1) The list is displayed in the order that the IC cards are saved. If the files in the IC card are erased

and files are output to the IC card repeatedly, the files will be written into the area opened by erasing the files. Thus, the files may not be displayed in the actually saved order.

(Note 2) When using the 2-part system, the screen operations can be disabled with the parameters. #1050

MemPrg #1286

ext22/bit0 Details

0, 2, 4, 6 - When using the M system, all operations are possible. When using the L system, operations other than operation search are possible. An error (E60) will occur if operation search is attempted.

1, 3, 5, 7 OFF Input/output of the machining programs registered in the System 1 memory is possible.

ON An error (E05) will occur if input/output is attempted.

8. High-speed Program Server 8.4 IC card

I-341

8.4.1 Inputting a Machining Program from the IC Card (IC to NC)

The following operations are used to input the machining program.

(1) Set #1 and the program No. (1 to 99,999,999). (Example) To input program 1000 from the IC card to the NC memory.

# (1) 0 (1000)

# ( 1 ) 0 ( 1000)

(2) Press the

INPUT key. The program input will start, and "DATA IN EXECUTION" will appear in the message area.

DATA IN EXECUTION # ( 1 ) 0 ( 1000)

(3) When the input is completed, "DATA IN COMPLETE" will appear in the message area, and the program No. setting area will become blank.

DATA IN COMPLETE # ( ) 0 ( )

(Note1) Programs being called by the M198 command cannot be input. (Note2) The screen cannot be changed during data input.

8. High-speed Program Server 8.4 IC card

I-342

8.4.2 Outputting a Machining Program to the IC Card (NC to IC)

The following operations are used to output the machining program.

(1) Set #2 and the program No. (1 to 99,999,999). (Example) To output program 1000 from the NC memory to the IC card.

# (2) 0 (1000)

# ( 2 ) 0 ( 1000)

(2) Press the

INPUT key. The program output will start, and "DATA OUT EXECUTION" will appear in the message area.

DATA OUT EXECUTION # ( 2 ) 0 ( 1000)

(3) When the output is completed, "DATA OUT COMPLETE" will appear in the message area, and the program No. setting area will become blank.

DATA OUT COMPLETE # ( ) 0 ( )

(Note1) The screen cannot be changed during data output.

8. High-speed Program Server 8.4 IC card

I-343

8.4.3 Erasing a Machining Program in the IC Card

The following operations are used to erase a machining program.

(1) Set #3 and the program No. (1 to 99,999,999) to be erased. (Example) To erase program 1000.

# (3) 0 (1000)

# ( 3 ) 0 ( 1000)

(2) Press the

INPUT key. The program erasing will start, and "ERASE EXECUTION" will appear in the message area.

ERASE EXECUTION # ( 3 ) 0 ( 1000)

(3) When the erasing is completed, "ERASE COMPLETE" will appear in the message area, and the program No. setting area will become blank.

ERASE COMPLETE # ( ) 0 ( )

(Note 1) Programs being searched with "#4 PROGRAM SEARCH" cannot be erased. (Note 2) Programs being called by the M198 command cannot be erased.

8. High-speed Program Server 8.4 IC card

I-344

8.4.4 Formatting the IC Card

Format the IC card with the following operations to erase all machining programs in the IC card or to format an IC card.

(1) Set #3 and ( FORMAT) in the program No. setting area.

# ( 3 ) 0 ( FORMAT)

(2) Press the

INPUT key. The formatting will start, and the message "FORMAT EXECUTION" will appear in the message area.

FORMAT EXECUTION # ( 3 ) 0 ( FORMAT)

(3) When the formatting is completed, the program No. setting area will become blank.

# ( ) 0 ( )

(Note 1) Formatting is not possible while the program is running.

8. High-speed Program Server 8.4 IC card

I-345

8.4.5 Searching for a Machining Program in the IC Card

The machining program is searched for with the following operations.

(1) Set #4 and the program No. (1 to 99,999,999) to be searched. (Example) To search for program 1000.

# (4) 0 (1000)

# ( 4 ) 0 ( 1000)

(2) Press the

INPUT key. The program search will start, and "SEARCH EXECUTION" will appear in the message area.

SEARCH EXECUTION # ( 4 ) 0 ( 1000)

(3) When the search is completed, "SEARCH COMPLETE" will appear in the message area, and the program No. setting area will become blank.

SEARCH COMPLETE # ( ) 0 ( )

(4) To start the program that was searched and found, press the Automatic Start switch in the tape mode. The search state is held until reset is input. (When reset, the program must be searched for again.)

(Note) Searching is not possible unless the machining program format is correct. (The machining program format is explained later.)

8. High-speed Program Server 8.4 IC card

I-346

8.4.6 Listing the Machining Programs in the IC Card

The machining programs can be listed with the following operations. If all of the saved machining programs cannot be displayed on one page, the list will cover several pages. Display the previous and following pages by pressing the page keys (

PREVIOUS PAGE ,

NEXT PAGE ).

[IC Card] PROGRAM SERVER 3.1/3

#1 IN (ICNC) PROGRAM ENTRY 20 #2 OUT (NCIC) BYTE 21234 #3 PROGRAM ERASE #4 PROGRAM SEARCH 1.prg 123 TESTCUT 2.prg : 10.prg : 100.prg : 1000.PRG : 1001.PRG : 1020.PRG :

[IC Card] PROGRAM SERVER 3.2/3 #1 IN (ICNC) PROGRAM ENTRY 20 #2 OUT (NCIC) BYTE 21234 #3 PROGRAM ERASE #4 PROGRAM SEARCH 2001.prg 123 TESTCUT 2002.prg : 2010.prg : 2100.prg : 1000.prg : 1001.PRG : 1020.PRG :

[IC Card] PROGRAM SERVER 3.3/3 #1 IN (ICNC) PROGRAM ENTRY 20 #2 OUT (NCIC) BYTE 21234 #3 PROGRAM ERASE #4 PROGRAM SEARCH 3001.prg 123 TESTCUT 3002.prg : 3010.prg : 3100.prg : 3200.prg : 3201.prg : 3220.prg : :

PREVIOUS PAGE

NEXT PAGE

9. Graphics 9.1 Outline of Functions

I-347

9. Graphics 9.1 Outline of Functions The GRAPHIC screen will appear when the function selection key

SFG is pressed. Machine tool operations can be monitored, and the machining program path can be illustrated on the

GRAPHIC screen. This is useful for inspecting the program. (1) Trace function The trace function illustrates the actual machine movement path and draws the machine motion itself.

The machine operation can be monitored during machining. (2) Program check function The program check function illustrates the machining program movement path and draws the operation

results in the NC without carrying out automatic operation. Thus, it can draw accurate figures at high speed, allowing the machining program to be checked. (Note 1) The graphic function is an option. The GRAPHIC screen will not be displayed if this specification

is not added. (Note 2) If the machining program uses a hypothetical axis, such as in milling interpolation, the figure may

not be drawn correctly with the program check function.

9. Graphics 9.2 Menu Function

I-348

9.2 Menu Function

The menu configuration in the GRAPHIC screen is shown below. These are operation menus for selecting operations on the GRAPHIC screen. Select the menus by pressing the corresponding menu key. If the required operation menu does not appear, press the

MENU key. The next menu will appear.

[MACHINE] N013 G00 X-100.; X-12345.678 N014 G01 X-10.; Y 0.000 N015 G92 X0 Y0 Z0; Z 0.000 N016 G01 Z-10.F 100; N017 G04 X10.; N018 N019 N020 N021 N022 N023 N024

TRACE EXECUTION

Y

Z

X

TRACE PROGRAM ERASE MENU

012345678 N13-0 Fc 0.000 GRAPHIC

CHECK STEP SEARCH ERASE MENU

SCALE STANDARD GRF MODE ROTATION MENU List of functions

Menu Function TRACE This function is used when carrying out trace display.

PROGRAM The machining program can be displayed on the screen during drawing with this function.

ERASE This function erases the graphics shown on the GRAPHIC screen. CHECK This function is used to continuously check the machining program.

STEP This function is used to check machining programs one block at a time. Commands G27 to G30, G60, fixed cycle and corner rounding/chamfering are divided into several blocks.

SEARCH The program to be checked can be set (called) with this function.

SCALE This function changes the figure scale and display position. Portions of the figure can be enlarged and drawn.

STANDARD This function automatically changes the display center and figure scale in the machine stroke length range.

9. Graphics 9.2 Menu Function

I-349

Menu Function

1-plane display 2-plane display 3-dimensional display (M system only) (M system only)

Y

X

X

X

X

Y Y Z

Z

GRF MODE

Any of the above can be set for a random axis.

ROTATION In the 3-dimensional display mode, a drawing of a solid object can be made looking at the object from any direction, not just the front. (M system only)

9. Graphics 9.3 Use of the Trace Mode

I-350

9.3 Use of the Trace Mode (

TRACE )

To select the trace mode, press the menu key

TRACE . When the trace mode is selected, the machine position is indicated by a triangle mark. If this tool mark does not appear, it is because the machine position is outside the screen display range. In this case, change the display range (explained below) and move the coordinates, or widen the display range by greatly increasing the scale value. The machine position is always drawn in the trace mode. The actual movement by automatic or manual operation is drawn. The machine zero point appears as a mark.

(1) Trace start

TRACE EXECUTION

Press the menu key

TRACE .

1) The message "TRACE EXECUTION" appears, indicating the trace mode.

2) A tool mark appears at the machine position.

TRACE EXECUTION

3) After this, the machine movement is drawn in the trace mode.

(2) Trace release

Press the menu key

TRACE .

1) The "TRACE EXECUTION" message disappears, indicating that the trace mode is released.

2) The tool mark disappears. (Note 1) The trace mode can also be released

by the following operation: 1. Press the function selection key

F0 .

(3) Line types in the trace mode 1. Movement by rapid traverse and manual feed: Broken line 2. Movement by cutting feed: Solid line (Note) When high-speed drawing is carried out in the trace mode, the drawing shape becomes more

deformed as the command speed increases. Correct shapes especially cannot be drawn during high-speed machine lock. Set the cutting feed to 2000mm/min. or less.

9. Graphics 9.4 Use of the Check Modes

I-351

9.4 Use of the Check Modes To select a check mode, press menu key

CHECK or

STEP . The check mode appears immediately when the check mode is selected. (1) Preparation for checking Press the menu key

SEARCH to call the program.

O ( 1 0 0 0 ) N ( ) ( ) Tape (0)

O ( ) N ( ) - ( ) TAPE (0)

Press the menu key

SEARCH .

The data setting area appears.

(Example) To check O1000, proceed as follows:

Press

INPUT key. O 1000 N -

SEARCH COMPLETE

The setting area disappears. A message appears to notify that the search is completed.

O ( 1000) N ( ) - ( ) TAPE (0)

(Note 1) This operation search is exactly the same as that of the MONITOR function. Pressing the

automatic start button after the search is completed starts the automatic operation. The operation mode is designated by the operation mode selection switch on the machine operation panel.

9. Graphics 9.4 Use of the Check Modes

I-352

(2) Checking start 1) To check the program continuously in the same manner as in automatic continuous operation:

G28 XYZ ;Press the menu key

CHECK on the GRAPHIC screen.

The program check stops at the program end.

[MACHINE] X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000

G01 X230.;

M02 %

PROGRAM CHECK COMPLETE

[MACHINE] X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000

The program check is executed.

9. Graphics 9.4 Use of the Check Modes

I-353

2) To check the program block by block in the same manner as in single block operation:

G28 XYZ ; G00 Y-200.;

[MACHINE] X 0.000 Y -200.000 Z 0.000

G00 Y-200.; G01 X-150.F500;

PROGRAM CHECK COMPLETE

Press the menu key

STEP on the GRAPHIC screen.

The system executes one block and stops.

The system executes the next block and stops.

Press the menu key

STEP on the GRAPHIC screen.

Press the menu key

STEP successively.

The system executes one block each time the menu key

STEP is pressed.

The program check stops at the program end.

Pressing the menu key

STEP after the check is completed will start the step check from the program head.

9. Graphics 9.4 Use of the Check Modes

I-354

3) Changeover between continuous check and step check modes Pressing the menu key

STEP during continuous check execution changes the mode to the step-check mode, in which the system checks subsequent blocks of the program one at a time.

Similarly, the mode can be also changed from the step-check mode to the continuous check mode using the same key.

The system executes next one block and stops.

Execute the continuous check.

Press the menu key

STEP .

Press the menu key

STEP .

The system starts a continuous check again.

4) Drawing during tool nose radius compensation If the program being checked involves tool nose radius compensation, both the program path and

tool center path are traced.

Execute the continuous check.

9. Graphics 9.4 Use of the Check Modes

I-355

(3) Line types during checking

During tool nose radius compensation

Not during tool nose radius compensation

Manual feed Program path Broken line

Rapid traverse Tool center path Broken line Broken line Program path Solid line

Cutting feed Tool center path Solid line Solid line

(4) Relation with other functions

Function name Graphic check Remarks

Coordinate system rotation

Figure rotation function

Decimal point input command Either Type I or Type II is possible.

Mirror image function Refer to (6) Precautions, item 4.

Z axis cancel function The path is drawn exactly as the commanded movement.

Interlock

External deceleration

Override

Feed hold

Cycle start If CYCLE START is pressed during checking, a "CHECK EXECUTION" alarm will appear while it is held down.

Auto-restart CHECK COMPLETE occurs with M02/M30.

Workpiece coordinate system offset

This is set at the position determined by the offset amount actually set.

Local coordinate system offset Same as above.

Compare stop function The operation does not stop even if the set stop block is executed.

Helical interpolation function Drawn with straight lines.

9. Graphics 9.4 Use of the Check Modes

I-356

Function name Graphic check Remarks

Fixed cycle/special fixed cycle function

Manual mode and handle

During checking, the machine can be moved by changing the mode to manual or handle feed. Checking is invalid.

F1 digit feed function Zero point return/start position return command Refer to (Note 1).

User macro I and II Basic variable operations, and all judgment and branch functions are valid. Note that the following functions are invalid. Macro interface input/output Message display and stop Single block stop, miscellaneous function complete

signal, WAIT suppression. Feed hold, feedrate override, G09 valid/invalid Position data Note that the end point coordinates of

the previous block are valid. When these commands are issued, they are ignored or illegal data is input. (Note) When an NC alarm occurs, the alarm state will

be entered without displaying a message for the operator.

9. Graphics 9.4 Use of the Check Modes

I-357

(Note 1) Zero point return commands and start position return commands are valid, but the actual

machine movement (trace display) will differ partially from the drawing by the program check function. When a zero point return is carried out via the intermediate point with a G28 or G30 command, positioning to the intermediate point is in a straight line. Positioning from the intermediate point to the zero point is carried out independently for each axis. With the G29 command, positioning to the intermediate point is also carried out independently for each axis. However, drawings using program checking are always drawn with straight lines, even when returning via the intermediate point. Thus, the path will differ partially from the trace display.

X in G53 basic machine coordinate system.

G28 path with trace display

1st zero point

#1

Movement to intermediate point by G29

G28 zero point return

G29 path with trace display

Movement to intermediate point by G28

Intermediate point

G29 command positioning movement

(5) Handling of variables, parameters and compensation amounts All the various data in program checking is handled in the same manner as when all operations are

executed.

Saving data before the checking start Explanation

Parameters Not possible Input commands executed in program checking are set as actual data.

Workpiece offset

Not possible Same as above.

Common variable

Not possible Same as above.

Local variable

Not possible Same as above.

Tool compensation amount

Not possible Same as above.

9. Graphics 9.4 Use of the Check Modes

I-358

(6) Precautions

(1) If menu key

STANDARD or

SCALE is selected during drawing in trace or check mode, the drawing is interrupted. The drawing resumes when the selected function is finished.

In trace mode, the part that would be drawn during the interruption is not drawn. (2) In trace or check mode, drawing will continue even if the screen changed to other function screens. (3) All graphics are erased if the function key

F0 is pressed. The trace and check modes are also cleared.

(4) In check mode, machine operation switches such as external mirror image are validated only if set before starting a check.

(5) If the automatic start button is pressed during checking, "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0112" will occur while the button is held down, and automatic start will not be possible. Press the automatic start button after the message "PROGRAM CHECK END" has been displayed or the operation has been canceled by reset.

(6) If a check search or check start is attempted during automatic start or automatic operation pause, operation alarm "PROGRAM RUNNING" will occur, and the search or start will not be possible.

(7) Drawings in the check function are made only according to the NC internal operation results, so drawing is not possible for commands requiring machine movement.

(8) The various data set during checking and in the program are handled as follows: 1) Workpiece offset, common variables and local variables Data before checking is not saved. 2) Tool compensation amounts Data before checking is not saved. 3) Parameters Data before checking is not saved. (9) Checking finish 1) Execution of an M00/M01 command causes "PROGRAM STOP". (Note) When M01 is executed, drawing will stop regardless of whether the optional stop switch

signal is ON or OFF. 2) Execution of an M02/M03 command causes "PROGRAM CHECK END". (Note) The tape is not rewound in the tape mode. 3) The checking is terminated by resetting, pressing

TRACE , or pressing

F0 . (Note) If a program error occurs, cancel the error by one of the operations above. (10) If the mode is changed to the manual operation during the checking, "M01 OPERATION ERROR

0112" will occur and the axis movement will be disabled. End the checking with reset before moving the axis.

(11) If the PLC interruption is commanded during the checking, "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0112" will occur. End the checking with reset before executing the PLC interruption.

(12) If the tap retract is attempted during the checking, "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0112" will occur. Cancel the checking with reset before executing the tap retract.

(13) Neither the counter set nor the origin set can be executed during the checking. If an axis address key is pressed on the POSITION screen, "E69 PROG. CHECK MODE" will occur.

(14) Before returning to the top to restart the checking, cancel the program check in execution with reset. Do not restart the continuous check during the execution (before the "PROGRAM CHECK END" is displayed).

9. Graphics 9.5 GRF MODE

I-359

9.5 GRF MODE (

GRF MODE )

(1) GRF mode types There are three types of GRF modes: 1-plane, 2-plane and 3-dimensional. The axes of each plane or

solid object can be randomly designated. (2) Setting the GRF mode

GRF MODE ( )

Press the menu key

GRF MODE .

1) The "GRF MODE" setting area appears. 2) Directly set the axis names according to

the following examples.

(Example 1) Setting the 1-plane display mode Set the horizontal and vertical axis names in order, and press the

INPUT key.

X

Press the

INPUT key.

1) When the GRF mode changes over, all already drawn graphics are erased, and the new coordinate axes, etc., appear.

Set the GRF mode. (Example) GRF mode (

X

Y )

Y

(Example 2) Setting the 2-plane display mode (M system only) Set the horizontal and vertical axis names of the upper plane and those of the lower plane in

order, and press the

INPUT key. Designate a common name for the horizontal axes of the upper and lower planes.

X

Press the

INPUT key.

1) When the GRF mode changes over, all already drawn graphics are erased, and the new coordinate axes, etc., appear.

Set the GRF mode. (Example) GRF mode

(

X

Y

X

Z )

Z

Y

9. Graphics 9.5 GRF MODE

I-360

(Example 3) Setting the 3-dimensional display mode (M system only)

Press the

INPUT key.

1) When the GRF mode changes over, all already drawn graphics are erased, and the new coordinate axes, etc., appear.

Set the 3-dimensional display mode. (Example) GRF mode

(

X

Y

Z )

XY

Z

9. Graphics 9.6 SCALE

I-361

9.6 SCALE (

SCALE ) The size and position of the graphics drawn on the GRAPHIC screen can be changed. 9.6.1 Changing the Scale

X SCALE0 300.000

Y

Press the menu key

SCALE .

1) SCALE appears in the lower right portion of the screen. The current scale value appears.

2) The cursor indicates the center of the screen.

X SCALE0 285.600

1) The scale value is decremented. 2) The frame indicating the display range

according to the set scale value is displayed with a solid line.

To enlarge the graphics, press the

key to decrement the scale value.

Y

X SCALE0 314.160

1) The scale value is incremented. 2) The frame indicating the reduced size

of the current display range according to the set scale value is displayed with a chain line.

To reduce the graphics, press the

key to increment the scale value.

Y

X

1) All already drawn graphics (if present) are erased.

Y

Press the

INPUT key.

9. Graphics 9.6 SCALE

I-362

(Note 1) The scale value is incremented/decremented by approx. 5% each time the

or

key is pressed.

(Note 2) The scale value can be changed in the range of 0.100 to 9999.999. 9.6.2 Changing the Display Position To move the drawing position, either designate the center of the display range using the cursor key, or use

the current tool position as the center of the display range using the

C.B CAN key.

(1) Designating the display range center

X SCALE0 300.000

Y

Press the menu key

SCALE .

1) The cursor indicating the display range center appears.

X SCALE0 300.000

Move the cursor to the required display center position using the cursor keys

,

,

,

. Y

X

Press the

INPUT key.

1) The coordinate system changes to the new coordinate system (having the cursor position as the screen center).

2) All already drawn graphics (if present) are erased, and the screen returns to the initial screen.

Y

(Note 1) The amount the center moves for one cursor shift varies depending on the current scale value.

9. Graphics 9.6 SCALE

I-363

(2) Using the tool position as the display range center

For example, assume that the tool mark is not in the screen center, and a drawing is made as shown at the right.

TRACE EXECUTION

Press the keys

SHIFT and

C.B CAN .

TRACE EXECUTION

1) The tool mark appears in the screen center.

2) If the message "TRACE EXECUTION" appears, consecutive drawing is made. (Note)

SHIFT +

C.B CAN function

This function displays the current machine position in the screen center.

1) This operation cannot be carried out while any one of SCALE, GRF MODE, ROTATION, or CHECK SEARCH is valid.

2) The machine position is not moved in program check mode, even if drawing is carried out. Therefore, the tool center cannot be displayed in the center of the screen, even with the above key operation.

3) However, both the drawing and machine position move in the trace mode, so the tool center can be displayed in the center of the screen with the above key operation.

(Example) Changing the scale and display position simultaneously

To enlarge the graphics (shown at the right) in the screen center, carry out the following operations:

TRACE EXECUTION

9. Graphics 9.6 SCALE

I-364

SCALE0 300.000

Press the menu key

SCALE .

Using the cursor shift keys, move the cursor near the graphics center.

SCALE0 300.000

Using the

key, fully enclose the graphics within the frame.

SCALE0 42.840

TRACE EXECUTION

Using the

INPUT key, fully enclose the graphics within the frame.

9. Graphics 9.6 SCALE

I-365

Draw the graphics again with the same program.

TRACE EXECUTION

(3) Changing the scale and display position during the 2-plane display mode 1-plane and 3-dimensional display modes are as explained before, but in the 2-plane display mode the

display positions of the upper and lower planes can be changed separately. Although the scale of either plane can be changed in the 2-plane display mode, the same scale is always

applied to the upper and lower planes. Similarly, the horizontal axis can also be changed on either plane.

X

Z

Y

Changeover between upper and lower planes

Press the menu key

SCALE .

1) The cursor indicating the center appears in the center of the lower plane. The lower plane display range can now be changed.

2) The method for changing the scale and display position is the same as for 1-plane and 3-dimensional display described above.

X SCALE0 300.000

Z

Y

1) The cursor moves to the upper plane. The upper plane display range can now be changed.

X SCALE0 300.000

Z

Y

Press the menu key

SCALE again.

9. Graphics 9.7 STANDARD

I-366

9.7 STANDARD (

STANDARD )

When the menu key

STANDARD is pressed, the machine's moveable range determined in setup parameters OT+ and OT (stored stroke limit range) becomes the display range. The scale and display position are automatically changed. This function is useful if the drawing graphics abnormally shift out of the screen.

TRACE EXECUTION

For example, assume the tool mark disappears from the screen during drawing.

Press the menu key

STANDARD .

TRACE EXECUTION

1) The display range is changed. 2) All already drawn graphics (if present)

are erased, and a new drawing starts in the changed display range.

9. Graphics 9.8 ROTATION

I-367

9.8 ROTATION (

ROTATION ) (M system) A 3-dimensional display can be rotated in any direction.

X Z

Y

X Z

Y

Press the menu key

ROTATION .

X Z

Y

Rotate the cube using the cursor keys

,

,

,

. For example, press the

key to rotate the cube as shown in the figure at the right.

X Z

Y

Press the

INPUT key, or press the

ROTATION key again.

1) All already drawn graphics (if present) are erased.

9. Graphics 9.9 ERASE

I-368

9.9 ERASE (

ERASE )

When the menu key

ERASE is pressed, graphics drawn with the trace mode and program check mode can be deleted.

1) All already drawn graphics are deleted.

Press the menu key

ERASE .

(Note 1) When graphics are deleted in the trace mode, drawing begins after completion of the deletion.

9. Graphics 9.10 PROGRAM

I-369

9.10 PROGRAM (

PROGRAM )

When the menu key

PROGRAM is pressed, the details of the program being drawn can be displayed. If these are not required, press the

PROGRAM key again and the details will disappear.

O 1000 N20-0 TESTFILES

O 1000 N20-0 TESTFILES

G28X0Y0Z0;

G81G98X-100.;

Press the menu key

PROGRAM .

1) The No., comments and machining program details of the program being executed appear.

10. Ladder Circuit Monitor 10.1 Parameter Setting

I-370

10. Ladder Circuit Monitor [for PLC built-in specification only] By pressing the function selection key

F0 , the menu key

LADDER appears and the sequence circuit operation status can be confirmed.

The following monitor functions are available: (1) Circuit monitor (2) Screen stop using a monitor stop trigger point (3) Registration monitor (4) Current value monitoring changeover between decimal notation and hexadecimal notation 10.1 Parameter Setting Parameter setting for the ladder circuit monitor function is carried on the PLC parameter BIT SELECT screen. The ladder circuit monitor can be selected by turning the "Onboard valid" parameter ON. When GX-Developer communication is valid, the on-board screen will not appear and the ladder circuit

monitor cannot be used.

[PLC bit selection]

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

# (6451) Data (0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1) 1: Onboard valid 1: GX Developer mode

0: GX Developer communication invalid This function is used for user PLC development. Refer to the PLC Onboard Instruction Manual (BNP-B2213) for details.

11. Visual Analyzer (Waveform display)

I-371

11. Visual Analyzer (Waveform display)

Pressing the function selection key

F0 displays the VISUAL ANALYZER screen. On this screen, changes in the spindle and servo operation status can be displayed in time units simultaneously for both channels. During synchronous tap, the difference of the spindle and tap axis position deviation (synchronous error amount) can be displayed as a waveform. The waveform data can be output. Refer to section "6.2.6 Outputting Waveform Data" for details.

(Note) The VISUAL ANALYZER screen is valid when the setup parameter "#1222 aux06/bit2" is set to 1.

SINGLE AUTO DISPLAY

[VISUAL ANALYZER] VISUAL ANALYZER 1. #1 time (1000)

(ms/div) 5 2 CH1 ax (X1) 3 data (1) 4 range ( 100) 5 level (0) 6 CH2 ax ( ) 0 7 data ( ) 8 range ( ) 9 level ( ) 10 type ( ) 11 signal ( ) -5 #( )data( )( )

# Parameter Description Setting range (units)

1 time (ms/div) Specify the unit of a time axis (horizontal axis) gradation in milli-second (ms).

1 to 9999

2 CH1 ax Specify the name of the axis to be displayed for CH1. No waveform data is displayed if ( ) is left blank. Input "/" to erase the displayed waveform.

Servo axis: Axis name [2 characters] (X1, Y1, Z1, etc.)

Spindle: S1 to S4 (Just S is sufficient for the first spindle.)

"/" will cancel the axis name.

11. Visual Analyzer (Waveform display)

I-372

# Parameter Description Setting range (units)

3 data Specify data to be sampled. (Servo axis) (Spindle)

1 to 7

1: Current FB (%) 2: Current command (%)

3: Position deviation (m) 4: Position command (m) 5: Speed FB (r/min)

1: Motor load (%) 2: Motor rotation speed

(speed command value) (r/min)

3: Position deviation (m) 4: Position command (m) 5: Srpm (speed FB) (r/min) 6: Synchronous error

width (m) 7: Synchronous error

angle (0.001)

The position command and deviation and synchronous tap error width are displayed with an mm unit even when inch specifications are set.

4 range Specify the size of the vertical axis. That is, specify the size of six gradations equivalent to the half of the screen. (Example 1) In case of current FB

When #4= 400, the upper half of the screen is 400% and the lower half of the screen is 400%.

(Example 2) In case of position deviation When #4= 18000, 18,000m (18mm)

(Example 3) In case of synchronous error width (m) When #4 = 6000, the scale increment for the vertical axis will be 1mm (1000m).

(Example 4) In case of synchronous error angle (0.001) When #4 = 6000, the scale increment for the vertical axis will be 1.

1 to 99999

5 level Specify the position of level 0 on the vertical axis. That is, specify the position of the current and speed 0 level on the scale. In the case of a position command or position deviation, the display start position is displayed at the specified gradation.

6 to 6

6 CH2 ax Specify the name of the axis to be displayed for CH2. No waveform data is displayed if ( ) is left blank. Input "/" to erase the displayed waveform.

Refer to the setting range for "#2 CH1 axis".

7 data Refer to "#3 data". (#7 is used for CH2.) 1 to 7 8 range Refer to "#4 range". (#8 is used for CH2.) 1 to 99999 9 level Refer to "#5 level". (#9 is used for CH2.) 6 to 6

10 type Specify the condition to stop waveform display in continuous mode.

0: Continuous menu OFF 2: #11 signal ON 3: #11 signal OFF

Display will stop when the continuous menu is turned OFF regardless of the stopping conditions.

0, 2, 3

11 signal Specify the stop signal name in hexadecimal number preceded by X or Y.

X00 to XFF Y00 to YFF

(Note 1) Only the servo axis name set in "#1022 axname2" can be set in #2 and #6. (Note 2) Only bus connected spindle (#3024 sout=1) can be set in #2 and #6.

11. Visual Analyzer (Waveform display)

11.1 Menu Function

I-373

11.1 Menu Function

Menu Function

SINGLE When menu key

SINGLE is pressed, data is collected and displayed for "#1 setting value 12 scale [ms]".

AUTO When menu key

AUTO is pressed, data is continuously collected and displayed.

DISPLAY The waveform data last page is displayed.

(Note 1) For continuous waveform display, the waveform display stop condition can be selected using

#10. (Note 2) To refer to data exceeding one screen with the continuous waveform display, press the menu

key

AUTO to stop the waveform display, and then press the page key. (Note 3) The parameter settings cannot be changed during continuous waveform display. Stop waveform

display and change them. (Note 4) The data for up to 4226 points can be retrieved for the waveform data. If data exceeding 4226

points is retrieved, the data will be deleted from the oldest data.

11. Visual Analyzer (Waveform display)

11.2 Synchronous Tap Error Display

I-374

11.2 Synchronous Tap Error Display

To display the error amount during synchronous tap, set either "6" or "7" in "#3 data" or "#7 data" and display the waveform. The operation methods and other setting items are the same as the normal waveform display.

SINGLE AUTO DISPLAY

[VISUAL ANALYZER] VISUAL ANALYZER 1. SYNCH ERR W (mm) 0.006 SYNCH ERR ANG (deg) 2.564 #1 time (1000)

(ms/div) 5 2 CH1 ax ( 1) 3 data (6) 4 range ( 6) 5 level (2) 6 CH2 ax ( 1) 0 7 data (7) 8 range ( 6000) 9 level (-4) 10 type ( ) 11 signal ( ) -5 #( )data( )( )

(Note 1) With the synchronous tap error display, only the waveform during cutting feed is displayed. (Note 2) Data displayed in "SYNCH ERR W (mm)" and "SYNCH ERR ANG (deg)" on the screen indicates

the maximum value of the synchronous tap error width obtained from the data displayed as a waveform.

(Note 3) The "SYNCH ERR W (mm)" is indicated as a value that allows for the gear ratio. (Note 4) The "SYNCH ERR W (mm)" and "SYNCH ERR ANG (deg)" are displayed on the screen only

when the spindle No. is set in "#2 CH1 axis" (or #6 CH2 axis), and 6 (synchronous tap error width) or 7 (synchronous tap error angle) is set in "#3 data" (or #7 data).

II. MACHINE OPERATION MANUAL

II. MACHINE OPERATION MANUAL

II-1

This chapter explains the functions and operation method of the machine operation switches for operation (automatic operation and manual operation) by using the illustration of the machine operation panel. The actual machine operation and motion vary from one minute to another. Refer to the operation manual issued by the machine manufacturer. Use this chapter for reference.

140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0

MDI

MODE SELECT MEMORY

100 50

1

25

% %

SPINDLE OVERRIDE

%

50 FEED HOLD

EMERGENCY STOP

REFERENCE POINT

X Y Z 4

FEED AXIS SELECT

+X

-X

+Y

-Y

+Z

-Z

+4

-4

RESET

X Y Z

4

HANDLE/INCREMENTAL MAGNIFICATION

10 10000

1 1

100 50000 1000 100000

mm/min

HANDLE

0 0 + -

CONTROL UNIT READY

IN AUTO OPERATION

ALARM M00 M02 M30 DRY RUN

PLAYBACK

RAPID TRAVERSE

REFERENCE POINT RETURN

JOG

TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

DETECT ERROR

OVERRIDE CANCEL

MANUAL OVERRIDE

MANUAL ABSOLUTE

HANDLE INTERRUPT

OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP

OPTIONAL STOP

HANDLE FEED AXIS SELECTION

RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE

FEED RATE OVERRIDE MANUAL FEED RATE

10 10

100 100

1000 1000

1 5000

150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300

72.0 52.0 31.0 21.0 20.0 14.0 10.0 7.2 6.2 3.7 2.7 2.0 1.4 1.0 0

140. 0 200. 0 270. 0 370. 0 520. 0 720.0 1000.0 1400.0 2000.0 2700.0 3700.0 5200.0 7200.0 10000.0 14000.0

100

CYCLE START HANDLE

TAPE

INCREMENTAL

60

70 80 90

100

110

120

0 1 1 0 1 0 7 2

SINGLE BLOCK

MISCELLA- NEOUS FUNCTION LOCK

CANCEL Z LOCK

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

1. Operation State 1.1 Operation State Transition Diagram

II-2

1. Operation State 1.1 Operation State Transition Diagram The controller operation state changes momentarily according to the program contents or signals from the

operation panel or machine. The controller roughly classifies the operation state into power OFF, not ready, and ready.

Operation is enabled only in the operating preparation ready state. The operating preparation ready state is furthermore classified into reset, automatic operation stop, automatic operation start, and automatic operation pause as shown below:

Manual mode operation is enabled in the operation complete state.

Block stop

Input

Power OFF state 1)

Power OFF 2) Power ON

Operations not ready state Waiting for READY ON Failure in operating preparations (Emergency stop)

4)READY ON 4) Problem is resolved

Operations not ready state 5)

Reset operations

In automatic operations

Automatic operation is stopped

Feed hold 7) 6) Automatic operation is started

Automatic operation in progress

6)8) Automatic operation is started

Automatic operation is stopped

6) Start

M02/30

Reset process

Reset 5)

Finished process- ing

Automatic operation not ready state

Resolve problem that caused emergency stop 5)

Reset operations

CRT operations (Machinery preparation)

Searching unmodal Completed

[During operation of the above, automatic start is not possible.]

3) Emergency stop

Operation state transition diagram 1.2 Power OFF The power OFF state means that no power is supplied to the control circuit. (1) From any other state to power OFF (transition 1)) When POWER OFF signal is input from the machine; When power supplied from the machine to controller is turned OFF; or When power unit fuse in the controller blows.

1. Operation State 1.3 Run Not Ready

II-3

1.3 Run Not Ready The operation preparation not ready state means that the system is not ready to run because of the

controller or because of the machine, even though power is supplied to the NC unit is control circuit. The RUN READY lamp on the setting and display unit is OFF.

(1) From power OFF to not ready (transition 2)) When POWER ON signal is input from the machine. (2) From ready to not ready (transition 3)) When EMG (emergency stop) is displayed on the setting and display unit; or When any of the following alarms is displayed on the setting and display unit; Servo alarm, feedback alarm, excessive error alarm, watch dog, MCP alarm. 1.4 Ready The operating preparation ready state means that power is supplied to the NC unit control circuit and the

system is ready to run. The READY lamp on the setting and display unit is ON. The state is furthermore classified into the following four: 1.4.1 Reset The reset state means that the controller is reset. (1) From not ready to reset (transition 2)) This state is also called initial state. When about four seconds have passed after the power is turned ON. (2) From another ready state to reset (transition 5)) When the RESET key on the setting and display unit is turned ON; When external reset signal is input from the machine; or When M02 or M30 is executed (depending on the machine specifications). 1.4.2 Automatic Operation Start The automatic operation start state means starting in automatic mode. The IN-AUTO OPERATION lamp on

the machine operation panel is ON. (1) From another ready state to automatic operation start (transition 6)) When the CYCLE START switch on the machine operation panel is pressed in automatic mode.

CAUTION

Stay out of the moveable range of the machine during automatic operation. During rotation, keep hands, feet and face away from the spindle.

1. Operation State 1.4 Ready

II-4

1.4.3 Automatic Operation Pause The automatic operation pause state means that operation or motion temporarily pauses during execution of

one block during the automatic operation start. The AUTO PAUSE lamp on the machine operation panel is ON and the AUTO START lamp is OFF.

(1) From automatic operation start to automatic pause (transition 7)) When the FEED HOLD switch on the machine operation panel is turned ON; or When automatic mode input is out. 1.4.4 Automatic Operation Stop The automatic operation stop state means that execution of one block is completed and stopped during

automatic operation start. Both the AUTO START and AUTO PAUSE lamps on the machine operation panel are OFF.

(1) From automatic operation start to automatic operation stop (transition 8)) When the SINGLE BLOCK switch on the machine operation panel is turned ON and execution of the

block is complete; or When automatic mode input is changed to another automatic mode input. 2. Indicator Lamps 2.1 Control Unit Ready The CONTROL UNIT READY lamp indicates that the control unit is ready to run. It goes ON in about one

second after the power is turned ON. The lamp goes OFF at emergency stop or when an alarm occurs in the drive or operation block.

2.2 Automatic Operation Busy The AUTO BUSY lamp is ON from CYCLE START switch turning ON in the automatic operation mode

(memory, tape, or MDI) to the program end after M02 or M30 execution, reset, or emergency stop. 2.3 Automatic Operation Start Busy The AUTO START BUSY lamp indicates that the controller is executing control in the automatic operation

mode. It is ON from the automatic operation start state entered when the CYCLE START switch is pressed in the automatic operation mode (tape, memory, or MDI) to the automatic operation start end such as the automatic operation pause busy state entered when the FEED HOLD switch is pressed or block completion stop (block stop).

2.4 Automatic Operation Pause Busy The AUTO PAUSE lamp is ON from AUTO PAUSE switch turning on to AUTO START switch turning ON or

when the mode selection switch is changed from the automatic to manual mode during the automatic operation.

2. Indicator Lamps 2.5 Return to Reference Position

II-5

2.5 Return to Reference Position Output is executed when the controlled axis arrives at the reference position when manual return to

reference position, automatic return to reference position, or reference position collation (check). 2.6 Alarm The ALARM lamp goes ON when an alarm occurs during NC running. 2.7 M00 If M00 given in a program is executed during automatic operation, automatic operation stop is performed after

execution of the M00 block is completed. The M00 lamp is turned ON. (This depends on PLC processing.) 2.8 M02/M30 When M02 or M30 is executed during automatic operation, the NC unit reaches the program end and the

M02 or M30 lamp is turned ON. (This depends on PLC processing.)

3. Reset Switch and Emergency Stop Button 3.1 Reset Switch

II-6

3. Reset Switch and Emergency Stop Button 3.1 Reset Switch The controller is reset by turning ON the RESET switch on the machine operation panel or the RESET key

on the setting and display unit. When the RESET switch or key is turned ON while the controller is running, the unit is placed in one of the following states.

(1) If a move command is being executed, move stops with deceleration and the remaining distance in the executing block is cleared.

(2) If miscellaneous function such as M, S, or T is being executed, execution of the miscellaneous function is interrupted.

(3) The active and buffer memory contents and display are cleared. (4) If a program error occurs and remains, the program error state is cleared and the ALARM lamp goes

OFF. (5) If the reset switch is turned ON while the input/output device is running, the power will be cut off. (6) When the reset switch is turned ON, the modal state will return to its original state. 3.2 Emergency Stop Button The EMERGENCY STOP button is a red mushroom-shape pushbutton. The unready state is set by

pressing the EMERGENCY STOP button. During emergency stop, the READY lamp goes OFF and automatic operation and manual operation do not work. The controller is reset.

If the EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed when a move command is executed, the moving axis stops and all other machine motions also stop.

When the EMERGENCY STOP button is released, the READY lamp goes ON in about one second and operation enable state (READY state) is entered.

When parameter is emergency stop hold type, if the EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed, the emergency stop state is held. To release the emergency stop state, turn ON the RESET switch.

If the EMERGENCY STOP LIMIT switch of each axis works, the same state as if the EMERGENCY STOP button were pressed may be entered depending on the machine specifications.

CAUTION

If the axis overruns or emits an abnormal noise, immediately press the emergency stop button and stop the axis.

4. Operation Mode 4.1 Mode Selection Switch

II-7

4. Operation Mode

(Note ) Do not execute the tap retract simultaneously with the operation in the manual (JOG feed, rapid traverse feed, reference position return, incremental and handle) mode or in the automatic (memory, tape and MDI) mode. The simultaneous operation causes the all axes interlock.

4.1 Mode Selection Switch The MODE SELECT switch is used to determine the controller operation mode.

Jog feed mode: Select the mode to move the controlled axis consecutively at manual feedrate.

Rapid traverse feed mode: Select the mode to move the controlled axis consecutively at rapid traverse feedrate.

Return to reference position mode: Select the mode to position the controlled axis at the machine reference position manually.

Incremental mode: Select the mode to move the controlled axis at a given distance.

MODE SELECT MEMORY

RAPID TRAVERSE JOG

REFERENCE POINT RETURN

MDI

TAPE

HANDLE INCRE- MENTAL

Handle feed mode: Select the mode to move the controlled axis by using the manual handle. Memory Mode: Select the mode for memory operation. Tape mode: Select the mode for tape operation. MDI mode: Select the mode for MDI operation. (Note 1) See 1.4 for the running state when a change is made to another mode during automatic

operation. 4.2 Jog Feed Mode The jog feed mode enables the machine to be moved consecutively at the feedrate set by using the

MANUAL FEED RATE switch manually. The jog feed mode is started by using the FEED AXIS SELECT switch.

See Section 5 for the MANUAL FEED RATE switch. Operation procedure

Using the MODE SELECT switch, select the jog mode.

Using the MANUAL FEED RATE switch, set the feedrate. The feedrate unit is the travel distance (mm) per minute.

To move the controlled axis, turn on the FEED AXIS SELECT switch. The controlled axis is moved while the switch is turned on. When the switch is turned off, the controlled axis stops with deceleration.

(Note 1) When the MANUAL OVERRIDE switch on the operation panel is turned ON, the override value set

by using the FEED RATE OVERRIDE switch takes precedence over the feedrate set by using the MANUAL FEED RATE switch.

4. Operation Mode 4.3 Rapid Traverse Feed Mode

II-8

4.3 Rapid Traverse Feed Mode The rapid traverse feed mode enables the machine to be moved consecutively at rapid traverse feedrate

manually. The rapid traverse feedrate can be changed in four steps by using the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch.

The rapid traverse feed mode is started by using the FEED AXIS SELECT switch. (Note 1) Refer to the manual issued by the machine maker for the rapid traverse feedrate. (Note 2) See Section 5 for the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch. Operation procedure

Using the MODE SELECT switch, select the rapid traverse feed mode.

Using the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch, set any desired override value.

To move the controlled axis, turn ON the FEED AXIS SELECT switch. The controlled axis is moved while the switch is turned ON. When the switch is turned OFF, the controlled axis stops with deceleration.

(Note 1) The override value set by using the CUTTING FEED OVERRIDE switch is not effective for the

rapid traverse feedrate; when the override value is 0%, the controlled axis does not move.

4. Operation Mode 4.4 Return to Reference Position Mode

II-9

4.4 Return to Reference Position Mode This mode enables a given controlled axis to be returned to the defined position unique to the machine

(reference position) manually. The first return to reference position after the NC power is turned ON becomes the dog mode. In the second

or later return to reference position, the dog mode or high-speed return can be selected by setting a given parameter.

Patterns of return to reference position are shown below.

() (+)

() (+)

To move in + direction To move in direction

Dog

Reference point

When reference point return direction is positive (+)

To move in + direction To move in direction

Dog Reference point

When reference point return direction is negative ()

Dog mode return to reference position The steps below describe what happens to the controlled axis when it returns to the reference point for the

first time with the power ON and with the machine in an "operations not ready state" (emergency stop is engaged or the servo alarm is ON) or when the parameters are selected in the dog mode.

(1) The controlled axis is moved in the direction where the near point detection limit switch and dog approach each other in the return to reference position mode.

(2) When the limit switch kicks the dog, the controlled axis once stops with deceleration. (3) Next, the controlled axis moves to the reference position at the approach rate set in the parameter. (4) When it arrives at the reference position, the reference position arrival signal is output. High-speed return to reference position If high-speed return is set in a given parameter after dog mode return to reference position is executed, then

high-speed return to reference position will be made.

4. Operation Mode 4.4 Return to Reference Position Mode

II-10

If the return direction is erroneous in high-speed return to reference position, an alarm occurs. A return is made to the reference position at the rapid traverse feedrate.

Minus Plus Dog

Reference point Operation procedure

Using the MODE SELECT switch, select the return to reference position.

Using the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch, set any desired override value.

Check the current machine position.

Dog

Spindle head

Z plus

X plus Coordinate system

Minus position Plus position

Plus movement Minus movement Machine table

Limit switch Reference point

The machine position depends on whether the near point detection limit switch is the plus or minus side with the near point dog on the machine table as illustrated above as the reference.

When the limit switch exists on the dog, move to either plus or minus.

Using the FEED AXIS SELECT switch, move the machine. If the limit switch exists in the minus direction as illustrated above, turn ON a plus FEED AXIS SELECT switch.

For dog mode return to reference position, turn ON the FEED AXIS SELECT switch (+ or ) in the direction

where the dog and limit switch approach each other. For high-speed reference point return, turn ON the FEED AXIS SELECT switch (+ or ) in the direction that

the spindle head approaches the reference point. Hold the FEED AXIS SELECT switch ON during return to reference position until the machine passes by the

dog (dog mode) or the REFERENCE POSITION ARRIVAL lamp goes ON (high speed return).

4. Operation Mode 4.5 Incremental Feed Mode

II-11

4.5 Incremental Feed Mode The incremental feed mode enables the controlled axis to be moved at a given distance selected by using the

HANDLE/INCREMENTAL MAGNIFICATION switch at the manual feedrate when the FEED AXIS SELECT switch is ON.

Operation procedure

Using the MODE SELECT switch, select the incremental feed mode.

Using the HANDLE/INCREMENTAL MAGNIFICATION switch set a travel distance.

The controlled axis selected by turning ON the FEED AXIS SELECT switch once is moved at a given distance.

4. Operation Mode 4.6 Handle Feed Mode

II-12

4.6 Handle Feed Mode The controlled axis can be moved by turning the manual handle. The travel distance per graduation of the handle depends on how the HANDLE/INCREMENTAL

MAGNIFICATION switch is set. The axis that can be moved by using the manual handle is determined by setting the HANDLE FEED AXIS

SELECT switch. Operation procedure

Using the MODE SELECT switch, select the handle feed mode.

Using the HANDLE FEED AXIS SELECT switch, select the controlled axis to be moved.

Using the HANDLE/INCREMENTAL MAGNIFICATION switch, set the travel distance per graduation of the handle.

Move the axis by turning the HANDLE in any desired direction.

HANDLE

00 + - 0110

10 72

4. Operation Mode 4.7 Memory Mode

II-13

4.7 Memory Mode In the memory mode, a work program registered in memory is called and automatic operation is executed. Operation procedure

Call the work program for memory operation by using the setting and display unit.

Check whether or not the work program is called normally.

Using the MODE SELECT switch, select the memory mode.

Set any desired override value by using the switch RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE, FEED RATE OVERRIDE, SPINDLE OVERRIDE. Normally, set the value to 100%.

Automatic operation is started by turning ON the CYCLE START switch. The CYCLE START switch becomes effective when it is once turned ON, then OFF.

To temporarily stop machine motion, turn ON the FEED HOLD switch. The controlled axes being moved stop with deceleration.

When machine motion is stopped by using the FEED HOLD switch, automatic operation will be restarted by

turning ON the CYCLE START switch. Memory operation terminates when M02 or M30 in the program is executed. The M02 or M30 lamp on the

machine operator panel is turned ON. To repeat execution of a single program, input the rewind signal by reset & rewind at user PLC. To forcibly terminate automatic operation, turn ON the RESET switch.

CAUTION

Carry out dry run operation before actually machining, and confirm the machining program, tool offset and workpiece coordinate system offset.

4. Operation Mode 4.8 MDI Operation Mode

II-14

4.8 MDI Operation Mode In the MDI operation mode, automatic operation is executed by using a program set on the setting and

display unit MDI screen. Operation procedure

The MDI operation follows the memory operation.

Set data on the setting and display unit MDI screen.

Using the MODE SELECT switch, select the MDI mode.

The following steps are the same as the memory operation steps. Refer to 4.7. (Note 1) When using the 2-part system, the MDI data operation can be switched with the parameters.

#1050 MemPrg Details 0, 2, 4, 6 The common MDI program for the system is run in each system. 1, 3, 5, 7 MDI programs for each system are run in each system.

5. Operation Panel Switches in Operation Mode 5.1 Rapid Traverse Override

II-15

5. Operation Panel Switches in Operation Mode 5.1 Rapid Traverse Override

Use the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch to override the rapid traverse feedrate in automatic or manual operation. RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE is applicable to the following:

Automatic operation: G00, G27, G28, G29, G30 Manual operation: Rapid traverse, return to

reference position, incremental feed

100 50

1

25

%

RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE

5.2 Cutting Feed Override

Use the FEED RATE OVERRIDE switch to override the feedrate in automatic operation (G01, G02, or G03 F command) or the manual feedrate of jog feed in manual operation in 10% units in the range of 0% to 300%. FEED RATE OVERRIDE is also applicable to the dry run rate in automatic operation.

140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0

%

FEED RATE OVERRIDE

150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300

(Note 1) The dry run rate is the movement rate set by using the MANUAL FEED RATE switch by

overriding the programmed feedrate in automatic operation. (Note 2) See Section 6.5 for feedrate override applied to manual feedrate. 5.3 Manual Feedrate Use the MANUAL FEED RATE switch to set the feedrate in jog feed mode during manual operation. The

feedrate can be selected among 31 steps from 0 to 14000.0 mm/min. When the MANUAL OVERRIDE switch (interrupt switch) is turned ON, the override value set by using the

FEED RATE OVERRIDE switch takes precedence over the value set by using the MANUAL FEED RATE switch.

Manual feedrate (mm/min) 0. 7.2 72 720 7200 1.0 10.0 100 1000 10000 1.4 14.0 140 1400 14000 2.0 20.0 200 2000 2.7 27.0 270 2700 3.7 37.0 370 3700 5.2 52.0 520 5200

MANUAL FEED RATE

72.0 52.0 31.0 21.0 20.0 14.0 10.0 7.2 6.2 3.7 2.7 2.0 1.4 1.0 0

140. 0 200. 0 270. 0 370. 0 520. 0 720.0 1000.0 1400.0 2000.0 2700.0 3700.0 5200.0 7200.0 10000.0 14000.0

100

5. Operation Panel Switches in Operation Mode 5.4 Handle/Incremental Feed Magnification Factor

II-16

5.4 Handle/Incremental Feed Magnification Factor Use the HANDLE/INCREMENTAL MAGNIFICATION switch to set the travel distance specified when manual

handle feed or incremental feed is made. The travel distances for each axis are listed below: (Up to 1000 can be set for handle feed.)

Handle Incremental 1 1 10 10 100 100 1000 1000 1 5000 10 10000 100 50000 1000 100000

HANDLE/ INCREMENTL MAGNIFICATION

10 10000

1 1

100 50000 1000 100000

10 10

100 100

1000 1000

1 5000

5.5 Handle Feed Axis Selection

Use the HANDLE FEED AXIS SELECT switch to select the axis moved by handle operation when the handle mode is selected.

X Y Z

4

HANDLE FEED AXIS SELECT

5.6 Manual Pulse Generator

In the manual handle mode, fine feed of the machine can be made by turning the manual pulse generator. The manual pulse generator has 100 graduations per revolution and outputs one pulse per graduation. The travel distance per pulse is set by using the HANDLE/ INCREMENTAL MAGNIFICATION switch.

HANDLE

00 +- 0 110 10

72

5. Operation Panel Switches in Operation Mode 5.7 Cycle Start and Feed Hold

II-17

5.7 Cycle Start and Feed Hold

Use the CYCLE START switch to start automatic operation (memory, tape, or MDI). Automatic operation is executed by turning ON the switch. Use also the switch for restart from stop by the FEED HOLD switch or the automatic operation stop state.

FEED HOLD CYCLE START

The CYCLE START switch becomes effective when the switch is turned ON, then OFF. Use the FEED HOLD switch to temporarily stop automatic operation (for example, deceleration stop of the

control axis during automatic operation). To restart operation, use the CYCLE START switch. 5.8 Feed Axis Selection

Use the FEED AXIS SELECT switch to start the controlled axis during manual operation. While the FEED AXIS SELECT switch is held ON, the selected controlled axis is moved. When the switch is turned OFF, the controlled axis move stops.

FEED AXIS SELECT +X

-X

+Y

-Y

+Z

-Z

+4

-4

6. Operation Panel Switch Functions 6.1 Chamfering

II-18

6. Operation Panel Switch Functions 6.1 Chamfering Chamfering can be validated/invalidated in the thread cutting cycle using an external switch. 6.2 Miscellaneous Function Lock (1) M, S, T, or B function execution can be ignored by turning ON the MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION LOCK

switch. (2) M, S, T, B function BCD output is made, but the start signal is not output. (3) If the MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION LOCK switch is changed during command execution, automatic

operation stops after the block being executed is terminated. Then, it becomes effective. 6.3 Single Block (1) When the SINGLE BLOCK switch is turned ON, automatic operation stops after the block being

executed is terminated. That is, automatic operation stops after one program block is executed. (2) The single block stop point in the fixed cycle mode is fixed according to the fixed cycle. 6.4 Dry Run (1) When the DRY RUN switch is turned ON, the feedrate set by using the MANUAL FEED RATE switch

takes precedence over the programmed feedrate (F). 6.5 Manual Override (1) When the MANUAL OVERRIDE switch is turned ON, the override value set by using the FEED

OVERRIDE switch takes precedence over the value set by using the MANUAL FEED RATE switch. (2) The override value also takes precedence over the dry run during automatic operation. (3) Manual override becomes effective immediately when the switch is turned ON.

6. Operation Panel Switch Functions 6.6 Override Cancel

II-19

6.6 Override Cancel (1) When the OVERRIDE CANCEL switch is turned ON, the programmed F command value takes

precedence over the override value set by using the FEED RATE OVERRIDE switch. (2) It is not effective for manual override. 6.7 Optional Stop (1) If M01 is programmed, the machine automatically stops by turning ON the OPTIONAL STOP switch.

When the switch is OFF, M01 is ignored and the machine does not stop. (2) The machine stops after the M01 block is executed. 6.8 Optional Block Skip When the OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP switch is turned ON, a block which begins with a slash ( / ) is skipped;

when the switch is OFF, the block is executed. This enables the operator to specify whether or not a block beginning with a slash ( / ) code is executed.

(Example) To work two parts as illustrated below, if the following program is prepared and work is made by turning ON the OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP switch, part (1) is provided; if work is made by turning OFF the switch, part (2) is provided:

Program N1G54 ; N2G90G81X50. Z-20. R3. F100 ; /N3X30. ; N4X10. ; N5G80 ; M02 ;

N4N4 N2 N3 N2

Part (1) Switch ON

Part (2) Switch OFF

6. Operation Panel Switch Functions 6.9 Manual Absolute

II-20

6.9 Manual Absolute When the MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch is turned ON, the program coordinate system is updated by manual

tool move distance. If the switch is OFF, the program coordinate system is updated by manual tool move distance.

W

-Y

X

When MANUAL ABSOLUTE Switch Is ON

Passes through the same path as program.

Path after manual interrupt

(Program coordinate system is updated by tool move distance.)

Manual interrupt

Path on program (absolute command)

Feed hold stop

W

-Y

X

When MANUAL ABSOLUTE Switch Is OFF

Path is shifted by manual interrupt value. (Origin (zero) is moved.)

Path after manual interrrupt

(Program coordinate system is not updated.) Manual interrupt

Path on program (absolute command) Feed hold stop

6. Operation Panel Switch Functions 6.10 Error Detect

II-21

6.10 Error Detect For positioning (G00), machine deceleration check is made before next block move is started. For cutting

(G01, G02, or G03), the next block is started before the machine reaches the move command end point. Thus, the corner part is slightly rounded.

To prevent rounded corners, turn ON the error detect signal. This will cause the machine to decelerate until the remaining distance falls below the value of the parameter. The next block command is stopped during this time.

This function is equivalent to G09 in the program. The parameter that is used by the error detect switch and the G09 command for determining the remaining

distance after deceleration for moving to the next command can be set with the settings monitor device.

X axis command

Y axis command

Y axis command

Error detect off

Error detect on

6.11 Follow-up Function The follow-up function monitors machine motion in the emergency stop state and reflects it in the current

position and workpiece coordinates. Thus, the work program can be continued without again making return to reference position after emergency stop.

6.12 Axis Removal When the machine receives the axis removal signal, that axis no longer becomes the controlled axis.

Accordingly, the alarm for the stroke end axis and the servo alarms (excessive errors, lack of signal, drive alarm, etc.) will be ignored. At the same time, the axis will become interlocked.

(Note) This cannot be used for the absolute position detector specification axis. 6.13 Manual/Automatic Synchronous Feed While you are using the automatic operation in the automatic operation mode, you can simultaneously

operate the machine manually (jog, return to reference point, incremental feed, handle). To select the manual mode and automatic mode, refer to the machine's instruction manual.

6. Operation Panel Switch Functions 6.14 Handle Interruption

II-22

6.14 Handle Interruption 6.14.1 Outline Section 6.14 explains automatic handle interruption, which enables the operator to interrupt movement using

the manual handle in automatic modes (tape, memory, MDI).

Tool

Workpiece

Automatic feed

Handle feed

G01 Z __ F X __ Y __ ; X __ Y __ ; X __ Y __ ;

100 10

1

Z Y

X

Overlaid feed locus of automatic feed and handle feed

Interrupt

6.14.2 Interruptible Conditions (1) The automatic handle interrupt function allows you to interrupt the program manually by selecting the

manual handle mode in automatic mode selection (tape, memory, MDI, etc.). However the interrupt cannot be generated from the manual handle when an automatic reference point return command (G28, G29, G30), the thread cutting (G33), or the skip command (G31) has been executed or when tapping in the tapping cycle.

(2) If automatic operation mode such as tape, memory, or MDI is being selected even when an automatic operation pause (including a block stop) is established, automatic handle interruption is enabled.

(3) If the axis is moved during dwell (G04) command processing by using automatic handle interruption, the dwell count operation will stop. A check is made for that the axis movement has been completed, then the dwell count operation continues.

(4) Automatic handle interruption is enabled even if automatic machine lock has been set. If manual machine lock has been set, the machine does not move; it only updates the POSITION display. If manual machine lock has not been set, the machine moves by the interruption distance by the manual handle and the POSITION display is updated.

(5) This function is disabled for an axis to which the interlock signal has been input or an axis, the interruption direction of which is the soft limit.

6.14.3 Interruption Effective Axis (1) Automatic handle interruption is enabled only for axes to which manual handle axis selection has been

input. (2) Automatic handle interruption is enabled for a maximum of three axes. (The number of axes is

restricted by the number of handles.)

6. Operation Panel Switch Functions 6.14 Handle Interruption

II-23

6.14.4 Axis Movement Speed Resulting from Interruption (1) The movement speed of the axis for which handle interruption is executed, may exceed the rapid

traverse feed rate during rapid traverse feed command (G00) processing in automatic start. To prevent this, clamp the axis. (The movement speed equals Automatic-start movement speed + Speed resulting from manual handle interruption.)

(2) The movement speed of the axis for which handle interruption is executed, may exceed the cutting feed speed during cutting feed command (G01, G02, G03) processing in automatic start. To prevent this, clamp the axis. (The movement speed equals Automatic start movement speed + Speed resulting from manual handle interruption.)

(3) If, during automatic start, manual handle interruption is executed, in the same direction, for the axis that is moving at an external decelerating speed, the axis movement speed may exceed the external decelerating speed. To prevent this, clamp the axis. (The movement speed equals Automatic start movement speed + Speed resulting from manual handle interruption.)

(4) If an attempt is made to execute interruption at a speed exceeding the clamp speed, the reading on the handle scale does not match the distance of interruption.

(5) The handle scale factor depends on the selected input of the manual handle/step scale factor.

6. Operation Panel Switch Functions 6.14 Handle Interruption

II-24

6.14.5 Path Resulting after Handle Interruption (1) For incremental value (G91) mode The locus deviates from the program path by the distance of interruption. (See the figure below.)

Program path (G91 X_ Y_;)

Distance of interruption by manual handle

Path after interruption

Path after interruption (Incremental value mode)

(2) For absolute value (G90) mode If program absolute value update by the distance of handle interruption is disabled, the locus deviates

from the program path by the distance of interruption. If this update is enabled, the locus returns to the program path during processing of the following

command: For single block running Return command is issued in the block next to the one for which the

interruption has been completed. For continuous running Return command is issued in the third block, if the block for which the

interruption has been completed is the first block. (Note) Each of the POSITION and MACHINE display includes the distance of handle interruption. For automatic handle interruption, select whether absolute data is updated or not, as follows: 1) Using machine parameters, set whether the manual absolute changeover switch or parameters

are used. 2) If the parameters are used, set whether or not absolute data is updated for each axis, by using

machine parameters other than those in item. 3) If the manual absolute changeover switch is used, use the machine operation panel switch for

selection.

6. Operation Panel Switch Functions 6.14 Handle Interruption

II-25

Absolute value update conditions for automatic handle interruption

Absolute data update MONITOR 2 screen manual interruption

distance display ON "1"

Absolute value is updated. Not updated. Parameter #1145

I_abs

ON "1"

Parameter #1061 intabs (Every axis) OFF

"0" Absolute value is not updated. Updated.

ON Absolute value is updated. Not updated.

OFF "0"

PLC interface manual absolute switching OFF Absolute value is not

updated. Updated.

Program path (G90 X_ Y_;)

Distance of interruption by manual handle

Path after interruption

Path after interruption (Absolute value mode, program absolute value update invalid)

Program path (G90 X_ Y_;)

Distance of interruption by manual handle

Path after interruption

Path after interruption (Absolute value mode, program absolute value update valid, single block operation)

6. Operation Panel Switch Functions 6.14 Handle Interruption

II-26

A B

Program path (G90 X_ Y_;)

Program path (G90 X_ Y_;)

Path after interruption

Path after interruption

B Distance of interruption in block execution

Distance of interruption by manual handle

Path after interruption (Absolute value mode, program absolute value update valid, continuous operation)

A Distance of interruption in block execution

6.14.6 Handle Interruption in Tool Radius Compensation Special movement described below relates only to the tool radius compensation plane axis. It has no

influence on the other axes. At time of tool radius compensation (G41, G42): In incremental value mode (G91) The quantity of deviation equals the distance of interruption. In absolute value mode (G90) If handle interruption is executed in the block for which tool radius

compensation (G41, G42) is being executed, the proper tool path will return in the succeeding block. This rule applies only when the program absolute update is active during single block running. If program absolute update is active during continuous running, the proper tool path will return with the following:

Executing the command in the fourth block after the one for which the interruption has been completed. At this time, four or more blocks may not exist between Block for which the interruption has been completed and Block that contains the nose radius compensation cancel command (G40). In this case, the proper tool path will return at the block next to the tool radius compensation cancel

command (G40).

6. Operation Panel Switch Functions 6.14 Handle Interruption

II-27

Path after interruption (Incremental value mode, continuous operation)

G42 Program path

Tool path

Distance of interruption by manual handle

Path after interruption

R R

R

Path after interruption (Absolute value mode, program absolute value update valid, single block operation)

Program path

Tool path

G42 G40

Tool radius

Path after interruption

Distance of interruption by manual handle

R

R

R

G42 Program path

G40

Tool radius

Path after interruption Distance of interruption by manual handle

Path after interruption (Absolute value mode, program absolute value update valid, continuous operation)

Tool path

6. Operation Panel Switch Functions 6.14 Handle Interruption

II-28

Path after interruption (Absolute value mode, program absolute value update valid, continuous operation)

Program path

G42 G40

Distance of interruption by manual handle

Path after interruption

Tool path

6.14.7 Interrupt Amount Reset Interrupt amount is reset when (1) Dog reference position return is executed; (2) Emergency stop is released; (3) Reset rewind or reset 2 is executed; or (4) Reset 1 is executed when the setup parameter "#1151 rstint" 6.14.8 Operation Sequence An operation example is given where auto operation of XYZ axes is executed in the memory operation

mode and the Z axis is used as a handle interrupt axis.

Perform automatic operation.

Turn ON the HANDLE INTERRUPT switch on the machine operation panel.

6. Operation Panel Switch Functions 6.15 Machine Lock

II-29

Select interrupt axis by setting the HANDLE AXIS SELECTION switch on the machine operation panel. Select the travel distance per handle graduation by setting the HANDLE/ INCREMENTAL RATIO switch.

Turn the manual handle in the + or direction and change the Z axis cut depth amount.

X Z

Program path (current position display)

Handle interrupt

Tool path (handle interrupt display)

When M02 or M30 is executed, automatic operation will stop.

6.15 Machine Lock

(1) When the "ALL AXES MACHINE LOCK" switch is turned ON, the NC commands for the manual operation or automatic operation movement can be executed without moving the machine. The current position display on the setting and display unit will be counted.

(2) The automatic operation speed during machine lock can be selected as the commanded speed or machine lock speed using the parameters. Commanded speed The movement is executed at the feedrate commanded in the program. Thus,

the time is the same as actual machining. Machine lock speed The movement commands are processed at the rapid traverse rate, and

the dwell time, etc., is ignored. Thus, the program check, etc., can be carried out faster.

(3) If the "ALL AXES MACHINE LOCK" switch is changed during automatic operation, the automatic operation will stop after the block currently being executed is completed, and then the setting will be validated.

(4) During reference point return (G28, G30), the movement will be controlled with the machine lock status up to the middle point. The machine lock status will be ignored from the middle point to the reference point.

(5) If the "MACHINE LOCK" switch is changed during manual operation, the setting will be validated after the feed is stopped once.

(6) The M, S, T and B commands are executed according to the program. (7) After the axis is moved in the "MACHINE LOCK" ON state, the current position display when the

"MACHINE LOCK" is turned OFF and the machine position will not match. If AUTO START is pressed in this state, the difference between the current position and the machine position will be added to the movement amount. If RESET is pressed, the current position display will change to match the machine position. Thus, after turning "MACHINE LOCK" OFF, press RESET before starting operation.

6. Operation Panel Switch Functions 6.16 Deceleration Check

II-30

6.16 Deceleration Check 6.16.1 Functions The purpose of the deceleration check is to reduce the machine shock that occurs when the control axis

feedrate is suddenly changed, and prevent corner roundness. The check is carried out at block joints. (1) Deceleration check during rapid traverse The deceleration check is always carried out at the block joints during rapid traverse, before executing

the next block. (2) Deceleration check during cutting feed The deceleration check is carried out at the block joints (before executing the next block) during cutting

feed when any one of the following conditions is valid. 1) When the error detect switch is ON. 2) When G09 (exact stop check) is commanded in the same block. 3) When G61 (exact stop check mode) has been selected. (3) Designating deceleration check The deceleration check by designating a parameter includes deceleration check specification type 1

and deceleration check specification type 2. The setting is selected with the parameter #1306 InpsTyp.

(a) Deceleration check specification type 1 (#1306 InpsTyp = 0)

The G0 and G1 deceleration check method can be selected with the base specification parameter deceleration check method 1 (#1193 inpos) and deceleration check method 2 (#1223 aux07/bit1).

Parameter Rapid traverse

command Parameter

Other than rapid traverse command (G1 : other than G0 command)

Inpos (#1193)

G0XX (G0+G9XX)

AUX07/BIT-1 (#1223/BIT-1)

G1+G9XX G0XX

0 Command

deceleration check 0

Command deceleration check

1 In-position

check 1

In-position check

No deceleration check

(Note 1) XX expresses all commands. (Note 2) #1223 aux07 is the system common parameter. (b) Deceleration check specification type 2 (#1306 InpsTyp = 1)

Rapid traverse and cutting in-position are designated with the inpos parameter.

Parameter Command block #1193 Inpos G0 G1+G9 G1

0 Command

deceleration check Command

deceleration check No deceleration

check

1 In-position

check In-position

check No deceleration

check (Note 1) #1193 inpos is the parameter per system. (Note 2) G0 means the rapid traverse, and G1 means the cutting feed.

6. Operation Panel Switch Functions 6.16 Deceleration Check

II-31

6.16.2 Deceleration Check Method (1) Command deceleration check After interpolation for one block has been completed, the completion of the command system

deceleration is confirmed before execution of the next block. The time required for the deceleration check is determined according to the acceleration/ deceleration

mode and acceleration/deceleration time constant. 1) For linear acceleration/deceleration

Ts Ts : Acceleration/deceleration time constant Td : Deceleration check time Td = Ts + (0 to 14ms)

Succeeding block Preceding block

Td

2) For exponential acceleration/deceleration

Ts

Succeeding block Preceding block

Td Ts : Acceleration/deceleration time constant Td : Deceleration check time Td = 2 Ts + (0 to 14ms)

3) For exponential acceleration and linear deceleration

2 Ts

Succeeding block Preceding block

Td Ts : Acceleration/deceleration time constant Td : Deceleration check time Td = 2 Ts + (0 to 14ms)

Ts

The deceleration check time required during rapid traverse is the longest rapid traverse

deceleration check time of all axes. This check time is determined by the rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration mode and rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time constant of simultaneously commanded axes.

The deceleration check time required during cutting feed is determined in the same manner. It is the longest rapid traverse deceleration check time on all axes. This check time is determined by the cutting feed acceleration/deceleration mode and cutting feed acceleration/ deceleration time constant of simultaneously commanded axes.

6. Operation Panel Switch Functions 6.16 Deceleration Check

II-32

(2) In-position check When the in-position check is valid, the command deceleration check is carried out. After that, it is

confirmed that the servo system positional error is less than the parameter setting value, and the next block is executed. The in-position check width can be designated with the servo parameter in-position width (SV024). However, G0 and G1 can be designated independently with the axis specification parameter G0 in-position check width (G0inps) and G1 in-position check width (G1inps). If both the servo parameter and axis specification parameter are set, the larger value will have the priority.

Speed G0inps (G1inps)

SV024

Time

Command to motor

Motor speed

Next block command

Judge completion of deceleration with G0inps (G1inps) setting value

Deceleration check signal ON OFF

If the SV024 setting value is larger, in-position check will end when the SV024 setting value is established.

6. Operation Panel Switch Functions 6.16 Deceleration Check

II-33

6.16.3 Deceleration Check when Opposite Direction Movement is Reversed Deceleration check cannot be designated for G1 G0 or G1 G1, but it can be designated in the following

manner only when the movement reverses to the opposite direction in successive blocks. Deceleration check can also be executed if even one axis is moving in the opposite direction while several axes are interpolating.

(1) Designating deceleration check for G1 G0 opposite direction movement reversal If the axis movement reverse to the opposite direction in a G1 to G0 successive block, the deceleration

check for the movement in the opposite direction can be changed with the base specification parameter G1 G0 deceleration check (#1502 G0Ipfg).

Same direction Opposite direction

G0Ipfg:0

G1 G0

G1 G0

The acceleration is excessive due to the G1 and G0 composite speed.

G0Ipfg:1

G1 G0

G1 G0

Commanded deceleration

(2) Designating deceleration check for G1 G1 opposite direction movement reversal If the axis movement reverse to the opposite direction in a G1 to G1 successive block, the deceleration

check for the movement in the opposite direction can be changed with the base specification parameter G1 G1 deceleration check (#1503 G1Ipfg).

Same direction Opposite direction

G0Ipfg:0

G1 G1

G1 G1

The acceleration is excessive due to the G1 and G1 composite speed.

G0Ipfg:1

G1 G1

G1 G1

Commanded deceleration

6. Operation Panel Switch Functions 6.16 Deceleration Check

II-34

6.16.4 Parameters (1) Designation of deceleration check

Base specification parameters

# Items Details Setting range inpos Change with the "#1306 InpsType deceleration check designation

type". 0: Deceleration check method 1: Validate in-position check

Deceleration check method 1

Select the G0 deceleration check method. 0: Command deceleration check 1: In-position check

0/1

1193

Validate in-position check

Designate the deceleration confirmation method for the positioning and cutting command.

0: G0, G1+G9 Command deceleration check 1: G0, G1+G9 In-position check

0/1

1223 aux07 (bit1)

Deceleration check method 2

Select the deceleration check method for G1 + G9. 0: Command deceleration check when G1+G9 1: In-position check when G1+G9

Deceleration check is executed only for G1+G9. If the #1306 InpsType deceleration check designation type is "1" (deceleration check designation type 2), this parameter will be invalid.

0/1

1306 InpsTyp Deceleration check specification type

Select the parameter specification type for the G0 or G1 deceleration check.

0: Deceleration check specification type 1 G0 is specified with #1193 inpos, and G1+G9 with #1223 aux07/BIT1.

1: Deceleration check specification type 2 G0 or G1+G9 is specified with #1193 inpos.

0/1

(2) Deceleration check during opposite direction travel

Base specification parameters

# Items Details Setting range 1502 G0Ipfg G1 G0

deceleration check

0: Do not perform a deceleration check when the move direction is changed from G1 to G0.

1: Perform a deceleration check when the move direction is changed from G1 to G0.

0/1

1503 G1Ipfg G1 G1 deceleration check

0: Do not perform a deceleration check when the move direction is changed from G1 to G1.

1: Perform a deceleration check when the move direction is changed from G1 to G1.

0/1

6. Operation Panel Switch Functions 6.16 Deceleration Check

II-35

(3) Designation of in-position check width

(a) Servo parameter

# Items Details Setting range 2224 SV024

INP In-position width

Set the in-position detection width value. Set the accuracy required of the machine. The positioning accuracy increases when the setting value is lowered, but the cycle time (settling time) will increase. Set "50" for ordinary operation.

0 to 32767 (m)

(b) Axis specification parameter

# Items Details Setting range 2077 G0inps G0

in-position width

Specify the G0 in-position width (each axis) when an in-position check is performed separately for G0 and G1. (SV024 or this parameter, whichever is larger, is applied.) The standard value is 100 (50 m). Value 0 indicates 1 m. (Applied only for SV024)

0 to 32767 (in 0.5 m steps)

2078 G1inps G1 in-position width

Specify the G1 in-position width (each axis) when an in-position check is performed separately for G0 and G1. (SV024 or this parameter, whichever is larger, is applied.) The standard value is 100 (50 m). Value 0 indicates 1 m. (Applied only for SV024)

0 to 32767 (in 0.5 m steps)

6.16.5 Precautions (1) Designating deceleration check

When in-position check is valid, set the in-position width in the servo parameters. (2) Deceleration check for opposite direction movement reversal

When deceleration check is valid (G0Ipfg=1), deceleration check will be executed when the axis reverses its movement to the opposite direction at the G1 G0 successive block regardless of whether G0 non-interpolation is ON or OFF.

When deceleration check is valid (G0Ipfg=1), deceleration check will be executed when the axis reverses its movement to the opposite direction at the G1 G0 successive block even in the fixed cycle.

In the G1 G28, G1 G29 or G1 30 successive blocks, deceleration check will always be executed when the G1 movement is completed, when movement to the intermediate point is completed and when movement to the return point is completed. Note that if the base specification parameter simple zero point return (#1222 aux06/bit7) is valid, the base specification parameter G1 G0 deceleration check (G0Ipfg) will be followed when the G1 movement is completed and when movement to the intermediate point is completed. (Deceleration check will always be executed when movement to the return point is completed even in this case.)

(3) Designating in-position width

The in-position width (programmable in-position check width) designated in the machining program has a priority over the in-position width set in the parameters (SV024, G0inps, G1inps).

When error detect is ON, in-position check will be forcibly carried out.

6. Operation Panel Switch Functions 6.16 Deceleration Check

II-36

(4) Deceleration check in G1 G0, G1 G1 opposite direction movement reversal during high-speed machining mode

When the axis movement reverses to the opposite direction in a G1 G1 successive block during the high-speed machining mode, the commanded deceleration will not take place even if G1Ipfg is set to 1. Note that the G0Ipfg setting will be followed if the axis direction reverse to the opposite direction in a G1 G0 successive block.

(5) Deceleration check in movement including spindle/C-axis

The deceleration check in a movement command including the spindle/C-axis is as the table described below when the following condition is fulfilled.

When the different values are set for the position loop gain in non-cutting mode (spindle parameter #3203 PGCO) and the position loop gain in cutting mode (spindle parameter #3330 PGC1 to #3333 PGC4).

That is because a vibration and so on occurs in the machine when the gain is changed during the axis movement.

Parameter Rapid traverse

command Parameter

Other than rapid traverse command (G1 : other than G0 command)

Inpos (#1193)

G0XX (G0+G9XX)

AUX07/BIT-1 (#1223/BIT-1)

G1G0 (G1+G9XX)

G1G1

0 Command

deceleration check 0

1 In-position

check 1

In-position check

(Applicable only to SV024)

No deceleration check

(Note 1) When G1 command is issued, the in-position check is performed regardless of the

deceleration check parameter. (Note 2) XX expresses all commands. (6) Deceleration check in polar coordinate interpolation / milling interpolation / cylindrical start /

cancel command The deceleration check in polar coordinate interpolation / milling interpolation / cylindrical start /

cancel command are as follows.

Parameter: #1223 aux07 BIT1 Deceleration check method

0 Command deceleration check 1 In-position check

III. SETUP

1. Switches 1.1 Layout Diagram of the Control Unit Rotary Switch

III-1

1. Switches 1.1 Layout Diagram of the Control Unit Rotary Switch

Front

Base

1. Switches 1.1 Layout Diagram of the Control Unit Rotary Switch

III-2

8

0 1 2 3 5

79A

B C

D

E F

4

6

NC SYS

OPEN

CBUS 2

DC IN DC OUT PS EMG

BAT ALM

CF11NC RST

NC LED

WD ER CF10

ENC2

CBUS 1

8

0 1 2

3 5

79A

B C

D

E F

4

6

AUX1

AUX2SW2

NCNO FG

Front

D C

IN EM

G C

F01 C

F02

Base

1. Switches 1.1 Layout Diagram of the Control Unit Rotary Switch

III-3

The axis No. must be set with the rotary switch before turning the power ON. The rotary switch setting is

validated when the amplifier power is turned ON.

Display area This displays the operation status and alarms. Setting area Rotary switch for setting the axis No.

2-axis integrated amplifier

1

L axis M axis

Rotary switch setting Setting axis No.

0 1st axis 1 2nd axis 2 3rd axis 3 4th axis 4 5th axis 5 6th axis 6 7th axis 7 8 9 A B C D E

Not used

F Unused axis

Function Setting Meaning 0 1st axis 1 2nd axis 2 3rd axis 3 4th axis 4 5th axis 5 6th axis 6 7th axis 7

E Not used

Axis No. setting

CS

F Unused

axis selection

~

1. Switches 1.1 Layout Diagram of the Control Unit Rotary Switch

III-4

Set the rotary switch (SW1) as shown below. SW1 setting C1-CV specifications (Notes)

0 During operation with contactor (deposits are detected)

1 During operation with no contactor

External emergency stop When not used

2 3

Setting prohibited

4 During operation with contactor (deposits are detected)

5 During operation with no contactor

External emergency stop When used

6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14

Rotary switch (SW1)

15

Setting prohibited

2. Start up and Adjustment Procedure 2.1 Confirmation of Connections

III-5

2. Start up and Adjustment Procedure 2.1 Confirmation of Connections Refer to Connection Manual (BNP-B2183) to confirm the connection of each unit and communication

terminals, etc. Especially confirm the position of the input power and connection connectors, etc. It is recommended to leave the servomotor and spindle motor drive lines disconnected until the settings of

the parameters, etc., is completed.

CAUTION

Ground the signal cables to ensure stable system operation. Also ground the control unit main frame, power distribution panel and machine to one point, so they all have the same potential.

2.2 Setting of Various Switches 1) Control unit setting switch A slide switch (SW1) and rotary switches (CS1, CS2) are located in the window on the upper front of the

control unit. Set SW1 to the "lower side" and CS1 to "0". CS2 is normally set to "0". Refer to the following settings if

needed.

Switch Operation Application 0 Normal operation mode Normal operation 1 PLC program stop For PLC development work 2 Not used 3 Maintenance mode for maker Do not use. 4 Not used 5 Maintenance mode for maker Do not use. 6 Not used 7 The entire memory will be erased, so do not set this. Do not use. 8~F Maintenance mode for maker Do not use.

CAUTION

If the control unit's rotary switch is set to "7", all data in the NC will be erased and the system will not start up.

2. Start up and Adjustment Procedure 2.2 Setting of Various Switches

III-6

2) Remote I/O unit setting switches There is a lever-type switch (DS1) and rotary switch (CS1) in the center from of the remote I/O unit. The DX10 model has one of each switch, and DX11 /12 /14 has two of each switch. All DS1 levers must be set and fixed to "OFF: left side". The CS1 setting is "0" to "7", and should be set

while referring to the following table. However, the PCB output (DO) on the right side of DX11 /12 /14 looking from the front is a 16-point PCB, so take care.

Make sure that the CS1 setting No., is different from other CS1 setting Nos. Remote I/O unit CS1 setting

Read in device No. Output device No. On both units Left side of unit Right side of unit Rotary switch

CS1 No. 1st system

2nd system

1st system

2nd system

1st system

2nd system

0 X00~X1F I00~I1F Y00~Y1F J00~J1F Y00~Y0F J00~J0F 1 X20~X3F I20~I3F Y20~Y3F J20~J3F Y20~Y2F J20~J2F 2 X40~X5F I40~I5F Y40~Y5F J40~J5F Y40~Y4F J40~J4F 3 X60~X7F I60~I7F Y60~Y7F J60~J7F Y60~Y8F J60~J6F 4 X80~X9F I80~I9F Y80~Y9F J80~J9F Y80~Y8F J80~J8F 5 XA0~XBF IA0~IBF YA0~YBF JA0~JBF YA0~YAF JA0~JAF 6 XC0~XDF IC0~IDF YC0~YDF JC0~JDF YC0~YCF JC0~JCF 7 XE0~XFF IE0~IFF YE0~YFF JE0~JFF YE0~YEF JE0~JEF

Left input connector

DIO specification switch (DS1) Rotary switch (CS1)

Left output connector

DX10

Front view

Front view

Left input connector

DIO specification switch (DS1)

Rotary switch (CS1)

Left output connector

Left input connector

DIO specification switch (DS1)

Rotary switch (CS1)

Left output connector

Front view

Outline drawing

DX11 / DX12

DX14 Right input connector Rotary switch Right output connector

Analog signal input/ output connector Rotary switch

2. Start up and Adjustment Procedure 2.3 Turning Power ON, Memory Initialization and Parameter Settings

III-7

2.3 Turning Power ON, Memory Initialization and Parameter Settings 1) Turning power ON Confirm the cable connections, etc., before turning the power ON. Especially take care to the power

system connections. Confirm that the communication terminal screen can be changed over after turning the power ON. 2) Setting of basic specification parameters and initialization of memory (1) Press the [TOOL/PARAM] function selector key on the communication terminal. (2) Press the "Menu" key corresponding to the "Menu" displayed on the bottom of the screen. Change

the menu display, find the menu display "SETUP", and press that "Menu" key. (3) The message "Open the setup parameter?" will display on the screen. Press

Y key, and then

INPUT key.

(4) The first page of the basic parameters for setup will display, so refer to the section on the parameters and set as required. (Parameters #1001 to 1019)

(5) Press the "NEXT PAGE" key on the right of the "Menu" keys, and display the second page of the basic parameters.

(6) Refer to the section on the parameters and set the items as with the first page. (Parameters #1025 to 1043)

(7) Set parameter #1060 SETUP on the second page to "1" (normally it is set to "0"), and perform one-touch setup.

[Procedures for one-touch setup] (a) Set "#1060 SETUP" to "1". The operation message "BASE PARA.

SET? (Y/N)" will appear.

(b) Set "Y". The standard parameter will be set. The operation message "FORMAT? (Y/N)" will appear.

(c) Set "Y". Formatting will start.

The basic parameters and memory will be initialized. (8) Turn the control unit's input power OFF and ON once. (9) This completes the initialization of the memory. 3) Setting of axis specification parameters (1) Press the [TOOL/PARAM] function selector key on the communication terminal. (2) Press the "Menu" key corresponding to the "Menu" displayed on the bottom of the screen. Change

the menu display, find the menu display "SETUP", and press that menu key. (3) The message "Display setup parameters?" will display on the screen. Press

Y key, and then

INPUT key.

(4) Press the "Axis Parameter" menu key. (Five pages in all.) (5) Refer to "Setup parameters" section and set each item.

CAUTION

Do not change setup parameters without prior approval from the machine maker.

3. Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Point Return 3.1 Outline

III-8

3. Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Point Return 3.1 Outline

The relative position detection and absolute position detection type position detection systems are available. The methods of returning to the reference point include the dog-type reference point return and the dogless-type reference point return. The method of adjusting the dog-type reference point return using the relative position detection is described in this section. Refer to the section "4. Absolute Position Detection System" for details on adjusting the absolute position detection.

3.2 Dog-type Reference Point Return

(1) Reference point return operation

When the dog-type reference point return is executed, the machine will move at the commanded speed. When the near-point detection limit switch kicks the near-point dog (when the near-point detection signal turns OFF), the machine decelerates to a stop. After decelerating to a stop, the machine moves at the G28 approach speed, and positions to the first grid point after leaving the near-point dog. This grid point is called the electrical zero point. Normally, this electrical zero point position is the reference point. For the reference point return using the relative position detector, the first return after turning the power ON is carried out with the dog-type reference point return. The second and following returns are carried out with high-speed reference point return. High-speed reference point return is a function that directly positions to the reference point saved in the memory without decelerating at the near-point dog. If reference point return has not been executed even once after turning ON the power while using relative position detection, the program error (P430) will occur when movement commands other than G28 are executed.

+

Near-point detection limit switch

Reference point return direction

G28 Rapid traverse rate (#2025 G28rap)

G28 approach speed (#2026 G28crp)

Grid space Near-point dog

Grid amount

Electrical zero point

Reference point

Grid point

3. Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Point Return 3.2 Dog-type Reference Point Return

III-9

(2) Reference point

The reference point is the point positioned to when the dog-type reference point return is executed. Note that a separate setting method is used for the absolute position detection. The reference point is the point positioned to with the manual reference point return and G28 command in the machining program. Using parameters, the reference point can be shifted from the electrical zero point position.

(3) Grid point

The position detector has a Z-phase that generates one pulse per rotation. The 0-point position of this Z-phase is the grid point. Thus, there is a grid point per rotation of the position detector, and the machine has many grid points at a set pitch. The grid point can be set per grid space by setting the grid space (SETUP PARAM. "#2029 grspc"). Thus, multiple grid points can be set per detector rotation.

(4) Grid space

The distance between the grid points is the grid space. The grid space can be set in mm units with the SETUP PARAM. "#2029 grspc".

(5) Grid amount

The grid amount expresses the distance from when the near-point detection limit switch leaves the near-point dog and reaches the grid point (electrical zero point) when the dog-type reference point return is executed. The grid amount can be confirmed with "GRID" on the "ALM/DIAG" "SERVO MONITOR (2)" screen of the setting and display unit. After setting the grid mask, the grid amount shows the distance from the grid mask OFF to the grid point.

3. Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Point Return 3.3 Reference Point Return Parameters

III-10

3.3 Reference Point Return Parameters

(1) Reference point return operation and parameter related drawing

+

#2025 G28rap G28 rapid traverse rate

#2030 dir () Reference point return direction

Reference point (Position returned to with the zero point return command)

#2026 G28crp G28 approach speed Basic machine coordinate system zero point

Electrical zero point

Grid point #2029 grspc

Grid space

Near-point dog

#2037 G53ofs Machine zero point offset

Grid mask

Grid mask amount

Grid amount Reference point shift amount

The grid between the near-point dog and grid mask is not the electrical zero point.

The first grid at the end of the grid mask is the electrical zero point.

The grid amount is displayed on the "ALM/DIAG" "SERVO MONITOR (2)" screen.

#2027 G28sft

#2028 grmask

(2) G28 rapid traverse rate (#2025 G28rap)

This parameter designates the feedrate for dog-type reference point return in manual operation and automatic operation. The feedrate during high-speed reference point return will be the rapid traverse rate (SETUP PARAM. "#2001 rapid").

(3) G28 approach speed (#2026 G28crp)

This parameter sets the approach speed to the reference point after decelerating to a stop by the near-dog detection. The G28 approach speed is accelerated and decelerated in steps (acceleration/deceleration zero), so if the speed is fast, mechanical shock, etc., could occur. The G28 approach speed should be set between 100 and 300 mm/min., and within 500 mm/min. at the fastest.

(4) Reference point shift amount (#2027 G28sft)

This parameter can set the shift amount for shifting the reference point from the electrical zero point. The shift direction can be set only in the reference point return direction. If the reference point shift amount is "0", the grid point (electrical zero point) will be the reference point.

3. Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Point Return 3.3 Reference Point Return Parameters

III-11

(5) Grid mask amount (#2028 grmask)

The electrical zero point is the first grid point after the dog is kicked. If the grid point is at the position where the near-point dog is kicked, the electrical zero point will be the grid point at the position where the dog is kicked because of the delay of the limit switch operation. Thus, the next grid point will be applied, or in the end, the reference point position may be deviate by the amount of the grid space. Thus, the position that the dog is kicked must be at the approximate center of the grid space.

Dog

Reference point

The electrical zero point will change depending on the limit switch delay.

Adjustments can be made by changing the near-point dog or by setting the grid mask amount. Setting the grid mask has the same effect as lengthening the near-point dog. If the grid amount is near the grid space or 0, the grid point will be at the position that the near-point dog is kicked, so set a grid mask. The grid mask amount is set so that the grid mask is one-half of the grid space. The grid mask amount can be set only in the reference point return direction. The grid amount and grid space can be confirmed on the "SERVO MONITOR (2)" screen. Refer to the grid mask amount calculation expressions on the next page for the grid mask amount values.

3. Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Point Return 3.3 Reference Point Return Parameters

III-12

Grid mask amount calculation expression When < Grid amount Grid mask amount = Grid amount

+ Near-point dog

2

Grid mask

Grid mask amount

Grid space

Grid amount

#2016

Reference point (Position returned to with the zero point return command)

Electrical zero point

When > Grid amount Grid mask amount = Grid amount +

+

2

Near-point dog Grid mask

Grid space

Grid amount Grid mask amount

#2016 Grid amount after grid mask is set

Reference point after grid mask is set

This will not be the electrical zero point due to the grid mask. Reference point before grid mask is set

Grid space 2

Grid space 2

Grid space 2

Grid space 2

3. Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Point Return 3.3 Reference Point Return Parameters

III-13

(6) Grid space (#2029 grspc)

This parameter sets the distance between grids. The normal grid space is the ball screw pitch (SETUP PARAM. "#2218 PIT") value or the movement amount per motor rotation set as a mm unit. To make the grid space smaller, set a divisor of the grid space.

Calculation expression for movement amount per motor rotation

When linear feed mechanism is ball screw Movement amount per motor rotation = Ball screw pitch

When linear feed mechanism is rack & pinion Movement amount per motor rotation = No. of pinion gear teeth Rack pitch

For rotation axis Movement angle per motor rotation = 360

N = PIT

Motor side gear ratio Machine side gear ratio

Motor side gear ratio Machine side gear ratio

Motor side gear ratio Machine side gear ratio

PC1 PC2

N = Movement amount per motor rotation PC1 = Motor side gear ratio PC2 = Machine side gear ratio PIT = Ball screw pitch

3. Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Point Return 3.3 Reference Point Return Parameters

III-14

(7) Reference point return direction (#2030 dir ())

This parameter sets the direction to move after the limit switch kicks the dog causing a deceleration stop during dog-type reference point return. The direction is either positive "0" or negative "1". If the reference point position is in the positive direction from the near-point dog, set "0". If the reference point position is in the negative direction from the near-point dog, set "1".

(a) When reference point return direction is positive (+)

() (+)

To move in + direction To move in

direction

Dog Reference point

(b) When reference point return direction is negative ()

() (+)

To move in + direction

To move in direction

Dog Reference point

(8) Axis with no reference point (#2031 noref)

"0" is set for the axis to carry out dog-type reference point return and the axis for absolute position detection. "1" is set for the axis that does not carry out reference point return during relative position detection.

(9) Machine coordinate system offset (#2037 G53ofs)

This parameter is set when the basic machine coordinate system zero point position is to be shifted from the reference point position. When "0" is set, the reference point position will be the position of the basic machine coordinate system zero point. G53ofs sets the reference point position from the basic machine coordinate system zero point as a basic machine coordinate system coordinate value. The machine value becomes this value with reference point return after the power is turned ON, and the basic machine coordinate system is established.

(10) Grid display selection (#1229 set01/bit6)

Select a grid type to be displayed on the servo monitor screen during dog type reference point return. 0: Selects the distance between dog OFF and zero point (including a grid mask amount). 1: Selects a value given by reducing a grid mask amount from the distance between dog OFF and zero

point.

3. Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Point Return 3.4 Dog-type Reference Point Return Adjustment Procedures

III-15

3.4 Dog-type Reference Point Return Adjustment Procedures

Adjust the dog-type reference point return with the following steps. (1) Set the zero point return parameter.

Set the reference point shift amount to 0. Set the grid mask amount to 0.

(2) Turn the power OFF and ON, and then execute reference point return. (3) Display the "ALM/DGN" "SERVO MONITOR (2)" screen on the setting and display unit.

The grid space and grid amount values can be read. (4) Calculate the grid mask amount with the grid mask amount calculation method. (5) Display the "SETUP PARAM" screen.

Set the grid mask amount. (6) Turn the power OFF and ON, and then execute reference point return. (7) Display the "ALM/DGN" "SERVO MONITOR (2)" screen on the setting and display unit.

The grid space and grid amount values can be read. If the grid amount value is approx. half of the grid space, the grid mask amount has been correctly set. If the value is not approx. half, repeat the procedure from step (1).

(8) Set the reference point shift. (9) Turn the power OFF and ON, and then execute reference point return.

(10) Set G53ofs.

4. Absolute Position Detection System 4.1 Outline

III-16

4. Absolute Position Detection System 4.1 Outline By detecting the machine movement amount even when the power is turned OFF, the absolute position

detection function allows automatic operation without executing zero point return after the power is turned ON. The reliability of this function is extremely high as it performs various data checks such as a mutual checks of the feedback amount from the detector, and checks of the absolute position on the machine's characteristic point.

The machine zero point must be determined and the absolute position established for the absolute position detection function. The two following methods can be used depending on how the absolute position is established.

(1) Dog-less type absolute position detection The absolute position is established by setting a random coordinate on a random position without using

the dog. The basic position can be determined with the following two methods in this method. Machine end stopper method Marked point alignment method Manual initialization or automatic initialization can be used for the machine end stopper method. (2) Dog type absolute position detection The absolute position is established by executed dog type zero point return. The validity of the absolute position detection system and the method can be set for each axis with

parameters. However, the servo amplifier and detector must have the absolute position detection specifications.

4.2 Coordinate System of Absolute Position System The basic machine coordinate zero point is created at the mechanical basic position (machine end or basic

point) or at the position determined by inverting the sign of the "ZERO" parameter using the electric basic position (grid point just before the machine end or basic point) as the absolute position basic point. The reference point is created at the position of the "G53ofs" parameter using the zero point of the basic machine coordinate.

Reference point

G53ofs

Basic machine coordinate system "ZERO"

Absolute position basic point

Fig. 2.2 Absolute position (dogless setting system) "ZERO" : Coordinate value of the absolute position basic position looking from the basic machine

coordinate zero point. ([ABS. POSITION SET] "#2 ZERO") "G53ofs" : Coordinate value of the reference point looking from the basic machine coordinate zero point.

([AXIS SPEC] "#2037 G53ofs") (Note) Select whether to use the machine basic position or electrical basic position as the absolute position

basic point with parameter "#2059 zerbas".

4. Absolute Position Detection System 4.3 Starting up Absolute Position Detection System

III-17

4.3 Starting up Absolute Position Detection System It is necessary to perform zero-point initialization before starting up the absolute position detection system.

Zero-point initialization sets up the coordinate system to be ready for operation. (1) Operation before establishment of absolute position If an attempt is made to start up the system while zero-point initialization has never been performed or

the absolute position is lost, an NC alarm occurs with the following alarm displayed and non-initialized axis name. Under this state, the NC coordinate system is undefined and subjected to the restrictions in the following table in individual modes. If this occurs, perform zero-point initialization to set up the coordinate system.

Alarm: Z70 ABS.ILLEGAL Z71 DETECTOR EEROR

Operation in individual modes

Absolute position detection method Operation mode

Dog-less type Dog type

Memory/MDI Move command invalid (including G28) (Note 1)

Move command invalid (G28 is valid) (Note 1)

Jog feed Valid Valid Rapid traverse Valid Valid

Handle Valid Valid Step Valid Valid

Zero return Start invalid (Note 2) Start valid (Note 1) A program error (P430) occurs. (Note 2) An attempt to start the axis for which the absolute position has not been set up causes "M01

OPERATION ERROR 0024." (It is effective for the axis for which the absolute position has been set up.)

(2) Selecting zero-point

initialization methods The zero-point initialization methods can be selected on the "ABS. POSI PARAM" screen. #2049 type 1: Dog-less machine

end stopper method

2: Dog-less marked point alignment method

3: Dog type

BASE AXIS SERVO SPINDLE MENU

[ABS. POSI PARAM] SETUP PARAM 2.5/5 # 2049 type 1 1 2 3 2050 absdir 0 0 0 0 2051 check 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 2052 absg28 100 100 100 100 2053 absm02 100 100 100 100 2054 clpush 80 50 0 0 2055 pushf 0 100 0 0 2056 aproch 0.000 3.000 0.000 0.000 2057 nrefp 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 2058 nrefn 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 2059 zerbas 0 0 0 0 2060 #( ) DATA ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

ABS. POSI PARAM screen

(Note) Refer to "MELDAS60/60S Series Alarm/Parameter Manual" (BNP-B2201) for details on the

parameters.

4. Absolute Position Detection System 4.3 Starting up Absolute Position Detection System

III-18

(3) Zero-point initialization The jog or handle is used with the "ABS. POSITION SET" screen to perform zero-point initialization. The

progress of the initialization operation is displayed in the STATE field of the same screen. The operation procedure will differ depending on the zero point initialization method. Each procedure is explained below.

(a) Machine end stopper method

(#2049 type: 1) The machine end stopper method includes two initialization modes: manual and automatic.

(i) Manual initialization

With this method, the axis is pressed against the machine end stopper using handle or JOG. Before performing zero-point initialization, specify the following parameter (for details, see Alarm/ Parameter Manual):

ABS-SRV ADJUST HISTORY CMPOSIT MENU

[ABS. POSITION SET] ALARM/DIAGN 5.2/2

TYPE NO-STOPPER STOPPER NO-STOPPER STOPPER

STATE NG NG NG NG

TO END -12345.678 0.000 1.234 0.000 MACHINE -12345.678 NOT PASS 0.000 NOT PASS

#

0 INIT SET 0 1 1 1 1 ORIGIN 0 0 1 0

2 ZERO -12345.678 0.000 1.234 0.000 #( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

#2054 clpush (Current limit)

4. Absolute Position Detection System 4.3 Starting up Absolute Position Detection System

III-19

[Operation procedure]

Operation procedure STATE display 1. Select the "ABS. POSITION SET" screen. 2. Select the handle or jog mode. 3. Ensure that the stopper method is applied for the axis for

which zero-point initialization is to be performed. ("TYPE" of [ABS. POSITION SET] screen indicates STOPPER )

NG if the absolute position is lost.

OK if the absolute position has been established.

4. Specify "1" to "#0 INIT. SET" for the axis for which zero-point initialization is to be performed.

5. Specify data for "#2 ZERO". 6. Press the axis against the stopper at the machine end.

STOPPER

7. Check that "STATE" indicates that the axis is being pressed. (After the axis is pressed against the stopper and the current limit is kept reached for a given time, "STATE" indicates RELEASE and "TO END" indicates the distance between

the machine end and the grid point just before it.)

RELEASE

8. The axis moves in the opposite direction. ORIG-RTN

9. The axis automatically stops at the grid point just before the stopper.

The basic machine coordinate system is automatically set. This sets up the absolute position.

10. This completes zero-point initialization. After completion of zero-point initialization for all axes, turn power OFF and ON again.

OK

11. Output parameter tape. To change just the basic machine coordinate zero point, perform steps 4 and 5 above, and then turn the power OFF and ON.

Zero point of basic machine coordinate Reference point

Zero-return parameter "#2037 G53ofs"

Grid point (Electrical basic position)

"TO END"

Machine end stopper (Mechanical basic position)

"#2 ZERO" (#2059 zerbas=1)

"#2 ZERO" (#2059 zerbas=0)

Select either "#2 ZERO" with the parameters.

6)

7)8) 9)

Manual zero-point initialization (Note 1) If pressing against the machine end is executed without passing the grip point once after turning

the power ON, the message "NOT PASS" will appear. Return to a point before the last grid, and then repeat from step 6.

(Note 2) If the first grid point is covered by the grid mask ("#2028 grmask" on [ZERO-RTN PARAM] screen) as a result of marked point return at step 9 (returning to the basic point), the axis stops the next grid point.

Note that zero-point shift ("#2027 G28sft" on [ZERO-RTN PARAM] screen) is invalid.

4. Absolute Position Detection System 4.3 Starting up Absolute Position Detection System

III-20

(ii) Automatic initialization With this method, the axis is pushed against the machine end stopper, and can be used when the

"INIT-SET" mode is selected. It has the following merits as compared to manual initialization. 1) Pressing is always carried out under the same conditions (feed rate and distance), so

displacements of zero points can be reduced. 2) Part of operation can be automated to ease zero-point initialization. Before performing zero-point initialization, specify the following parameter on the [ABS. POSI

PARAM] screen. (for details, see Alarm/Parameter Manual): #2054 clpush : Current limit #2055 pushf : Push speed #2056 aproch : Approach point

[Operation procedure] Operation procedure STATE display

1. Select the "ABS. POSITION SET" screen. 2. Select the "INIT-SET" mode. 3. Ensure that the stopper method is applied for the axis for which

zero-point initialization is to be performed. ("TYPE" of [ABS. POSITION SET] screen indicates STOPPER )

NG if the absolute position is lost.

OK if the absolute position has been established.

4. Specify "1" to "#0 INIT. SET" for the axis for which zero-point initialization is to be performed.

5. Specify data for "#2 ZERO". JOG-START

6. Perform jog start for the axis for which zero-point initialization is to be performed.

The jog start is available only in the direction of the sign specified for "#2 ZERO" (toward machine end stopper). (An attempt to perform the jog start in a wrong direction encounters "invalid start direction".)

STOPPER 1

a) The axis moves toward the machine end stopper at the "press-fit speed". 7. Auto-

matic opera- tion

b) The axis hits against the machine end stopper. After the current limit is kept reached for a given time, the axis moves toward the approach point at the "press-fit speed".

ZP-RTN

c) After it reaches the approach point, it again moves

toward the machine end stopper at the "press-fit speed".

STOPPER 2

d) The axis hits against the machine end stopper. After the current limit is kept reached for a given time, the axis moves toward the grid point just before the stopper at the "press-fit speed".

ORIG-RTN

e) The axis stops at that first grid point. The basic machine coordinate system is automatically set. This sets up the absolute position.

OK

8. This completes zero-point initialization. After completion of zero-point initialization for all axes, turn power OFF and ON again.

9. Output parameter tape. To change just the basic machine coordinate zero point, perform steps 4 and 5 above, and then turn the power OFF and ON.

4. Absolute Position Detection System 4.3 Starting up Absolute Position Detection System

III-21

Zero point of basic machine coordinate

Reference point

Zero-return parameter "#2037 G53ofs"

Machine end stopper (Machine basic position)

"#2 ZERO" (#2059 zerbas=1)

"#2 ZERO" (#2059 zerbas=0)

Grid point (Electrical basic position) "TO END"

Absolute position parameter "#2056 aproch"

a) to e) in the drawing corresponding to the sub-sections given in operation procedure (7) (automatic operation).

Select either "#2 ZERO" with the parameters.

Automatic initialization start point Press-fit speed a)

b)

c)

d)e)

Automatic zero-point initialization (Note 1) When the approach point is reached after the first press-fit, if the grid has not been passed once

after turning the power ON, the message "NOT PASS" will display. Return to a point before the last grid, and then repeat from step 6.

(Note 2) Acceleration/deceleration during movement at the specified press-fit speed is performed in smoothing-off (step feed) mode.

(Note 3) If 0 is specified for "#2056 aproch" of the [ABS. POSI PARAM] screen, the machine zero point becomes the approach point.

(Note 4) Automatic initialization is interrupted if one of the following events occurs. If it is interrupted, "STATE" indicates JOG-START (after selection of the "INIT-SET" if it is caused by mode change), so restart operation from step 6.

An absolute position detection alarm occurs. Operation preparation turns OFF. The mode is changed. The system is reset. If "STATE" is OK before automatic initialization is started, "STATE" returns to OK if power is

turned OFF and ON again without restarting the operation. (Note 5) If the first grid point is covered by the grid mask ("#2028 grmask" on [ZERO-RTN PARAM]

screen) as a result of marked point return at step 7 e), the axis stops at the next grid point. Note that zero-point shift ("#2027 G28sft" on [ZERO-RTN PARAM] screen) is invalid.

4. Absolute Position Detection System 4.3 Starting up Absolute Position Detection System

III-22

(Note 6) Automatic initialization cannot be started if one of the following event occurs. An attempt to start it encounters the message "T01 CANT CYCLE ST".

Data has not been specified for "#0 INIT. SET" parameter. Invalid data has been specified for the "#2 ZERO" parameter. Data has not been specified for "#2055 pushf" of the [ABS. POSI PARAM] screen. "Z71 DETECTOR ERROR 0005" has occurred. Invalid data for the "#2 ZERO" parameter indicates that the relationship between "#2 ZERO" and

zero return parameter "#2037 G53ofs" is inadequate. That is, if the former is smaller than the latter, the machine end stopper would be located between the zero point of the basic machine coordinate and machine zero point; this disables automatic initialization. If the former is 0, the direction of the machine end stopper is unpredictable; this also disables automatic initialization. See the figure below.

Machine end stopper (Mechanical basic position)

Zero point of basic machine coordinate

Zero point of basic machine coordinate

Machine end stopper (Mechanical basic position) "#2 ZERO"

Zero-return parameter "#2037 G53ofs"

Reference point

Zero return cannot be performed because the machine zero point is located far beyond the machine end stopper when it is seen from the zero point of the basic machine coordinate.

If 0 is specified for "#2 ZERO", the zero point of the basic machine coordinate is located on the machine end stopper. The direction in which the axis is to be moved is thus unpredictable.

Explanation of causes that disable automatic initialization

4. Absolute Position Detection System 4.3 Starting up Absolute Position Detection System

III-23

(b) Marked point alignment method The handle or jog is operated to align the axis with the basic point of the machine. Before performing zero-point initialization, specify the following parameter of the [ABS. POSI

PARAM] screen (for details, see Alarm/Parameter Manual): #2050 absdir [Operation procedure]

Operation procedure STATE display 1. Select the "ABS. POSITION SET" screen. 2. Select the handle mode, handle axis or jog mode. 3. Ensure that the origin point alignment method is applied for

the axis for which zero-point initialization is to be performed. ("TYPE" of [ABS. POSITION SET] screen indicates NO-STOPPER . )

NG if the absolute position is lost.

OK if the absolute position has been established.

4. Specify "1" to "#0 INIT. SET" for the axis for which zero-point initialization is to be performed.

5. Specify data for "#2 ZERO". 6. Move the axis to the machine basic position and align it with

the basic point. 7. Specify "1" to "#1 ORIGIN".

ORIGIN SET

8. The machine will move in the direction specified with [ABS. POSI PARAM] "#2050 absdir". ORIG-RTN

9. The axis automatically stops at the first grid point. The basic machine coordinate system is automatically

set. This sets up the absolute position.

10. This completes zero-point initialization. After completion of zero-point initialization for all axes, turn power OFF and ON again.

OK

11. Output parameter tape. To change just the basic machine coordinate zero point, perform steps 4 and 5 above, and then turn the power OFF and ON.

Zero point of basic machine coordinate Reference point

Zero-return parameter "#2037 G53ofs"

Grid point

"#2 ZERO" (#2059 zerbas=1)

Select either "#2 ZERO" with the parameters.

"#2 ZERO" (#2059 zerbas=0)

Start point

Machine basic point

"TO END"

6)

7)8)9)

(Electrical basic position)

Zero-point initialization by origin point alignment method

4. Absolute Position Detection System 4.3 Starting up Absolute Position Detection System

III-24

(Note 1) If the basic point is set when the grid has not been passed once after turning the power ON, the message "NOT PASS" will display. Return to a point before the last grid, and then repeat from step 6.

(Note 2) If the first grid point is covered by the grid mask ("#2028 grmask" on [zero-return parameter] screen) as a result of marked point return at step 9, the axis stops at the next grid point.

Note that zero-point shift ("#2027 G28sft" on [ZERO-RTN PARAM] screen) is invalid. (Note 3) Reconfirm the absdir direction if the machine does not move in step 8. The machine will move

only in the positive direction when set to 0, and the negative direction when set to 1.

4. Absolute Position Detection System 4.3 Starting up Absolute Position Detection System

III-25

(c) Common precautions for dogless type absolute position detection (i) Examples of setting "#2 ZERO" parameter The coordinate value of the absolute basic point (mechanical basic position or electrical basic

position) looking from the basic machine coordinate zero point is set for "#2 ZERO" parameter.

(Example 1) The zero point is determined at the position 50.0 to the front of the absolute position basic position on the positive side.

Zero point of basic machine coordinate

"ZERO"=50.0

Absolute position basic point

(Machine basic position or electrical basic position)

(Example 2) The zero point is determined at the position 400.0mm to the front from the machine basic position or absolute position basic point at the negative side.

Zero point of basic machine coordinate

"ZERO"=-400.0

Absolute position basic point

(Machine basic position or electrical basic position)

(Example 3) If it is desired to create the zero point of the basic machine coordinate on a grid point, the value

indicated in "TO END" is used to calculate the value to be set to the "#2 ZERO" parameter as shown in the example below. The value indicated in "TO END" is the distance from the machine basic position to the grid point right before the end. (If the coordinates of the absolute position basic point are used for "#2 ZERO", TO END does not need to be considered.)

The zero point is determined at the third grid point (10.0mm grid-point intervals) when "TO END" indicates 5.3 at the basic position at the positive side. (Example for 10.0mm grid interval.)

Zero point of basic machine coordinate system

"ZERO"=25.3 Machine basic position

"TO END" = 5.3

10.0 10.0

4. Absolute Position Detection System 4.3 Starting up Absolute Position Detection System

III-26

(ii) Setting of reference point The reference point can be created in the following method by setting the "#2037 G53ofs" of the

[ZERO-RTN PARAM] screen.

(Example 1) To set the reference point at the same point as the basic machine coordinate zero point.

Absolute position basic point

Basic machine coordinate zero point "ZERO"

"G53ofs" = 0Reference point

(Machine basic position or electrical basic position)

(Example 2) To set the reference point at a position 200.0 to the front of the basic machine coordinate zero position on the positive side. (When the basic machine coordinate zero point is 300.0mm to the front of the absolute position basic position.)

Absolute position basic point

Basic machine coordinate zero point "ZERO" = 300.0

"G53ofs" = 200.0

Reference point

(Machine basic position or electrical basic position)

(iii) Common precautions for initialization (Note 1) "#0 INIT. SET" parameter setting (axis for which zero point is to be initialized) can be set for

all axes or for one axis. (Note 2) "#0 INIT. SET" parameter cannot be turned OFF with the keys. The power must be turned OFF

once. If even one axis is ON for this parameter, the message "INITIAL SET (ABS)" will display on the operation status section of all screens, and the axis in initialization will be output. The automatic, MDI and manual zero point return operation will be interlocked at this time.

(Note 3) The "#2 ZERO" setting can be made at any level is "#0 INIT. SET" parameter is set to "1". (Note 4) The grid point must be passed once after the power is turned ON to execute zero point

initialization. If the grid point has not been passed once, "NOT PASS" will appear at "MAC POS".

(Note 5) After the absolute position has been established, save the necessary data in the memory.

4. Absolute Position Detection System 4.3 Starting up Absolute Position Detection System

III-27

(5) Zero point initialization for dog type absolute position detection By executing dog type zero point return with the manual zero point return mode or automatic zero point

return command (G28), the zero point will be initialized. The execution stage of the initialization will be showed in the "STATE" column of the [ABS. POSITION SET] screen. The "#0 INIT. SET", "#1 ORIGIN" and "#2 ZERO" settings are invalid during dog type absolute position detection.

[Operation procedure/operation]

Operation procedure STATE display 1. Select the [ABS. POSITION SET] screen.

2. Confirm that the axis to be zero point initialized is a "dog type" axis. (See "TYPE" on the [ABS. POSITION SET] screen.)

NG if the absolute position is lost.

OK if the absolute position is established.

3. Perform manual or automatic dog type zero point return. ZP-RTN

4. The basic machine coordinate system will be established when the zero point is reached. The absolute position is established at this stage, and the zero point initialization is completed.

COMPLETE

5. Output the parameters after zero point initialization is completed for all axes.

(Note 1) If the dog type zero point return is stopped by resetting, the previous state (OK or NG) will display

in the "STATE" column. (Note 2) After the absolute position has been established, save the necessary data in the memory. (Note 3) With dog type zero point return, zero point return can be executed again even if the "STATE" is

OK .

5. Stored Stroke Limit

III-28

5. Stored Stroke Limit

(1) Outline

Three tool entry prohibited ranges can be set with stored stroke limit I, stored stroke limit II, IIB and stored stroke limit IB. Part of the prohibited range on the outside of soft limit I can be validated with stored stroke limit IC. The stored stroke limit II and IIB select the outer side (II) and inner side (IIB) of the entry prohibited range with parameters.

Stored stroke limit IB

Stored stroke limit IIB

Stored stroke limit I

Stored stroke limit IC

If the tool tries to move over the set range, an alarm will appear, and the axis will decelerate to a stop. If the prohibited range is entered and an alarm occurs, movement will be possible only in the direction opposite the entry direction.

[Valid Conditions of Stored Stroke Limit]

When using the relative position detection system, the stored stroke limit is invalid until the reference point return is completed after the power is turned ON. The stored stroke limit can be validated even if the reference point return is not yet completed, by setting parameter #2049 type = 9. If the absolute position detection is valid when using the absolute position detection system, the stored stroke limit will be validated immediately after the power is turned ON.

[Stored stroke limit coordinates] The stored stroke limit check is carried out in the basic machine coordinate system established by the reference point return. To validate the stored stroke limit even when the reference point return is not yet completed, check the stored stroke limit using the temporary basic machine coordinate system (basic coordinate system defined when the power was previously turned OFF). When the 1st dog-type reference point return is completed after the power is turned OFF, the correct coordinate system is established.

CAUTION

Always set the stored stroke limit. Failure to set this could result in collision with the machine end. (Note) The axis movement possible when the reference point return has not yet completed is limited to

manual and handle feed only. Automatic operation is validated after the reference point return is completed.

5. Stored Stroke Limit

III-29

(2) Detailed explanation

The stored stroke limit sets a prohibited range with the parameters or program command. The maximum and minimum values of the prohibited range are set as coordinate values (radius values) on the basic machine coordinate system for each axis. If the parameters (#8204 OT-CHECK-N and #8205 OT-CHECK-P), for setting the prohibited range, are set to the same value, the stroke will not be checked. This function is valid only for the axis for which the reference point is established. If the machine enters the prohibited range, an error "M01 Operation error 0007" (S/W stroke end) will occur, and the machine movement will stop. The alarm can be reset by moving the erroneous axis in the opposite direction. During automatic operation, if an alarm occurs with even one axis, all axes will decelerate to a stop. During manual operation, only the axis that caused the alarm will decelerate to a stop. The axis will always stop at a position before the prohibited range. The distance between the prohibited range and stop position will depend on the feedrate.

The stored stroke limits I, II, IIB, IB and IC are handled as follows.

Type Prohibited range Explanation Range setting

parameter Validating conditions

I Outside Set by the machine maker. When used with II, the narrow range

designated by the two types becomes the movement valid range.

#2013 OT #2014 OT+

Zero point return is completed.

#2013 and #2014 are not set to the same value.

II Outside #8210 OT-INSIDE:0

Used with I.

IIB Inside

Set by the user. Select II or IIB with the

parameters.

#8210 OT-INSIDE: 1

#8204 OT-CHECK-N #8205 OT-CHECK-P

Zero point return is completed.

#8204 and #8205 are not set to the same value.

#8202 OT-CHECK OFF: 0

IB Inside Set by the machine maker. #2061 OT_1B #2062 OT_1B+

Zero point return is completed.

#2061 and #2062 are not set to the same value.

IC Outside Set by the machine maker. Can be rewritten with DDB.

#2061 OT_1B #2062 OT_1B+

#2061 and #2062 are not set to the same value.

#2063 OT_1C type: 2

5. Stored Stroke Limit 5.1 Stored stroke limit I

III-30

5.1 Stored stroke limit I

This is a stroke limit function used by the machine maker. The boundary is set with the parameters (axis specification parameters "#2013 OT" and "#2014 OT+"). The outside of the set boundary is the prohibited range. When used with the stored stroke limit II function, the narrow range designated by the two types becomes the movement valid range.

Basic machine coordinate system

Point 1

P ro

hi bi

te d

ra ng

e

Machine movement valid range

setting value

P ro

hi bi

te d

ra ng

e

Point 2

+ setting value

The following values are set with the coordinate values in the basic machine coordinate system.

Point 1: #2014 OT+ Point 2: #2013 OT

5. Stored Stroke Limit 5.2 Stored stroke limit II

III-31

5.2 Stored stroke limit II The boundary is set with the parameters (axis parameters #8204 OT-CHECK-N, #8205 OT-CHECK-P) or with the program commands. Either the inside or the outside of the set boundary is the prohibited range. Whether the inside or outside of the range is prohibited is determined by parameter (#8210 OT-INSIDE). When the inside is selected, this function is called stored stroke limit IIB. When using program commands, entry of the tool into the prohibited range is prohibited with G22, and entry into the prohibited range is enabled with G23. The stored stroke limit II function can be invalidated for each axis with the parameter setting (#8202 OT-CHECK OFF: 1). "#8210 OT-INSIDE" can be set for each axis, but when used in combination, the following type of operation is possible.

X Z Movement prohibited range

Moveable range

O ut

si de

O ut

si de

Moveable range

O ut

si de

In si

de

Moveable range

In si

de

In si

de

Moveable range

5. Stored Stroke Limit 5.2 Stored stroke limit II

III-32

(1) Stored stroke limit II (When prohibited range is on outside) When used with the stored stroke limit I function, the narrow range designated by the two types becomes the movement valid range.

Range prohibited with stored stroke limit II

Basic machine coordinate system

Point 1

P ro

hi bi

te d

ra ng

e

Machine movement valid range

setting value + setting

value

P ro

hi bi

te d

ra ng

e

Point 2

Point 3

Point 4

(2) Stored stroke limit IIB (When prohibited range is on inside) A range except for that of the stored stroke limit I becomes the movement prohibited range.

Range prohibited with stored stroke limit IIB

Basic machine coordinate system

Point 1

P ro

hi bi

te d

ra ng

e

Machine movement valid range

setting value

+ setting value

P ro

hi bi

te d

ra ng

e

Point 2

Point 3

Point 4

The following values are set with the coordinate values in the basic machine coordinate system.

Point 3 and 4: #8205 OT-CHECK-P #8204 OT-CHECK-N

Points 1 and 2 are the prohibited range set with stored stroke limit I.

5. Stored Stroke Limit 5.3 Stored stroke limit IB

III-33

5.3 Stored stroke limit IB

The boundary is set for each axis with the parameters (axis parameters "#2061 OT_1B" and "#2062 OT_1B+"). The inside of the set boundary is the prohibited range.

Range prohibited with stored stroke limit IIB

Basic machine coordinate system

Point 1

P ro

hi bi

te d

ra ng

e

Machine movement valid range

setting value

+ setting value

P ro

hi bi

te d

ra ng

e

Point 2

Point 3

Point 4

Point 6

Point 5

5.4 Stored stroke limit IC

The boundary is set for each axis with the parameters (axis parameters "#2061 OT_1B" and "#2062 OT_1B+"). The inside of the set boundary is the machine movement valid range. This is valid when the axis parameter #2063 is set to 2, and cannot be used with soft limit IB.

Basic machine coordinate system

Point 1

P ro

hi bi

te d

ra ng

e

Machine movement valid range

P ro

hi bi

te d

ra ng

e

Point 2

Point 3

Point 4

Additional movement range

The following values are set with the coordinate values in the basic machine coordinate system.

Point 3 : #2062 OT_1B+ Point 4 : #2061 OT_1B

Points 1 and 2 are the prohibited range set with stored stroke limit I, and points 3 and 4 are the prohibited range set with stored stroke limit II.

The following values are set with the coordinate values in the basic machine coordinate system.

Point 3 : #2062 OT_1B+ Point 4 : #2061 OT_1B

Points 1 and 2 are the prohibited range set with stored stroke limit I.

5. Stored Stroke Limit 5.5 Movable Range during Inclined Axis Control

III-34

5.5 Movable Range during Inclined Axis Control

By setting #2063 OT_1Btype to "3", the inclined axis control axis can be checked with the program coordinates using the stored stroke limit IB/IC range setting (#2061, #2062). The stored stroke limit IB and IC cannot be used together at this time. By using this function with stored stroke limit I, the check can be carried out simultaneously with the actual axis and program coordinate value. In this case, the range that does not fit into either of the following two prohibited ranges will be the movable range.

y axis

Movable range

Movement prohibited range

X axis

Y axis

Point 1

Point 2

Point 3

Point 4

The following values are set with the coordinate values in the basic machine coordinate system.

Point 3: #2062 OT_1B+ Point 4: #2061 OT_1B

Points 1 and 2 are the prohibited range set with stored stroke limit I.

5. Stored Stroke Limit 5.6 Stored Stroke Limit for Rotation Axis

III-35

5.6 Stored Stroke Limit for Rotation Axis

Stored stroke limits I and II are used as the stored stroke limit for the rotation axis. The area between the maximum and minimum values of the prohibited range's parameters, which does not contain the 0 point of the basic machine coordinate system, is the entry prohibited range. The prohibited range parameters for the rotation axis can be set to establish "maximum value < minimum value". This will be handled in the same manner as if "maximum value > minimum value". (Example)

Stored stroke limit I (maximum value and minimum value of prohibited range parameter) #2013 OT: 70.000 #2014 OT+: 60.000 Stored stroke limit II (maximum value and minimum value of prohibited range parameter)

#8204 Soft limit : 30.000 #8205 Soft limit +: 80.000

80

70 (290)

60 30

0

Stored stroke limit I entry prohibited range

Movable range

Stored stroke limit II entry prohibited range

(Note) Do not use stored stroke limits IB, IIB or IC. Invalidate stored stroke limits IB, IIB and IC by setting the parameters as shown below.

#8210 OT INSIDE: 0 (stored stroke limit II valid, IIB invalid) #2061, #2062 set to same value (stored stroke limits IB and IC invalid)

5. Stored Stroke Limit 5.7 Precautions

III-36

5.7 Precautions (1) If the maximum value and minimum value of the stored stroke limit's prohibited range are set to the same

value, the following will occur. (a) When the maximum value and minimum value are set to 0, if the outside is the prohibited range, the

entire range will be prohibited. If the inside is the prohibited range, the entire range will be the moveable range.

(b) If data other than 0 is set for the maximum value and minimum value, the entire range will be the moveable range.

(2) The stored stroke limit IC is valid when the axis parameter #2063 is changed. If changed during automatic operation, the function will be validated after the smoothing for all axes reaches 0.

(3) Make sure that the lower limit value of the stored stroke limit IC setting value is "smaller than the upper limit value".

(4) The axis parameters #2063, #2061 and #2062 can be changed with DDB.

6. Daily Maintenance and Periodic Inspection and Maintenance 6.1 Maintenance Tools

III-37

6. Daily Maintenance and Periodic Inspection and Maintenance

6.1 Maintenance Tools

(1) Measuring instruments The following measuring instruments are used to confirm that the voltage is being supplied correctly to the NC unit, to confirm that the wiring to the NC unit is correct, and to carry out simple troubleshooting.

Tool Condition Application

Tester To check that the wiring to the NC unit is correct before turning the power ON.

AC voltmeter Measure the AC power voltage. The tolerable error is 2% or less.

To measures the AC power voltage being supplied to the external 24VDC power supply unit.

DC voltmeter Max. scale 30V. The tolerable error is 2% or less.

To measure the DC power voltage. External power supply 24V (control section, machine input/output interface) Battery voltage HR081/HR082/HR083 DC output

Phase rotation meter

To check the connection order of the AC 3-phase input power supply.

Oscilloscope General measurement and simple troubleshooting

(Note 1) Currently, a high-accuracy digital multi-meter is commonly used as a tester. This digital multi-meter can be used as both an AC voltmeter and an DC voltmeter.

(Note 2) A logic analyzer (sampling cycle 200MHz or more) is required for complicated troubleshooting.

(2) Tools Screwdriver (large, medium, small) Radio pliers

6.2 Maintenance Items

Maintenance is categorized into daily maintenance items (items to be carried at set intervals) and periodic maintenance items (replacement of parts when life is reached). Some parts will not function in a hardware manner when the life is reached, so these should be replaced before the life is reached.

Class Name Life Inspection/replacement Remarks Daily maintenance

Escutcheon Once/two months (Accordingly when dirty)

Periodic maintenance

Battery (lithium battery)

Cumulative data holding time 45,000 hr

When battery voltage drop caution alarm occurs (Guideline: approx. 5 years)

Refer to Section 6.3.2 (1).

Cooling fan (control section)

30,000 hr Refer to left.

Other consumable parts

Operation board 106 punches Refer to left.

6. Daily Maintenance and Periodic Inspection and Maintenance 6.2 Maintenance Items

III-38

6.2.1 Escutcheon

(1) Cleaning the escutcheon 1) Keep the rear side of the escutcheon as clean as possible. 2) Wipe the escutcheon with a soft, clean, dry cloth. If cleaning is still required, put some neutral

detergent on a cloth and wipe. Do not use alcohol, thinner, etc. 6.2.2 LCD Panel

(1) Handling the LCD panel (a) Precautions for use

1) The polarizing plate (display surface) of the LCD panel surface can be easily scratched, so be careful during handling.

2) Glass is used in the LCD panel. Be careful not to drop the LCD panel or allow it to hit hard objects, as the glass may chip or break.

3) The polarizing plate may be stained or discolored if drops of water, etc., adhere to it for long periods, so be sure to wipe off any moisture immediately.

4) Wipe off any dirt, dust, etc., on the polarizing plate using absorbent cotton or other soft cloth. 5) A CMOS LSI is used in the LCD panel, so be careful of static electricity when handling. 6) Never disassemble the LCD panel. Doing so will damage the panel.

(b) Precautions for storage 1) Do not store the LCD panel in locations having a high temperature or humidity. (Store within the

storage temperature range.) 2) When storing the LCD panel as an individual unit, be sure that other objects do not touch or hit the

polarizing plate (display surface). 3) When storing the LCD panel for long periods, be sure to store in a dark place away from exposure to

direct sunlight or fluorescent light. (2) Other precautions for use (a) Backlight life

The life of the backlight is 25,000 hours for the 7.2-inch type and 25,000 hours for the 10.4-inch type at 25C. (Time for luminance to drop to 50% of the initial value.) The backlight life is dependent on the temperature. The life tends to be shorter when used continuously at lower temperatures. Deterioration of the backlight can be prevented by turning OFF the backlight with the screen saver function when the screen is not used for a long time.

(b) Luminance start Due to the characteristics of the backlight, the luminance could drop slightly at lower temperatures. It will take approx.10 to 15 minutes for the luminance to reach the rated value after the power is turned ON.

(c) Unevenness, luminescent spots and irregularities Uneven brightness, small luminescent spots or small dark spots may appear on LCD, but this is not a fault.

(d) Contrast The contrast of STN method LCD panels changes with temperature fluctuation. If this happens and the panel is difficult to see, open the operation box door and adjust the contrast with the contrast adjustment potentiometer on the LCD signal interface PCB.

(3) Replacing the backlight Replacement should be commissioned to the Mitsubishi Service Center.

6. Daily Maintenance and Periodic Inspection and Maintenance 6.2 Maintenance Items

III-39

6.2.3 ATA Memory Card

(1) Handling the PCMCIA card The general handling methods for the PCMCIA card are described below. Refer to the instruction manual of the PCMCIA card used for details.

(a) Precautions for use 1) Insert the card in the correct direction. 2) Do not touch the connector area with the hands or metal. 3) Do not apply excessive force to the connector area. 4) Do not subject the card to bending or strong impacts. 5) Do not open the cover or disassemble the card. 6) Do not use the card in dusty locations.

(b) Precautions for storage 1) Do not store the card in locations having a high temperature or humidity. 2) Do not store the card in dusty locations.

6. Daily Maintenance and Periodic Inspection and Maintenance 6.3 Replacement Methods

III-40

6.3 Replacement Methods

6.3.1 Cable If the cable is replaced without turning the power OFF, the normal unit or peripheral devices could be damaged, and risks could be imposed. Disconnect each cable with the following procedures. (a) For the following type of connector, press the tabs with a thumb and forefinger in the direction of the

arrow, and pull the connector off.

Y

(1) Press (1) Press

(2) Pull (2) Pull

(1) Press

(1) Press

(2) Pull

(2) Pull

View from above

Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.

Do not connect the cable by pulling on the cable wire.

CAUTION

6. Daily Maintenance and Periodic Inspection and Maintenance 6.3 Replacement Methods

III-41

(b) For a flat cable type connector with latches, open the latches in the directions of the arrows, and pull the connector off.

(1) Open

(2) Pull

(c) For a flat cable type connector without latches, hold the connector with a thumb and forefinger, and pull the connector off.

(1) Hold with thumb and forefinger.

(2) Pull

(d) For the screw fixed type connector, loosen the two fixing screws, and pull the connector off. (1) Loosen

(1) Loosen

(2) Pull (2) Pull

Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.

Do not connect the cable by pulling on the cable wire.

CAUTION

6. Daily Maintenance and Periodic Inspection and Maintenance 6.3 Replacement Methods

III-42

6.3.2 Durable Parts

(1) Control unit battery All data, such as the parameters and machining programs that need to be backed up when the power is turned OFF, are saved by a lithium battery installed in the control unit's battery holder.

Battery With ER6 connector (Toshiba with Mitsubishi specifications) Initial battery voltage 3.6V

Voltage at which voltage drop is detected

2.8V (Battery voltage drop caution alarm screen display) 2.6V (Battery voltage drop warning alarm screen display + control section LED display)

Battery cumulative data holding time

45,000 hours (At room temperature. The life will be shorter if the temperature is high.)

Battery life Approx. 5 years (from date of battery manufacture) Discharge current 40A or less

(Note) Replace the battery when the battery voltage drop caution alarm appears on the NC screen. The internal data could be damaged if the battery voltage drop warning alarm appears.

(a) Replacement procedures

Always replace the battery with the control section (machine) power turned OFF. Complete the replacement within 30 minutes after turning the power OFF. (If the battery is not connected within 30 minutes, the data being backed up will be destroyed.) 1) Turn the control section (machine) power OFF. 2) Open the electric cabinet door, and confirm that the control unit LED, 7-segment display, etc., are all

OFF. 3) If an extension unit is mounted, and a cable is connected to the front of the control section,

disconnect the cable. 4) Open the front cover of the control section by pulling on the right side of the door (the side without

fixing screws). 5) Remove the battery from the battery holder. 6) Pull the connector connected to the battery out from the BAT connector on the control section

HR081/HR082/HR083 power supply PCB. 7) Replace the battery with the new one. Insert the connector connected to the new battery into the

BAT connector on the control section HR081/HR082/HR083 PCB. Pay attention to the connector orientation, being careful not to insert backwards.

8) Fit the battery into the battery holder. 9) Close the front cover of the control section. At this time, confirm that the cover is closed by listening

for the "click" sound when the latch catches. 10) Close the door of the electric cabinet.

HR081/082/HR083 BAT connector

Connection connector Battery holder Battery

Front cover

Open the front cover of the control section.

Control section

6. Daily Maintenance and Periodic Inspection and Maintenance 6.3 Replacement Methods

III-43

(b) Precautions for handling battery Always replace the battery with the same type. Do not disassemble the battery. Do not place the battery in flames or water. Do not pressurize and deform the battery. This is a primary battery so do not charge it. Dispose of the spent battery as industrial waste.

(2) External battery unit battery

When the external battery unit (FCU6-BT4D1) is used, the data, such as the parameters and machining programs, which needs to be backed up when the power is turned OFF, is held by the lithium battery mounted on the external battery unit. The external battery unit is provided with one AA battery (E6) for the control unit, and four AA batteries (ER6-B4D-01) for the servo amplifier. The control unit battery is the same as the battery mounted on the control unit. The servo amplifier battery's characteristics, such as the holding time, differs according to the servo amplifier configuration, so refer to the servo amplifier manual.

Battery unit: FCU6-BT4D1

SH21

SH21

F240 CR05

System 1

To feed axis servo ampli f ier

To auxi liary axis servo ampli f ier

To NC control unit

Provide an allowance in the cable wiring so that the battery unit can be pulled out during replacement.

System 2Servo battery

HR071 NC battery

Unit type : FCU6-BT4D1 Replacement part type : For NC ER6 BKO-NC2157H01 (single battery replacement)

For servo ER6-B4D-01 BKO-NC2151H06 (PCB unit replacement)

6. Daily Maintenance and Periodic Inspection and Maintenance 6.3 Replacement Methods

III-44

(a) NC side battery replacement procedures Always replace the external battery unit's battery with the control section (machine) power turned ON. (This is because there is no need to open the machine's electric cabinet door.)

1) Remove the four screws on the front cover, and pull the external battery unit out. 2) Remove the two screws on the cable relay PCB HR071, and remove the HR071A card. 3) Remove the battery (ER6) from the battery holder. 4) Pull the connector connected to the battery from the BAT connector on the cable relay PCB

HR071. 5) Replace the battery with a new one. Insert the connector connected to the new battery to the BAT

connector on the cable relay PCB HR071. Pay attention to the connector orientation, being careful not to insert backwards.

6) Fit the battery into the battery holder. 7) Fix the cable relay PCB HR071 onto the external battery unit, and insert and fix the external

battery unit into the electric cabinet.

(b) Servo side battery replacement procedures The absolute position data is backed up with the feed axis servo and auxiliary axis servo systems. Thus, if the battery voltage drop warning occurs in either the feed axis servo or auxiliary axis servo, the battery (ER6-B4D-01) must be replaced. The battery (ER6-B4D-01) is an assembled battery PCB type. The battery is replaced with the amplifier control power ON in the same manner as the control section replacement procedures. If the battery voltage drop warning occurs, do not turn the amplifier control power OFF. (There is no need to turn ON the main circuit power or cancel the emergency stop.)

If the battery voltage drop warning alarm occurs, the programs, tool data and parameters could be damaged. Thus, reload each data with the input/output device after replacing the battery.

Do not short circuit, charge, overheat, incinerate or disassemble the battery. Dispose the spent battery according to local laws.

CAUTION

6. Daily Maintenance and Periodic Inspection and Maintenance 6.3 Replacement Methods

III-45

6.3.3 Unit

(1) Control unit (a) Replacement procedures

Always replace the control unit with the machine power turned OFF. 1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.) 2) Open the electric cabinet door. 3) Disconnect all cables connected to the control unit. 4) Remove the screws fixing the control unit onto the control unit installation fitting, and remove the

control unit from the control unit installation fitting. (Loosen the two lower fixing screws first, and then remove the two upper fixing screws while supporting the unit with a hand. Then lift the unit upward and off. The two lower fixing screws do not need to be removed.)

5) Replace with a new control unit, and fix the control unit onto control section installation fitting with the fixing screws.

6) Connect all cables connected to the control unit. (Connect the cables to the designated connectors.) 7) Check the cables and wires for connection leaks, faulty connections, etc., then close the electric

cabinet door.

Control unit Fixing screws (4 screws)

Control unit installation f i tting

CAUTION

Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors. Do not replace the control unit while the power is ON. Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.

6. Daily Maintenance and Periodic Inspection and Maintenance 6.3 Replacement Methods

III-46

(2) Base I/O unit The base I/O unit is generally installed on the electric cabinet side.

(a) Replacement procedures

Always replace the base I/O unit with the machine power turned OFF. 1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.) 2) Open the electric cabinet door. 3) Disconnect all cables connected to the base I/O unit. 4) Remove the screws fixing the base I/O unit to the electric cabinet, and remove the base I/O unit from

the electric cabinet. (Loosen the two lower fixing screws first, and then remove the two upper fixing screws while supporting the unit with a hand. Then lift the unit upward and off. The two lower fixing screws do not need to be removed.)

5) Replace with a new base I/O unit, and fix the unit onto the electric cabinet with the fixing screws. 6) Connect all cables connected to the base I/O unit. (Connect the cables to the designated connectors.) 7) Check the cables and wires for connection leaks, faulty connections, etc., then close the electric

cabinet door.

Fixing screws (4 screws)

Base I/O unit

Electric cabinet

Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors. Do not replace the base I/O unit while the power is ON. Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.

CAUTION

6. Daily Maintenance and Periodic Inspection and Maintenance 6.3 Replacement Methods

III-47

6.3.4 Control PCB (1) Control section power supply PCB (HR081/HR082/HR083)

The control section power supply PCB is supplied with 24VDC from an external source. This PCB generates the DC voltage required for each control PCB in the control section.

(a) Replacement procedures Always replace the control section power supply PCB with the machine power turned OFF. A battery for backing up the memory is mounted on the control section power supply PCB, so as with the battery, replace the control section power supply PCB within 30 minutes. 1) Confirm that the machine power is OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.) 2) Open the electric cabinet door, and confirm that the control unit LED, 7-segment display, etc., are all

OFF. 3) Disconnect all cables connected to the control section power supply PCB. 4) If an extension unit is mounted, and a cable is connected to the front of the control section,

disconnect the cable. 5) Open the front cover of the control section by pulling on the right side of the door (the side without

fixing screws). 6) While holding the front upper and lower sections of the control section power supply PCB with both

hands, pull out the PCB from the control section. 7) Remove the battery from the control section power supply PCB that was removed from the control

section. 8) Replace the battery with the new one. Insert the connector connected to the new battery into the

BAT connector on the HR081/082 control section PCB. 9) Install the control section power supply PCB into the control section. (Align the control section power

supply PCB with the PCB fixing guides on the inner side of the control section case, and then install.) 10) Connect all cables that were connected to the control section power supply PCB. (Connect all

cables to the designated connectors.) 11) Close the front cover of the control section. At this time, confirm that the cover is closed by listening

for the "click" sound when the latch catches. 12) Close the door of the electric cabinet.

Control section case

Control section power supply PCB PCB f ixing guides

Control section case

Control section

Open the front cover of the control section.

Control section power supply PCB

BAT connector

Battery holder Battery

Front cover

Connection connector

Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors. Do not replace the control section power supply PCB while the power is ON. Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.

CAUTION

6. Daily Maintenance and Periodic Inspection and Maintenance 6.3 Replacement Methods

III-48

(2) Expansion PCB The expansion PCB is used to expand the system for adding a serial port, etc. (Refer to the "I Connection Manual, Section 2.2" in the Connection and Maintenance Manual BNP-B2183 for information related to expansion PCB types and functions.) Up to two expansion PCBs can be added. The PCBs are mounted in the RT #1/#2 slots on the right side of the control section power supply PCB.

(a) Replacement procedures Always replace the expansion PCB with the machine power turned OFF.

1) Confirm that the machine power is OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.) 2) Open the electric cabinet door, and confirm that the control unit LED, 7-segment display, etc., are all

OFF. 3) Disconnect all cables connected to the control unit and expansion PCB. 4) Open the front cover of the control section as shown in the drawing below. 5) While holding the front upper and lower sections of the expansion PCB with both hands, pull out the

PCB from the control section. 6) Replace with the new expansion PCB. If the PCB has setting locations, set to the same settings as

the old PCB. 7) Install the expansion PCB into the slot in which the old PCB was mounted.

(Align the expansion PCB with the PCB fixing guides on the inner side of the control section case, and then install.)

8) Close the front cover of the control section. 9) Connect all cables that were connected to the control unit and expansion PCB.

(Connect all cables to the designated connectors.) 10) Close the door of the electric cabinet.

Expansion PCB mounting slot

Open the front cover of the control section.

Front cover

Control section case

Expansion PCB PCB f ixing guides

Control section case

Expansion PCB

Control section

Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors. Do not replace the expansion PCB while the power is ON. Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.

CAUTION

6. Daily Maintenance and Periodic Inspection and Maintenance 6.3 Replacement Methods

III-49

6.3.5 Memory Cassette

(1) HR4xx

The memory cassette is a PCB used to store user PLC and machining programs, and is installed on the CBUS#2 connector of the control section.

(a) Replacement procedures

Always replace the memory cassette with the machine power turned OFF. Before replacing RAM-type memory cassettes, always make a backup of the memory to be replaced using an external I/O device, etc. Then, re-input the details after replacing the memory cassette.

Confirm that the control unit power is OFF. (1) Open the control unit cover from the right side. (2) While holding the top and bottom of the memory cassette with a thumb and forefinger, pull out the

memory cassette from the control section. (3) Install the new memory cassette in the control section.

Install by carrying out steps (1) and (2) in reverse (2) (1) order. (Align the memory cassette with the cassette fixing guides on the NC control case.)

RR

M EM

O R

Y C

ASETTE Ver.* FC

U6-HR 4** SER

.9801001

M EM

O R

Y C

ASETTE Ver.* FC

U6-HR 4** SER

.9801001

CBUS#1 CBUS#2

Cassette guides

Enlarged view

Memory cassette

Control section case

(2) Pull out the memory cassette.

(1) Open the front cover of the control section. Front cover

Memory cassette

6. Daily Maintenance and Periodic Inspection and Maintenance 6.3 Replacement Methods

III-50

(2) Method for disassembling the cassette cover

R

L

M EM

O R

Y C

AS ET

TE

V

er .*

FC U6

-H R

4* *

SE R

.9 80

10 01

Installation guides

Case B

Case A Memory card Name label

Push

1) Remove the name label holding case A and B. 2) Press the indented area on case B and separate the case into parts A and B. 3) Remove the memory card inside from the installation guides.

Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors. Do not replace the memory cassette while the power is ON. Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON. Be careful that metal cutting chips, etc., do not come into contact with the connector contacts of the memory cassette.

CAUTION

6. Daily Maintenance and Periodic Inspection and Maintenance 6.3 Replacement Methods

III-51

6.3.6 High-speed Program Server

(1) High-speed program server unit (FCU6-EP203-1) The high-speed program server is configured of the HR831 and HR832 cards and an F150 cable. It is replaced as a unit.

(a) Replacement procedures

Turn the machine power OFF before replacing the high-speed program server unit.

Front cover

PCB fixing claw

High-speed program server unit (FCU6-EP203-1)

Open the control section's front cover.

High-speed program server unit storage section (enlarged view)

Ethernet interface PCB (HR832)

Control section

IC card interface PCB (HR831)

F150 cable

EXTPCI connector

Incorrect connections will cause device damage, so always connect the cable to the specified connector. Do not replace the high-speed program server unit while the power is ON.

CAUTION

7. Troubleshooting 7.1 Confirmation of Trouble State

III-52

7. Troubleshooting

7.1 Confirmation of Trouble State Confirm "when", "when doing what", and "what kind of" trouble occurred.

(1) When?

What time did the trouble occur?

(2) When doing what?

What was the NC operation mode?

During automatic operation .......... Program No., sequence No. and program details when the trouble occurred.

During manual operation .............. What was the manual operation mode? What was the operation procedure? What were the previous and next steps?

What was the setting and display unit screen? Did the trouble occur during input/output operations? What was the machine side state? Did the trouble occur while replacing the tools? Did hunting occur in the control axis?

(3) What kind of trouble?

What was displayed on the setting and display unit's Alarm Diagnosis screen? Display the Alarm Diagnosis screen, and check the alarm details. What was displayed for the machine sequence alarm? Is the CRT and LCD screen normal?

(4) How frequently?

When did the trouble occur? What was the frequency? (Does it occur when other machines are operating?) If the trouble occurs infrequently or if it occurs during the operation of another machine, there may be an error in the power voltage or the trouble may be caused by noise, etc. Check whether the power voltage is normal (does it drop momentarily when other machines are operating?), and whether noise measures have been taken.

Does the trouble occur during a specific mode? Does the trouble occur when the overhead crane is operating? What is the frequency in the same workpiece? Check whether the same trouble can be repeated during the same operation. Check whether the same trouble occurs when the conditions are changed. (Try changing the override, program details, and operation procedures, etc.) What is the ambient temperature? (Was there a sudden change in the temperature? Was the fan at the top of the control unit rotating?) Is there any contact defect or insulation defect in the cables? (Has any oil or cutting water splattered onto the cables?)

7. Troubleshooting 7.2 When in Trouble

III-53

7.2 When in Trouble If the system does not operate as planned or if there is any trouble in the operation, confirm the following points and then contact the Mitsubishi Service Center.

Examples of trouble

Nothing appears in the NC screen, LED, etc., even when the power ON button is pressed. The power turns OFF suddenly. Nothing appears on the NC screen, or the screen is completely white. The operation keys do not function. The NC screen appears but the operation board key input does not

function. Machining operation is not possible.

7. Troubleshooting 7.2 When in Trouble

III-54

(1) Problems related to the power supply The power does not turn ON.

Cause Remedy The power cord is disconnected or

loose. Check the cable between the NC unit and the external power supply, and between the external power supply and socket. Make sure that the cable is inserted securely. Check that there are no wires broken in the cable. If broken, replace the cable.

The door interlock is applied. If the control panel door is not completely closed, close it. If the door interlock is applied even when the door is closed, the door interlock circuit is damaged. Repair it.

There is a problem in the power socket.

If the socket has a switch, turn the switch ON. Make sure that the specified power voltage and power frequency is being output from the socket.

The external power supply is faulty.

Check that the power can be turned ON with just the external power supply. (Note) Depending on the external power supply being

used, the power may not turn ON in the no-load state, so install a slight load and check.

The ON/OFF cable is short- circuited.

Disconnect the ON/OFF cable and check that it is not short-circuited. If short-circuited, replace the cable.

The external power supply's input voltage is not as specified.

Check that the input voltage is within 200 to 230VAC +10 to 15%, 100 to 115VAC +10 to 15%, and 24VDC5%.

The external power turns ON but the NC control power does not turn ON. Cause Remedy

The external power supply output is not correct.

Disconnect the cable between the NC unit and the external power supply, and check that the external power supply output is normal. Wire the cable between the NC unit and external power supply, and check that the external power supply output is normal.

The cable connected from the NC unit to the peripheral device is short-circuited.

Disconnect the cable connected to the peripheral device one at a time and check that the power turns ON. Check that there are no short-circuited cables.

There is a short circuit in the configuration card.

Remove the removable cards one at a time and check that the power turns ON. Check that there are no short-circuited cards.

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector. Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.

Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.

Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.

Do not connect or disconnect the PCBs while the power is ON.

CAUTION

7. Troubleshooting 7.2 When in Trouble

III-55

The power turns OFF.

Cause Remedy There is a problem in the power

socket. Check whether the voltage fluctuates at certain time zones. Check whether an instantaneous power failure has occurred.

A problem occurs when the peripheral device starts operating.

Check whether the voltage drops instantaneously when the peripheral device operation starts.

The HR081/HR082/HR083 power card PSEMG (red) LED is lit. Cause Remedy

The emergency stop switch connected to the EMG connector is ON (A contact), or the EMG connector is disconnected.

Set the emergency stop switch to the release (B contact) state. Check the connection to the EMG connector.

The HR081/HR082/HR083 power card BATALM (red) LED is lit. Cause Remedy

The LED lights when the voltage of the battery connected to the HR081/HR082/HR083 BAT connector has dropped to 2.6V 0.065V or less.

Refer to section 6.3.2 and replace the battery.

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector. Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.

Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.

Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.

Do not connect or disconnect the PCBs while the power is ON.

CAUTION

7. Troubleshooting 7.2 When in Trouble

III-56

(2) Problems when starting the system The NC does not start up correctly.

Cause Remedy 8 is displayed on the CPU card's

7-segment display NCLD1. Check that the rotary switch NCSYS is set to 0. If not set to 0, set to 0 and restart.

E or F is displayed on the CPU card's 7-segment display NCLD1.

Contact the Mitsubishi Service Center.

(3) Problems related to remote I/O The communication alarm LED RAL is lit.

Cause Remedy The remote connection cable

(SH41) of RIO System 1 or System 2 is not connected. The cable has broken wires or the contact is defective.

Check the connection of the remote connection cable F010 with the NC control section or the cable SH41 between the remote I/Os.

The HR3 card is defective. Contact the Mitsubishi Service Center, and then replace the card.

The power supply system LED is not lit. Cause Remedy

The 24IN LED is not lit. (The input power is not being supplied.)

Supply a +24V5% voltage to the HR3OO card.

The 5OUT LED is not lit. (The input power is not within the tolerable range, or the internal power is faulty.)

Check that the input voltage is not +20V or less. If it is being supplied correctly, contact the Mitsubishi Service Center.

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.

Doing so may lead to destruction or damage. Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.

Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.

Do not connect or disconnect the PCBs while the power is ON.

CAUTION

8. Maintenance Functions 8.1 Data Input/Output Function

III-57

8. Maintenance Functions The machining programs, parameters and tool data, etc., are saved in the memory. However, these

contents could be lost due to the battery life, etc. To avoid total loss, save the machining programs, tool data and parameters in an input/output device.

8.1 Data Input/Output Function The data can be collectively input/output or collated in the data input/output screen. This function can be

used to protect data and investigate failure causes at the customer premises. It can handle three types of data shown below. Hex data is converted and output in the ISO/EIA format. Individual data items can also be input/output or collated separately. This function is valid only while the user PLC is halted.

1. Table data: The data area is reserved in advance. Parameter (system, common, axis, machine error) PLC data (PLC timer, PLC counter, PLC constants, bit selection, ATC data, axis control) Work offset data Backup data (PLC latch relay, PLC switch, program No.) 2. File data: The file format is required before data input. Tool offset data Common variables Tool life control data 3. PLC program data: PLC program area data Ladder (ROM: Ladder, message)

Screen Setting

Display

RS-232C device

Input

Output

PLC ladder

Tool offset Common variables Tool life

PLC axis parameter

PLC data PLC timer, PLC counter

Backup data PLC switch, latch relay, program No.

R register PLC constant, bit selection, ATC data, user backup

Parameter table

System, common axis, machine error, work, offset

Fixed cycle program

Machining program

1

2

3

8. Maintenance Functions 8.1 Data Input/Output Function

III-58

8.1.1 Data Format The tape output format of single data is as follows:

E O R

E O B

"Ox ... " indicates hexadecimal data. Example : Ox64 = (6 16 + 4 = 100)

O : Type of output data N : Sequence number (0,1,2 ... in units of four L data items) L : Data is output in units of 4 bytes (hex). M: Data is output in units of 1 byte (hex).

0 x 3 2 0 0 5 0

0 x 6 4

0 x 0

0 x 3 2

0 x 1 0 0 0 1

N 0 L 3 2 0 0 5 0 L 6 4 L 0 L 3 2 N 1 L 1 0 0 0 1

Feed Feed Header Data

Data Feed Feed

O E O B

E O R

E O B

E O B

The output format of continuous data (batch output data) is as follows:

Feed Feed Header 1 Data 1

Data n Feed

E O B

E O R

E O B

E O B

E O B

E O B

E O B

Feed Header 2 Data 2

FeedHeader nFeed

E O B

E O B

E O B

E O B

E O R

(Note) The number of feeds is the value set with the input/output parameter #9114.

8. Maintenance Functions 8.1 Data Input/Output Function

III-59

Table data 1 (No.100~149)

No. Data details ALL output 100 System common parameters ALL1 102 Axis independent parameters (including PLC axis) 103 Machine error offset data, offset amount 105 PLC constants, work counter (R2800~R2899) 106 PLC timer 107 PLC counter 108 Bit selection parameter (R2900~R2947) 109 (Not used) 110 Work offset 111 R register (R2950~R3639) 112 R register user backup (R1900~R2799) 113 PLC latch relay L 114 PLC switch 115 Program No. 116 Timer cumulative output 117 Counter cumulative output 118 PLC timer expansion 119 Bit selection parameter expansion (R4400~R4449) 130 Tool life management I (R3000~R3639) 133 Position switch 134 PLC timer cumulative current value 135 PLC counter cumulative current value 136 R register system backup (R1880~R1899) 138 Tool life management II (R5480~R6279) 140 Spindle parameter 141 Communication parameters 142 Common variable name

Table data 2 (No.150~199)

No. Data details ALL output 150 Data history (operation history) 152 Special process backup

8. Maintenance Functions 8.1 Data Input/Output Function

III-60

Table data 3 (No.200~249)

No. Data details ALL output M system L system ALL2 200 Tool length offset (shape) Tool offset (X shape) 201 Tool length offset (wear) Tool offset (X wear) 202 Tool diameter offset (shape) Tool offset (Z shape) 203 Tool diameter offset (wear) Tool offset (Z wear)

204 Tool offset (Tool offset selection additional axis shape)

205 Tool life Tool offset (Tool offset selection additional axis wear)

206 Nose R (shape) 207 Nose R (wear) 208 Nose point No. data 209 Common variables for both systems (#500~) 210 Common variable valid flags for both systems (#500~) 230 Common variables independent for systems (#100~) 231 Common variable valid flags independent for systems (#100~)

PLC program (No.250~299)

No. Data details ALL output 250 Ladder ALL3

8. Maintenance Functions 8.1 Data Input/Output Function

III-61

8.1.2 Data Output (1) Explanation of function When the user PLC is stopped, the various data on the data input/output output screen can be

converted from HEX to ISO/EIA and output to the external RS-232C device. User PLC stopping operation This function can be used only when the user PLC is stopped. To stop the user PLC, enter the emergency stop state by pressing the emergency stop button, and set

the rotary switch NCSYS to "1".

Press the "emergency stop" button to enter the emergency stop state.

RESET

Data group output operation

Setting area operation Output data (No.) # (99) DATA ( ALL1) Plain data 100~149 # (99) DATA ( ALL2) File data 200~230 # (99) DATA ( ALL3) PLC program 250~299

Single data output function

Setting area operation Output data (No.) # (99) DATA ( ) Single data 100~149, 200~230, 250~299

(Note 1) If a data No. that is not in the specifications is set, the error message "E06 NO SPEC" will display,

and the data will not be output. When group output is executed, the data not in the specifications will not be output.

8. Maintenance Functions 8.1 Data Input/Output Function

III-62

(2) Data output operation procedure

Stop user PLC.

Confirm output device connection.

Select output screen.

Data output

# (99) Data ( ) Setting and input

Setting data OK?

Start data output.

Execution of data output

Continuous output (ALL)?

End data output

Data output completion

1. EOR and parameter setting feed

"DATA OUT COMPLETE"

No

Yes

1. Header data and EOB 2. Data 3. Parameter setting feed

1. Parameter setting feed and EOR 2. Parameter setting feed and EOB

Yes

No

"DATA OUT EXECUTION"

ALL 1 ALL 2 ALL 3

Data No.

E01 SETTING ERROR E03 NO. NOT FOUND E06 NO SPEC E24 PLC RUN

Feed

Feed Data Header

Feed Feed

E O B

E O R

E O B

E O B

O

E O R

N1

(Note) The number of feeds is the value set with the input/output parameter #9114.

8. Maintenance Functions 8.1 Data Input/Output Function

III-63

(3) Example of data output operation

Confirm that the user PLC is stopped.

Connect the output device.

Call out the data output screen.

DIAGN IN/OUT

INPUT

OUTPUT

1) The data output screen will display. Group output of data ex. ALL1: Plain data (Parameter, R register, work offset, backup data.)

Set 99 in 9 9 setting area, and A L L 1 in the data setting

area. # (99) DATA ( ALL1) Press

INPUT key.

N3L320050L64L0L32 ; DATA OUT EXECUTION # (99) data ( 10 1 )

% DATA OUT COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( )

1) The output will start, and the output data No., output data details, and "DATA OUT EXECUTION" message will display.

2) The output operation will end when the end code % (EOR) is output, and the message "DATA OUT COMPLETE" displays.

8. Maintenance Functions 8.1 Data Input/Output Function

III-64

Output of independent data

Set 9 9 in the # setting area, and the No. of the data to be output in the data setting area. (Ex. Common variable) # (99) DATA ( 209) Press

INPUT key.

N5L320000L10001LF0000BL78; DATA OUT EXECUTION # (99) DATA ( 20 9 )

% DATA OUT COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( )

1) The output will start, and the output data No., output data details, and "DATA OUT EXECUTION" message will display.

2) The output operation will end when the end code % (EOR) is output, and the message "DATA OUT COMPLETE" displays.

(Note 1) The setting of the data protection key will be ignored. (Note 2) Data not found in the specifications will not be output.

8. Maintenance Functions 8.1 Data Input/Output Function

III-65

8.1.3 Data Input and Compare (1) Explanation of function When the PLC is stopped, the data output from the input screen can be input and compared. The target data is the same as for data output. This function is valid only when the user PLC is stopped. (Note 1) If data that exceeds the actual memory size is input or compared, the data of the memory size will

be read in and then the message "E10 MEMORY OVER" will display. The operation will stop. (Note 2) The data protection key setting will basically be ignored. (Note 3) To stop the PLC, enter the emergency stop state, and then set rotary switch NCSYS to "1".

8. Maintenance Functions 8.1 Data Input/Output Function

III-66

(2) Data input operation procedure

Stop user PLC.

Confirm input device connection.

Select output screen.

Data output

# (99) Data ( ) Setting and input

Setting OK?

Start data input.

Read data.

Save OK?

Save data.

Data in completion

"DATA IN COMPLETE"

No

Yes

No

"DATA IN EXECUTION"

E06 NO SPEC E24 PLC RUN E86 INPUT DATA ERR

No

Yes

Yes

Data END (Feed)

Data END (EOR)

No

Yes

E10 MEMORY OVER E17 PARITY H E18 PARITY V E86 INPUT DATA ERR

8. Maintenance Functions 8.1 Data Input/Output Function

III-67

(3) Example of data input operation

Confirm that the user PLC is stopped.

Connect the input device.

Call out the data input screen.

DIAGN IN/OUT

IN/OUT

INPUT

1) The data input screen will display. 2) The input mode is valid when the

screen is selected.

Set 99 in # setting area. # (99) DATA ( )

N2L0L0L10001L10000; DATA IN EXECUTION # (9 9 ) DATA ( 101 )

% DATA IN COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( )

1) The input will start, and the input data details and "DATA IN EXECUTION" message will display.

The No. of the data being input will display in the data setting area.

2) The input operation is com- pleted when the end code % (EOR) is read in. Then the parameters will be written into the EEROM. Do not turn off the power while the message "EEROM WRITE IN PROCESS" is displayed.

When writing to the EEROM is completed, the message "DATA IN COMPLETE" will display.

Press

INPUT key.

# (9 9 ) DATA ( )

8. Maintenance Functions 8.1 Data Input/Output Function

III-68

(4) Data compare operation procedure

Stop user PLC.

Confirm input device connection.

Select output screen.

Data compare

# (99) Data ( ) Setting and input

Setting OK?

Start data compare.

Read data.

Normal data?

Data compare completion

"COMPARE COMPLETE"

Yes

No

"COMPARE EXECUTION"

E06 NO SPEC E24 PLC RUN E86 INPUT DATA ERR

No Yes

Yes

Data END (Feed)

Data END (EOR)

No

Yes

E10 MEMORY OVER E17 PARITY H ERR E18 PARITY V ERR E35 COMPARE ERROR E86 INPUT DATA ERR

No

8. Maintenance Functions 8.1 Data Input/Output Function

III-69

(5) Example of data input operation

Confirm that the user PLC is stopped.

Connect the input device.

Call out the data input screen, and enter the compare mode. # (10) data ( 2)

INPUT

1) The compare mode is canceled when

the screen is changed, and the input mode will be validated. Thus, the mode must be set again.

Set 9 9 in # setting area. # (99) DATA ( )

N2L10001LF0000L0L0; N2L10001LF0000L0L0; COMPARE EXECUTION # (9 9 ) DATA ( 101 )

% % COMPARE COMPLETE # ( ) DATA ( )

1) The compare will start, and the data being compared and "COMPARE EXECUTION" message will display.

The No. of the data will display in the data setting area.

2) When the data is compared normally to the end and the end code % (EOR) is read in, the message "COMPARE COM-PLETE" will display.

3) If a compare error occurs, the message "E35 COMPARE ERROR" will display, and the operation will be stopped.

Press

INPUT key.

# (9 9 ) DATA ( )

8. Maintenance Functions 8.1 Data Input/Output Function

III-70

8.1.4 Parameter Backup

(1) Explanation of function The parameter backup function is used to back up and restore the NC parameters, etc. (including options).

(2) Backup targets The backed up data is the maintenance data output equivalent to ALL1 (table data1) and ALL3 (PLC program). Refer to section "8.1.1 Data Format" for details.

(3) Hardware configuration The memory cassette for maintenance is used to back up and restore the data.

Model Compatible memory cassette for maintenance

M64AS HR410/HR450 M64S HR411/HR451 M65S/M66S HR415/HR455 Others No function

The memory cassette for maintenance is mounted in CBUS#2 on the NC control unit.

NC control unit (back side)

Memory cassette for maintenance (connect to CBUS#2)

(4) Operation methods The data is backed up and restored using the BACKUP screen. Refer to section "4.5 BACKUP Screen" in "I. OPERATION SECTION" for details on operation.

(Note 1) With the M60S, the NC system cannot start if the maintenance memory cassette is not mounted.

8. Maintenance Functions 8.2 Data Sampling

III-71

8.2 Data Sampling

The NC internal data (speed output from NC to amplifier, or feedback data from amplifier, etc.) can be sampled and output serially. (Setup parameter "#1224 aux08/bit0" must be set to "1" to use this function.)

8.2.1 Specifications

Sampling cycle : 3.5ms scale Number of sampled axes : 1 to 18 axes (Servo axes 14 + spindle 4) Number of sampled points : 1 to 8 points Number of sampled data items : With no memory cassette ... Max. 3,072 When using HR412/HR452 (512KB) ... Max. 131,072 When using HR422/HR462 (1MB) ... Max. 262,144 When using HR432/HR472 (2MB) ... Max. 524,288 (Note 1) The memory cassette is mounted in CBUS#1. (Note 2) The maximum number of sampled data items is the number of all sampled points. When the data

to be sampled increases, the number of sampled points will drop per data item.

[Restrictions]

(1) When using this function, do not use the input/output functions (PLC, APLC, MELDASNET or anshin-net) or the onboard.

(2) If the machining program is longer than 1280m or if APLC is added, the memory cassette cannot be designated.

(3) If a memory cassette is mounted in CBUS#1 for a purpose other than data sampling (to run APLC on the SRAM, etc.), the expansion memory cannot be used to sample the data.

(4) The data set with this function is not output to the parameters. (5) When the power is turned ON, "#0 Sampling start" will be set to "0" (sampling stop). (The data set in #1 to #27 will be held.)

8. Maintenance Functions 8.2 Data Sampling

III-72

8.2.2 Operation Procedures

Set items?

Y

N

Set #1 Cycle to #18 Address 8.

*1

Set #0 Sampling start to "1".

*3

Use extension function?

Y

N

*2

Output sampling data *5

*5 Refer to section "8.2.4 Data Output Procedures".

Sampling process

*1 Go to N if previously set values are to be used.

*2 Go to Y when using ring buffer, or to set special ending conditions.

Set #21 Process type to #27 Data mask.

*3 During manual start

... Process is executed immediately Other than the above

... The trigger standby state is entered, and the execution is started after the start trigger is detected.

*4 *4

Refer to section (11) in "8.2.3 Setting and Display Items" for details on the ending conditions.

START

END

Refer to section "8.2.3 Setting and Display Items" for details on each setting item.

8. Maintenance Functions 8.2 Data Sampling

III-73

8.2.3 Setting and Display Items

The various data related to sampling of data is set and displayed on the NC-DATA SAMPLING screen.

AUX-PRM AUX-MON SUPPORT MENU

[NC-DATA SAMPLING] ALARM/DIAGN 11.2/2 # 0 SMT START 0 SMT COUNTER 0 Sampling stop # 1 CYCLE 1 #11 ADR1 00000300 #21 PROCESS FORM 0 # 2 MARKS 2 #12 ADR2 00010000 #22 E-CONDITION 0 # 3 BUFFER 0 #13 ADR3 00000000 #23 VARIABLE NO. 0 # 4 CAPACITY 2 #14 ADR4 00000000 #24 PLC DEVICE X0000 # 5 S-CONDITION 0 #15 ADR5 00000000 #25 ADDRESS 00000000 #16 ADR6 00000000 #26 DATA 00000000 #17 ADR7 00000000 #27 DATA MASK 00000000 #18 ADR8 00000000 #( ) ( )

(Note 1) #21 to #27 are extension functions and normally do not need to be set. (Note 2) The data cannot be set when "#1224 aux08/bit0" is set to "0".

(1) STATE display

The current status is displayed.

Display Status "sampling" Sampling is being executed. "sampling stop" Sampling is not being executed, or the sampling process has

completed. "TRIGGER WAIT" When #5 is not set to "0" (manual start), this indicates that state

from when #0 was set to "1" to when the sampling start trigger was detected and sampling was started.

(2) SMT COUNTER (sampling counter)

The position of the sampling buffer during the sampling process is displayed. When the sampling buffer is valid, the head of the buffer can be seen with the value of the counter at the end of sampling.

Sampling buffer 0 1 : n-1 End of buffer (newest data) Sampling counter (n) n Head of buffer (oldest data) :

8. Maintenance Functions 8.2 Data Sampling

III-74

(3) #0 SMT START (setting range: 0, 1, 9) 0: Sampling stop 1: Sampling start 2: Sampling forced end

Sampling will start when "1" is set. This will be set to "0" when sampling is completed. The operation when "1" is set will differ according to the #5 setting.

#5 setting Operation 0 Sampling starts immediately. Other than 0 System waits for trigger, and sampling starts when trigger is

detected.

If "9" is set during the sampling process, the sampling will stop immediately, and the value will be set to 0.

(4) #1 CYCLE (setting range: 1 to 255) Set the sampling cycle. Cycle = 1.7ms 2 scale Scale = (setting value + 1) /2 [integer value] (Example) When setting value is 1 or 2: 3.5ms cycle

When setting value is 3 or 4: 7.1ms cycle

(5) #2 MARKS (setting range: 1 to 8) Set the number of sampling points. (Note) The sampling buffer will be divided by the set number of points. The number of samples per point

will decrease when the number of sampling points is increased.

(6) #3 BUFFER (setting range: 0 to 1) Set the range of the buffer to be used.

0: Internal memory (DRAM) 1: Memory cassette (capacity is automatically judged)

"1" cannot be selected in the following cases: When the memory cassette is not mounted When the machining program capacity is higher than 1280m

(7) #4 CAPACITY (setting range: 0 to n) Set the capacity of the buffer used for sampling. Buffer capacity = (setting value + 1) 1024 items The setting value's upper limit n differs according to the buffer range being used.

Buffer range Maximum number of sampling data items

Setting value upper limit n

Built-in memory 3,072 2 HR412/HR452 131,072 127 HR422/HR462 262,144 255 HR432/HR472 524,288 511

8. Maintenance Functions 8.2 Data Sampling

III-75

(8) #5 S-CONDITION (setting range: 0 to 4) Set the conditions for starting sampling.

0: Manual start (Sampling starts when "1" is set in #0) 1: Variable No. start (Sampling starts when the variable set in #23 is 0 or a value other

than null) 2: PLC device start (Sampling starts at the rising edge of the signal set in #24) 3: Address condition, true (Sampling starts when the #25 to #27 conditions are true) 4: Address condition, false (Sampling starts when the #25 to #27 conditions are false)

(Note 1) Always set #25 to #27 when "3" or "4" is set. Sampling might not be started if these are not set. If the same value as #22 is set (if #5 is set to "3" and #22 to "3" or #5 to "4" and #22 to "4"),

sampling will not take place. (Note 2) When "1" is set, the common variable uses the floating decimal point method, so if the

calculation results are used, an error will occur, and the value may not be recognized as 0. When using the multi-system, the trigger will turn ON if the conditions are satisfied in even one

system. (Note 3) The variable data settings are validated immediately only from the program. These will not be

validated immediately with settings from the screen or DDB.

(9) #11 to #18 ADR1 to 8 Set the sampling address. These items can be set with the following three methods. The applied method is automatically judged. Designate prepared data with index No. Set actual address Search for head address of symbol and set automatically

A different designation method can be set for each address. (Note) If addresses exceeding the setting value are set, the setting will be ignored. (a) Index No. method

The index No. is fixed regardless of the axis configuration. The low-order six digits of the address are explained below. (If the high-order two digits are not set, the setting will be interpreted as 00.)

Name Standard setting value Address #1 00nn00 (nn is the axis No. of the basic axis k in system 1) Address #2 010000 Address #3 0 (no setting) Address #4 0 (no setting) Address #5 0 (no setting) Address #6 0 (no setting) Address #7 0 (no setting) Address #8 0 (no setting)

8. Maintenance Functions 8.2 Data Sampling

III-76

Setting range (index No.) Servo axis 1st axis 2nd axis ... 14th axis Feedback position 000100 000200 ... 000E00 Command position 000101 000201 ... 000E01 Spindle 1st axis 2nd axis ... 4th axis Feedback position 010000 020000 ... 040000 Command position 010001 020001 ... 040001

High-order 4 digits: Axis index High-order 2 digits : Spindle index (01 to 04)

Low-order 2 digits : Servo axis index (01 to 0E) Low-order 2 digits: Sampling target index 00: Feedback position

01: Command position

* Examples of setting for each purpose are shown below. Synchronized tapping

setting : 3rd servo axis FB (000300) - 1st spindle axis FB

(010000) High-accuracy setting

(roundness) : 1st servo axis FB (000100) - 2nd servo axis FB

(000200) Spindle synchroniza-

tion setting : 1st spindle axis FB

(010000) - 2nd spindle axis FB

(020000)

(b) Actual address method If the actual address is known beforehand, it can be set by directly inputting it. However, if an illegal address (highest-order bit 0) is input, a setting error will occur. If an address that does not exist is set, the system could fail. (Note) Even if the data does not match near the 4th byte, "E02 DATA OVER" will occur. (c) Head address automatic setting method When the symbol is set in the setting area, the head address of that symbol will be searched

for, and will be automatically set as the sampling address. Normally, the data to be actually sampled is the actual address obtained by adding the data offset

(relative address from address determined with symbol) to the address determined with this method. When setting a symbol containing "_", substitute "=".

(Note 1) The symbols are limited to NC internal table symbols having within 16 digits. (Note 2) The symbols are searched for as all lowercase symbols. (Note 3) If there is no symbol, "E01 SETTING ERROR" will occur, and if the symbol is not found

within the 4 bytes, "E02 DATA OVER" will occur.

8. Maintenance Functions 8.2 Data Sampling

III-77

(10) #21 PROCESS FORM (Setting range: 0 to 2) Set the sampling process type.

0: One-shot (Stops only when buffer is full.) 1: Repeat valid (After the process ends (the buffer is full), the "TRIGGER WAIT" state

will be entered again. 2: Sampling buffer valid

(Note) If a value other than "0" is set, #22 must also be set. If not set, the sampling process will not end until it is forcibly ended.

(11) #22 E-CONDITION (Setting range: 0 to 4) Set the conditions for ending the sampling process.

0: Sampling completed (buffer full) 1: Variable No.

(Sampling ends when the variable set in #23 is 0 or a value other than null) 2: PLC device (Sampling ends at the rising edge of the signal set in #24) 3: Address condition, true (Sampling ends when the #25 to #27 conditions are true) 4: Address condition, false (Sampling ends when the #25 to #27 conditions are false)

(Note 1) Always set #25 to #27 when "3" or "4" is set. Sampling may not end if these are not set. If the same value as #5 is set (if #5 is set to "3" and #22 to "3" or #5 to "4" and #22 to "4"),

sampling will not take place. (Note 2) When "1" is set, the common variable uses the floating decimal point method, so if the

calculation results are used, an error will occur, and the value may not be recognized as 0. When using a multi-system, the end trigger will turn ON only when the conditions are satisfied

in all systems. (Note 3) The variable data settings are validated immediately only from the program. These will not be

validated immediately with settings from the screen or DDB. (Note 4) Even fit the ending conditions are satisfied, the subsequent flow will differ according to the

value set in #21. Refer to the following diagram for details. (This also applies when ending manually.)

#21 Process type Flow of sampling process

One-shot

Repeat

Ring buffer

Start trigger ON Sampling com- pleted (buffer full) Start trigger ON End trigger ON

Sampling

Process continued until sampling is completed

Waiting for trigger Sampling Sampling

Sampling

Sampling stopped

Sampling stopped

Sampling stopped

8. Maintenance Functions 8.2 Data Sampling

III-78

(12) #23 VARIABLE NO. (Setting range: 0 to 999) Set the variable No. that causes the start/end trigger.

0: System variable (#1299) Other than 0: Designated common variable (#100 ~, #500 ~)

(Note 1) If both #5 and #22 are set to a value other than "1" (variable No.), the value will be ignored even

if set. (Note 2) If a number that does not exist is set, "E02 DATA OVER" will occur.

(13) #24 PLC DEVICE (Setting range: For PLC4B : ~ () X04BF, ~ () Y053F, ~ () U0017F, ~ () W01FF For GPPW : ~ () X063F, ~ () Y073F) Set the PLC device that functions as the start/end trigger. If a "" is added at the head, the device will be a b contact.

0: Data sampling trigger signal (Y2FC) Other than 0: Designated device

(Note 1) If both #5 and #22 are set to a value other than "2" (PLC device), the value will be ignored even

if set. (Note 2) If a device that does not exist is input, "E01 SETTING ERROR" will occur, and if the device No.

is not within the setting range, "E02 DATA OVER" will occur.

(14) #25 ADDRESS (For simple setup: 0) Set the address targeted for applying #27 data mask. However, if an illegal address (highest-order bit 0) is input, a setting error will occur. If an address that does not exist is set, the system could fail. (Note) If both #5 and #22 are set to a value other than "3" or "4" (address conditions, true/false), the

value will be ignored even if set. This item can be set with the same methods as #11 to #18.

(15) #26 DATA (For simple setup: 0) Set the data for judging the results of applying #27 data mask on #25 address. (Note) If both #5 and #22 are set to a value other than "3" or "4" (address conditions, true/false), the

value will be ignored even if set.

(16) #27 DATA MASK (For simple setup: 0) Set the data mask to be applied on #25 address. (Note) If both #5 and #22 are set to a value other than "3" or "4" (address conditions, true/false), the

value will be ignored even if set.

8. Maintenance Functions 8.2 Data Sampling

III-79

(17) Example of conditions for ending with address [Setting details] #22 E-CONDITION ... "3" #25 ADDRESS ... "12345678" #26 DATA ... "00000100" #27 DATA MASK ... "0000FFFF" [Meaning of setting details]

The point where results of applying a mask with 0000FFFF onto the data in address 12345678 are 00000100 will function as the sampling end trigger.

8.2.4 Data Output Procedures

The sampled data can be output by setting "S" in "# ( )" on the DATA OUT screen.

[DATA OUT] IN/OUT 2 # 1 MAIN PROGRAM # 2 TOOL DATA OFF #11 PORT NO. 2 # 3 PARAMETER OFF #12 DEVICE NO. 1 # 5 COMMON VARI. OFF (FDD:9600bps) #30 MACRO PROGRAM #28 AUX-PARA. #60 TRACE DATA #99 MAINTENANCE #( S) DATA( ) ( )

INPUT OUTPUT ERASE FILE MENU

(Note 1) The data will not be output if sampling has not been executed. (Note 2) The data will not be output if the sampling output valid parameter is not set to valid. (Sampling output is validated by setting setup parameter "#1224 aux08/bit0" to 1.) The output data is the sampling buffer dumped with a long data length (4 bytes). The header, etc., are not added, and the sampling data is output immediately. (Example) When number of sampling points is "2" ("2" MARKS" = 2)

00044363 000222A8 00044363 000222A8 00044363 :

... 1st point 1st scan data

... 2nd point 1st scan data

... 1st point 2nd scan data

... 2nd point 2nd scan data

... 1st point 3rd scan data :

IV. APPENDIXES

Appendix 1. List of Function Codes

IV-1

Appendix 1 List of Function Codes Function

code Punch-out

output ISO

Control unit recognition

Subject to parity V count

Screen display

Setting and display unit

key-in Stored in memory ISO

Internal NC system function

0~9 Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored 0~9 Numerical data A~Z Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored A~Z Addresses + Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored + Sign, variable operator (+) Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored Sign, variable operator () . Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored . Decimal point , Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored ,

/ Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored / Block delete (optional block skip) Variable operator ()

% Yes Counted Displayed (%)

No key-in (automatical- ly inserted)

Stored % End of record (tape storage end) Rewind start & stop during tape search

LF/NL Yes Counted Displayed (;)

Key-in ;/EOB Stored LF End of block

( Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored ( Control out (comment start) ) Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored ) Control in (comment end) : Yes Counted Displayed No key-in Stored : Program number address (instead of O.) # Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored # Variable number Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored Variable operator () = Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored = Variable definition [ Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored [ Variable operator ] Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored ] Variable operator

BS No Counted Not displayed No key-in Stored

HT No Counted Not displayed No key-in Stored

SP No Not displayed Key-in Stored

SP (T-V automatic adjustment)

CR No Not displayed No key-in Stored

DEL No Not counted

Not displayed No key-in Not

stored

NULL No Not counted

Not displayed No key-in Not

stored

Any other No Counted (Note 2) No key-in Stored (Note 1) Codes not listed in the above table are stored on tape, but an error will result during operation if they are

not comments. (Note 2) This denotes characters (including blanks) which are stored inside and which correspond to the

command codes. "@" is not displayed.

Appendix 2. Table of Command Value Ranges

IV-2

Appendix 2 Table of Command Value Ranges

Linear axis Rotary axis Input unit (mm) Input unit (inch) Input unit () Minimum input setting unit

0.001/0.0001/0.00001 0.0001/0.00001 0.001/0.0001/0.00001

Maximum stroke (value for machine coordinate system)

99999.999mm 9999.9999mm 999.99999mm

9999.9999inch 999.99999inch

99999.999 9999.9999 999.99999

Maximum programmable dimension

99999.999mm 9999.9999mm 999.99999mm

9999.9999inch 999.99999inch

99999.999 9999.9999 999.99999

Rapid traverse rate (including dry run)

1 to 1000000mm/min 1 to 100000mm/min 1 to 10000mm/min

1 to 39370inch/min 1 to 3937inch/min

1 to 1000000/min 1 to 100000/min 1 to 10000/min

M system Cutting feed rate (including dry run)

0.01 to 1000000mm/min 0.001 to 100000mm/min

0.001 to 100000inch/min 0.0001 to 10000inch/min

0.01 to 1000000/min 0.001 to 100000/min

L system Cutting feed rate (including dry run)

0.001 to 1000000mm/min 0.0001 to 100000mm/min 0.00001 to 10000mm/min

0.0001 to 39370.0787inch/min 0.00001 to 3937.00787inch/min

0.001 to 1000000/min 0.0001 to 100000/min 0.00001 to 10000/min

M system Synchronous feed

0.001 to 999.999mm/rev 0.0001 to 99.9999mm/rev

0.0001 to 999.9999inch/rev 0.00001 to 99.99999inch/rev

0.01 to 999.99/rev 0.001 to 99.999/rev

L system Synchronous feed

0.0001 to 999.9999mm/rev 0.00001 to 99.99999mm/rev 0.000001 to 9.999999mm/rev

0.000001 to 99.999999inch/rev 0.0000001 to 9.9999999inch/rev

0.0001 to 999.9999/rev 0.00001 to 99.99999/rev 0.000001 to 9.999999/rev

2nd to 4th reference point offset (value with machine coordinate system)

99999.999mm 9999.9999mm 999.99999mm

9999.9999inch 999.99999inch

99999.999 9999.9999 999.99999

Tool offset amount (tool length)

999.999mm 99.9999mm 9.99999mm

99.9999inch 9.99999inch

Tool offset amount (wear)

9999.999mm 999.9999mm 99.99999mm

9.9999inch 0.99999inch

Incremental feed amount 0.001mm/pulse 0.0001mm/pulse 0.00001mm/pulse

0.0001inch/pulse 0.00001inch/pulse

0.001/pulse 0.0001/pulse 0.00001/pulse

Handle feed amount 0.001mm/pulse 0.0001mm/pulse 0.00001mm/pulse

0.0001inch/pulse 0.00001inch/pulse

0.001/pulse 0.0001/pulse 0.00001/pulse

Soft limit range (value with machine coordinate system)

99999.999mm to +99999.999mm 9999.9999mm to +9999.9999mm 999.99999mm to +999.99999mm

9999.9999inch to +9999.9999inch 999.99999inch to +999.99999inch

1 to 359.999 1 to 359.9999 1 to 359.99999

Dwell time 0 to 99999.999s 0 to 99999.999s

Backlash compensation amount

0 to 9999pulse 0 to 9999pulse 0 to 9999pulse

Pitch error compensation amount

0 to 9999pulse 0 to 9999pulse 0 to 9999pulse

M system Thread lead (F)

0.001 to 999.999mm/rev 0.0001 to 99.9999mm/rev

0.0001 to 99.9999inch/rev 0.00001 to 9.99999inch/rev

M system Thread lead (precision E)

0.00001 to 999.99999mm/rev 0.000001 to 99.999999mm/rev

0.000001 to 39.370078inch/rev 0.000001 to 3.937007inch/rev

L system Thread lead (F)

0.0001 to 999.9999mm/rev 0.00001 to 99.99999mm/rev 0.000001 to 9.999999mm/rev

0.000001 to 99.999999inch/rev 0.0000001 to 9.9999999inch/rev

L system Thread lead (precision E)

0.00001 to 999.99999mm/rev 0.000001 to 99.999999mm/rev 0.0000001 to 99.9999999mm/rev

0.000010 to 9.9999999inch/rev 0.0000010 to 0.99999999inch/rev

(Note 1) The second line in the table applies when the least setting increment is 0.001, 0.0001 from the first

line. The third line applies when the least setting increment is 0.001, 0.0001, 0.00001 from the first line.

Appendix 3. Circular Cutting Radius Error

IV-3

Appendix 3 Circular Cutting Radius Error When circular cutting is performed, an error is caused between the command coordinate and the tracking

coordinate due to the tracking delay in the smoothing circuit and servo system, and the workpiece ends up with a radius smaller than the commanded value. The method for obtaining this error (radius error) is shown below.

A : Command coordinate B : Tracking coordinate R : Command radius (mm) R : Radius error (mm) : Angle error (rad) F : Cutting feed rate (m/min)

A

F

B

R

R

F

The radius error R and angle error are calculated from the following formula.

Exponential acceleration/ deceleration

R = ( Ts2 + Tp2) ( )2 (mm)

Linear acceleration/ deceleration

R = ( Ts2 + Tp2) ( )2 (mm)

= tan1 (Ts ) + tan1 (Tp ) (rad) TS: Time constant (s) of specified smoothing circuit TP: Position loop time constant (Note 1) When the R radius error applying with circular cutting does not come within the allowable value,

proceed to reduce the cutting feed rate F, set Ts to a lower value or review the program. (Note 2) In the steady state, R is constant. However, it is not constant with command start and stop

transitions. Under command start and stop conditions, therefore, the tracking coordinate should be as shown in the figure below.

Start/stop

Command Tracking

R R

1 2

1 2

1 R

F 103

60 1

24

1 2

1 R

F 103

60

F R

F R

Appendix 4. Registering/Editing the Fixed Cycle Program 4.1 Fixed cycle Operation Parameters

IV-4

Appendix 4 Registering/Editing the Fixed Cycle Program The subprogram for the fixed cycle can be input, output and edited.

CAUTION

Do not change the fixed cycle program without prior approval from the machine maker. 4.1 Fixed Cycle Operation Parameters To input/output or edit the data of each fixed cycle subprogram, use the IN/OUT and EDIT screens in the

same way as when creating usual user-created work programs. In this case, the parameters must have been set. Set "1" in parameter "#1166 fixpro" on the BASE SPEC. PARAM screen. If this parameter is valid, the IN/OUT and EDIT screens are usable only for operating a fixed cycle control subprogram. During this period, PROGRAM FILE displays only fixed cycle programs. Thus, after fixed cycle program operation, return parameter to "0".

(Note) Parameter fixpro will be set to 0 when the power is turned OFF. 4.2 Inputting the Fixed Cycle Program Input the fixed cycle program from the DATA INPUT screen. Before input, check that fixed cycle operation

parameter "#1166 fixpro" is valid. The operating procedure is the same as a user machining program. It is desirable that the data can be input

consecutively. After the data is registered, check proper registration on the PROGRAM FILE and EDIT screen. 4.3 Outputting the Fixed Cycle Program Output the fixed cycle program on the DATA OUTPUT screen. Before output, check that fixed cycle

operation parameter "#1166 fixpro" is valid. The operating procedure is the same as a user machining program. The registered fixed cycle programs

can be output one by one or at a time. If the programs have been output at a time, they can be input consecutively by one operation. After the data is output, be sure to collate it with the data on tape. At this time, make sure that there are no

data output mistakes (punch mistakes, etc.). 4.4 Erasing the Fixed Cycle Program Erase the fixed cycle program on the PROGRAM ERASE screen. Before erasing, check that fixed cycle

operation parameter "#1166 fixpro" is valid. The operating procedure is the same as a user machining program, except set 4 in # ( ) to designate the

fixed C program.

Appendix 4. Registering/Editing the Fixed Cycle Program 4.5 Standard Fixed Cycle Subprogram (For L system)

IV-5

4.5 Standard Fixed Cycle Subprogram (For L system)

G37 (O370) Automatic tool length measurement

G31 Z #5 F #3 ; 1F [ROUND [ ABS [#2 [ ##10 #11 #12 ] ] ] GT #8 ] GOTO 1 ; 1F [ROUND [ ##10 #11 #12 ] EQ #4 ] GOTO 1 ; ##9 = #10 #12/#11 #2/#11 + ##9 ; #3003 = #1 ; N2 ; M99 ; N1 # 3901 = 126 ;

G74 (O740) End face cutoff cycle

G. 1 ; 1F [ ABS [ #2 ] GT 0 ] GOTO 10 ; #14 = 1 ; N10 #13 = #3 ; IF [ #15 NE 0 ] GOTO 11 ; #13 = #3 #5 ; N11 #16 = 0 ; D0 1 ; #10 = 0 ; #11 = #4 ; D0 2 ; #10 = #10 + #4 ; IF [ ABS [ #10 ] GE [ABS [ #1 ] ] ] GOTO 1 ; G01 X #11 ; G00 X #6 ; #11 = #4 #6 ; END 2 ; N1 G01 X#1 #10 + #11 ; IF [ #15 EQ 0 ] GOTO 20 ; IF [ #16 EQ 0 ] GOTO 21 ; N20 G00 Y#5 ; N21 #16 = 1 ; G00X #1 ; IF [ #14 ] GOTO 3 ; #12 = #12 + #3 ; IF [ ABS [ #12 ] LT [ABS [ #2 ] ] ] GOTO 2 ; #14 = 1 ; #13 = #2 #12 + #13 ; N2 G00 Y #13 ; #13 = #3 #5 ; END 1 ; N3 G00 Y #2 #5 ; M99 ;

Appendix 4. Registering/Editing the Fixed Cycle Program 4.5 Standard Fixed Cycle Subprogram (For L system)

IV-6

G75 (O750) Longitudinal cutting cycle

G. 1 ; 1F [ ABS [ #1 ] GT 0 ] GOTO 10 ; #14 = 1 ; N10 #13 = #4 ; IF [ #15 NE 0 ] GOTO 11 ; #13 = #4 #5 ; N11 #16 = 0 ; D0 1 ; #10 = 0 ; #11 = #3 ; D0 2 ; #10 = #10 + #3 ; IF [ ABS [ #10 ] GE [ABS [ #2 ] ] ] GOTO 1 ; G01 Y #11 ; G00 Y #6 ; #11 = #3 #6 ; END 2 ; N1 G01 Y#2 #10 + #11 ; IF [ #15 EQ 0 ] GOTO 20 ; IF [ #16 EQ 0 ] GOTO 21 ; N20 G00 X#5 ; N21 #16 = 1 ; G00Y #2 ; IF [ #14 ] GOTO 3 ; #12 = #12 + #4 ; IF [ ABS [ #12 ] LT [ABS [ #1 ] ] ] GOTO 2 ; #14 = 1 ; #13 = #1 #12 + #13 ; N2 G00 X #13 ; #13 = #4 #5 ; END 1 ; N3 G00 X #1 #5 ; M99 ;

Appendix 4. Registering/Editing the Fixed Cycle Program 4.5 Standard Fixed Cycle Subprogram (For L system)

IV-7

G75.1 (O751) Groove cutting cycle

G. 1 ; #3003 = #8 OR 1 ; G0 X #1 ; G1 Y #2 ; G0 Y #2 ; X #5 ; 1F [ #3 EQ 0 ] GOTO 1 ; G1 X #3 Y #4 ; N1 G1 Y#6 ; X #7 ; G0Y #2 ; X #5 ; 1F [ #3 EQ 0 ] GOTO 2 ; G1 X #3 Y #4 ; N2 G1 Y#6 ; X #7 ; #3003 = #8 ; G0Y #2 ; M99 ;

G76 (O760) Compound thread cutting cycle

G. 1 ; #12 = 1 ; #13 = #9 ; 1F [ ABS [ #13 ] GE [ ABS [ #8 ] ] ] GOTO 1 ; #16 = 1 ; #13 = #8 ; N1 #11 = #13 ; 1F [ ABS [ #11 ] LT [ ABS [ #4 #5 ] ] ] GOTO 2 ; #11 = #4 #5 ; #14 = 1 ; N2 #17 = #11 ; #18 = ROUND [ [ #4 #11 #5 ] #7 ] ; IF [ [ #18 XOR #1 ] GE 0 ] GOTO 10 ; #18 = #18 ; N10 #19 = #18 ; #10 = ROUND [ [ #11 + #5 ] #7 ] ; IF [ [ #10 XOR #1 ] GE 0 ] GOTO 20 ; #10 = #10 ; N20 G00 X#10 ; #20 = #10 D0 1 ; #15 = ROUND [ #10 #3/#1 ] ; G00 Y #2 + #3 #4 #15 + #11 ; G33 X#1 #10 #18 Y #3 + #15 ; G00 Y #2 + #4 #11 ; IF [ #14 GT 0 ] GOTO 3 ; IF [ #16 GT 0 ] GOTO 7 ; #12 = #12 + 1 ; #13 = ROUND [ #9 SQRT [ #12 ] ] ;

Appendix 4. Registering/Editing the Fixed Cycle Program 4.5 Standard Fixed Cycle Subprogram (For L system)

IV-8

IF [ ABS [ #13 #11 ] GE [ ABS [ #8 ] ] ] GOTO 8 ; #16 = 1 ; N7 #13 = #11 + #8 ; N8 #11 = #13 ; IF [ ABS [ #11 ] LT [ ABS [ #4 #5 ] ] ] GOTO 9 ; #11 = #4 #5 ; #14 = 1 ; N9 #10 = ROUND [ [ #17 #11 ] #7 ] ; IF [ [ #10XOR#1] GE 0 ] GOTO 6 ; #10 = #10 ; N6 #10 = #10 + #20 ; G00 X #1 + #10 + #18 ; IF [ #14 LT 0 ] GOTO 11 ; #18 = 0 ; GOTO 12 ; N11 #18 = #19 #10 + #20 ; N12 END 1 ; N3 IF [ ABS [ #6 ] LT 1 ] GOTO 5 ; #14 = 0 ; #13 = 0 ; D0 2 ; IF [ #14 GT 0 ] GOTO 5 ; #13 = #13 + #6 ; IF [ ABS [ #13 ] LT [ ABS [ #5 ] ] ] GOTO 4 ; #13 = #5 ; #14 = 1 ; N4 G00 X #10 #1 ; G00 Y #2 + #3 #4 + #13 #15 + #11 ; G33 X #1 #10 Y #3 + #15 ; G00 Y #2 + #4 #13 #11 ; END 2 ; N5 G00 X #1 ; M99 ;

G76.1 (O761) 2-system simultaneous compound thread cutting cycle

G. 1 ; N761 !L10 #12 = 1 ; #13 = #9 ; 1F [ ABS [ #13 ] GE [ ABS [ #8 ] ] ] GOTO 1 ; #16 = 1 ; #13 = #8 ; N1 #11 = #13 ; 1F [ ABS [ #11 ] LT [ ABS [ #4 #5 ] ] ] GOTO 2 ; #11 = #4 #5 ; #14 = 1 ; N2 #17 = #11 ; #18 = ROUND [ [ #4 #11 #5 ] #7 ] ; IF [ [ #18 XOR #1 ] GE 0 ] GOTO 10 ; #18 = #18 ; N10 #19 = #18 ; #10 = ROUND [ [ #11 + #5 ] #7 ] ; IF [ [ #10 XOR #1 ] GE 0 ] GOTO 20 ; #10 = #10 ; N20 G00 X#10 ;

Appendix 4. Registering/Editing the Fixed Cycle Program 4.5 Standard Fixed Cycle Subprogram (For L system)

IV-9

#20 = #10 D0 1 ; #15 = ROUND [ #10 #3/#1 ] ; G00 Y #2 + #3 #4 #15 + #11 ; !L11 ; G33 X#1 #10 #18 Y #3 + #15 ; G00 Y #2 + #4 #11 ; !L12 ; IF [ #14 GT 0 ] GOTO 3 ; IF [ #16 GT 0 ] GOTO 7 ; #12 = #12 + 1 ; #13 = ROUND [ #9 SQRT [ #12 ] ] ; IF [ ABS [ #13 #11 ] GE [ ABS [ #8 ] ] ] GOTO 8 ; #16 = 1 ; N7 #13 = #11 + #8 ; N8 #11 = #13 ; IF [ ABS [ #11 ] LT [ ABS [ #4 #5 ] ] ] GOTO 9 ; #11 = #4 #5 ; #14 = 1 ; N9 #10 = ROUND [ [ #17 #11 ] #7 ] ; IF [ [ #10XOR#1] GE 0 ] GOTO 6 ; #10 = #10 ; N6 #10 = #10 + #20 ; G00 X #1 + #10 + #18 ; IF [ #14 LT 0 ] GOTO 11 ; #18 = 0 ; GOTO 12 ; N11 #18 = #19 #10 + #20 ; N12 END 1 ; N3 IF [ ABS [ #6 ] LT 1 ] GOTO 5 ; #14 = 0 ; #13 = 0 ; D0 2 ; IF [ #14 GOTO ] GOTO 5 ; #13 = #13 + #6 ; IF [ ABS [ #13 ] LT [ ABS [ #5 ] ] ] GOTO 4 ; #13 = #5 ; #14 = 1 ; N4 G00 X #10 #1 ; G00 Y #2 + #3 #4 + #13 #15 + #11 ; !L11 ; G33 X #1 #10 Y #3 + #15 ; G00 Y #2 + #4 #13 #11 ; !L12 ; END 2 ; N5 G00 X #1 ; M99 ;

Appendix 4. Registering/Editing the Fixed Cycle Program 4.5 Standard Fixed Cycle Subprogram (For L system)

IV-10

G76.2 (O762) 2-system simultaneous compound thread cutting cycle

G. 1 ; N762 !L10 ; #12 = 1 ; #13 = #9 ; 1F [ ABS [ #13 ] GE [ ABS [ #8 ] ] ] GOTO 1 ; #16 = 1 ; #13 = #8 ; N1 #11 = #13 ; 1F [ ABS [ #11 ] LT [ ABS [ #4 #5 ] ] ] GOTO 2 ; #11 = #4 #5 ; #14 = 1 ; N2 #17 = #11 ; #18 = ROUND [ [ #4 #11 #5 ] #7 ] ; IF [ [ #18 XOR #1 ] GE 0 ] GOTO 10 ; #18 = #18 ; N10 #19 = #18 ; #10 = ROUND [ [ #11 + #5 ] #7 ] ; IF [ [ #10 XOR #1 ] GE 0 ] GOTO 20 ; #10 = #10 ; N20 IF [# 27 NE 1 ] GOTO 21 ; G00 X#10 ; N21 #20 = #10 ; #28 = 1 ; D01 ; #15 = ROUND [ #10 #3/#1 ] ; #29 = #28 MOD 2 ; IF [ [ #27 EQ 1 ] AND [#29 EQ 0 ] GOTO 22 ; IF [ [ #27 EQ 2 ] AND [#29 EQ 1 ] GOTO 22 ; G00 Y #2 + #3 #4 #15 + #11 ; !L11 ; G33 X#1 #10 #18 Y #3 + #15 ; G00 Y #2 + #4 #11 ; #21 = #18 ; !L12 ; N22 IF [ #14 GT 0 ] GOTO 3 ; IF [ #16 GT 0 ] GOTO 7 ; #12 = #12 + 1 ; #13 = ROUND [ #9 SQRT [ #12 ] ] ; IF [ ABS [ #13 #11 ] GE [ ABS [ #8 ] ] ] GOTO 8 ; #16 = 1 ; N7 #13 = #11 + #8 ; N8 #11 = #13 ; IF [ ABS [ #11 ] LT [ ABS [ #4 #5 ] ] ] GOTO 9 ; #11 = #4 #5 ; #14 = 1 ; N9 #10 = ROUND [ [ #17 #11 ] #7 ] ; IF [ [ #10XOR#1] GE 0 ] GOTO 6 ; #10 = #10 ; N6 #10 = #10 + #20 ; IF [ [ #27 EQ 1 ] AND [#29 EQ 1 ] GOTO 24 ; IF [ [ #27 EQ 2 ] AND [#29 EQ 0 ] GOTO 24 ; IF [ [ #27 EQ 2 ] AND [#28 EQ 1 ] GOTO 23 ; G00 X #1 + #10 + #21 ;

Appendix 4. Registering/Editing the Fixed Cycle Program 4.5 Standard Fixed Cycle Subprogram (For L system)

IV-11

GOTO 24 ; N23 G00 X#10 ; N24 IF [ #14 LT 0 ] GOTO 11 ; #18 = 0 ; GOTO 12 ; N11 #18 = #19 #10 + #20 ; N12 #28 = #28 + 1 ; END 1 ; N3 IF [ ABS [ #6 ] LT 1 ] GOTO 5 ; #14 = 0 ; #13 = 0 ; D0 2 ; IF [ #14 GT 0 ] GOTO 5 ; #13 = #13 + #6 ; IF [ ABS [ #13 ] LT [ ABS [ #5 ] ] ] GOTO 4 ; #13 = #5 ; #14 = 1 ; N4 #29 = #28 MOD 2 ; IF [ [ #27 EQ 1 ] AND [#29 EQ 1 ] GOTO 25 ; IF [ [ #27 EQ 2 ] AND [#29 EQ 0 ] GOTO 25 ; G00 X #10 #1 + #21 ; #21 = 0 ; G00 Y #2 + #3 #4 + #13 #15 + #11 ; !L11 ; G33 X #1 #10 Y #3 + #15 ; G00 Y #2 + #4 #13 #11 ; !L12 ; N25 #28 = #28 + 1 ; END 2 ; N5 G00 X #1 ; M99 ; %

G77 (O770) Longitudinal cutting cycle

G. 1 ; 1F [ [ #1 EQ 0 ] OR [ #2 EQ 0 ] ] GOTO 1 ; Y #2 + #7 ; G1 X #1 Y #7 ; Y #2 ; G0 X #1 ; N1 M99 ;

G78 (O780) Thread cutting cycle

G. 1 ; 1F [ [ #1 EQ 0 ] OR [ #2 EQ 0 ] ] GOTO 1 ; Y #2 + #7 ; G33 X #1 Y #7 F #9 E #10 ; G0 Y #2 ; X #1 ; N1 M99 ;

Appendix 4. Registering/Editing the Fixed Cycle Program 4.5 Standard Fixed Cycle Subprogram (For L system)

IV-12

G79 (O790) End face cutoff cycle

G. 1 ; 1F [ [ #1 EQ 0 ] OR [ #2 EQ 0 ] ] GOTO 1 ; X #1 + #7 ; G1 X #7 Y #2 ; X #1 ; G0 Y #2 ; N1 M99 ;

G83 G87 (O830) Deep hole drilling cycle B

G. 1 ; 1F [ #30 ] GOTO 2 ; M #24 ; #29 = #11 #28 = 0 ; Z #2 ; #2 = ##5 #3003 = #8 OR 1 ; D0 1 ; #28 = #28 #11 #26 = #28 #29 ; Z #26 ; IF [ ABS [ #28 ] GE [ ABS [ #3 ] ] ] GOTO 1 ; G1 Z #29 ; G0 Z #28 ; G29 = #11 + #14 ; END 1 ; N1 G1 Z #3 #26 ; G4 P #4 ; #3003 = #8 ; G0Z #3 #2 ; IF [#24 EQ #0 ] GOTO 2 ; M #24 + 1 ; G4 P #21 ; N2 M99 ;

Appendix 4. Registering/Editing the Fixed Cycle Program 4.5 Standard Fixed Cycle Subprogram (For L system)

IV-13

G83 G87 (O831) Deep hole drilling cycle A

G. 1 ; 1F [ #30 ] GOTO 2 ; M #24 ; #29 = #0 #28 = #11 ; Z #2 ; #2 = ##5 #3003 = #8 OR 1 ; D0 1 ; #29 = #29 + #11 ; IF [ ABS [ #29 ] GE [ ABS [ #3 ] ] ] GOTO 1 ; G1 Z #28 ; G0 Z #14 ; #28 = #11 + #14 ; END 1 ; N1 G1 Z #3 #29 + #28 ; G4 P #4 ; #3003 = #8 ; G0Z #3 #2 ; IF [#24 EQ #0 ] GOTO 2 ; M #24 + 1 ; G4 P #21 ; N2 M99 ;

G83.2 (O832) Deep hole drilling cycle 2

G. 1 ; 1F [ #30 ] GOTO 3 ; #3003 = #8 OR 1 ; #29 = #12 #28 = 0 ; G0 Z #2 ; IF [ #12 NE #0 ] GOTO 1 ; IF [ #11 EQ #0 ] GOTO 2 ; N1 #28 = #28 #12 #26 = #28 #29 ; IF [ ABS [ #28 ] GE [ ABS [ #3 ] ] ] GOTO 2 ; G1 Z #12 ; G4 P #4 ; G0 Z #28 #2 ; G4P # 13 ; G29 = #11 + #15 ; D0 1 ; #28 = #28 #11 #26 = #28 #29 ; G0 Z #26 + #2 ; IF [ ABS [ #28 ] GE [ ABS [ #3 ] ] ] GOTO 2 ; G1 Z #29 ; G4 P #4 ; G0 Z #28 #2 ; G4 P # 13 ; END 1 ; N2 G1 Z #3 #26 ; G4 P #4 ;

Appendix 4. Registering/Editing the Fixed Cycle Program 4.5 Standard Fixed Cycle Subprogram (For L system)

IV-14

#3003 = #8 ; G0Z #3 #2 ; N3 M99 ;

G84 G88 (O840) Tap cycle

G. 1 ; 1F [ #30 ] GOTO 2 ; M #24 ; Z #2 ; #2 = ##5 #3003 = #8 OR 1 #3004 = #9 OR 3 ; G1 Z #3 ; G4 P #4 ; M4 ; #3900 = 1 ; G1 Z #3 ; #3004 = #9 ; M3 ; #3003 = #8 ; IF [#24 EQ #0 ] GOTO 1 ; M #24 + 1 ; G4 P #21 ; N1 G0 Z #2 ; N2 M99 ;

G85 G89 (O850) Boring cycle

G. 1 ; 1F [ #30 ] GOTO 2 ; M #24 ; Z #2 ; #2 = ##5 #3003 = #8 OR 1 ; G1 Z #3 ; G4 P #4 ; #3003 = #8 ; Z #3 F #23 ; F #22 ; IF [#24 EQ #0 ] GOTO 1 ; M #24 + 1 ; G4 P #21 ; N1 G0 Z #2 ; N2 M99 ;

Appendix 4. Registering/Editing the Fixed Cycle Program 4.6 Standard Fixed Cycle Subprogram (For M system)

IV-15

4.6 Standard Fixed Cycle Subprogram (For M system)

G81 (O810) Drill, spot drill

Fixed cycle block 1 movement command Check for fixed cycle invalidity. Inhibit single block stop. Return.

G82 (O820) Drill, counter boring

Fixed cycle block 1 movement command Check for fixed cycle invalidity. Inhibit single block stop. Dwell. Return.

G83 (O830) Deep hole drill cycle

Fixed cycle block 1 movement command Check for fixed cycle invalidity. Define the cutting amount. Initialize the return amount (total cutting amount). Inhibit single block stop. Define the return amount of the next block. Calculate the feed amount. Feed. Does the total cutting amount (return amount) exceed the cut amount? Cutting feed

G. 1 ; 1F [#30] GOTO1 ; Z#2 G#6 H#7 ; #2 = ##5 #3003 = #8 OR 1 ; G1 Z#3 ; #3003 = #8 ; G0 Z #3 #2 ; N1 M99%

G. 1 ; 1F [#30] GOTO1 ; Z#2 G#6 H#7 ; #2 = ##5 #3003 = #8 OR 1 ; G1 Z#3 ; G4 P#4 ; #3003 = #8 ; G0 Z #3 #2 ; N1 M99%

G. 1 ; 1F [#30] GOTO2 ; #29 = #11 #28 = 0 Z#2 G#6 H#7 ; #2 = ##5 #3003 = #8 OR 1 ; DO 1 ; #28 = #28 #11 #26 = #28 #29 Z#26 ; IF [ABS [#28] GE [ABS [#3] ] ] GOTO 1 ; G1 Z#29 ;

Appendix 4. Registering/Editing the Fixed Cycle Program 4.6 Standard Fixed Cycle Subprogram (For M system)

IV-16

Return. Define the cutting amount for block 2 and after. Cutting feed Return.

G84 (O840) Tap cycle

Fixed cycle block 1 movement command Check for fixed cycle invalidity. Inhibit single block stop. Invalidate feed hold/override. Dwell. Rotate the spindle reversely. Dwell. Rotate the spindle forward. Return.

G85 (O850) Boring 1

Fixed cycle block 1 movement command Check for fixed cycle invalidity. Inhibit single block stop. Return.

G0 Z#28 ; #29 = #11 + #14 ; END1 ; N1 G1 Z#3 #26 ; #3003 = #8 ; G0 Z #3 #2 ; N2 M99%

G. 1 ; 1F [#30] GOTO1 ; Z#2 G#6 H#7 ; #2 = ##5 #3003 = #8 OR 1 ; #3004 = #9 OR 3 ; G1 Z#3 ; G4 P#4 ; M4 ; #3900 = 1 ; G1 Z #3 ; #3004 = #9 ; G4 P#4 ; M3 ; #3003 = #8 ; G0 Z = #2 ; N1 M99%

G. 1 ; 1F [#30] GOTO1 ; Z#2 G#6 H#7 ; #2 = ##5 #3003 = #8 OR 1 ; G1 Z#3 ; #3003 = #8 ; Z #3 ; G0 Z #2 ; N1 M99%

Appendix 4. Registering/Editing the Fixed Cycle Program 4.6 Standard Fixed Cycle Subprogram (For M system)

IV-17

G86 (O860) Boring 2

Fixed cycle block 1 movement command Check for fixed cycle invalidity. Inhibit single block stop. Dwell. Stop the spindle. Return. Rotate the spindle forward.

G87 (O870) Back boring

Fixed cycle block 1 movement command Check for fixed cycle invalidity. Inhibit single block stop. Orient the spindle. Cancel single block stop inhibition. Inhibit single block stop. Cancel single block stop inhibition. Rotate the spindle forward. Inhibit single block stop. Orient the spindle. Shift. G87 is not affected by the G98 or G99 modal. Cancel single block stop inhibition. Shift. Rotate the spindle forward.

G. 1 ; 1F [#30] GOTO1 ; Z#2 G#6 H#7 ; #2 = ##5 #3003 = #8 OR 1 ; G1 Z#3 ; G4 P#4 ; M5 ; G0 Z #3 #2 ; #3003 = #8 ; M3 ; N1 M99%

G. 1 ; 1F [#30] GOTO1 ; #3003 = #8 OR 1 ; M19 ; X#12 Y#13 ; #3003 = #8 ; Z#2 G#6 H#7 ; #3003 = #8 OR 1 ; G1 X #12 Y #13 ; #3003 = #8 ; M3 ; #3003 = #8 OR 1 ; Z#3 ; M19 ; G0 X#12 Y#13 ; Z #2 #3 ; #3003 = #8 ; X #12 Y #13 ; M3 ; N1 M99%

Appendix 4. Registering/Editing the Fixed Cycle Program 4.6 Standard Fixed Cycle Subprogram (For M system)

IV-18

G88 (O880) Boring 3

Fixed cycle block 1 movement command Check for fixed cycle invalidity. Inhibit single block stop. Dwell. Cancel single block stop inhibition. Rotate the spindle forward Inhibit single block stop. Return. Cancel single block stop inhibition. Rotate the spindle forward.

G89 (O890) Boring 4

Fixed cycle block 1 movement command Check for fixed cycle invalidity. Inhibit single block stop. Dwell. Return.

G73 (O831) Step cycle

Fixed cycle block 1 movement command Check for fixed cycle invalidity. Initialize the total cutting amount. Define the cutting amount. Single block stop command Increment the total cutting amount counter. Does the total cutting amount exceed the cut amount Z?

G. 1 ; 1F [#30] GOTO1 ; Z#2 G#6 H#7 ; #2 = ##5 #3003 = #8 OR 1 ; G1 Z#3 ; G4 P#4 ; #3003 = #8 ; M5 ; #3003 = #8 OR 1 ; G0 Z #3 #2 ; #3003 = #8 ; M3 ; N1 M99 ;

G. 1 ; 1F [#30] GOTO1 ; Z#2 G#6 H#7 ; #2 = ##5 #3003 = #8 OR 1 ; G1 Z#3 ; G4 P#4 ; #3003 = #8 Z #3 ; G0 Z #2 ; N1 M99%

G. 1 ; 1F [#30] GOTO2 ; #29 = 0 #28 = #11 ; Z#2 G#6 H#7 ; #2 = ##5 #3003 = #8 OR 1 ; DO 1 ; #29 = #29 + #11 ; IF [ABS [#29] GE [ABS [#3] ] ] GOTO 1 ;

Appendix 4. Registering/Editing the Fixed Cycle Program 4.6 Standard Fixed Cycle Subprogram (For M system)

IV-19

Cutting feed Dwell. Return. Define the cutting amount for block 2 and after. Cutting feed Dwell. Return.

G74 (O841) Reverse tap cycle

Fixed cycle block 1 movement command Check for fixed cycle invalidity. Inhibit single block stop. Invalidate feed hold/override. Dwell. Rotate the spindle forward. Dwell. Rotate the spindle reversely. Return.

G76 (O861) Fine boring

Fixed cycle block 1 movement command Check for fixed cycle invalidity. Single block stop command Orient the spindle. Shift. Return. Shift. Rotate the spindle forward.

G1 Z#28 ; G4 P#4 ; G0 Z #14 ; #28 = #11 + #14 ; END1 ; N1 G1 Z#3 #29 + #28 ; G4 P#4 ; #3003 = #8 ; G0Z #3 #2 ; N2 M99%

G. 1 ; 1F [#30] GOTO1 ; Z#2 G#6 H#7 ; #2 = ##5 #3003 = #8 OR 1 ; #3004 = #9 OR 3 ; G1 Z#3 ; G4 P#4 ; M3 ; #3900 = 1 ; Z #3 ; #3004 = #9 ; G4 P#4 ; M4 ; #3003 = #8 ; G0 Z #2 ; N1 M99%

G. 1 ; 1F [#30] GOTO1 ; Z#2 G#6 H#7 ; #2 = ##5 #3003 = #8 OR 1 ; G1 Z#3 ; M19 ; X#12 Y#13 ; G0 Z #3 #2 ; #3003 = #8 ; X #12 Y #13 ; M3 ; N1 M99%

Appendix 5. RS-232C I/O Device Parameter Setting Examples and Cable Connection

IV-20

Appendix 5 RS-232C I/O Device Parameter Setting Examples and Cable Connection

Personal computer

Tape reader (Mitsubishi)

Tape puncher

(Mitsubishi) Printer (Mitsubishi)

Floppy disk drive unit (Kyohritsu- sha)

Floppy disk drive unit (Mitsubishi)

Floppy disk drive unit (Tanaka Business)

I/O device

Parameter PTR-02A PTP-02A PRT-02A D-30 FD-3.5 TBM-F1

DEVICE NAME

BAUD RATE 2 2 2 2 2 2

STOP BIT 3 3 3 3 3 3

PARITY EFFECTIVE 0 0 0 0 0 0

EVEN PARITY 0 0 0 0 0 0

CHR. LENGTH 3 3 3 3 3 3

HAND SHAKE 3 3 2 3 3 3

DC CODE PARITY 1 1 0 1 1 1

DC2/DC4 OUTPUT 0 0 0 1 0 1

CR OUTPUT 0 0 0/1 0 0 0

FEED CHR. 0 Number of characters

0 0 0 0

PARITY V 0 0/1 0 0 0/1 0/1

TIME-OUT SET

Follows communi- cation software.

100 100 100 100 100 100

Cable connection (Cable accessories)

Follows communi- cation protocol. (NC side) 2 : SD 3 : RD 4 : RS 5 : CS 6 : DR 20: ER 7 : GND

NC I/O

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 20 20 7 7

NC I/O

1 1 2 2 3 3 14 14 5 5 6 6 20 20 7 7

NC I/O

1 1 2 2 3 3 14 14 5 5 6 6 20 20 7 7

NC I/O

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 8 6 20 8 7 7

NC I/O

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 20 20 8 8 7 7

NC I/O

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 20 20 8 8 7 7

Appendix 6. Data Input/Output Data List

IV-21

Appendix 6 Data Input/Output Data List The NC data that can be input/output with each connection method (RS-232C connection, Ethernet

connection, IC card connection) is listed below.

Screen (connection method) "INPUT"

"OUTPUT" screen

"HOST" screen Data type

(RS232C) (Ethernet) (IC card)

"IC card" screen

(IC card)

Remarks

Machining program <"INPUT"/"OUTPUT" screen> All files can be input/output by setting the keyword ALL

<"HOST" screen> Multiple files can be input/output by using "*"

<"IC Card" screen> Multiple files cannot be input/output

Parameter (Note 1) (Note 1) Common variable (Note 3) (Note 1) (Note 1) Tool compensation data (Note 4)

(Note 1) (Note 1)

Tool life control data (Note 5)

(Note 1) (Note 1)

User macro Machine maker macro Auxiliary axis parameter

Operation history Cannot be input to the NC side.

ALL1 ALL2 ALL3 SRAM data (Note 2)

(Note 1) (Note 1)

Mainte- nance data

Extended SRAM data (Note 2)

(Note 1) (Note 1)

Waveform data

(Note 1) The following file names will be assigned if the file name is not assigned when outputting from the NC.

Data type File name Parameter ALL.PRM Common variable COMMON.VAR Tool compensation data TOOL.OFS Tool life control data TLIFE.TLF SRAM data SRAM.BIN Extended SRAM data EXTSRAM.BIN

Appendix 6. Data Input/Output Data List

IV-22

(Note 2) This data is for maintenance by Mitsubishi and must not be used by the user.

(Note 3) When inputting the common variables, set the following items to the conditions as when data is

output. Number of systems Number of variable commands If conditions do not match when inputting data to the NC, the error "E315 Write error" (during host transmission) and "E86 Input data illegal" (during data input) will occur.

(Note 4) When inputting the tool compensation data, set the following items to the same conditions as when data is output. Model class Number of systems Number of axes, axis name Compensation type Number of compensation sets If conditions do not match when inputting data to the NC, the error "E315 Write error" (during host transmission) and "E86 Input data illegal" (during data input) will occur.

(Note 5) When inputting the tool life management data, set the following items to the same conditions as when data is output. Model class Number of systems Number of compensation sets If conditions do not match when inputting data to the NC, the error "E315 Write error" (during host transmission) and "E86 Input data illegal" (during data input) will occur.

Appendix 7. Operation Messages on Setting and Display Unit

IV-23

Appendix 7 Operation Messages on Setting and Display Unit If a setting operation error occurs on any setting and display unit screen, the error No. E and a message

describing the details of the error will display in the line above the data setting area or the menu display area.

: Message requiring resetting and restarting : Message requiring restarting after canceling error conditions.

(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)

Error No. Error message Details

E01 SETTING ERROR The setting data is incorrect. An alphabetic character was set when only number can be set etc.

Data was input without setting number (#). (Word editing)

Even though no retrieval data was set, menu key [ ] or [ ] was pressed.

Even though no data is stored in edit buffers, menu key Replace was pressed.

One of the following characters was entered as the first character of the retrieval data and edit buffers: 0 to 9, . , (space), +, , =, *, [ ] , and " " .

When the incremental detection system was used, the parameter (#0 absolute position setting) was set on the absolute position setting screen.

The data input for the standard parameter setting or during execution of formatting is not Y or N.

A value from 4 to 10 was specified for #1043 lang. Even though no language data exists, its output and comparison

were attempted. Check the numbers (0253 and 0254) of the language data to be output.

When the machine manufacturer macro program memory area is the SRAM area, the setup parameter #1060 SETUP was set to 20.

When the machine manufacturer macro program memory area is the SRAM area, writing of the machine manufacturer macro program was attempted on PROGRAM COPY screen.

E02 DATA OVER The setting data exceeded the setting range. The compensation data specification exceeded the range when

inputting the tool offset data on tape so that block could not be input. Press the INPUT key again while the input screen is displayed and the input will continue from the next block.

When workpiece coordinate offsets are measured, the calculation results given by pressing the CALC key are exceeding the specified range. Correctly specify the tool length or the wear data of cutting edges used for the calculation.

#1003 iunit was set to D when the least increment command 0.01m option was not available.

When there was no option, 2 or more was specified for #1043 lang. Otherwise, an option was added and 23 or more was specified for #1043 lang.

Appendix 7. Operation Messages on Setting and Display Unit

IV-24

Error No. Error message Details

E03 No. NOT FOUND The corresponding setting No. (#) was not found. This error occurs if a setting No. not found on the screen was set and input or if a variable No. not found in the specifications was set and input for the common variables.

When the tool length was measured manually, a nonexisting tool wear compensation number was specified and the sensor was turned ON. Specify the R register of the offset number correctly.

E04 DEV. NOT READY The input/output unit power is not ON. The cable is disconnected. Setting of the transfer speed (baud rate) does not agree.

E05 NOT ACCEPTABLE

The PLC timer cannot be set from the screen when the program is valid. (When machine parameter bit selection #6449 bit 1 is set to 1.)

The PLC counter cannot be set from the screen when the program is valid. (When machine parameter bit selection #6449 bit 0 is set to 1.)

The tool registration data setting is prohibited. (When special relay E71 is valid by the PLC.)

Setting from the tool life management screen is prohibited. Absolute position setting screens #1 ORIGIN and #2 ZERO

cannot be set when #0 INIT SET is invalid. The total of axes set in #1001 SYS_ON #1002 axisno is illegal.

Set so that the total No. of axes is within the specifications range for the target model.

#1037 cmdtyp is not within the setting range. The INPUT key was pressed to perform search for the program

that is in background edit status on the word edit screen. The menu keys (Replace and Insert) on the word edit screen

were manipulated when a running program is displayed (PDISP signal: ON).

An attempt was made to set MDI data in an MDI setting lock state (the MDI setting lock parameter is specified with 0 and a non-MDI mode is valid).

Language data in display selection status was entered. Change the display selection status once before entering the data. (#1043 lang)

When the manual value command protection (#1228 aux12/bit7) function is valid, the first monitor screen was manipulated by manual command operation (M, S, and T keys).

Appendix 7. Operation Messages on Setting and Display Unit

IV-25

Error No. Error message Details

E06 NO SPEC The menu key for a function not in the specifications was pressed.

A parameter not in the specifications was set. A language that was not added as an option was selected.

(#1043 lang) Set up parameter #1049 mmac_R was set to 1 when the

machine manufacturer macro option was not valid. Set up parameter #1060 SETUP was set to 20 when the

machine manufacturer macro option was not valid. Writing of the machine manufacturer macro program with the

PROGRAM COPY screen was attempted when the machine manufacturer macro option was not valid.

E07 RESET END The input/output operations were forcibly stopped by reset etc. (including EMG).

E08 PHYSICAL ERR The input/output parameter setting or input/output unit side setting was incorrect.

E09 TIME OUT The input/output unit parameter #9116 TIME-OUT SET setting was too short.

There is no EOB code in the machining program. E10 MEMORY OVER The program cannot be written because the memory capacity is

exceeded. This error occurs when the MDI data setting on the MDI screen

exceeds 500 characters or when saving MDl editing or making a program on the edit screen input on the data input/output screen program copy etc.

E11 PROG. No. DUPLI When registering a machining program in the memory a program with the same No. as the designated program No. was found in the memory. Refer to the program file to find a program No. not being used and reset the program No.

A program with the same No. as the machining program to be copied from the memory was found in the IC card.

This error occurs during MDI registration in the MDI screen or during creation of a program in the edit screen.

E12 FILE ENTRY OVER

When registering a machining program in the memory the No. of programs determined in the specifications is exceeded preventing registration. This error occurs during MDI registration in the MDI screen creation of a program in the edit screen data input in the data input/output screen and program copy.

E13 NB NOT FOUND The block with the designated sequence No. or block No. does not exist in the designated program.

E14 PROG. NOT FOUND

The designated program is not found in the memory. The corresponding program No. was not found with search of

tape memory during graphic check.

Appendix 7. Operation Messages on Setting and Display Unit

IV-26

Error No. Error message Details

E15 EDIT LOCK B An operation (edit input/output buffer correction etc.) inhibited for machining program B was attempted.

E16 EDIT LOCK C An operation (edit input/output buffer correction etc.) inhibited for machining program C was attempted.

E17 PARITY H ERR A parity H error was detected during data input etc. Check the paper tape or input device. This error may occur if the

paper tape is dirtied with oil etc. E18 PARITY V ERR A parity V error was detected during data input.

Check the paper tape to see whether the number of characters in the significant information section of a block is odd.

Also check the state (cable wiring noise measures etc.) of the connected equipment.

E20 OVER RUN ERR The control method using the DC codes etc. for the input/output operation is incorrect.

Check the settings of the input/output unit parameters and the settings on the input/output unit side and reset if necessary.

E21 PROGRAM RUNNING

Deletion of a machining program was attempted during operation.

Search was attempted during operation. Change of data such as parameters was attempted during

operation. Start of graphic check was attempted during operation. When using the two systems, the program being buffer corrected

was running with the other system. Erasing or inputting (IC NC) of a program in the IC card being

used was attempted. Formatting of the IC card was attempted during automatic start. Accessing to the host computer was attempted during automatic

operation. E22 CODE CHANGE

ERR There was an illegal code on the paper tape.

Appendix 7. Operation Messages on Setting and Display Unit

IV-27

Error No. Error message Details

E24 PLC RUN Data input/output or comparison was attempted when the PLC was not stopped.

Analog output adjustment was attempted when the PLC was not stopped.

An attempt was made to input or output language data during PLC execution.

When the machine manufacturer macro program memory area was set to the FROM area, formatting of the FROM area (#1060 SETUP 20) was attempted when the PLC was not stopped, writing of the machine manufacturer macro program was attempted on the PROGRAM COPY screen, or input of the macro program was attempted.

(Measures) Stop the PLC. Set the control unit rotary switch to 1. Set the onboard file screen RUN/STOP setting to 1.

E25 DATA MEMORY ERR

When inputting the tool offset data onto tape an offset type exceeding the specifications range was designated and that block could not be input. If the INPUT key is pressed again in the input screen the input will continue from the next block.

E26 NO CHARACTERS

The designated character string was not found from the block displayed on the screen to the end of the program when searching with data search in the edit screen. Press the INPUT key again and the search will start at the head of the program.

E35 COMPARE ERROR

An inconsistency was found in the paper tape and memory data during comparison.

E40 OP MODE ERROR Continuous or step graphic check was not possible because the operation mode was illegal.

E50

E51

E52

E53

E54

E55

E56

FILE ERR FILE OPEN ERR FILE CLOSE ERR FILE SEEK ERR FILE READ ERR FILE DELETE ERR FILE INSERT ERR

If one of these errors occurs the editing or input/output operations cannot be continued. Contact the Service Center. As for E50 a classification No. will display at the end of the message. Inform the service center of this No. as well.

Appendix 7. Operation Messages on Setting and Display Unit

IV-28

Error No. Error message Details

E60

IOP ERR A classification number is displayed after the message for E60. Refer to the section shown in parentheses and remedy the problem.

E60 lOP ERROR 2 (Port already being used) E60 lOP ERROR 4 (E09 TIME OUT) E60 lOP ERROR 5 (E08 PHYSICAL ERR) E60 lOP ERROR 7 (E07 RESET END) E60 lOP ERROR 10 (E04 DEV. NOT READY) E60 lOP ERROR 15 (E17 PARITY H ERR) E60 lOP ERROR 16 (E18 PARITY V ERR) E60 lOP ERROR 17 (E20 OVER RUN ERR) E60 lOP ERROR 18 (E22 CODE CHANGE ERR)

E60 IOP ERROR 20 (framing and H/W errors) Setting for the bit length is incorrect. (Baud rate, stop bit, and

character length) Check the setting of the I/O device system and its parameters and set it again.

Check the situations of the connected devices (cable wiring and noise measures).

Data was input/output or the tape search was executed during the host link. Set 0 in #8109 HOST LINK, and then set 1 again before performing the cycle start. (IOP error -2)

The host link parameter was turned ON during connecting to the Anshin-net. Turn the Anshin-net valid OFF. (IOP error -2)

When #10812 Anshin-net/ Machine builders network system valid is set to 1, the modem connection port of the Anshin-net or machine builders network system is occupied. Perform inputting or outputting using a port other than the modem connection port. (IOP error -2)

When connecting the GX Developer (when the bit selection parameter #6451 bit5 is set to 1), the port 2 of the RS232C communication port is always used. Use a port other than the port 2 of the RS232C communication port. (IOP error -2)

Appendix 7. Operation Messages on Setting and Display Unit

IV-29

Error No. Error message Details

E62 I/O PARAM ERR The EIA code data set for I/O parameter is of an unusable code. The unusable codes are those used as the EIA standard codes

and the even hole codes. E64 PROGRAM No.

ERR The same No. as the program No. designated for program copy

was found in the memory. During tape input the first character of the machining program

block is the program No. address O or L. E65 PROG. No. DUPLl During tape input the same No. as the specified program was

found in the memory. E66 NO PROG.

NUMBER During tape input the program No. was not found on the paper

tape and a program No. was not designated on the screens data setting area. Set the program No. and input again.

E69 PROG. CHECK MODE

Search (operation search) was attempted during program check (continuous or step).

Retry search after the program check is completed or after resetting the program search

E70 TOOL No. DUPLl A tool No. already registered was newly registered on the tool life management screen.

E71 TOOL ENTRY OVER

Registration of data exceeding the max. No. of registerable tools was attempted on the tool life management screen.

When inputting the tool offset data onto tape a compensation number exceeding the specifications range was specified and that block could not be input. If the INPUT key is pressed again in the input screen the input will continue from the next block.

E73 CANT CALCULATE

The coordinate value of the hole center cannot be obtained. Reset the measurement point, which must not applied to the

following conditions. The measurement A point is the same as the Y coordinate of the C point. The measurement B is the same as the Y coordinate of the C point. The slope of the line through A and C point is the same as the slope of the line through B and C point.

E74 MENU IMPOSSIBLE

Press the operation menu = Input or + input during the tool measurement.

Press the operation menu = Input or + input during the manual value command mode.

Press the screen selection menu on which is displayed during the tool measurement.

Press the screen selection menu on which is displayed during the manual value command mode.

Appendix 7. Operation Messages on Setting and Display Unit

IV-30

Error No. Error message Details

E75 TLM ILL. SIGNAL The sensor signal was already ON when the tool measurement mode (TLM) signal was validated.

After the tool measurement mode (TLM) signal was validated, the sensor signal turned ON when there was no axis movement.

The sensor signal turned ON at a position within 100m from the final entry start position.

Turn the tool measurement mode signal input OFF, or turn the sensor signal OFF and move the axis in a safe direction.

Note) This display will be erased when another screen is opened. The display will not be erased even if the tool measurement

mode signal input is turned OFF, or if the axis is moved in a direction away from the sensor.

E76 TOOL No. ERROR The offset No. to be used for workpiece coordinate system offset data measurement was invalid. Restart from tool selection. (Correctly specify the R register that contains the offset number.)

E77 AXIS No. REF-RET

Zero point return has not been completed for the axis being measured. Return the axis to the zero point.

E78 AX UNMATCH (TLM)

During movement of two or more axes the sensor turned ON and the tool length was measured. Keep off from the sensor and perform the measurement for one axis at a time.

E79 NO REF-RTN (TLM)

The sensor turned on for an axis that has not completed dog-type reference point return and the tool length was measured. Return the axis to the zero point.

E80 TOP SEARCH ERR

The program head search (unmodal type search) was not executed before type 2 (standard specification) restart search was executed for program restart. Set the type to unmodal, search for the head of the program, and then search for the restart block with type 2.

E82 ALREADY RESEARCH

After completing the type 1 or type 2 search for program restart, the unmodal type, type 1 or type 2 search was attempted again.

If program restart is continued (if the axis is return to the restart position with automatic or manual operations), the program will restart from the block searched for first.

To search again, cancel the previous search by resetting, and then search again.

E84 CANT IN/OUT An attempt was made to input a parameter in the setup parameter locked state. Refer to the manual issued by the machine manufacturer.

The parameter #1925 EtherNet of the high-speed program server function is set to 0.

When writing data to the IC card, the file name is illegal. (Exceeding 8 characters of file name + 3 characters of extension.)

Input of maintenance data from the host or IC card was attempted.

Appendix 7. Operation Messages on Setting and Display Unit

IV-31

Error No. Error message Details

E86 INPUT DATA ERR When inputting the tool offset data the data format was not correct so that block could not be input.

If the INPUT key is pressed again in the input screen the input will continue from the next block.

When data is read from parameter tape, its format is incorrect. The format of file written to the NC memory is illegal.

E87 NOT EDIT PROG. Playback edit was executed for a fixed cycle subprogram. Playback edit of a fixed cycle subprogram is not possible.

E88 CANT ADD BLOCK

Playback edit cannot be executed unless the block being edited with playback is displayed to the end (EOB) on the left side of the

machining program display area. Press the cursor key and display the whole block to the end. Then input the data.

E91 MODE ERROR (PBK)

G90 was set when PB_G90 was OFF. G91 was set when PB_G90 was ON.

E98 CANT RESEARCH

When restarting the program, the type 3 restart search was attempted with a program containing no T command. Check the program.

When restarting the program, the T command corresponding to the type 3 restart search was not found in the program. Check the program.

When restarting a program for 2-systems, restart search was performed simultaneously for the 1st and 2nd systems, and then the 2nd system was searched again.

If program restart is continued (if the axis is return to the restart position with automatic or manual operations), the program will restart from the block searched for first.

To search again, cancel the previous search by resetting, and then search again.

When carrying our program restart, type 3 restart search was attempted while the machine was at the negative () side of the restart limit parameters. Manually move the machine to the positive (+) side of the restart limit parameters, and search again.

E165 AUX RUNNING The keys other than Function/Menu/Previous page/Next page were pressed in Auxiliary monitor screen during auxiliary axis operation.

E190 FORE EDITING An attempt was made to perform background search for the program that is in foreground search status. (Word editing)

E191 NOT COM. SEARCH

Operation search was attempted in tape mode.

E200 ADJUST ERROR The hardware status cant be read correctly so automatic adjustment was not possible.

Check the remote l/O unit. A Z55 RIO NOT CONNECT occurred. Adjust manually. Unit defect (replace unit)

Appendix 7. Operation Messages on Setting and Display Unit

IV-32

Error No. Error message Details

E201 UNIT NOT EQUIP The analog output unit is not mounted. Confirm the remote l/O unit. Prepare a unit having analog output. Check the connection (power and signal wires) Unit defect (replace unit)

E301 CONNECT ERROR

A socket connection attempt failed during Ethernet communication.

Check the host address, the setting of the port No. and that the host computer is turned ON.

E302 LOGIN ERR A login attempt failed during Ethernet communication. Check the user name and password.

Check the account settings, such as the home directory. E303 TIME OUT Transmission of a file with Ethernet communication ended

because of timeout. E311 DOWNLOAD ERR An attempt to read a host file failed during Ethernet

communication. E312 UPLOAD ERR An attempt to write to a host file failed during Ethernet

communication. E313 NO FILE The file specified by host receive (host IC) operation during

Ethernet communication is not found in the host. The file specified by host send (IC host) operation during

Ethernet communication is not found in the IC card. E314 FILE DUPLICATE The file name specified to be stored by host receive (host IC)

operation during Ethernet communication already exists in the IC card.

The file name specified to be loaded by host send (IC host) operation during Ethernet communication already exists in the host.

E315 FILE WRITE ERR An attempt to write to the IC card failed during Ethernet communication.

E316 FILE READ ERR An attempt to read a file from the IC card failed during Ethernet communication.

E317 MEMORY OVER IC card memory is full. NC memory is full.

E318 OVER FLOW ERR A host directory contains too many files. E319 DIRECTORY ERR An attempt to move a directory failed.

In the IC card device, accessing a directory in the nineteenth layer or more was attempted.

E320 HR437 UNEQU

When backup or writing of the expansion cassette into/from the FROM, the expansion cassette (HR437) was not mounted in CBUS#1 or was incorrectly mounted.

When backup or writing of the expansion cassette into/from the FROM, a card other than the expansion cassette (HR437) was mounted in CBUS#1.

When the program memory was formatted to 1280m or more, the expansion cassette (HR437) was not mounted in CBUS#1.

Appendix 7. Operation Messages on Setting and Display Unit

IV-33

The following messages indicate the status of the setting and display functions, and are not operation errors. They are mainly used to show that operation is normal, and serve as guides for the following operations. There is no classification by numbers.

(1) Search and operation related

Message Message details

SEARCH EXECUTION Search is being executed normally.

SEARCH COMPLET Search was completed normally.

BUFFER EDIT The buffer is being corrected. This appears when the cursor or a tab key is pressed and the buffer correction mode is entered. This is erased when INPUT is pressed.

CANT BUF. EDIT When using 2 systems, the program being buffer corrected is being used by the other system. Buffer correcting of a machine manufacturer macro program was attempted.

DATA PROTECTING Buffer correcting is prohibited since the data protection key 3 is valid.

(2) MDI/editing related

Message Message details

MDI NO SETTING Only display of MDI data (no execution)

MDI SETTING COMPLETE The MDI data setting has been completed (execution is now possible).

MDI ENTRY COMPLETE The MDI data was saved in the memory with the specified program No.

MDI RUNNING The NC is operating with an MDI program and the MDI data cannot be corrected.

PUSH KEY SERCH/PROG Status in which no programs to be edited have been called on the editing screen. To edit press the SEARCH or PROGRAM edit key.

EDITING The details of a program are being edited on the screen. Press INPUT to write the data in the memory.

PROGRAM RUNNING A machining program to be edited is currently being run with memory operation and cannot be edited.

DELETE? (Y/N) Waiting for a key entry (whether to delete the program) in word edit status (when the background search menu is selected)

BACK GROUND EDITING Background edit mode

EDIT POSSIBLE Editing can be performed in foreground edit mode.

Appendix 7. Operation Messages on Setting and Display Unit

IV-34

Message Message details

EDIT IMPOSSIBLE Editing cannot be performed in foreground edit mode. This state also occurs during feed hold or fixed cycle mode

(single-block stop).

WORD SEARCH FIN The word matching the search data was searched on word editing.

(3) Data input/output related

Message Message details

DATA IN EXECUTION Data is being read without error from the paper tape.

DATA WRITING IN PROGRESS Data has been entered normally and the input data is being written to the ROM.

DATA IN COMPLETE Data has been stored without error.

COMPARE EXECUTION Comparison is being executed without error.

COMPARE COMPLETE Comparison has completed without error.

DATA OUT EXECUTION Data is being output without error.

DATA OUT COMPLETE Data has been output without error.

ERASE EXECUTION Data is being erased without error.

ERASE COMPLETE Data has been erased without error.

COPY EXECUTION The machining program is being copied without error.

COPY COMPLETE The machining program has been copied without error.

CONDENSE EXECUTION The machining program is being condensed without error.

CONDENSE COMPLETE The machining program has been condensed without error.

MERGE EXECUTION The machining program is being merged without error.

MERGE COMPLETE The machining program has been merged without error.

No. CHANGE EXECUTION The machining program No. is being changed without error.

No. CHANGE COMPLETE The machining program No. has been changed without error.

Appendix 7. Operation Messages on Setting and Display Unit

IV-35

(4) S-analog output adjustment related

Message Message details

ADJUST EXECUTION Analog output adjustment is being executed without error.

ADJUST COMPLETE Analog output adjustment has completed without error.

(5) Auxiliary axis

Message Message details

CONTINUE Y/N Type Y or N to specify whether to perform operation.

BACKUP EXECUTION The auxiliary axis parameters are being backed up in SRAM.

BACKUP COMPLETE The backup of the auxiliary axis parameters in SRAM has been completed.

AUX. WRITING EXEC. The auxiliary axis parameters in SRAM is being written to MR-J2-CT.

WRITE COMPLETE The writing of the auxiliary axis parameters in SRAM to MR-J2-CT has been completed.

ABS POS RESTORED The absolute position in SRAM has been restored in MR-J2-CT.

(6) Parameter backup related

Message Message details

BACKUP EXEC. Y/N Type Y or N to specify whether to perform the operation.

BACKUP EXECUTION The parameters are being backed up.

BACKUP COMPLTE Backup of the parameters has been completed.

RESTORE EXEC. Y/N Type Y or N to specify whether to perform the operation.

RESTORE EXECUTION The parameters are being restored.

RESTORE COMPLETE Restoration of the parameters has been completed.

Appendix 7. Operation Messages on Setting and Display Unit

IV-36

(7) Others

Message Message details

DATA PROTECTING The data protection key is valid and the various data cannot be set or erased etc.

BASE PARA. SET? (Y/N) Waiting for the key input of standard parameter setting (Y/N).

BASE PARA EXECUTION The standard parameters are being set.

EXECUTE FORMAT? (Y/N) Waiting for the key input of execute format (Y/N).

FORMAT EXECUTION Formatting is being executed.

SETUP COMPLETE The simple setup has been completed. Setup with #1060 SETUP "1" has been completed. Formatting with #1060 SETUP "20" has been completed.

NON SETUP Completed without executing simple setup. (When N has been set for both BASE PARA. SET? (Y/N) and EXECUTE FORMAT? (Y/N).)

CONFIRM OPE? (Y/N) Confirmation for erasing operating time or alarm history.

INPUT? (Y/N) Waiting for the key input of tool length data by manual measurement.

V-ANALIZER EXEC. Waveform display data cannot be output while waveform is displayed.

ROM WRITE? (Y/N) The system is waiting for a key input to indicate whether to write the macro programs into the FROM.

DATA WRITING The macro program is being written into the FROM.

WRITE COMPLETE The macro program has been written into the FROM.

Revision History

Date of revision Manual No. Revision details

Feb. 1998 BNP-B2180 First edition created.

Mar. 2000 BNP-B2180A The content of "MELDAS64 INSTRUCTION MANUAL (SUPPLEMENT)" (BNP-B2248) was reflected.

May 2000 BNP-B2180B The explanation about synchronous error monitor screen was added. The parameters and messages were added and changed. Mistakes or illegal descriptions are corrected.

Sep. 2001 BNP-B2180C The contents revised to correspond to M64AS, M64S, M65S and M66S. Miswrite is corrected. Design of the cover and the back cover were changed. Manual name changed from "MELDAS 64/65 Operation Manual" to "MELDAS

60/60S Series Operation Manual". MODEL, MODEL CODE, and Manual No. were added on the back cover.

Apr. 2002 BNP-B2180D Revisions to comply with M60S Series Version B0 Miswrite is corrected.

Mar. 2003 BNP-B2180E Revisions to comply with M60S Series Version B3 Miswrite is corrected.

May 2004 BNP-B2180F Revisions to comply with M60S Series Version C0 and C1.

Feb. 2008 BNP-B2180G Precautions for the program check were added. Precautions were added for each deletion of the common variables, tool offset data,

tool registration data, and the tool life management data. Precautions for the operation mode were added.

Feb.2010 BNP-B2180J Reviewed "Precautions for Safety". Corrected the mistakes.

Global Service Network

AMERICA EUROPE

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION INC. ( AMERICA FA CENTER) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. (EUROPE FA CENTER) Central Region Service Center GOTHAER STRASSE 10, 40880 RATINGEN, GERMANY 500 CORPORATE WOODS PARKWAY, VERNON HILLS, IL., 60061, U.S.A. TEL: +49-2102-486-0 / FAX: +49-2102-486-5910 TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650

Germany Service Center Western Michigan Service Satellite KURZE STRASSE. 40, 70794 FILDERSTADT-BONLANDEN, GERMANY ALLEGAN, MICHIGAN., 49010, U.S.A. TEL: + 49-711-3270-010 / FAX: +49-711-3270-0141 TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-269-673-4092

France Service Center Ohio Service Satellite 25, BOULEVARD DES BOUVETS, 92741 NANTERRE CEDEX FRANCE LIMA, OHIO, 45801, U.S.A. TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25 TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650

France (Lyon) Service Satellite Minnesota Service Satellite 120, ALLEE JACQUES MONOD 69800 SAINT PRIEST RICHFIELD, MINNESOTA, 55423, U.S.A. TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25 TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650

Italy Service Center Western Region Service Center VIALE COLLEONI 7-PALAZZO SIRIO CENTRO DIREZIONALE COLLEONI, 5665 PLAZA DRIVE, CYPRESS, CALIFORNIA, 90630, U.S.A. 20041 AGRATE BRIANZA MILANO ITALY TEL: +1-714-220-4796 / FAX: +1-714-229-3818 TEL: +39-039-60531-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206

Eastern Region Service Center Italy (Padova) Service Sattelite 200 COTTONTAIL LANE SOMERSET, NEW JERSEY, 08873, U.S.A. VIA SAVELLI 24 - 35129 PADOVA ITALY TEL: +1-732-560-4500 / FAX: +1-732-560-4531 TEL: +39-039-60531-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206

Western Pennsylvania Service Satellite U.K. Service Center ERIE, PENNSYLVANIA, 16510, U.S.A. TRAVELLERS LANE, HATFIELD, HERTFORDSHIRE, AL10 8XB, U.K. TEL: +1-814-897-7820 / FAX: +1-814-987-7820 TEL: +44-1707-27-6100 / FAX: +44-1707-27-8992

Southern Region Service Center Spain Service Center 2810 PREMIERE PARKWAY SUITE 400, DULUTH, GEORGIA, 30097, U.S.A. CTRA. DE RUBI, 76-80-APDO. 420 TEL: +1-678-258-4500 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519 08190 SAINT CUGAT DEL VALLES, BARCELONA SPAIN

TEL: +34-935-65-2236 / FAX: +34-935-89-1579 Northern Texas Service Satellite 1000, NOLEN DRIVE SUITE 200, GRAPEVINE, TEXAS, 76051, U.S.A. Poland Service Center TEL: +1-817-251-7468 / FAX: +1-817-416-5000 UL.KRAKOWSKA 50, 32-083 BALICE, POLAND

TEL: +48-12-630-4700 / FAX: +48-12-630-4727 Southern Texas Service Satellite FRIENDSWOOD, TEXAS, 77546, U.S.A Poland (Wroclaw) Service Center TEL: +1-832-573-0787 / FAX: +1-678-573-8290 UL KOBIERZYCKA 23,52-315 WROCLAW,POLAND

TEL: +48-71-333-77-53 / FAX: +48-71-333-77-53 Central Florida Service Satellite SATELITE BEACH, FLORIDA, 32937, U.S.A. Turkey Service Center TEL : +1-321-610-4436 / FAX : +1-321-610-4437 BAYRAKTAR BULVARI, NUTUK SOKAK NO:5, YUKARI DUDULLU

ISTANBUL, TURKEY Canadian Region Service Center TEL: +90-216-526-3990 / FAX: +90-216-526-3995 4299 14TH AVENUE MARKHAM, ONTARIO, L3R OJ2, CANADA TEL: +1-905-475-7728 / FAX: +1-905-475-7935 Czech Republic Service Center

TECHNOLOGICKA 374/6,708 00 OSTRAVA-PUSTKOVEC, CZECH REPUBLIC Mexico City Service Center TEL: +420-59-5691-185 / FAX: +420-59-5691-199 MARIANO ESCOBEDO 69 TLALNEPANTLA, 54030 EDO. DE MEXICO TEL: +52-55-9171-7662 / FAX: +52-55-9171-7649 Russia Service Center

213, B.NOVODMITROVSKAYA STR., 14/2, 127015 MOSCOW, RUSSIA Monterrey Service Satellite TEL: +7-495-748-0191 / FAX: +7-495-748-0192 ARGENTINA 3900, FRACC. LAS TORRES, MONTERREY, N.L., 64720, MEXICO TEL: +52-81-8365-4171 / FAX: +52-81-8365-4171 Sweden Service Center

STRANDKULLEN, 718 91 FROVI, SWEDEN Brazilian Service Center TEL: +46-581-700-20 / FAX: +46-581-700-75 ACESSO JOSE SARTORELLI, KM 2.1 CEP 18550-000, BOITUVA-SP, BRAZIL TEL: +55-15-3363-9900 / FAX: +55-15-3363-9911 Bulgaria Service Center

4 A. LYAPCHEV BOUL., 1756 - SOFIA, BULGARIA Brazilian's Sites Service Center TEL: +359-2-8176000 / FAX: +359-2-9744061 CITIES OF PORTO ALEGRE AND CAXIAS DO SUL BRAZIL CITIES OF SANTA CATARINA AND PARANA STATES Ukraine (Kharkov) Service Center TEL: +55-15-3363-9927 APTEKARSKIY PEREULOK 9-A, OFFICE 3, 61001 KHARKOV, UKRAINE

TEL: +38-57-732-7744 / FAX: +38-57-731-8721

Ukraine (Kiev) Service Center 4-B, M. RASKOVOYI STR., 02660 KIEV, UKRAINE TEL: +38-044-494-3355 / FAX: +38-044-494-3366

Belarus Service Center 703, OKTYABRSKAYA STR., 16/5, 220030 MINSK, BELARUS TEL: +375-17-210-4626 / FAX: +375-17-227-5830

South Africa Service Center P.O. BOX 9234, EDLEEN, KEMPTON PARK GAUTENG, 1625 SOUTH AFRICA TEL: + +27-11-394-8512 / FAX: +27-11-394-8513

ASEAN CHINA

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE. LTD. (ASEAN FA CENTER) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION (SHANGHAI) LTD. (CHINA FA CENTER) Singapore Service Center China (Shanghai) Service Center 307 ALEXANDRA ROAD #05-01/02 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC BUILDING SINGAPORE 159943 4/F ZHI FU PLAZA, NO. 80 XIN CHANG ROAD, TEL: +65-6473-2308 / FAX: +65-6476-7439 SHANGHAI 200003,CHINA

TEL: +86-21-2322-3030 / FAX: +86-21-2322-2800 Indonesia Service Center China (Ningbo) Service Dealer WISMA NUSANTARA 14TH FLOOR JL. M.H. THAMRIN 59, JAKARTA 10350 INDONESIA China (Wuxi) Service Dealer TEL: +62-21-3917-144 / FAX: +62-21-3917-164 China (Jinan) Service Dealer

Malaysia (KL) Service Center China (Beijing) Service Center 60, JALAN USJ 10 /1B 47620 UEP SUBANG JAYA SELANGOR DARUL EHSAN, MALAYSIA 9/F, OFFICE TOWER 1, HENDERSON CENTRE, 18 JIANGUOMENNEI AVENUE TEL: +60-3-5631-7605 / FAX: +60-3-5631-7636 DONGCHENG DISTRICT, BEIJING, CHINA 100005

TEL: +86-10-6518-8830 / FAX: +86-10-6518-8030 Malaysia (Johor Baru) Service Center China (Beijing) Service Dealer No. 16, JALAN SHAH BANDAR 1, TAMAN UNGKU TUN AMINAH, 81300 SKUDAI, JOHOR MALAYSIA TEL: +60-7-557-8218 / FAX: +60-7-557-3404 China (Tianjin) Service Center

B-2-801-802, YOUYI BUILDING. 50 YOUYI ROAD, HEXI DISTRICT Vietnam Service Center-1 TIANJIN, CHINA 300061 47-49 HOANG SA ST. DAKAO WARD, DIST. 1, HO CHI MINH CITY, VIETNAM TEL: +86-22-2813-1015 / FAX: +86-22-2813-1017 TEL: +84-8-910-4763 / FAX: +84-8-910-2593 China (Shenyang) Service Satellite

Vietnam Service Center-2 China (Chengdu) Service Center THUAN KIEN PLAZA 190 HONG BANG ROAD.TOWER C. SUITE 3002. DIST.5, BLOCK B-1, 23F, CHUAN XIN MANSION, 18 SECTION 2 HO CHI MINH CITY,VIETNAM RENMIN ROAD (SOUTH), CHENGDU, SICHUAN, CHINA 610016 TEL: +84-8-240-3587 / FAX: +84-8-726-7968 TEL: +86-28-8619-9730 / FAX: +86-28-8619-9805

Vietnam (Hanoi) Service Center China (Changchun) Service Satellite 5TH FL., 93B KIM LIEN ST., PHUONG LIEN WARD, DONG DA DIST. BING 3RD ROAD., INDUSTRIAL&ECONOMICAL DEVELOPMENT ZONE, CHAOYANG DISTRICT TEL: +84-8-573-7646 / FAX: +84-4-573-7650 TEL : +86-0431-5021-546 / FAX : +86-0431-5021-690

Philippines Service Center China (Shenzhen) Service Center UNIT No.411, ALABAMG CORPORATE CENTER KM 25. WEST SERVICE ROAD ROOM 2512-2516, GREAT CHINA INTERNATIOANL EXCHANGE SQUARE, JINTIAN RD.S., SOUTH SUPERHIGHWAY, ALABAMG MUNTINLUPA METRO MANILA, PHILIPPINES 1771 FUTIAN DISTRICT, SHENZHEN, CHINA 518034 TEL: +63-2-807-2416 / FAX: +63-2-807-2417 TEL: +86-755-2399-8272 / FAX: +86-755-8218-4776

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION (THAILAND) CO., LTD. (THAILAND FA CENTER) BANG-CHAN INDUSTRIAL ESTATE No.111 SOI SERITHAI 54 KOREA T.KANNAYAO, A.KANNAYAO, BANGKOK 10230, THAILAND TEL: +66-2906-8255 / FAX: +66-2906-3239 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION KOREA CO., LTD. (KOREA FA CENTER)

Korea Service Center Thailand Service Center 1480-6, GAYANG-DONG, GANGSEO-GU SEOUL 157-200 ,KOREA 898/19,20,21,22 S.V. CITY BUILDING OFFICE TOWER 1 FLOOR 7 TEL: +82-2-3660-9602 / FAX: +82-2-3664-8668 RAMA III RD BANGPONGPANG,YANNAWA,BANGKOK 10120. THAILAND TEL: +66-2-682-6522 / FAX: +66-2-682-9750 Korea Taegu Service Satellite

603 CRYSTAL BUILDING 1666, SANBYEOK-DONG, BUK-KU, DAEGU, 702-010, KOREA TEL: +82-53-604-6047 / FAX: +82-53-604-6049

INDIA

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PVT LTD TAIWAN FIRST & SECOND FLOOR, AVR BASE, MUNICIPAL No.BC-308, HENNURE BANASWADI ROAD, HRBR RING ROAD, BANGALORE-560 043,INDIA MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TAIWAN CO., LTD(TAIWAN FA CENTER) TEL: +91-80-4020-1600 / FAX: +91-80-4020-1699 TAIWAN (Taichung) Service Center

No.8-1, GONG YEH 16TH RD., TAICHUNG INDUSTRIAL PARK TAICHUNG CITY, TAIWAN R.O.C India (Pune) Service Center TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 / FAX: +886-4-2359-0689 EL-3, J BLOCK, M.I.D.C., BHOSARI PUNE 411026, INDIA TEL: +91-20-2710-2000 / FAX: +91-20-2710-2185 TAIWAN (Taipei) Service Center

3TH. FLOOR, No.122 WUKUNG 2ND RD., WU-KU HSIANG, TAIPEI HSIEN, TAIWAN R.O.C India (Bangalore) Service Center TEL: +886-2-2299-2205 / FAX: +886-2-2298-1909 S 615, 6TH FLOOR, MANIPAL CENTER, BANGALORE 560001, INDIA TEL: +91-80-509-2119 / FAX: +91-80-532-0480 TAIWAN (Tainan) Service Center

2F(C),1-1, CHUNGHWA-RD, YONGKANG CITY, TAINAN HSIEN, TAIWAN R.O.C India (Delhi) Service Center TEL: +886-6-313-9600 / FAX: +886-6-313-7713 1197, SECTOR 15 PART-2, OFF DELHI-JAIPUR HIGHWAY BEHIND 32nd MILESTONE GURGAON 122001, INDIA TEL: +91-98-1024-8895

OCEANIA

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUSTRALIA LTD. Oceania Service Center 348 VICTORIA ROAD, RYDALMERE, N.S.W. 2116 AUSTRALIA TEL: +61-2-9684-7269 / FAX: +61-2-9684-7245

Notice

Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible. Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments regarding the use of this product.

Duplication Prohibited This instruction manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without written permission from Mitsubishi Electri

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the CNC Meldas 60 Mitsubishi Electric works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Operating Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Operation Manual for Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60 as well as other Mitsubishi Electric manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Operation Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Operating Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Operating Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Operating Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Operating Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Operating Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.